This is a modern-English version of Astronomy for Amateurs, originally written by Flammarion, Camille.
It has been thoroughly updated, including changes to sentence structure, words, spelling,
and grammar—to ensure clarity for contemporary readers, while preserving the original spirit and nuance. If
you click on a paragraph, you will see the original text that we modified, and you can toggle between the two versions.
Scroll to the bottom of this page and you will find a free ePUB download link for this book.
ASTRONOMY FOR
AMATEURS
BY
CAMILLE FLAMMARION
AUTHOR OF POPULAR ASTRONOMY
BY
CAMILLE FLAMMARION
AUTHOR OF POPULAR ASTRONOMY
AUTHORIZED TRANSLATION BY
FRANCES A. WELBY
AUTHORIZED TRANSLATION BY
FRANCES A. WELBY
ILLUSTRATED
Illustrated

NEW YORK AND LONDON
D. APPLETON AND COMPANY
1910
NEW YORK AND LONDON
D. APPLETON AND COMPANY
1910
Copyright, 1904, by
D. APPLETON AND COMPANY
Published October, 1904
Copyright, 1904, by
D. APPLETON AND COMPANY
Published October, 1904
TO
Madame C.R. CAVARÉ
ORIGINAL MEMBER OF THE ASTRONOMICAL SOCIETY OF FRANCE
CHÂTEAU DE MAUPERTHUIS
TO
Madam C.R. CAVARÉ
ORIGINAL MEMBER OF THE ASTRONOMICAL SOCIETY OF FRANCE
CHÂTEAU DE MAUPERTHUIS
Madame: I have dedicated none of my works, save Stella—offered to the liberal-minded, the free and generous friend of progress, and patron of the sciences, James Gordon Bennett, editor of the New York Herald. In this volume, Madame, I make another exception, and ask your permission to offer it to the first woman who consented to be enrolled in the list of members of the Astronomical Society of France, as foundress of this splendid work, from the very beginning of our vast association (1887); and who also desired to take part in the permanent organization of the Observatory at Juvisy, a task of private enterprise, emancipated from administrative routine. An Astronomy for Women[1] can not be better placed than upon the table of a lady whose erudition is equal to her virtues, and who has consecrated her long career to the pursuit and service of the Beautiful, the Good, and the True.
Madam: I haven't dedicated my work to anyone except Stella—given to the open-minded, free-spirited, and generous supporter of progress and the sciences, James Gordon Bennett, editor of the New York Herald. In this volume, Madame, I'm making another exception and asking for your permission to dedicate it to the first woman who agreed to join the Astronomical Society of France, as a founder of this remarkable effort, right from the start of our extensive organization (1887); and who also wanted to participate in the ongoing establishment of the Observatory at Juvisy, a privately driven initiative, free from bureaucratic constraints. An Astronomy for Women[1] belongs on the table of a woman whose knowledge matches her character, and who has devoted her long career to the pursuit and promotion of the Beautiful, the Good, and the True.
Camille Flammarion.
Camille Flammarion.
Observatory of Juvisy, November, 1903.
Observatory of Juvisy, November 1903.
CONTENTS
CHAPTER | PAGE | |
Introduction | 1 | |
I. | The Contemplation of the Heavens | 10 |
II. | The Constellations | 28 |
III. | The Stars, Suns of the Infinite. A Journey through Space | 56 |
IV. | Our Star the Sun | 88 |
V. | The Planets. A. Mercury, Venus, The Earth, Mars | 113 |
VI. | The Planets. B. Jupiter, Saturn, Uranus, Neptune | 146 |
VII. | The Comets | 172 |
VIII. | The Earth | 205 |
IX. | The Moon | 232 |
X. | The Eclipses | 259 |
XI. | On Methods. How Celestial Distances are Determined, and How the Sun is Weighed | 287 |
XII. | Life, Universal and Eternal | 317 |
Index | 341 |
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS
Contemplation | Frontispiece | |
From a painting by Paul Renaud | ||
FIG. | PAGE | |
1. | The great Book of the Heavens is open to all eyes | 15 |
2. | The earth in space. June solstice, midday | 20 |
3. | The Great Bear (or Dipper) and the Pole Star | 34 |
4. | To find the Pole Star | 35 |
5. | To find Cassiopeia | 37 |
6. | To find Pegasus and Andromeda | 37 |
7. | Perseus, the Pleiades, Capella | 38 |
8. | To find Arcturus, the Herdsman, and the Northern Crown | 40 |
9. | The Swan, Vega, the Eagle | 41 |
10. | The Constellations of the Zodiac: summer and autumn; Capricorn, Archer, Scorpion, Balance, Virgin, Lion | 46 |
11. | The Constellations of the Zodiac: winter and spring; Crab, Twins, Bull, Ram, Fishes, Water-Carrier | 47 |
12. | Orion and his celestial companions | 48 |
13. | Winter Constellations | 51 |
14. | Spring Constellations | 52 |
15. | Summer Constellations | 53 |
16. | Autumn Constellations | 54 |
17. | The double star Mizar | 69 |
18. | Triple star ξ in Cancer | 72 |
19. | Quadruple star ε of the Lyre | 73 |
20. | Sextuple star θ in the Nebula of Orion | 74 |
21. | The Star-Cluster in Hercules | 79 |
22. | The Star-Cluster in the Centaur | 80 |
23. | The Nebula in Andromeda | 81 |
24. | Nebula in the Greyhounds | 82 |
25. | The Pleiades | 83 |
26. | Occultation of the Pleiades by the Moon | 85 |
27. | Stellar dial of the double star γ of the Virgin | 86 |
28. | Comparative sizes of the Sun and Earth | 93 |
29. | Direct photograph of the Sun | 96 |
30. | Telescopic aspect of a Sun-Spot | 97 |
31. | Rose-colored solar flames 228,000 kilometers (141,500 miles) in height, i.e., 18 times the diameter of the Earth | 103 |
32. | Orbits of the four Planets nearest to the Sun | 115 |
33. | Orbits of the four Planets farthest from the Sun | 116 |
34. | Mercury near quadrature | 117 |
35. | The Earth viewed from Mercury | 119 |
36. | The Evening Star | 123 |
37. | Successive phases of Venus | 124 |
38. | Venus at greatest brilliancy | 126 |
39. | The Earth viewed from Venus | 130 |
40. | Diminution of the polar snows of Mars during the summer | 136 |
41. | Telescopic aspect of the planet Mars (Feb., 1901) | 137 |
42. | Telescopic aspect of the planet Mars (Feb., 1901) | 138 |
43. | Chart of Mars | 140 |
44. | The Earth viewed from Mars | 144 |
45. | Telescopic aspect of Jupiter | 150 |
46. | Jupiter and his four principal satellites | 155 |
47. | Saturn | 159 |
48. | Varying perspective of Saturn's Rings, as seen from the Earth | 161 |
49. | The Great Comet of 1858 | 174 |
50. | What our Ancestors saw in a Comet [After Ambroise Paré (1858)] | 177 |
51. | Prodigies seen in the Heavens by our Forefathers | 178 |
52. | The orbit of a Periodic Comet | 182 |
53. | The tails of Comets are opposed to the Sun | 185 |
54. | A Meteor | 191 |
55. | Shooting Stars of November 12, 1799 [From a contemporary drawing] | 196 |
56. | Fire-Ball seen from the Observatory at Juvisy, August 10, 1899 | 199 |
57. | Explosion of a Fire-Ball above Madrid, February 10, 1896 | 200 |
58. | Raphael's Fire-Ball (The Madonna of Foligno) | 202 |
59. | A Uranolith | 203 |
60. | Motion of the Earth round the Sun | 222 |
61. | Inclination of the Earth | 224 |
62. | The divisions of the globe. Longitudes and latitudes | 226 |
63. | To find the long and short months | 230 |
64. | The Full Moon slowly rises | 234 |
65. | The Moon viewed with the unaided eye | 236 |
66. | The Man's head in the Moon | 237 |
67. | Woman's head in the Moon | 238 |
68. | The kiss in the Moon | 239 |
69. | Photograph of the Moon | 240 |
70. | The Moon's Phases | 241 |
71. | Map of the Moon | 247 |
72. | The Lunar Apennines | 251 |
73. | Flammarion's Lunar Ring | 253 |
74. | Lunar landscape with the Earth in the sky | 254 |
75. | Battle between the Medes and Lydians arrested by an Eclipse of the Sun | 266 |
76. | Eclipse of the Moon at Laos (February 27, 1877) | 269 |
77. | The path of the Eclipse of May 28, 1900 | 273 |
78. | Total eclipse of the Sun, May 28, 1900, as observed from Elche (Spain) | 281 |
79. | The Eclipse of May 28, 1900, as photographed by King Alfonso XIII, at Madrid | 285 |
80. | Measurement of Angles | 289 |
81. | Division of the Circumference into 360 degrees | 291 |
82. | Measurement of the distance of the Moon | 292 |
83. | Measurement of the distance of the Sun | 297 |
84. | Small apparent ellipses described by the stars as a result of the annual displacement of the Earth | 306 |
INTRODUCTION
The Science of Astronomy is sublime and beautiful. Noble, elevating, consoling, divine, it gives us wings, and bears us through Infinitude. In these ethereal regions all is pure, luminous, and splendid. Dreams of the Ideal, even of the Inaccessible, weave their subtle spells upon us. The imagination soars aloft, and aspires to the sources of Eternal Beauty.
The Science of Astronomy is amazing and beautiful. It’s noble, uplifting, comforting, and almost divine; it gives us wings and carries us through the infinite. In these heavenly realms, everything is pure, bright, and magnificent. Dreams of the Ideal, even those that seem impossible, cast their delicate spells on us. Our imagination rises high and longs for the origins of Eternal Beauty.
What greater delight can be conceived, on a fine spring evening, at the hour when the crescent moon is shining in the West amid the last glimmer of twilight, than the contemplation of that grand and silent spectacle of the stars stepping forth in sequence in the vast Heavens? All sounds of life die out upon the earth, the last notes of the sleepy birds have sunk away, the Angelus of the church hard by has rung the close of day. But if life is arrested around us, we may seek it in the Heavens. These incandescing orbs are so many points of interrogation suspended above our heads in the inaccessible depths of space.... Gradually they multiply. There is Venus, the white star of the shepherd. There Mars, the little celestial world so near our own.[Pg 2] There the giant Jupiter. The seven stars of the Great Bear seem to point out the pole, while they slowly revolve around it.... What is this nebulous light that blanches the darkness of the heavens, and traverses the constellations like a celestial path? It is the Galaxy, the Milky Way, composed of millions on millions of suns!... The darkness is profound, the abyss immense.... See! Yonder a shooting star glides silently across the sky, and disappears!...
What greater joy can you imagine on a beautiful spring evening, when the crescent moon is glowing in the West alongside the last hints of twilight, than watching the grand and silent display of stars appearing one by one in the vast sky? All sounds of life quiet down on the earth, the last songs of tired birds fade away, and the church bells nearby have chimed the end of the day. But even if everything around us feels still, we can look to the skies for life. These shining orbs are like countless questions hanging above us in the unreachable depths of space.... They gradually increase in number. There’s Venus, the white star of the shepherd. There’s Mars, that little celestial world so close to our own. [Pg 2] And over there is the giant Jupiter. The seven stars of the Great Bear seem to indicate the North Star while they slowly circle around it.... What is this hazy light that brightens the darkness of the sky and cuts through the constellations like a cosmic path? It’s the Milky Way, made up of millions and millions of suns!... The darkness is deep, the void is vast.... Look! A shooting star glides silently across the sky and vanishes!...
Who can remain insensible to this magic spectacle of the starry Heavens? Where is the mind that is not attracted to these enigmas? The intelligence of the amateur, the feminine, no less than the more material and prosaic masculine mind, is well adapted to the consideration of astronomical problems. Women, indeed, are naturally predisposed to these contemplative studies. And the part they are called to play in the education of our children is so vast, and so important, that the elements of Astronomy might well be taught by the young mother herself to the budding minds that are curious about every issue—whose first impressions are so keen and so enduring.
Who can stay indifferent to this amazing display of the starry sky? Where is the mind that isn’t drawn to these mysteries? Both amateur enthusiasts and women, as well as the more practical-minded men, are perfectly suited to explore astronomical questions. In fact, women are naturally inclined toward these reflective studies. Their role in educating our children is so significant and extensive that the basics of Astronomy could easily be taught by the young mother herself to the curious young minds eager to learn about everything—whose first impressions are so vivid and lasting.
Throughout the ages women have occupied themselves successfully with Astronomy, not merely in its contemplative and descriptive, but also in its mathematical aspects. Of such, the most illustrious was the[Pg 3] beautiful and learned Hypatia of Alexandria, born in the year 375 of our era, public lecturer on geometry, algebra, and astronomy, and author of three works of great importance. Then, in that age of ignorance and fanaticism, she fell a victim to human stupidity and malice, was dragged from her chariot while crossing the Cathedral Square, in March, 415, stripped of her garments, stoned to death, and burned as a dishonored witch!
Throughout history, women have successfully engaged with Astronomy, not just in its observational and descriptive forms, but also in its mathematical aspects. Among them, the most renowned was the[Pg 3] remarkable and knowledgeable Hypatia of Alexandria, born in 375 AD, who was a public lecturer on geometry, algebra, and astronomy, and authored three significant works. However, in that time of ignorance and fanaticism, she became a victim of human ignorance and malice; she was dragged from her chariot while crossing the Cathedral Square in March 415, stripped of her clothes, stoned to death, and burned as a disgraced witch!
Among the women inspired with a passion for the Heavens may be cited St. Catherine of Alexandria, admired for her learning, her beauty and her virtue. She was martyred in the reign of Maximinus Daza, about the year 312, and has given her name to one of the lunar rings.
Among the women inspired by a passion for the Heavens is St. Catherine of Alexandria, known for her intelligence, beauty, and virtue. She was martyred during the reign of Maximinus Daza, around the year 312, and her name is associated with one of the lunar rings.
Another celebrated female mathematician was Madame Hortense Lepaute, born in 1723, who collaborated with Clairaut in the immense calculations by which he predicted the return of Halley's Comet. "Madame Lepaute," wrote Lalande, "gave us such immense assistance that, without her, we should never have ventured to undertake this enormous labor, in which it was necessary to calculate for every degree, and for a hundred and fifty years, the distances and forces of the planets acting by their attraction on the comet. During more than six months, we calculated from morning[Pg 4] to night, sometimes even at table, and as the result of this forced labor I contracted an illness that has changed my constitution for life; but it was important to publish the result before the arrival of the comet."
Another famous female mathematician was Madame Hortense Lepaute, born in 1723, who worked with Clairaut on the extensive calculations that predicted the return of Halley's Comet. "Madame Lepaute," wrote Lalande, "provided us such tremendous support that, without her, we never would have dared to take on this massive task, where we needed to calculate for every degree, over a span of one hundred and fifty years, the distances and forces of the planets affecting the comet with their gravitational pull. For over six months, we worked from morning[Pg 4] till night, sometimes even at the dinner table, and as a result of this intense effort, I developed an illness that has changed my health forever; but it was crucial to publish our findings before the comet arrived."
This extract will suffice for the appreciation of the scientific ardor of Madame Lepaute. We are indebted to her for some considerable works. Her husband was clock-maker to the King. "To her intellectual talents," says one of her biographers, "were joined all the qualities of the heart. She was charming to a degree, with an elegant figure, a dainty foot, and such a beautiful hand that Voiriot, the King's painter, who had made a portrait of her, asked permission to copy it, in order to preserve a model of the best in Nature." And then we are told that learned women can not be good-looking!...
This excerpt highlights the scientific passion of Madame Lepaute. We owe her many significant contributions. Her husband was the king's clockmaker. "Along with her intellectual talents," says one of her biographers, "she possessed all the qualities of a kind heart. She was charming beyond measure, with a graceful figure, delicate feet, and such beautiful hands that Voiriot, the king's painter, who had painted her portrait, requested permission to replicate it to keep a representation of the finest in Nature." Then we're told that educated women can't be attractive!...
The Marquise du Châtelet was no less renowned. She was predestined to her career, if the following anecdote be credible. Gabrielle-Émilie de Breteuil, born in 1706 (who, in 1725, was to marry the Marquis du Châtelet, becoming, in 1733, the most celebrated friend of Voltaire), was four or five years old when she was given an old compass, dressed up as a doll, for a plaything. After examining this object for some time, the child began angrily and impatiently to strip off the silly draperies the toy was wrapped in, and after turning[Pg 5] it over several times in her little hands, she divined its uses, and traced a circle with it on a sheet of paper. To her, among other things, we owe a precious, and indeed the only French, translation of Newton's great work on universal gravitation, the famous Principia, and she was, with Voltaire, an eloquent propagator of the theory of attraction, rejected at that time by the Académie des Sciences.
The Marquise du Châtelet was equally famous. Her path seemed destined, if the following story is to be believed. Gabrielle-Émilie de Breteuil, born in 1706 (who would marry the Marquis du Châtelet in 1725 and became the most well-known friend of Voltaire by 1733), was only four or five years old when she received an old compass, dressed up as a doll, as a toy. After examining it for a while, she became frustrated and impatient, tearing off the silly decorations covering the toy. After turning it over in her small hands multiple times, she figured out its purpose and drew a circle with it on a piece of paper. To her, among other contributions, we owe a valuable, and indeed the only French, translation of Newton's great work on universal gravitation, the famous Principia, and she, along with Voltaire, was a passionate advocate for the theory of attraction, which was dismissed at that time by the Académie des Sciences.
Numbers of other women astronomers might be cited, all showing how accessible this highly abstract science is to the feminine intellect. President des Brosses, in his charming Voyage en Italie, tells of the visit he paid in Milan to the young Italian, Marie Agnesi, who delivered harangues in Latin, and was acquainted with seven languages, and for whom mathematics held no secrets. She was devoted to algebra and geometry, which, she said, "are the only provinces of thought wherein peace reigns." Madame de Charrière expressed herself in an aphorism of the same order: "An hour or two of mathematics sets my mind at liberty, and puts me in good spirits; I feel that I can eat and sleep better when I have seen obvious and indisputable truths. This consoles me for the obscurities of religion and metaphysics, or rather makes me forget them; I am thankful there is something positive in this world." And did not Madame de Blocqueville, last surviving[Pg 6] daughter of Marshal Davout, who died in 1892, exclaim in her turn: "Astronomy, science of sciences! by which I am attracted, and terrified, and which I adore! By it my soul is detached from the things of this world, for it draws me to those unknown spheres that evoked from Newton the triumphant cry: 'Cœli enarrant gloriam Dei!'"
Numbers of other women astronomers could be mentioned, all demonstrating how accessible this highly abstract science is to women's intellect. President des Brosses, in his delightful *Voyage en Italie*, recounts his visit in Milan to the young Italian, Maria Agnesi, who delivered speeches in Latin and was fluent in seven languages, for whom mathematics held no secrets. She was passionate about algebra and geometry, which she said, "are the only areas of thought where peace exists." Madame de Charrière expressed a similar sentiment: "An hour or two of mathematics frees my mind and lifts my spirits; I feel I can eat and sleep better after I've seen clear and indisputable truths. This comforts me in the face of the complexities of religion and metaphysics, or rather helps me forget them; I am grateful that there is something certain in this world." And didn't Madame de Blocqueville, the last surviving[Pg 6] daughter of Marshal Davout, who passed away in 1892, declare in her turn: "Astronomy, the science of sciences! that both attracts and terrifies me, and which I adore! It allows my soul to detach from worldly matters, as it draws me to those unknown realms that inspired Newton's triumphant cry: 'Cœli enarrant gloriam Dei!'"
Nor must we omit Miss Caroline Herschel, sister of the greatest observer of the Heavens, the grandest discoverer of the stars, that has ever lived. Astronomy gave her a long career; she discovered no less than seven comets herself, and her patient labors preserved her to the age of ninety-eight.—And Mrs. Somerville, to whom we owe the English translation of Laplace's Mécanique céleste, of whom Humboldt said, "In pure mathematics, Mrs. Somerville is absolutely superior." Like Caroline Herschel, she was almost a centenarian, appearing always much younger than her years: she died at Naples, in 1872, at the age of ninety-two.—So, too, the Russian Sophie Kovalevsky, descendant of Mathias Corvinus, King of Hungary, who, an accomplished mathematician at sixteen, married at eighteen, in order to follow the curriculum at the University (then forbidden to unmarried women); arranging with her young husband to live as brother and sister until their studies should be completed. In 1888[Pg 7] the Prix Bordin of the Institut was conferred on her.—And Maria Mitchell of the United States, for whom Le Verrier gave a fête at the Observatory of Paris, and who was exceptionally authorized by Pope Pius IX to visit the Observatory of the Roman College, at that time an ecclesiastical establishment, closed to women.—And Madame Scarpellini, the Roman astronomer, renowned for her works on shooting stars, whom the author had the honor of visiting, in company with Father Secchi, Director of the Observatory mentioned above.
We can't forget Miss Caroline Herschel, sister of the greatest observer of the skies, the most remarkable discoverer of stars ever. Astronomy offered her a long career; she discovered seven comets herself, and her dedication allowed her to live to the age of ninety-eight. And then there’s Mrs. Somerville, to whom we owe the English translation of Laplace's *Mécanique céleste*, and of whom Humboldt said, "In pure mathematics, Mrs. Somerville is absolutely superior." Like Caroline Herschel, she almost reached a hundred, always looking much younger than her age. She died in Naples in 1872 at ninety-two. Also noteworthy is the Russian Sophie Kovalevsky, a descendant of Mathias Corvinus, King of Hungary, who became an accomplished mathematician by sixteen, got married at eighteen to attend university (which was then off-limits to unmarried women), and arranged with her young husband to live as brother and sister until they finished their studies. In 1888[Pg 7], she received the Prix Bordin from the Institut. Then there's Maria Mitchell from the U.S., for whom Le Verrier hosted a celebration at the Paris Observatory, and who was uniquely permitted by Pope Pius IX to visit the Observatory of the Roman College, which was then a church-run institution closed to women. Finally, there’s Madame Scarpellini, the Roman astronomer known for her works on meteor showers, whom the author had the privilege of visiting alongside Father Secchi, Director of the aforementioned Observatory.
At the present time, Astronomy is proud to reckon among its most famous workers Miss Agnes Clerke, the learned Irishwoman, to whom we owe, inter alia, an excellent History of Astronomy in the Nineteenth Century;—Mrs. Isaac Roberts, who, under the familiar name of Miss Klumpke, sat on the Council of the Astronomical Society of France, and is D. Sc. of the Faculty of Paris and head of the Bureau for measuring star photographs at the Observatory of Paris (an American who became English by her marriage with the astronomer Roberts, but is not forgotten in France);—Mrs. Fleming, one of the astronomers of the Observatory at Harvard College, U.S.A., to whom we owe the discovery of a great number of variable stars by the examination of photographic records, and by spectral photography;—Lady[Pg 8] Huggins, who in England is the learned collaborator of her illustrious husband;—and many others.
At this time, Astronomy proudly counts among its most notable contributors Miss Agnes Clerke, the knowledgeable Irish woman, to whom we owe, among other things, an excellent History of Astronomy in the Nineteenth Century;—Mrs. Isaac Roberts, who, known commonly as Miss Klumpke, served on the Council of the Astronomical Society of France and holds a D. Sc. from the Faculty of Paris, leading the Bureau for measuring star photographs at the Paris Observatory (an American who became British through her marriage to astronomer Roberts, but is still remembered in France);—Mrs. Fleming, one of the astronomers at the Harvard College Observatory, U.S.A., to whom we owe the discovery of many variable stars through the examination of photographic records and spectral photography;—Lady[Pg 8] Huggins, who in England collaborates with her distinguished husband;—and many others.
The following chapters, which aim at summing up the essentials of Astronomy in twelve lessons for amateurs, will not make astronomers or mathematicians of my readers—much less prigs or pedants. They are designed to show the constitution of the Universe, in its grandeur and its beauty, so that, inhabiting this world, we may know where we are living, may realize our position in the Cosmos, appreciate Creation as it is, and enjoy it to better advantage. This sun by which we live, this succession of months and years, of days and nights, the apparent motions of the heavens, these starry skies, the divine rays of the moon, the whole totality of things, constitutes in some sort the tissue of our existence, and it is indeed extraordinary that the inhabitants of our planet should almost all have lived till now without knowing where they are, without suspecting the marvels of the Universe.
The following chapters aim to summarize the essentials of Astronomy in twelve lessons for beginners. They won’t turn my readers into astronomers or mathematicians—let alone snobs or know-it-alls. Instead, they are intended to reveal the structure of the Universe, highlighting its grandeur and beauty, so that as we live in this world, we can understand where we are, grasp our place in the Cosmos, appreciate Creation as it is, and enjoy it more fully. This sun that sustains us, the cycle of months and years, the rhythm of days and nights, the apparent movements of the skies, the starry heavens, the divine light of the moon—all of these elements form the fabric of our existence. It’s truly incredible that nearly all the people on our planet have lived up to now without knowing their true place in the universe, without realizing the wonders that surround them.
For the rest, my little book is dedicated to a woman, muse and goddess—the charming enchantress Urania, fit companion of Venus, ranking even above her in the choir of celestial beauties, as purer and more noble, dominating with her clear glance the immensities of[Pg 9] the universe. Urania, be it noted, is feminine, and never would the poetry of the ancients have imagined a masculine symbol to personify the pageant of the heavens. Not Uranus, nor Saturn, nor Jupiter can compare with the ideal beauty of Urania.
For the rest, my little book is dedicated to a woman, muse, and goddess—the enchanting Urania, a perfect companion for Venus, even surpassing her in the chorus of celestial beauty, as she is purer and more noble, commanding with her clear gaze the vast expanses of[Pg 9] the universe. It’s important to note that Urania is female, and ancient poetry would never have conceived a masculine figure to represent the splendor of the heavens. Neither Uranus, nor Saturn, nor Jupiter can match the ideal beauty of Urania.
Moreover, I have before me two delightful books, in breviary binding, dated the one from the year 1686, the other from a century later, 1786. The first was written by Fontenelle for a Marquise, and is entitled Entretiens sur la Pluralité des Mondes. In this, banter is pleasantly married with science, the author declaring that he only demands from his fair readers the amount of application they would concede to a novel. The second is written by Lalande, and is called Astronomie des Dames. In addressing myself to both sexes, I am in honorable company with these two sponsors and esteem myself the better for it.
Moreover, I have in front of me two charming books, both in breviary binding. One is from 1686, and the other is from a century later, 1786. The first was written by Fontenelle for a Marquise and is titled "Entretiens sur la Pluralité des Mondes." In this book, witty banter goes hand in hand with science, with the author saying he only asks his female readers for the same level of engagement they would give to a novel. The second book is by Lalande and is called "Astronomie des Dames." As I address both men and women, I find myself in great company with these two authors and feel proud to be associated with them.
CHAPTER I
THE CONTEMPLATION OF THE HEAVENS
The crimson disk of the Sun has plunged beneath the Ocean. The sea has decked itself with the burning colors of the orb, reflected from the Heavens in a mirror of turquoise and emerald. The rolling waves are gold and silver, and break noisily on a shore already darkened by the disappearance of the celestial luminary.
The red sun has dipped below the ocean. The sea is adorned with the fiery colors of the sun, reflecting from the sky in a mirror of turquoise and green. The rolling waves are gold and silver, crashing loudly on a shore that is already darkened by the absence of the celestial light.
We gaze regretfully after the star of day, that poured its cheerful rays anon so generously over many who were intoxicated with gaiety and happiness. We dream, contemplating the magnificent spectacle, and in dreaming forget the moments that are rapidly flying by. Yet the darkness gradually increases, and twilight gives way to night.
We watch sadly as the sun sets, having once shared its bright light so freely with those caught up in fun and joy. We daydream, taking in the beautiful scene, and in our dreaming, we lose track of the fleeting moments. But slowly, the darkness creeps in, and dusk turns into night.
The most indifferent spectator of the setting Sun as it descends beneath the waves at the far horizon, could hardly be unmoved by the pageant of Nature at such an impressive moment.
The most indifferent observer of the setting sun as it dips below the waves at the distant horizon could hardly remain unaffected by the spectacle of nature at such a breathtaking moment.
The light of the Crescent Moon, like some fairy boat suspended in the sky, is bright enough to cast changing and dancing sparkles of silver upon the ocean. The[Pg 11] Evening Star declines slowly in its turn toward the western horizon. Our gaze is held by a shining world that dominates the whole of the occidental heavens. This is the "Shepherd's Star," Venus of rays translucent.
The light of the Crescent Moon, like a magical boat hanging in the sky, is bright enough to create shifting and dancing sparkles of silver on the ocean. The[Pg 11] Evening Star slowly dips toward the western horizon. We're captivated by a shining world that rules the entire western sky. This is the "Shepherd's Star," Venus with her radiant glow.
Little by little, one by one, the more brilliant stars shine out. Here are the white Vega of the Lyre, the burning Arcturus, the seven stars of the Great Bear, a whole sidereal population catching fire, like innumerable eyes that open on the Infinite. It is a new life that is revealed to our imagination, inviting us to soar into these mysterious regions.
Little by little, one by one, the brighter stars start to shine. Here are the white Vega of the Lyre, the blazing Arcturus, the seven stars of the Great Bear—a whole cosmic population sparking to life, like countless eyes opening to the Infinite. A new life is revealed to our imagination, inviting us to explore these mysterious realms.
O Night, diapered with fires innumerable! hast thou not written in flaming letters on these Constellations the syllables of the great enigma of Eternity? The contemplation of thee is a wonder and a charm. How rapidly canst thou efface the regrets we suffered on the departure of our beloved Sun! What wealth, what beauty hast thou not reserved for our enraptured souls! Where is the man that can remain blind to such a pageant and deaf to its language!
O Night, covered in countless fires! Haven't you inscribed in bright letters on these stars the letters of the great mystery of Eternity? Gazing at you is both a wonder and a delight. How quickly can you erase the regrets we felt when our beloved Sun left! What richness, what beauty have you kept for our captivated souls! Where is the person who can stay oblivious to such a display and deaf to its message!
To whatever quarter of the Heavens we look, the splendors of the night are revealed to our astonished gaze. These celestial eyes seem in their turn to gaze at, and to question us. Thus indeed have they questioned every thinking soul, so long as Humanity has existed on our Earth. Homer saw and sung these[Pg 12] self-same stars. They shone upon the slow succession of civilizations that have disappeared, from Egypt of the period of the Pyramids, Greece at the time of the Trojan War, Rome and Carthage, Constantine and Charlemagne, down to the Twentieth Century. The generations are buried with the dust of their ancient temples. The Stars are still there, symbols of Eternity.
No matter where we look in the sky, the beauty of the night reveals itself to our amazed eyes. These celestial bodies seem to gaze back at us, as if they’re questioning us. They have, indeed, posed this question to every thoughtful person throughout Human history. Homer saw and sang about these[Pg 12] same stars. They have shone over the slow rise and fall of civilizations that have come and gone, from ancient Egypt during the time of the Pyramids, Greece during the Trojan War, to Rome and Carthage, and figures like Constantine and Charlemagne, all the way to the Twentieth Century. Generations have come and gone, buried with the remnants of their ancient temples. But the stars remain, enduring symbols of Eternity.
The silence of the vast and starry Heavens may terrify us; its immensity may seem to overwhelm us. But our inquiring thought flies curiously on the wings of dream, toward the remotest regions of the visible. It rests on one star and another, like the butterfly on the flower. It seeks what will best respond to its aspirations: and thus a kind of communication is established, and, as it were, protected by all Nature in these silent appeals. Our sense of solitude has disappeared. We feel that, if only as infinitesimal atoms, we form part of that immense universe, and this dumb language of the starry night is more eloquent than any speech. Each star becomes a friend, a discreet confidant, often indeed a precious counsellor, for all the thoughts it suggests to us are pure and holy.
The silence of the vast, starry sky might scare us; its size can feel overwhelming. But our curious minds soar on the wings of dreams, exploring the farthest corners of what we can see. They settle on one star after another, like a butterfly on a flower. They search for what meets their hopes and dreams, creating a kind of connection that's almost safeguarded by Nature in these silent yearnings. Our sense of being alone fades away. We realize that, even as tiny particles, we are part of this immense universe, and the quiet language of the starry night speaks more profoundly than any words. Each star becomes a friend, a trusted confidant, and often a valuable guide, as the thoughts it inspires in us are pure and uplifting.
Is any poem finer than the book written in letters of fire upon the tablets of the firmament? Nothing could be more ideal. And yet, the poetic sentiment that the beauty of Heaven awakens in our soul[Pg 13] ought not to veil its reality from us. That is no less marvelous than the mystery by which we were enchanted.
Is there any poem more beautiful than the words written in fire on the tablets of the sky? Nothing could be more perfect. And yet, the poetic feelings that the beauty of Heaven stirs in our soul[Pg 13] shouldn't hide its truth from us. That is just as incredible as the mystery that captivated us.
And here we may ask ourselves how many there are, even among thinking human beings, who ever raise their eyes to the starry heavens? How many men and women are sincerely, and with unfeigned curiosity, interested in these shining specks, and inaccessible luminaries, and really desirous of a better acquaintance with them?
And here we might ask ourselves how many people, even among thoughtful individuals, ever look up at the starry sky? How many men and women are genuinely curious about those shining dots and distant stars, and truly want to know more about them?
Seek, talk, ask in the intercourse of daily life. You, who read these pages, who already love the Heavens, and comprehend them, who desire to account for our existence in this world, who seek to know what the Earth is, and what Heaven—you shall witness that the number of those inquiring after truth is so limited that no one dares to speak of it, so disgraceful is it to the so-called intelligence of our race. And yet! the great Book of the Heavens is open to all eyes. What pleasures await us in the study of the Universe! Nothing could speak more eloquently to our heart and intellect!
Seek, talk, and ask in the everyday flow of life. You, who are reading these pages, who already love the Heavens and understand them, who want to make sense of our existence in this world, who want to know what Earth is and what Heaven is—you will see that the number of people searching for truth is so small that no one dares to discuss it, as it is considered shameful to the so-called intelligence of our species. And yet! The great Book of the Heavens is open to everyone. What joys await us in the study of the Universe! Nothing could speak more powerfully to our hearts and minds!
Astronomy is the science par excellence. It is the most beautiful and most ancient of all, inasmuch as it dates back to the indeterminate times of highest antiquity. Its mission is not only to make us acquainted with the innumerable orbs by which our nights are[Pg 14] illuminated, but it is, moreover, thanks to it that we know where and what we are. Without it we should live as the blind, in eternal ignorance of the very conditions of our terrestrial existence. Without it we should still be penetrated with the naïve error that reduced the entire Universe to our minute globule, making our Humanity the goal of the Creation, and should have no exact notion of the immense reality.
Astronomy is the ultimate science. It's the most beautiful and oldest of all, going back to ancient times. Its purpose is not just to introduce us to the countless celestial bodies that light up our nights, but also, thanks to it, we understand where we are and what we are. Without it, we would live like the blind, in constant ignorance of the very conditions of our existence on Earth. Without it, we would still be trapped in the naive belief that reduced the entire universe to our tiny planet, making humanity the center of creation, and we would lack an accurate understanding of the vast reality.
To-day, thanks to the intellectual labor of so many centuries, thanks also to the immortal genius of the men of science who have devoted their lives to searching after Truth—men such as Copernicus, Galileo, Kepler, Newton—the veil of ignorance has been rent, and glimpses of the marvels of creation are perceptible in their splendid truth to the dazzled eye of the thinker.
Today, thanks to the intellectual efforts of countless generations, and to the extraordinary genius of scientists who have dedicated their lives to the pursuit of truth—such as Copernicus, Galileo, Kepler, and Newton—the veil of ignorance has been lifted, allowing us to see the wonders of creation in their stunning reality to the amazed eye of the thinker.
The study of Astronomy is not, as many suppose, the sacrifice of oneself in a cerebral torture that obliterates all the beauty, the fascination, and the grandeur of the pageant of Nature. Figures, and naught but figures, would not be entertaining, even to those most desirous of instruction. Let the reader take courage! We do not propose that he shall decipher the hieroglyphics of algebra and geometry. Perish the thought! For the rest, figures are but the scaffolding, the method, and do not exist in Nature.
The study of Astronomy isn't, as many think, a dull and painful experience that destroys all the beauty, fascination, and grandeur of Nature's spectacle. Just numbers, without context, wouldn't be engaging, even for those eager to learn. So, take heart! We don't expect you to decode the complex symbols of algebra and geometry. Let's dismiss that idea! Remember, numbers are just the framework and the method; they don't actually exist in Nature.

We simply beg of you to open your eyes, to see where you are, so that you may not stray from the path of truth, which is also the path of happiness. Once you have entered upon it, no persuasion will be needed to make you persevere. And you will have the profound satisfaction of knowing that you are thinking correctly, and that it is infinitely better to be educated than to be ignorant. The reality is far beyond all dreams, beyond the most fantastic imagination. The most fairy-like transformations of our theaters, the most resplendent pageants of our military reviews, the most sumptuous marvels on which the human race can pride itself—all that we admire, all that we envy on the Earth—is as nothing compared with the unheard-of wonders scattered through Infinitude. There are so many that one does not know how to see them. The fascinated eye would fain grasp all at once.
We sincerely ask you to open your eyes and see where you are, so you don’t stray from the path of truth, which is also the path of happiness. Once you commit to it, you won’t need anyone to convince you to keep going. You’ll find deep satisfaction in knowing you’re thinking clearly and that being educated is so much better than being ignorant. The reality is far beyond all dreams and the wildest imagination. The most magical transformations in our theaters, the most dazzling parades in our military reviews, the most extravagant wonders we can take pride in—all that we admire and envy on Earth is insignificant compared to the incredible wonders scattered throughout the universe. There are so many that it’s hard to take them all in at once. The captivated eye wishes it could see them all simultaneously.
If you will yield yourselves to the pleasure of gazing upon the sparkling fires of Space, you will never regret the moments passed all too rapidly in the contemplation of the Heavens.
If you let yourselves enjoy looking at the sparkling fires of Space, you will never regret the moments that pass too quickly while contemplating the Heavens.
Diamonds, turquoises, rubies, emeralds, all the precious stones with which women love to deck themselves, are to be found in greater perfection, more beautiful, and more splendid, set in the immensity of Heaven! In the telescopic field, we may watch the progress of armies of majestic and powerful suns, from[Pg 17] whose attacks there is naught to fear. And these vagabond comets and shooting stars and stellar nebulæ, do they not make up a prodigious panorama? What are our romances in comparison with the History of Nature? Soaring toward the Infinite, we purify our souls from all the baseness of this world, we strive to become better and more intelligent.
Diamonds, turquoise, rubies, and emeralds—all the precious stones women love to adorn themselves with—can be found in even greater perfection, beauty, and splendor in the vastness of Heaven! Through a telescope, we can observe the march of incredible and powerful stars, from[Pg 17] which pose no threat to us. And what about those wandering comets, shooting stars, and starry nebulae? They create an amazing spectacle! How do our stories compare to the History of Nature? As we reach toward the Infinite, we cleanse our souls of all the pettiness of this world, and we aim to become better and smarter.
But in the first place, you ask, what are the Heavens? This vault oppresses us. We can not venture to investigate it.
But first, you ask, what are the Heavens? This dome weighs down on us. We can’t dare to explore it.
Heaven, we reply, is no vault, it is a limitless immensity, inconceivable, unfathomable, that surrounds us on all sides, and in the midst of which our globe is floating. The Heavens are all that exists, all that we see, and all that we do not see: the Earth on which we are, that bears us onward in her rapid flight; the Moon that accompanies us, and sheds her soft beams upon our silent nights; the good Sun to which we owe our existence; the Stars, suns of Infinitude; in a word—the whole of Creation.
Heaven, we say, isn’t just a ceiling; it’s an endless expanse, unimaginable and deep, surrounding us on all sides, with our planet floating in the middle of it. The universe includes everything that exists., everything we see and everything we don’t see: the Earth we stand on, which carries us forward in its swift journey; the Moon that’s with us, casting its gentle light on our quiet nights; the bright Sun, which gives us life; the Stars, the suns of infinity; in short—everything in Creation.
Yes, our Earth is an orb of the Heavens: the sky is her domain, and our Sun, shining above our heads, and fertilizing our seasons, is as much a star as the pretty sparkling points that scintillate up there, in the far distance, and embellish the calm of our nights[Pg 18] with their brilliancy. All are in the Heavens, you as well as I, for the Earth, in her course through Space, bears us with herself into the depths of Infinitude.
Yes, our Earth is a sphere of the universe: the sky is her realm, and our Sun, shining above us and nurturing our seasons, is as much a star as the beautiful sparkling points that twinkle far away, adding charm to the tranquility of our nights[Pg 18] with their brightness. We are all part of the universe, you and I, because the Earth, in her journey through space, carries us along into the depths of infinity.
In the Heavens there is neither "above" nor "below." These words do not exist in celestial speech, because their significance is relative to the surface of this planet only. In reality, for the inhabitants of the Earth, "low" is the inside, the center of the globe, and "high" is what is above our heads, all round the Earth. The Heavens are what surround us on all sides, to Infinity.
In the Heavens, there is no "above" or "below." These terms don’t exist in celestial language because their meaning is only relevant to the surface of this planet. For the people on Earth, "low" refers to the inside, the center of the globe, while "high" is everything above us, all around the Earth. The Heavens encompass us on all sides, stretching to Infinity.
The Earth is, like her fellows, Mercury, Venus, Mars, Jupiter, Saturn, Uranus, Neptune, one of the planets of the great solar family.
The Earth, along with its siblings Mercury, Venus, Mars, Jupiter, Saturn, Uranus, and Neptune, is one of the planets in the vast solar system.
The Sun, her father, protects her, and directs all her actions. She, as the grateful daughter, obeys him blindly. All float in perfect harmony over the celestial ocean.
The Sun, her father, watches over her and guides all her actions. As a thankful daughter, she follows him without question. Everything floats in perfect harmony across the celestial ocean.
But, you may say, on what does the Earth rest in her ethereal navigation?
But you might ask, what does the Earth rely on in her celestial journey?
On nothing. The Earth turns round the colossal Sun, a little globe of relatively light weight, isolated on all sides in Space, like a soap-bubble blown by some careless child.
On nothing. The Earth rotates around the massive Sun, a small planet of relatively light weight, surrounded on all sides by Space, like a soap bubble blown by some careless child.
Above, below, on all sides, millions of similar globes are grouped into families, and form other systems of[Pg 19] worlds revolving round the numerous and distant stars that people Infinitude; suns more or less analogous to that by which we are illuminated, and generally speaking of larger bulk, although our Sun is a million times larger than our planet.
Above, below, and all around, millions of similar planets are clustered into groups, creating other systems of[Pg 19] worlds that orbit the countless distant stars populating the universe; suns that are more or less similar to the one that lights our world, and generally speaking are larger in size, even though our Sun is a million times bigger than our planet.
Among the ancients, before the isolation of our globe in Space and the motions that incessantly alter its position were recognized, the Earth was supposed to be the immobile lower half of the Universe. The sky was regarded as the upper half. The ancients supplied our world with fantastic supports that penetrated to the Infernal Regions. They could not admit the notion of the Earth's isolation, because they had a false idea of its weight. To-day, however, we know positively that the Earth is based on nothing. The innumerable journeys accomplished round it in all directions give definite proof of this. It is attached to nothing. As we said before, there is neither "above" nor "below" in the Universe. What we call "below" is the center of the Earth. For the rest the Earth turns upon its own axis in twenty-four hours. Night is only a partial phenomenon, due to the rotary motion of the planet, a motion that could not exist under conditions other than that of the absolute isolation of our globe in space.
Among ancient people, before they understood that our planet is isolated in space and that its position constantly changes, they believed the Earth was the immovable lower half of the universe, with the sky as the upper half. They imagined our world was supported by fantastical structures reaching down to hell. They couldn't accept the idea of the Earth's isolation because they had a mistaken notion of its weight. Today, however, we know for sure that the Earth doesn't rest on anything. The countless journeys taken around it in all directions prove this. It isn't attached to anything. As mentioned earlier, there is no "above" or "below" in the universe. What we consider "below" is actually the center of the Earth. Additionally, the Earth rotates on its axis every twenty-four hours. Night is merely a temporary phenomenon, caused by the planet's rotation, which could only occur under the unique conditions of our globe being completely isolated in space.

Since the Sun can only illuminate one side of our globe at one moment, that is to say one hemisphere, it follows that Night is nothing but the state of the part that is not illuminated. As the Earth revolves upon itself, all the parts successively exposed to the Sun are in the day, while the parts situated opposite to the Sun, in the cone of shadow produced by the Earth itself, are in night. But whether it be noon or midnight, the stars always occupy the same position in[Pg 21] the Heavens, even when, dazzled by the ardent light of the orb of day, we can no longer see them; and when we are plunged into the darkness of the night, the god Phœbus still continues to pour his beneficent rays upon the countries turned toward him.
Since the Sun can only light up one side of our planet at a time, meaning one hemisphere, it makes sense that Night is just the part that isn’t lit. As the Earth rotates on its axis, all the areas that are exposed to the Sun experience day, while the regions on the opposite side, in the shadow created by the Earth itself, experience night. But whether it’s noon or midnight, the stars always stay in the same position in[Pg 21] the sky, even when we can’t see them because the bright light of the Sun blinds us; and when we’re surrounded by the darkness of night, the Sun continues to shine its beneficial rays on the regions facing it.
The sequence of day and night is a phenomenon belonging, properly speaking, to the Earth, in which the rest of the Universe does not participate. The same occurs for every world that is illuminated by a sun, and endowed with a rotary movement. In absolute space, there is no succession of nights and days.
The cycle of day and night is something that strictly belongs to Earth, and the rest of the Universe doesn't take part in it. The same applies to every planet that is lit by a sun and has a rotating motion. In the vastness of space, there is no occurrence of nights and days.
Upheld in space by forces that will be explained at a later point, our planet glides in the open heavens round our Sun.
Supported in space by forces that will be explained later, our planet moves through the open sky around our Sun.
Imagine a magnificent aerostat, lightly and rapidly cleaving space. Surround it with eight little balloons of different sizes, the smallest like those sold on the streets for children to play with, the larger, such as are distributed for a bonus in large stores. Imagine this group sailing through the air, and you have the system of our worlds in miniature.
Imagine a stunning airship, swiftly slicing through the sky. Surround it with eight small balloons of different sizes, the smallest ones like those sold on the streets for kids to play with, and the larger ones, like the ones given out as prizes in big stores. Picture this group floating through the air, and you have a miniature version of our solar system.
Still, this is only an image, a comparison. The balloons are held up by the atmosphere, in which they float at equilibrium. The Earth is sustained by nothing material. What maintains her in equilibrium is the ethereal void; an immaterial force; gravitation. The[Pg 22] Sun attracts her, and if she did not revolve, she would drop into him; but rotating round him, at a speed of 107,000 kilometers[2] (about 66,000 miles) per hour, she produces a centrifugal force, like that of a stone in a sling, that is precisely equivalent, and of contrary sign, to its gravitation toward the central orb, and these two equilibrated forces keep her at the same medium distance.
Still, this is just an image, a comparison. The balloons stay up because of the atmosphere, where they float in balance. The Earth isn't held by anything material. What keeps it stable is the empty space; an immaterial force; gravity. The[Pg 22] Sun pulls it in, and if it didn’t rotate, it would fall into the Sun; but by spinning around it at a speed of 107,000 kilometers[2] (about 66,000 miles) per hour, it creates a centrifugal force, like a stone in a sling, that exactly matches and opposes the gravitational pull towards the Sun, and these two balanced forces keep it at a consistent distance.
This solar and planetary group does not exist solitary in the immense void that extends indefinitely around us. As we said above, each star that we admire in the depths of the sky, and to which we lift up our eyes and thoughts during the charmed hours of the night, is another sun burning with its own light, the chief of a more or less numerous family, such as are multiplied through all space to infinity. Notwithstanding the immense distances between the sun-stars, Space is so vast, and the number of these so great, that by an effect of perspective due solely to the distance, appearances would lead us to believe that the stars were touching. And under certain telescopic aspects, and in some of the astral photographs, they really do appear to be contiguous.
This solar system isn’t alone in the vast emptiness that stretches endlessly around us. As we mentioned earlier, every star we admire in the night sky, to which we lift our eyes and thoughts during those enchanting hours, is another sun shining with its own light, the leader of a more or less numerous family, just like the countless ones scattered throughout all of space. Despite the enormous distances between the stars, Space is so immense, and the number of these stars so great, that due to perspective created solely by distance, it may seem like the stars are touching. And in certain telescopic views and some astronomical photographs, they do indeed appear to be adjacent.
The Universe is infinite. Space is limitless. If[Pg 23] our love for the Heavens should incite in us the impulse, and provide us with the means of undertaking a journey directed to the ends of Heaven as its goal, we should be astonished, on arriving at the confines of the Milky Way, to see the grandiose and phenomenal spectacle of a new Universe unfold before our dazzled eyes; and if in our mad career we crossed this new archipelago of worlds to seek the barriers of Heaven beyond them, we should still find universe eternally succeeding to universe before us. Millions of suns roll on in the immensities of Space. Everywhere, on all sides, Creation renews itself in an infinite variety.
The Universe is infinite. Space is limitless. If[Pg 23] our love for the Heavens inspires us to embark on a journey aimed at reaching the ends of Heaven, we would be amazed, upon reaching the edge of the Milky Way, to witness the extraordinary and spectacular sight of a new Universe unfolding before our astonished eyes. And if, in our wild pursuit, we navigated through this new collection of worlds in search of the boundaries of Heaven beyond them, we would still encounter an endless succession of universes ahead of us. Millions of suns shine in the vastness of Space. Everywhere, in every direction, Creation renews itself in an infinite variety.
According to all the probabilities, universal life is distributed there as well as here, and has sown the germ of intelligence upon those distant worlds that we divine in the vicinity of the innumerable suns that plow the ether, for everything upon the Earth tends to show that Life is the goal of Nature. Burning foci, inextinguishable sources of warmth and light, these various, multi-colored suns shed their rays upon the worlds that belong to them and which they fertilize.
According to all the probabilities, universal life exists both there and here, and has spread the seed of intelligence on those distant worlds we imagine near the countless suns that traverse the universe. Everything on Earth suggests that Life is Nature's ultimate purpose. These bright points, endless sources of warmth and light, cast their rays on the worlds that belong to them and help them thrive.
Our globe is no exception in the Universe. As we have seen, it is one of the celestial orbs, nourished, warmed, lighted, quickened by the Sun, which in its turn again is but a star.
Our planet is not unique in the Universe. As we've seen, it's one of the celestial bodies, sustained, heated, illuminated, and energized by the Sun, which itself is just another star.
Innumerable Worlds! We dream of them. Who can say that their unknown inhabitants do not think of us in their turn, and that Space may not be traversed by waves of thought, as it is by the vibrations of light and universal gravitation? May not an immense solidarity, hardly guessed at by our imperfect senses, exist between the Celestial Humanities, our Earth being only a modest planet.
Innumerable Worlds! We dream about them. Who can say that their unknown inhabitants don’t think about us too, and that Space might not be crossed by waves of thought, just like it is by the vibrations of light and universal gravitation? Could there be a vast connection, barely sensed by our limited perceptions, between the Celestial Humanities, with our Earth being just a small planet?
Let us meditate on this Infinity! Let us lose no opportunity of employing the best of our hours, those of the silence and peace of the bewitching nights, in contemplating, admiring, spelling out the words of the Great Book of the Heavens. Let our freed souls fly swift and rapt toward those marvelous countries where indescribable joys are prepared for us, and let us do homage to the first and most splendid of the sciences, to Astronomy, which diffuses the light of Truth within us.
Let’s reflect on this Infinity! Let’s make the most of our time, especially during the quiet and peaceful nights, by contemplating, admiring, and exploring the words of the Great Book of the Heavens. Let our liberated souls soar quickly and joyfully toward those amazing places where indescribable joys await us, and let’s pay tribute to the first and most glorious of sciences, Astronomy, which brings the light of Truth into our lives.
To poetical souls, the contemplation of the Heavens carries thought away to higher regions than it attains in any other meditation. Who does not remember the beautiful lines of Victor Hugo in the Orientales? Who has not heard or read them? The poem is called "Ecstasy," and it is a fitting title. The words are sometimes set to music, and the melody seems to complete their pure beauty:
To poetic souls, gazing at the Heavens lifts thoughts to heights that no other reflection can reach. Who doesn't recall the beautiful lines of Victor Hugo in the Orientales? Who hasn't heard or read them? The poem is called "Ecstasy," which is a perfect title. The words are sometimes put to music, and the melody seems to elevate their pure beauty:
J'étais seul près des flots par une nuit d'étoiles.
Pas un nuage aux cieux, sur les mers pas de voiles;
Mes yeux plongeaient plus loin que le monde réel,
Et les bois et les monts et toute la nature
Semblaient interroger, dans un confus murmure,
Les flots des mers, les feux du ciel.
Et les étoiles d'or, légions infinies,
A voix haute, à voix basse, avec mille harmonies
Disaient, en inclinant leurs couronnes de feu;
Et les flots bleus, que rien ne gouverne et n'arrête,
Disaient en recourbant l'écume de leur crête:
... C'est le Seigneur, le Seigneur Dieu!
I was by myself by the waves on a starry night.
Not a cloud in the sky, no sails on the ocean;
My eyes saw beyond the real world,
And the woods, mountains, and all of nature
It seemed to ask in a puzzled whisper,
The ocean waves, the fires in the sky.
And the golden stars, endless legions,
Spoke quietly, with a thousand harmonies.
As they bowed, tilting their fiery crowns;
And the blue waves, which are beyond anyone's control or stopping,
Said, curling the foam of their crest:
... It's the Lord, the Lord God!
Note: Free Translation
Note: Free Translation
I was alone on the waves, on a starry night,
Not a cloud in the sky, not a sail in sight,
My eyes pierced beyond the natural world...
And the woods, and the hills, and the voice of Nature
Seemed to question in a confused murmur,
The waves of the Sea, and Heaven's fires.
And the golden stars in infinite legion,
Sang loudly, and softly, in glad recognition,
Inclining their crowns of fire;...
And the waves that naught can check nor arrest
Sang, bowing the foam of their haughty crest...
Behold the Lord God—Jehovah!
I was alone on the waves under a starry night,
No clouds in the sky, no sails in sight,
My eyes gazed beyond the natural world...
And the woods, the hills, and Nature's voice
Appeared to ask in a puzzled whisper,
The waves of the ocean and the flames of heaven.
And the golden stars in endless quantities,
Sang both loudly and softly in joyful recognition,
Bowing their fiery crowns;...
And the waves that nothing can stop or hold back
Sang, bowing under the weight of their proud crest...
Look at the Lord God—Jehovah!
The immortal poet of France was an astronomer. The author more than once had the honor of conversing with him on the problems of the starry sky—and reflected that astronomers might well be poets.
The immortal poet of France was an astronomer. The author had the privilege of talking with him about the mysteries of the night sky more than once—and thought that astronomers could easily be poets.
It is indeed difficult to resist a sense of profound emotion before the abysses of infinite Space, when we behold the innumerable multitude of worlds suspended above our heads. We feel in this solitary contemplation of the Heavens that there is more in the Universe than tangible and visible matter: that there are forces, laws, destinies. Our ants' brains may know themselves microscopic, and yet recognize that there is something greater than the Earth, the Heavens;—more absolute than the Visible, the Invisible;—beyond the more or less vulgar affairs of life, the sense of the True, the Good, the Beautiful. We feel that an immense mystery broods over Nature,—over Being, over created things. And it is here again that Astronomy surpasses all the other sciences, that it becomes our sovereign teacher, that it is the pharos of modern philosophy.
It's really hard not to feel deep emotions when we look at the vastness of infinite Space and see the countless worlds hanging above us. In this quiet contemplation of the Heavens, we realize there's more to the Universe than just physical matter: there are forces, laws, and destinies. Our tiny brains may recognize how small we are, yet we understand that there’s something greater than the Earth and the Heavens—something more absolute than what we can see and beyond the everyday concerns of life, touching on the sense of the True, the Good, and the Beautiful. We sense that an enormous mystery surrounds Nature—around existence and all created things. This is where Astronomy truly excels beyond all other sciences; it becomes our supreme teacher and serves as the pharos of modern philosophy.
O Night, mysterious, sublime, and infinite! withdrawing from our eyes the veil spread above us by the light of day, giving back transparency to the Heavens, showing us the prodigious reality, the shining casket of the celestial diamonds, the innumerable stars that succeed each other interminably in immeasurable space![Pg 27] Without Night we should know nothing. Without it our eyes would never have divined the sidereal population, our intellects would never have pierced the harmony of the Heavens, and we should have remained the blind, deaf parasites of a world isolated from the rest of the universe. O Sacred Night! If on the one hand it rests upon the heights of Truth beyond the day's illusions, on the other its invisible urns pour down a silent and tranquil peace, a penetrating calm, upon our souls that weary of Life's fever. It makes us forget the struggles, perfidies, intrigues, the miseries of the hours of toil and noisy activity, all the conventionalities of civilization. Its domain is that of rest and dreams. We love it for its peace and calm tranquillity. We love it because it is true. We love it because it places us in communication with the other worlds, because it gives us the presage of Life, Universal and Eternal, because it brings us Hope, because it proclaims us citizens of Heaven.
O Night, mysterious, sublime, and infinite! pulling back the veil cast over us by daylight, revealing the clarity of the Heavens, showing us the amazing reality, the bright treasure of celestial diamonds, the countless stars that endlessly succeed each other in boundless space![Pg 27] Without Night, we would know nothing. Without it, our eyes would never have discovered the starry population, our minds would never have grasped the harmony of the Heavens, and we would have remained blind, deaf parasites in a world cut off from the rest of the universe. O Sacred Night! While it rests upon the heights of Truth beyond the day’s illusions, it also pours down silent and tranquil peace, a deep calm, upon our souls that tire of Life’s fever. It helps us forget the struggles, betrayals, intrigues, and the hardships of our busy hours filled with activity, all the conventions of civilization. Its realm is one of rest and dreams. We cherish it for its peace and calm tranquility. We love it because it is genuine. We love it because it connects us with other worlds, because it offers us a glimpse of Life, Universal and Eternal, because it brings us Hope, because it declares us citizens of Heaven.
CHAPTER II
THE CONSTELLATIONS
In Chapter I we saw the Earth hanging in space, like a globe isolated on all sides, and surrounded at vast distances by a multitude of stars.
In Chapter I we saw the Earth floating in space, like a globe alone on all sides, and surrounded at great distances by countless stars.
These fiery orbs are suns like that which illuminates ourselves. They shine by their own light. We know this for a fact, because they are so far off that they could neither be illuminated by the Sun, nor, still more, reflect his rays back upon us: and because, on the other hand, we have been able to measure and analyze their light. Many of these distant suns are simple and isolated; others are double, triple, or multiple; others appear to be the centers of systems analogous to that which gravitates round our own Sun, and of which we form part. But these celestial tribes are situated at such remote distances from us that it is impossible to distinguish all the individuals of each particular family. The most delicate observations have only revealed a few of them. We must content ourselves here with admiring the principals,—the sun-stars,—prodigious[Pg 29] globes, flaming torches, scattered profusely through the firmament.
These fiery orbs are suns just like the one that lights up our world. They shine with their own light. We know this for certain because they are so far away that they can't be lit by our Sun, nor can they reflect its rays back to us. Additionally, we've been able to measure and analyze their light. Many of these distant suns are simple and solitary; others exist in pairs, triplets, or groups; some seem to be the centers of systems similar to the one that orbits our Sun, of which we are a part. However, these celestial groups are located at such vast distances that it’s impossible to identify all the members of each specific family. The most precise observations have only uncovered a few of them. For now, we must be satisfied with admiring the main ones—the sun-stars—magnificent[Pg 29] spheres, blazing beacons scattered widely across the sky.
How, then, is one to distinguish them? How can they be readily found and named? There are so many of them!
How can you tell them apart? How can they be easily found and identified? There are so many of them!
Do not fear; it is quite a simple matter. In studying the surface of the Earth we make use of geographical maps on which the continents and seas of which it consists are drawn with the utmost care. Each country of our planet is subdivided into states, each of which has its proper name. We shall pursue the same plan in regard to the Heavens, and it will be all the easier since the Great Book of the Firmament is constantly open to our gaze. Our globe, moreover, actually revolves upon itself so that we read the whole in due sequence. Given a clear atmosphere, and a little stimulus to the will from our love of truth and science, and the geography of the Heavens, or "uranography," will soon be as familiar to us as the geography of our terrestrial atom.
Do not worry; it's really quite simple. When we examine the surface of the Earth, we use geographical maps that carefully detail the continents and oceans. Each country on our planet is divided into states, each with its own name. We will follow the same approach for the Heavens, and it'll be even easier since the Great Book of the Firmament is always visible to us. Our globe actually rotates, allowing us to view everything in the correct order. With a clear atmosphere and a little motivation from our love for truth and science, we will soon know the geography of the Heavens, or "uranography," just as well as we know the geography of our planet.
On a beautiful summer's night, when we look toward the starry sky, we are at first aware only of a number of shining specks. The stars seem to be scattered almost accidentally through Space; they are so numerous and so close to one another that it would appear rash to attempt to name them separately. Yet some[Pg 30] of the brighter ones particularly attract and excite our attention. After a little observation we notice a certain regularity in the arrangement of these distant suns, and take pleasure in drawing imaginary figures round the celestial groups.
On a beautiful summer night, when we look up at the starry sky, we initially notice just a bunch of shining dots. The stars seem to be scattered almost randomly through Space; there are so many of them and they're so close together that it seems a bit foolish to try to name each one. Yet some[Pg 30] of the brighter ones really catch our eye and excite us. After watching for a bit, we start to see a pattern in how these distant suns are arranged, and we enjoy imagining shapes around the celestial clusters.
That is what the ancients did from a practical point of view. In order to guide themselves across the trackless ocean, the earliest Phenician navigators noted certain fixed bearings in the sky, by which they mapped out their routes. In this way they discovered the position of the immovable Pole, and acquired empire over the sea. The Chaldean pastors, too, the nomad people of the East, invoked the Heavens to assist in their migrations. They grouped the more brilliant of the stars into Constellations with simple outlines, and gave to each of these celestial provinces a name derived from mythology, history, or from the natural kingdoms. It is impossible to determine the exact epoch of this primitive celestial geography. The Centaur Chiron, Jason's tutor, was reputed the first to divide the Heavens upon the sphere of the Argonauts. But this origin is a little mythical! In the Bible we have the Prophet Job, who names Orion, the Pleiades, and the Hyades, 3,300 years ago. The Babylonian Tables, and the hieroglyphs of Egypt, witness to an astronomy that had made considerable advance even in those [Pg 31]remote epochs. Our actual constellations, which are doubtless of Babylonian origin, appear to have been arranged in their present form by the learned philosopher Eudoxus of Cnidus, about the year 360 B.C. Aratus sang of them in a didactic poem toward 270. Hipparchus of Rhodes was the first to note the astronomical positions with any precision, one hundred and thirty years before our era. He classified the stars in order of magnitude, according to their apparent brightness; and his catalogue, preserved in the Almagest of Ptolemy, contains 1,122 stars distributed into forty-eight Constellations.
That’s what the ancients did practically. To navigate the vast ocean, the earliest Phoenician sailors observed fixed points in the sky to chart their courses. This way, they found the location of the unchanging North Star and gained control over the seas. The Chaldean shepherds, a nomadic people from the East, looked to the heavens for help during their migrations. They organized the brighter stars into constellations with simple shapes and named these celestial regions based on mythology, history, or the natural world. It’s hard to pinpoint the exact time when this early celestial mapping began. The Centaur Chiron, the mentor of Jason, was said to be the first to divide the skies when the Argonauts were around. However, that story is somewhat mythical! In the Bible, the Prophet Job mentions Orion, the Pleiades, and the Hyades over 3,300 years ago. The Babylonian tablets and Egyptian hieroglyphs indicate that astronomy had already made significant progress during those distant times. Our current constellations, which likely originate from Babylon, seem to have been organized in their existing form by the learned philosopher Eudoxus of Cnidus around 360 B.C. Aratus wrote about them in a didactic poem around 270. Hipparchus of Rhodes was the first to accurately record the astronomical positions about 130 years before our era. He categorized the stars by their brightness, and his catalogue, preserved in Ptolemy's Almagest, lists 1,122 stars distributed across forty-eight constellations.
The figures of the constellations, taken almost entirely from fable, are visible only to the eyes of the imagination, and where the ancients placed such and such a person or animal, we may see, with a little good-will, anything we choose to fancy. There is nothing real about these figures. And yet it is indispensable to be able to recognize the constellations in order to find our way among the innumerable army of the stars, and we shall commence this study with the description of the most popular and best known of them all, the one that circles every night through our Northern Heavens. Needless to name it; it is familiar to every one. You have already exclaimed—the Great Bear!
The shapes of the constellations, mostly drawn from myths, can only be seen by the imagination. Where the ancients mapped out certain figures, with a bit of creativity, we can visualize anything we want. These shapes aren't real. Still, it's essential to recognize the constellations to navigate through the countless stars, so we'll start with a look at the most famous and well-known of them all, the one that moves across our Northern Sky every night. No need to mention its name; everyone knows it. You've probably already called out—The Great Bear!
This vast and splendid association of suns, which is[Pg 32] also known as the Chariot of David, the Plow or Charles's Wain, and the Dipper, is one of the finest constellations in the Heavens, and one of the oldest—seeing that the Chinese hailed it as the divinity of the North, over three thousand years ago.
This huge and impressive group of stars, which is[Pg 32] also known as the Chariot of David, the Plow, or Charles's Wain, and the Dipper, is one of the most beautiful constellations in the sky and one of the oldest—since the Chinese recognized it as the god of the North over three thousand years ago.
If any of my readers should happen to forget its position in the sky, the following is a very simple expedient for finding it. Turn to the North—that is, opposite to the point where the sun is to be found at midday. Whatever the season of the year, day of the month, or hour of the night, you will always see, high up in the firmament, seven magnificent stars, arranged in a quadrilateral, followed by a tail, or handle, of three stars. This magnificent constellation never sinks below our horizon. Night and day it watches above us, turning in twenty-four hours round a very famous star that we shall shortly become acquainted with. In the figure of the Great Bear, the four stars of the quadrilateral are found in the body, and the three at the extremity make the tail. As David's Chariot, the four stars represent the wheels, and the three others the horses.
If any of my readers happen to forget where it is located in the sky, here’s a very simple way to find it. Face North—that is, the opposite direction of where the sun is at noon. No matter the season, date, or time of night, you will always see seven bright stars high in the sky, arranged in a square shape, followed by a tail of three stars. This striking constellation never drops below the horizon. It’s always watching over us, completing a full turn around a well-known star every twenty-four hours, which we'll learn about soon. In the Great Bear constellation, the four stars in the square form the body, while the three at the end make up the tail. The four stars represent the wheels of David's Chariot, and the three others represent the horses.
Sometimes our ancestors called them the Seven Oxen, the "oxen of the celestial pastures," from which the word septentrion (septem triones, seven oxen of labor) is derived. Some see a Plowshare; others[Pg 33] more familiarly call this figure the Dipper. As it rotates round the pole, its outline varies with the different positions.
Sometimes our ancestors called them the Seven Oxen, the "oxen of the celestial pastures," from which the word septentrion (septem triones, seven oxen of labor) comes. Some see a Plowshare; others[Pg 33] more commonly refer to this shape as the Dipper. As it rotates around the pole, its outline changes with the different positions.
It is not easy to guess why this constellation should have been called the Bear. Yet the name has had a certain influence. From the Greek word arctos (bear) has come arctic, and for its antithesis, antarctic. From the Latin word trio (ox of labor) has come septentrion, the seven oxen. Etymology is not always logical. Is not the word "venerate" derived from Venus?
It’s not easy to understand why this constellation is called the Bear. Still, the name has had a notable impact. The Greek word arctos (bear) led to the terms arctic and its opposite, antarctic. The Latin word trio (ox of labor) gave us septentrion, referring to the seven oxen. Etymology isn’t always straightforward. Isn’t the word "venerate" derived from Venus?
In order to distinguish one star from another, the convention of denoting them by the letters of the Greek Alphabet has been adopted, for it would be impossible to give a name to each, so considerable is their number.[3]
To tell one star apart from another, we use letters from the Greek Alphabet since there are so many stars that it would be impossible to name each one.[3]
α and β denote the front wheels of the Chariot generally known as the "pointers;" γ and δ the hind wheels; ε, ζ, η the three horses. All these stars are of the second order of magnitude (the specific meaning of this expression will be explained in the next chapter), except the last (δ) of the quadrilateral, which is of the third order.
α and β represent the front wheels of the Chariot, commonly referred to as the "pointers;" γ and δ are the back wheels; ε, ζ, and η are the three horses. All of these stars are of the second magnitude (the specific meaning of this term will be clarified in the next chapter), except for the last one (δ) in the quadrilateral, which is of the third magnitude.

Figure 3 gives the outline of this primitive constellation. In revolving in twenty-four hours round the Pole, which is situated at the prolongation of a line drawn from β to α, it occupies every conceivable position,—as if this page were turned in all directions. But the relative arrangement of the seven stars remains unaltered. In contemplating these seven stars it must never be forgotten that each is a dazzling sun, a center of force and life. One of them is especially remarkable: ζ, known as Mizar to the Arabs. Those who have good sight will distinguish near it a minute star, Alcor, or the Cavalier, also called Saidak by the Arabs—that is, the Test, because it can be used as a test of vision. But further, if you have a small telescope at your disposal, direct it upon the fine star Mizar: you will be astonished[Pg 35] at discovering two of the finest diamonds you could wish to see, with which no brilliant is comparable. There are several double stars; these we shall become acquainted with later on.
Figure 3 shows the outline of this basic constellation. As it revolves around the North Pole every twenty-four hours, positioned along an extension of the line between β and α, it takes on every possible orientation—much like rotating this page in various directions. However, the arrangement of the seven stars remains constant. When observing these seven stars, it's important to remember that each one is a bright sun, a source of force and life. One star stands out in particular: ζ, known as Mizar by the Arabs. Those with good vision will notice a tiny star nearby, Alcor, or the Cavalier, which is also referred to as Saidak by the Arabs—meaning the Test, since it can be used to test eyesight. Moreover, if you have a small telescope handy, point it at the beautiful star Mizar: you'll be amazed[Pg 35] to find two of the most stunning diamonds you could imagine, which no gem can match. There are several double stars; we'll learn more about them later on.
Meantime, we must not forget our celestial geography. The Great Bear will help us to find all the adjacent constellations.
Meantime, we must not forget our celestial geography. The Great Bear will help us find all the neighboring constellations.

If a straight line is drawn (Fig. 4) from β through α, which forms the extremity of the square, and is prolonged by a quantity equal to the distance of α from the tip of the handle, we come on a star of second magnitude, which marks the extremity of a figure perfectly comparable with the Great Bear, but smaller, less brilliant, and pointing in the contrary direction. This is the Little Bear, composed, like its big brother, of seven stars; the one situated at the end of the line by which we have found it is the Pole-Star.
If you draw a straight line (Fig. 4) from β through α, which is the end of the square, and extend it by the same distance as α from the tip of the handle, you'll find a second magnitude star. This star marks the end of a shape that closely resembles the Great Bear but is smaller, less bright, and points in the opposite direction. This shape is the Little Bear, which, like its larger counterpart, consists of seven stars; the one at the end of the line we've drawn is the Pole Star.
Immovable in the region of the North Pole, the Pole-Star has captivated all eyes by its position in the firmament. It is the providence of mariners who have gone astray on the ocean, for it points them to the[Pg 36] North, while it is the pivot of the immense rotation accomplished round it by all the stars in twenty-four hours. Hence it is a very important factor, and we must hasten to find it, and render it due homage. It should be added that its special immobility, in the prolongation of the Earth's axis, is merely an effect caused by the diurnal movements of our planet. Our readers are of course aware that it is the earth that turns and not the sky. But evidence of this will be given later on. In looking at the Pole-Star, the South is behind one, the East to the right, and the West to the left.
Stationed in the North Pole region, the Pole Star has drawn attention because of its spot in the sky. It's a guiding light for sailors who have lost their way on the sea, as it directs them to the[Pg 36] North, while all the stars rotate around it in a twenty-four-hour cycle. Because of this, it plays a significant role, and we need to quickly locate it and pay it the respect it deserves. It's worth mentioning that its seeming stillness, aligned with the Earth's axis, is just a result of our planet's daily rotation. Our readers know, of course, that it's the Earth that's spinning, not the sky. More evidence of this will be provided later. When facing the Pole Star, the South is behind you, the East is to your right, and the West is to your left.
Between the Great and the Little Bear, we can distinguish a winding procession of smaller stars. These constitute the Dragon.
Between the Great Bear and the Little Bear, we can see a twisting line of smaller stars. These make up the Dragon.
We will continue our journey by way of Cassiopeia, a fine constellation placed on the opposite side of the Pole-Star in relation to the Great Bear, and shaped somewhat like the open limbs of the letter W. It is also called the Chair. And, in fact, when the figure is represented with the line α β below, the line χ γ forms the seat, and γ δ ε its back.
We will keep going on our journey through Cassiopeia, a beautiful constellation located on the opposite side of the North Star compared to the Big Dipper, and shaped a bit like the open arms of the letter W. It’s also known as the Chair. In fact, when the figure is shown with the line α β at the bottom, the line χ γ forms the seat, and γ δ ε makes up its back.
If a straight line is drawn from δ of the Great Bear, and prolonged beyond the Pole-Star in a quantity equal to the distance which separates these two stars, it is easy to find this constellation (Fig. 5). This group,[Pg 37] like the preceding, never sets, and is always visible, opposite to the Great Bear. It revolves in twenty-four hours round the Pole-Star, and is to be seen, now above, now below, now to the right, now to the left.
If you draw a straight line from δ of the Great Bear and extend it beyond the Pole Star by a distance equal to the space between these two stars, you can easily locate this constellation (Fig. 5). This group,[Pg 37] like the previous one, never sets and is always visible, opposite the Great Bear. It revolves around the Pole Star in twenty-four hours and can be seen above, below, to the right, or to the left.


If in the next place, starting from the stars α and δ in the Great Bear, we draw two lines which join at Polaris and are prolonged beyond Cassiopeia, we arrive at the Square of Pegasus (Fig. 6), a vast [Pg 38]constellation that terminates on one side in a prolongation formed of three stars.
If we start from the stars α and δ in the Great Bear and draw two lines that meet at Polaris and extend beyond Cassiopeia, we reach the Square of Pegasus (Fig. 6), a large [Pg 38]constellation that ends on one side with a line formed by three stars.
These three last stars belong to Andromeda, and themselves abut on Perseus. The last star in the Square of Pegasus is also the first in Andromeda.
These last three stars are part of Andromeda and are adjacent to Perseus. The last star in the Square of Pegasus is also the first in Andromeda.
γ of Andromeda is a magnificent double orb, to which we shall return in the next chapter, i.e., the telescope resolves it into two marvelous suns, one of which is topaz-yellow, and the other emerald-green. Three stars, indeed, are visible with more powerful instruments.
γ of Andromeda is a stunning double star system, which we will revisit in the next chapter. The telescope reveals it as two amazing suns, one a topaz-yellow and the other an emerald-green. With more powerful instruments, three stars can actually be seen.

Above β and near a small star, is visible a faint, whitish, luminous trail: this is the oblong nebula of Andromeda, the first mentioned in the history of astronomy, and one of the most beautiful in the Heavens, perceptible to the unaided eye on very clear nights.
Above β and near a small star, you can see a faint, whitish, glowing trail: this is the elongated nebula of Andromeda, the first one noted in the history of astronomy, and one of the most beautiful in the sky, visible to the naked eye on very clear nights.
The stars α, β and γ of Perseus form a concave bow which will serve in a new orientation. If it is prolonged in the direction of δ, we find a very brilliant star of the first magnitude. This is Capella, the Goat, in the constellation of the Charioteer (Fig. 7).
The stars α, β, and γ of Perseus create a curved shape that will assist in a new alignment. If we extend it towards δ, we discover a very bright first-magnitude star. This is Capella, the Goat, located in the Charioteer constellation (Fig. 7).
If coming back to δ in Perseus, a line is drawn[Pg 39] toward the South, we reach the Pleiades, a gorgeous cluster of stars, scintillating like the finest dust of diamonds, on the shoulder of the Bull, to which we shall come shortly, in studying the Constellations of the Zodiac.
If we return to δ in Perseus and draw a line[Pg 39] southward, we arrive at the Pleiades, a beautiful cluster of stars sparkling like the finest diamond dust, resting on the shoulder of the Bull, which we will discuss soon when studying the Constellations of the Zodiac.
Not far off is a very curious star, β of Perseus, or Algol, which forms a little triangle with two others smaller than itself. This star is peculiar in that, instead of shining with a fixed light, it varies in intensity, and is sometimes pale, sometimes brilliant. It belongs to the category of variable stars which we shall study later on. All the observations made on it for more than two hundred years go to prove that a dark star revolves round this sun, almost in the plane of our line of sight, producing as it passes in front of it a partial eclipse that reduces it from the second to the fourth magnitude, every other two days, twenty hours, and forty-nine minutes.
Not far away is a very interesting star, β of Perseus, or Algol, which makes a small triangle with two other smaller stars. This star is unique because, instead of shining steadily, its brightness changes; sometimes it appears dim, and other times it's bright. It falls into the category of variable stars that we will study later. All the observations made of it over the past two hundred years show that a dark star orbits around this star, almost in line with our view, causing a partial eclipse as it passes in front, which dims Algol from the second magnitude to the fourth every two days, twenty hours, and forty-nine minutes.
And now, let us return to the Great Bear, which aided us so beneficently to start for these distant shores, and whence we shall set out afresh in search of other constellations.
And now, let’s go back to the Great Bear, which helped us so generously to set out for these faraway shores, and from where we will embark again in search of other constellations.
If we produce the curved line of the tail, or handle, we encounter a magnificent golden-yellow star, a splendid sun of dazzling brilliancy: let us make our bow to Arcturus, α of the Herdsman, which is at the extremity[Pg 40] of this pentagonal constellation. The principal stars of this asterism are of the third magnitude, with the exception of α, which is of the first. Alongside of the Herdsman is a circle consisting of five stars of the third and fourth magnitude, save the third, α, or the Pearl, which is of the second magnitude. This is the Corona Borealis. It is very easily recognized (Fig. 8).
If we draw the curved line of the tail, or handle, we come across a stunning golden-yellow star, a brilliant sun shining brightly: let's acknowledge Arcturus, α of the Herdsman, located at the far end[Pg 40] of this five-sided constellation. The main stars of this group are mostly third magnitude, except for α, which is first magnitude. Next to the Herdsman is a circle made up of five stars of third and fourth magnitude, except for the third, α, or the Pearl, which is second magnitude. This is the Corona Borealis. It's very easy to spot (Fig. 8).

A line drawn from the Pole-Star to Arcturus forms the base of an equilateral triangle, the apex of which, situated opposite the Great Bear, is occupied by Vega, or α of the Lyre, a splendid diamond of ideal purity scintillating through the ether. This magnificent star, of first magnitude, is, with Arcturus, the most luminous in our Heavens. It burns with a white light, in the proximity of the Milky Way, not far from a constellation that is very easily recognized by the arrangement of its principal stars in the form of a cross. It is named Cygnus, the Bird, or the Swan (Fig. 9), and is[Pg 41] easy to find by the Square of Pegasus, and the Milky Way. This figure, the brilliancy of whose constituents (of the third and fourth magnitudes) contrasts strongly with the pallor of the Milky Way, includes at its extremity at the foot of the Cross, a superb double star, β or Albirio: α of Cygnus is also called Deneb. The first star of which the distance was calculated is in this constellation. This little orb of fifth magnitude, which hangs 69,000,000,000,000 kilometers (42,000,000,000,000 miles) above our Earth, is the nearest of all the stars to the skies of Europe.
A line drawn from the North Star to Arcturus forms the base of an equilateral triangle, with the peak opposite the Big Dipper occupied by Vega, or α of the Lyre, a brilliant diamond of perfect clarity sparkling in the sky. This stunning star, of first magnitude, is among the brightest in our heavens, along with Arcturus. It shines with a white light near the Milky Way, not far from a constellation easily recognized by the arrangement of its main stars in the shape of a cross. This constellation is called Cygnus, the Bird, or the Swan (Fig. 9), and is easy to locate by the Square of Pegasus and the Milky Way. This figure, whose bright stars (of the third and fourth magnitudes) stand out against the pale light of the Milky Way, features a magnificent double star at the foot of the Cross, β or Albireo: α of Cygnus is also known as Deneb. The first star for which the distance was calculated is in this constellation. This small fifth-magnitude star, suspended 69,000,000,000,000 kilometers (42,000,000,000,000 miles) above Earth, is the closest star to the European skies.

Not far off is the fine Eagle, which spreads its wings in the Milky Way, and in which the star Altaïr, α, of first magnitude, is situated between its two satellites, β and γ.
Not far away is the beautiful Eagle, which spreads its wings in the Milky Way, and where the star Altaïr, α, of first magnitude, is located between its two companions, β and γ.
The Constellation of Hercules, toward which the[Pg 42] motions of the Sun are impelling us, with all the planets of its system, is near the Lyre. Its principal stars can be recognized inside the triangle formed by the Pole-Star, Arcturus, and Vega.
The Constellation of Hercules, which the[Pg 42] movements of the Sun are guiding us toward, along with all the planets in its system, is close to the Lyre. You can spot its main stars within the triangle made by the Pole-Star, Arcturus, and Vega.
All the Constellations described above belong to the Northern Hemisphere. Those nearest the pole are called circumpolar. They revolve round the pole in twenty-four hours.
All the constellations mentioned above are in the Northern Hemisphere. The ones closest to the pole are called circumpolar. They rotate around the pole in twenty-four hours.
Having now learned the Northern Heavens, we must come back to the Sun, which we have left behind us. The Earth revolves round him in a year, and in consequence he seems to revolve round us, sweeping through a vast circle of the celestial sphere. In each year, at the same period, he passes the same points of the Heavens, in front of the same constellations, which are rendered invisible by his light. We know that the stars are at a fixed position from the Earth, whatever their distance, and that if we do not see them at noon as at midnight, it is simply because they are extinguished by the dazzling light of the orb of day. With the aid of a telescope it is always possible to see the more brilliant of them.
Having now studied the Northern Heavens, we need to return to the Sun, which we have previously overlooked. The Earth orbits around him in a year, making it appear as though he revolves around us, moving through a vast circle in the sky. Each year, at the same time, he passes the same points in the sky, in front of the same constellations, which become invisible due to his brightness. We know that the stars are fixed in relation to the Earth, regardless of their distance, and if we can’t see them at noon like we do at midnight, it’s simply because they’re outshone by the bright light of the Sun. With a telescope, it's always possible to view the brighter stars.
The Zodiac is the zone of stars traversed by the Sun in the course of a year. This word is derived from the Greek Zodiakos, which signifies "animal," and this etymology arose because most of the figures traced[Pg 43] on this belt of stars represent animals. The belt is divided into twelve parts that are called the twelve Signs of the Zodiac, also named by the ancients the "Houses of the Sun," since the Sun visits one of them in each month. These are the signs, with the primitive characters that distinguish them: the Ram ♈, the Bull ♉, the Twins ♊, the Crab ♋, the Lion ♌, the Virgin ♍, the Balance ♎, the Scorpion ♏, the Archer ♐, the Goat ♑, the Water-Carrier ♒, the Fishes ♓. The sign ♈ Aries represents the horns of the Ram, ♉ the head of the Bull, and so on.
The Zodiac is the area of stars that the Sun travels through over the course of a year. The term comes from the Greek Zodiakos, which means "animal," because most of the figures drawn on this band of stars depict animals. This band is divided into twelve sections known as the twelve Signs of the Zodiac, also called the "Houses of the Sun" by the ancients, as the Sun moves through one of them each month. Here are the signs, along with their basic symbols: the Ram ♈, the Bull ♉, the Twins ♊, the Crab ♋, the Lion ♌, the Virgin ♍, the Balance ♎, the Scorpion ♏, the Archer ♐, the Goat ♑, the Water-Carrier ♒, and the Fishes ♓. The sign ♈ Aries represents the ram's horns, ♉ represents the bull's head, and so on.
If you will now follow me into the Houses of the Sun you will readily recognize them again, provided you have a clear picture of the principal stars of the Northern Heavens. First, you see the Ram, the initial sign of the Zodiac; because at the epoch at which the actual Zodiac was fixed, the Sun entered this sign at the vernal equinox, and the equator crossed the ecliptic at this point. This constellation, in which the horns of the Ram (third magnitude) are the brightest, is situated between Andromeda and the Pleiades. Two thousand years ago, the Ram was regarded as the symbol of spring; but owing to the secular movement of the precession of the equinoxes, the Sun is no longer there on March 21: he is in the Fishes.
If you now follow me into the Houses of the Sun, you'll easily recognize them again, assuming you have a clear image of the main stars in the Northern Sky. First, you see Aries, the first sign of the Zodiac; because when the current Zodiac was established, the Sun entered this sign at the spring equinox, and the equator crossed the ecliptic at this point. This constellation, with the horns of Aries (third magnitude) being the brightest, is located between Andromeda and the Pleiades. Two thousand years ago, Aries was seen as the symbol of spring; but due to the slow shift of the precession of the equinoxes, the Sun is no longer in Aries on March 21; it’s in Pisces now.
To the left, or east of the Ram, we find the Bull,[Pg 44] the head of which forms a triangle in which burns Aldebaran, of first magnitude, a magnificent red star that marks the right eye; and the Hyades, scintillating pale and trembling, on its forehead. The timid Pleiades, as we have seen, veil themselves on the shoulder of the Bull—a captivating cluster, of which six stars can be counted with the unaided eye, while several hundred are discovered with the telescope.
To the left, or east of the Ram, we have the Bull,[Pg 44] whose head creates a triangle where Aldebaran, a bright red star of first magnitude, shines as the right eye; and the Hyades twinkle faintly and unsteadily on its forehead. The shy Pleiades, as we've noted, hide themselves on the Bull's shoulder—a stunning cluster where six stars can be seen without a telescope, while several hundred more are revealed with it.
Next the Twins. They are easily recognized by the two fine stars, α and β, of first magnitude, which mark their heads, and immortalize Castor and Pollux, the sons of Jupiter, celebrated for their indissoluble friendship.
Next are the Twins. They can be easily recognized by the two bright stars, α and β, which represent their heads and immortalize Castor and Pollux, the sons of Jupiter, known for their unbreakable friendship.
Cancer, the Crab, is the least important sign of the Zodiac. It is distinguished only by five stars of fourth and fifth magnitudes, situated below the line of Castor and Pollux, and by a pale cluster called Præsepe, the Beehive.
Cancer, the Crab, is the least significant sign of the Zodiac. It's marked by just five stars of fourth and fifth magnitudes located below the line of Castor and Pollux, along with a faint cluster known as Præsepe, the Beehive.
The Lion next approaches, superb in his majesty. At his heart is a gorgeous star of first magnitude, α or Regulus. This figure forms a grand trapezium of four stars on the celestial sphere.
The Lion steps forward, magnificent in his glory. At its center is a stunning star of the highest brightness, α or Regulus. This shape creates a large trapezoid of four stars in the sky.
The Virgin exhibits a splendid star of first magnitude; this is Spica, which with Regulus and Arcturus, form a triangle by which this constellation can be recognized.
The Virgin shows off a bright star of first magnitude; this is Spica, which along with Regulus and Arcturus, creates a triangle that helps identify this constellation.
The Balance follows the Virgin. Its scales, marked by two stars of second magnitude, are situated a little to the East of Spica.
The Balance follows the Virgin. Its scales, marked by two second-magnitude stars, are located a bit to the east of Spica.
We next come to the eighth constellation of the Zodiac, which is one of the most beautiful of this belt of stars. Antares, a red star of first magnitude, occupies the heart of the venomous and accursed Scorpion. It is situated on the prolongation of a line joining Regulus to Spica, and forms with Vega of the Lyre, and Arcturus of the Herdsman, a great isosceles triangle, of which this latter star is the apex.
We now arrive at the eighth constellation of the Zodiac, which is one of the most stunning in this band of stars. Antares, a bright red star, sits at the heart of the dangerous and cursed Scorpion. It's located along a line extending from Regulus to Spica and forms a large isosceles triangle with Vega from the Lyre and Arcturus from the Herdsman, with Arcturus being the top point of the triangle.
The Scorpion, held to be a sign of ill luck, has been prejudicial to the Archer, which follows it, and traces an oblique trapezium in the sky, a little to the east of Antares. These two southernmost constellations never rise much above the horizon for France and England. In fable, the Archer is Chiron, the preceptor of Jason, Achilles and Æsculapius.
The Scorpion, considered a symbol of bad luck, has been harmful to the Archer that comes after it, forming a slanted trapezoid in the sky, a bit to the east of Antares. These two southern constellations never rise very high above the horizon in France and England. In mythology, the Archer represents Chiron, the teacher of Jason, Achilles, and Asclepius.
Capricorn lies to the south of Altaïr, on the prolongation of a line from the Lyre to the Eagle. It is hardly noticeable save for the stars α and β of third magnitude, which scintillate on its forehead.
Capricorn is south of Altaïr, extending from a line that connects the Lyre to the Eagle. It's barely noticeable except for the third-magnitude stars α and β, which twinkle on its forehead.
The Water-Carrier pours his streams toward the horizon. He is not rich in stars, exhibiting only three of third magnitude that form a very flattened triangle.
The Water-Carrier pours his streams toward the horizon. He isn’t rich in stars, showing only three of third magnitude that create a very flattened triangle.
Lastly the Fishes, concluding sign of the Zodiac, are[Pg 46] found to the south of Andromeda and Pegasus. Save for α, of third magnitude, this constellation consists of small stars that are hardly visible.
Lastly, the Pisces, the last sign of the Zodiac, are[Pg 46] located south of Andromeda and Pegasus. Except for α, which is of third magnitude, this constellation is made up of small stars that are barely visible.
These twelve zodiacal constellations will be recognized on examining the chart (Figs. 10–11).
These twelve zodiac constellations can be identified by looking at the chart (Figs. 10–11).
We must now visit the stars of the Southern Heavens, some of which are equally deserving of admiration.
We should now explore the stars of the Southern Sky, as some of them are just as worthy of admiration.

Capricorn, Sagittarius, Scorpio, Libra, Virgo, Leo.
It should in the first place be noted that the signs of the Zodiac and the Southern Constellations are not, like those which are circumpolar, perpetually visible at all periods of the year. Their visibility depends on the time of year and the hour of the night.[4]
It should first be noted that the Zodiac signs and the Southern Constellations are not, like those that are circumpolar, visible all year round. Their visibility depends on the time of year and the hour of the night.[4]
In order to admire the fine constellations of the North, as described above, we have only to open our[Pg 47] windows on a clear summer's evening, or walk round the garden in the mysterious light of these inaccessible suns, while we look up at the immense fields in which each star is like the head of a celestial spear.
To appreciate the beautiful constellations of the North, as mentioned earlier, we just need to open our[Pg 47] windows on a clear summer evening or stroll through the garden in the mysterious glow of these distant suns, while gazing up at the vast expanses where each star resembles the tip of a heavenly spear.
But the summer is over, autumn is upon us, and then, too soon, comes winter clothed in hoar-frost. The days are short and cold, dark and dreary; but as a compensation the night is much longer, and adorns herself with her most beautiful jewels, offering us the contemplation of her inexhaustible treasures.
But summer is over, autumn is here, and before we know it, winter arrives dressed in frost. The days are short and cold, dark and bleak; but to make up for that, the nights are much longer, decorated with beautiful stars, giving us the chance to appreciate her endless treasures.

First, let us do homage to the magnificent Orion, most splendid of all the constellations: he advances like a colossal giant, and confronts the Bull.
First, let's pay tribute to the magnificent Orion, the most splendid of all the constellations: he strides forward like a massive giant, facing the Bull.
This constellation appears about midnight in November, in the south-eastern Heavens; toward eleven[Pg 48] o'clock in December and January, due south; about ten in February, in the south-east; about nine in March, and about eight in April, in the west; and then sets below our horizon.
This constellation shows up around midnight in November, in the southeastern sky; around eleven[Pg 48] o'clock in December and January, due south; around ten in February, in the southeast; around nine in March, and around eight in April, in the west; and then it sets below our horizon.

It is indisputably the most striking figure in the sky, and with the Great Bear, the most ancient in history, the first that was noticed: both are referred to in the ancient texts of China, Chaldea, and Egypt.
It’s definitely the most impressive figure in the sky, and along with the Great Bear, the oldest in history—the first one that was observed. Both are mentioned in the ancient writings of China, Chaldea, and Egypt.
Eight principal stars delineate its outline; two are of the first magnitude, five of the second, and one of the third (Fig. 12). The most brilliant are Betelgeuse (α) and Rigel (β): the former marking the right shoulder of the Colossus as it faces us; the second the left foot. The star on the left shoulder is γ or Bellatrix, of second magnitude; that of the right foot, χ, is almost of the third. Three stars of second magnitude placed obliquely at equal distances from each other, the first or highest of which marks the position of the equatorial line, indicate the Belt or Girdle. These stars, known as the Three Kings, and by country people as the Rake, assist greatly in the recognition of this fine constellation.
Eight main stars outline its shape; two are first magnitude, five are second, and one is third (Fig. 12). The brightest are Betelgeuse (α) and Rigel (β): the former marks the right shoulder of the giant as it faces us, while the latter marks the left foot. The star on the left shoulder is γ or Bellatrix, which is second magnitude; the one on the right foot, χ, is almost third magnitude. Three second-magnitude stars positioned diagonally at equal distances from each other, with the highest one indicating the equatorial line, represent the Belt or Girdle. These stars, known as the Three Kings and referred to by local people as the Rake, help significantly in identifying this impressive constellation.
A little below the second star of the Belt, a large white patch, like a band of fog, the apparent dimensions of which are equal to that of the lunar disk, is visible to the unaided eye: this is the Nebula of Orion, one of the most magnificent in the entire Heavens. It was discovered in 1656 by Huyghens, who counted twelve stars in the pale cloud. Since that date it has been constantly studied and photographed by its many admirers, while the giant eye of the telescope discovers in it to-day an innumerable multitude of little stars which reveal the existence of an entire universe in this region.
A little below the second star of the Belt, there’s a large white patch that looks like a band of fog. Its size is about the same as the moon, and it can be seen with the naked eye. This is the Nebula of Orion, one of the most stunning sights in the sky. It was discovered in 1656 by Huyghens, who saw twelve stars within the pale cloud. Since then, it has been continuously studied and photographed by many enthusiasts, and the powerful lens of the telescope now reveals an incredible number of tiny stars, showing that there’s an entire universe in this area.
Orion is not merely the most imposing of the celestial figures; it is also the richest in sidereal wonders. Among[Pg 50] these, it exhibits the most complex of all the multiple systems known to us: that of the star θ situated in the celebrated nebula just mentioned. This marvelous star, viewed through a powerful telescope, breaks up into six suns, forming a most remarkable stellar group.
Orion isn't just the most impressive of the constellations; it's also the most filled with celestial wonders. Among[Pg 50] these, it showcases the most complex of all the known multiple star systems: the star θ located in the well-known nebula mentioned earlier. This amazing star, seen through a powerful telescope, splits into six suns, creating a truly remarkable group of stars.
This region is altogether one of the most brilliant in the entire firmament. We must no longer postpone our homage to the brightest star in the sky, the magnificent Sirius, which shines on the left below Orion: it returns every year toward the end of November. This marvelous star, of dazzling brilliancy, is the first, α, in the constellation of the Great Dog, which forms a quadrilateral, the base of which is adjacent to a triangle erected from the horizon.
This area is truly one of the brightest in the whole sky. We should no longer delay paying our respects to the brightest star up there, the amazing Sirius, which can be found on the lower left of Orion: it comes back every year around the end of November. This incredible star, shining brilliantly, is the first, α, in the constellation of the Great Dog, which creates a quadrilateral, with its base next to a triangle rising from the horizon.
When astronomers first endeavored to determine the distance of the stars, Sirius, which attracted all eyes to its burning fires, was the particular object of attention. After long observation, they succeeded in determining its distance as 92 trillion kilometers (57 trillion miles). Light, that radiates through space at a velocity of 300,000 kilometers (186,000 miles) per second, takes no less than ten years to reach us from this sun, which, nevertheless, is one of our neighbors.
When astronomers first tried to figure out how far away the stars were, Sirius, with its bright flames, became the focus of their attention. After extensive observation, they managed to measure its distance as 92 trillion kilometers (57 trillion miles). Light, which travels through space at a speed of 300,000 kilometers (186,000 miles) per second, takes at least ten years to reach us from this sun, even though it’s one of our closest neighbors.
The Little Dog, in which Procyon (α, of first magnitude) shines out, is above its big brother. With the exception of α, it has no bright stars.
The Little Dog, where Procyon (α, of first magnitude) stands out, is positioned above its bigger counterpart. Apart from α, it doesn’t have any bright stars.

Lastly, toward the southern horizon, we must notice the Hydra, Eridanus, the Whale, the Southern Fish, the Ship, and the Centaur. This last constellation, while invisible to our latitudes, contains the star that is[Pg 52] nearest to the Earth, α, of first magnitude, the distance of which is 40 trillion kilometers (25 trillion miles).
Lastly, towards the southern horizon, we should take note of Hydra, Eridanus, the Whale, the Southern Fish, the Ship, and the Centaur. This last constellation, while not visible from our latitudes, includes the star that is[Pg 52] closest to Earth, α, which is a first magnitude star, located 40 trillion kilometers (25 trillion miles) away.

The feet of the Centaur touch the Southern Cross, which is always invisible to us, and a little farther[Pg 53] down the Southern Pole reigns over the icy desert of the antarctic regions.
The feet of the Centaur reach the Southern Cross, which we can never see, and a bit further[Pg 53] down the Southern Pole oversees the freezing wasteland of the Antarctic regions.


In order to complete the preceding descriptions, we subjoin four charts representing the aspect of the starry heavens during the evenings of winter, spring, summer, and autumn. To make use of these, we must suppose them to be placed above our heads, the center marking the zenith, and the sky descending all round to the horizon.[Pg 55] The horizon, therefore, bounds these panoramas. Turning the chart in any direction, and looking at it from north, south, east, or west, we find all the principal stars. The first map (Fig. 13) represents the sky in winter (January) at 8 P.M.; the second, in spring (April) at 9 P.M.; the third, in summer (July) at the same hour; the fourth, the sky in autumn (October) at the same time.
To wrap up the previous descriptions, we include four charts showing what the night sky looks like during the winter, spring, summer, and autumn evenings. To use these, imagine them positioned directly above you, with the center indicating the zenith and the sky sloping down to the horizon all around.[Pg 55] The horizon acts as the boundary for these views. By rotating the chart in any direction and observing it from the north, south, east, or west, you’ll see all the main stars. The first map (Fig. 13) shows the winter sky (January) at 8 P.M.; the second is for spring (April) at 9 P.M.; the third remains for summer (July) at the same hour; and the fourth depicts the autumn sky (October) at the same time.
And so, at little cost, we have made one of the grandest and most beautiful journeys conceivable. We now have a new country, or, better, have learned to see and know our own country, for since the Earth is a planet we must all be citizens of the Heavens before we can belong to such or such a nation of our lilliputian world.
And so, at a minimal expense, we have taken one of the most impressive and beautiful journeys imaginable. We now have a new perspective on our country, or more accurately, we've learned to see and understand our own nation, because since Earth is a planet, we must all be citizens of the universe before we can truly belong to any particular nation in our tiny world.
We must now study this sublime spectacle of the Heavens in detail.
We need to examine this amazing view of the sky closely now.
CHAPTER III
THE STARS, SUNS OF THE INFINITE
A Journey through Space
A Journey Through Space
We have seen from the foregoing summary of the principal Constellations that there is great diversity in the brightness of the stars, and that while our eyes are dazzled with the brilliancy of certain orbs, others, on the contrary, sparkle modestly in the azure depths of the night, and are hardly perceptible to the eye that seeks to plumb the abysses of Immensity.
We have seen from the summary above of the main constellations that there is a wide range in the brightness of the stars. While some shine brightly and can easily grab our attention, others shine more quietly in the deep blue of the night sky and are barely visible to the eye that tries to explore the vastness of space.
We have appended the word "magnitude" to the names of certain stars, and the reader might imagine this to bear some relation to the volume of the orb. But this is not the case.
We have attached the word "magnitude" to the names of certain stars, and the reader might think this has something to do with the size of the star. But that's not true.
To facilitate the observation of stars of varying brilliancy, they have been classified in order of magnitude, according to their apparent brightness, and since the dimensions of these distant suns are almost wholly unknown to us, the most luminous stars were naturally denoted as of first magnitude, those which were a little less bright of the second, and so on. But in reality[Pg 57] this word "magnitude" is quite erroneous, for it bears no relation to the mass of the stars, divided thus at an epoch when it was supposed that the most brilliant must be the largest. It simply indicates the apparent brightness of a star, the real brilliancy depending on its dimensions, its intrinsic light, and its distance from our planet.
To help us observe stars that shine with different levels of brightness, they've been classified by their magnitude based on how bright they appear. Since we know very little about the actual sizes of these distant stars, the brightest ones were labeled as first magnitude, the next brightest as second, and so on. However, the term "magnitude" is misleading[Pg 57] because it doesn’t relate to the stars' mass, which was divided during a time when it was thought that the brightest stars must be the largest. It just indicates how bright a star looks, while the true brightness depends on its size, its own light, and how far it is from Earth.
And now to make some comparison between the different orders. Throughout the entire firmament, only nineteen stars of first magnitude are discoverable. And, strictly speaking, the last of this series might just as well be noted of "second magnitude," while the first of the second series might be added to the list of stars of the "first order." But in order to form classes distinct from one another, some limit has to be adopted, and it was determined that the first series should include only the following stars, the most luminous in the Heavens, which are subjoined in order of decreasing brilliancy.
And now let’s compare the different categories. In the entire sky, only nineteen stars of the first magnitude can be seen. Technically, the last star in this group could also be classified as "second magnitude," while the first star of the second group might be considered part of the "first order." However, to create distinct classes, some limits need to be set, and it was decided that the first group would only include the following stars, the brightest in the sky, listed here in order of decreasing brightness.
STARS OF THE FIRST MAGNITUDE
FIRST-MAGNITUDE STARS
1. | Sirius, or α of the Great Dog. |
2. | Canopus, or α of the Ship. |
3. | Capella, or α of the Charioteer. |
4. | Arcturus, or α of the Herdsman. |
5. | Vega, or α of the Lyre. |
6. | Proxima, or α of the Centaur. |
7. | Rigel, or β of Orion. |
8. | Achernar, or α of Eridanus. |
9. | Procyon, or α of the Little Dog. |
10. | β of the Centaur. |
11. | Betelgeuse, or α of Orion. |
12. | Altaïr, or α of the Eagle. |
13. | α of the Southern Cross. |
14. | Aldebaran, or α of the Bull. |
15. | Spica, or α of the Virgin. |
16. | Antares, or α of the Scorpion. |
17. | Pollux, or β of the Twins. |
18. | Regulus, or α of the Lion. |
19. | Fomalhaut, or α of the Southern Fish. |
THE STARS OF THE SECOND MAGNITUDE
THE STARS OF THE SECOND MAGNITUDE
Then come the stars of the second magnitude, of which there are fifty-nine. The stars of the Great Bear (with the exception of δ, which is of third magnitude), the Pole-Star, the chief stars in Orion (after Rigel and Betelgeuse), of the Lion, of Pegasus, of Andromeda, of Cassiopeia, are of this order. These, with the former, constitute the principal outlines of the constellations visible to us.
Then come the stars of the second magnitude, of which there are fifty-nine. The stars of the Great Bear (except for δ, which is of third magnitude), the Pole-Star, the main stars in Orion (after Rigel and Betelgeuse), in the Lion, in Pegasus, in Andromeda, and in Cassiopeia are in this category. Together with the first magnitude stars, they make up the main outlines of the constellations we can see.
Then follow the third and fourth magnitudes, and so on.
Then follow the third and fourth levels, and so on.
The following table gives a summary of the series, down to the sixth magnitude, which is the limit of visibility for the unaided human eye:
The table below summarizes the series down to the sixth magnitude, which is the limit of what the naked eye can see:
19 | stars of first magnitude. |
59 | of second magnitude. |
182 | of third magnitude. |
530 | of fourth magnitude. |
1,600 | of fifth magnitude. |
4,800 | of sixth magnitude. |
This makes a total of some seven thousand stars visible to the unaided eye. It will be seen that each series is, roughly speaking, three times as populated as that preceding it; consequently, if we multiply the number of any class by three, we obtain the approximate number of stars that make up the class succeeding it.
This means there are about seven thousand stars visible to the naked eye. It’s clear that each series has roughly three times the number of stars as the one before it; so, if we multiply the number of any class by three, we get the approximate number of stars in the next class.
Seven thousand stars! It is an imposing figure, when one reflects that all these lucid points are suns, as enormous as they are potent, as incandescent as our own (which exceeds the volume of the Earth by more than a million times), distant centers of light and heat, exerting their attraction on unknown systems. And yet it is generally imagined that millions of stars are visible in the firmament. This is an illusion; even the best vision is unable to distinguish stars below the sixth magnitude, and ordinary sight is far from discovering all of these.
Seven thousand stars! That's an impressive number when you think about the fact that all these bright points are suns, just as massive and powerful as ours (which is over a million times the size of Earth), distant sources of light and heat, pulling on unknown systems. Yet, people usually believe that millions of stars can be seen in the sky. This is a misconception; even the best eyesight can't see stars dimmer than the sixth magnitude, and regular vision is far from spotting all of them.
Again, seven thousand stars for the whole Heavens[Pg 60] makes only three thousand five hundred for half the sky. And we can only see one celestial hemisphere at a time. Moreover, toward the horizon, the vapor of the atmosphere veils the little stars of sixth magnitude. In reality, we never see at a given moment more than three thousand stars. This number is below that of the population of a small town.
Again, seven thousand stars for the entire sky[Pg 60] means only three thousand five hundred for half the sky. Plus, we can only see one half of the sky at a time. Also, near the horizon, the atmosphere's haze covers the faint stars of sixth magnitude. In reality, we never see more than three thousand stars at once. This number is less than the population of a small town.
But celestial space is unlimited, and we must not suppose that these seven thousand stars that fascinate our eyes and enrich our Heavens, without which our nights would be black, dark, and empty,[5] comprise the whole of Creation. They only represent the vestibule of the temple.
But outer space is limitless, and we shouldn’t think that these seven thousand stars that captivate us and brighten our skies, without which our nights would be pitch black, [5] make up all of Creation. They only symbolize the entrance to the temple.
Where our vision is arrested, a larger, more powerful eye, that is developing from century to century, plunges its analyzing gaze into the abysses, and reflects back to the insatiable curiosity of science the light of the innumerable suns that it discovers. This eye is the lens of the optical instruments. Even opera-glasses disclose stars of the seventh magnitude. A small astronomical objective penetrates to the eighth and ninth orders. More powerful instruments attain the tenth. The[Pg 61] Heavens are progressively transformed to the eye of the astronomer, and soon he is able to reckon hundreds of thousands of orbs in the night. The evolution continues, the power of the instrument is developed; and the stars of the eleventh and twelfth magnitudes are discovered successively, and together number four millions. Then follow the thirteenth, fourteenth, and fifteenth magnitudes. This is the sequence:
Where our vision is limited, a larger, more powerful eye, that is evolving from century to century, launches its analytical gaze into the depths, and reflects back to the unquenchable curiosity of science the light of the countless suns it finds. This eye is the lens of optical instruments. Even binoculars reveal stars of the seventh magnitude. A small astronomical telescope reaches the eighth and ninth orders. More powerful instruments achieve the tenth. The[Pg 61] heavens are gradually transformed to the astronomer's eye, and soon he can count hundreds of thousands of orbs in the night sky. The evolution continues, the power of the instruments grows; and the stars of the eleventh and twelfth magnitudes are discovered one after another, totaling four million. Then come the thirteenth, fourteenth, and fifteenth magnitudes. This is the sequence:
7th magnitude | 13,000. |
8th magnitude | 40,000. |
9th magnitude | 120,000. |
10th magnitude | 380,000. |
11th magnitude | 1,000,000. |
12th magnitude | 3,000,000. |
13th magnitude | 9,000,000. |
14th magnitude | 27,000,000. |
15th magnitude | 80,000,000. |
Accordingly, the most powerful telescopes of the day, reenforced by celestial photography, can bring a stream of more than 120 millions of stars into the scope of our vision.
Accordingly, the most advanced telescopes of the time, enhanced by celestial photography, can bring more than 120 million stars into our sight.
The photographic map of the Heavens now being executed comprises the first fourteen magnitudes, and will give the precise position of some 40,000,000 stars, distributed over 22,054 sheets, forming a sphere 3 meters 44 centimeters in diameter.
The photographic map of the Heavens currently being created includes the first fourteen magnitudes and will provide the exact locations of around 40,000,000 stars, spread across 22,054 sheets, forming a sphere 3 meters 44 centimeters in diameter.
The boldest imagination is overwhelmed by these figures, and fails to picture such millions of suns—formidable and burning globes that roll through space, sweeping their systems along with them. What furnaces are there! what unknown lives! what vast immensities!
The most daring imagination is blown away by these numbers and can't even picture millions of suns—massive, fiery bodies moving through space, pulling their systems along with them. What amazing furnaces! What mysterious lives! What enormous expanses!
And again, what enormous distances must separate the stars, to admit of their free revolution in the ether! In what abysses, at what a distance from our terrestrial atom, must these magnificent and dazzling Suns pursue the paths traced for them by Destiny!
And once more, what incredible distances must lie between the stars, allowing them to move freely in the vastness of space! In what depths, and how far from our tiny world, must these magnificent and brilliant Suns follow the paths set for them by Fate!
If all the stars radiated an equal light, their distances might be calculated on the principle that an object appears smaller in proportion to its distance. But this equality does not exist. The suns were not all cast in the same mold.
If all the stars shone with the same brightness, we could figure out their distances based on the idea that an object looks smaller the farther away it is. But that uniformity isn't there. The suns weren't all shaped the same way.
Indeed, the stars differ widely in size and brightness, and the distances that have been measured show that the most brilliant are not the nearest. They are scattered through Space at all distances.
Indeed, the stars vary greatly in size and brightness, and the distances that have been measured reveal that the brightest ones are not necessarily the closest. They are spread out in space at various distances.
Among the nearer stars of which it has been found possible to calculate the distance, some are found to be of the fourth, fifth, sixth, seventh, eighth, and even ninth magnitudes, proving that the most brilliant are not always the least distant.
Among the closer stars for which we can calculate the distance, some are discovered to be of the fourth, fifth, sixth, seventh, eighth, and even ninth magnitudes, showing that the brightest ones aren't always the closest.
For the rest, among the beautiful and shining stars with which we made acquaintance in the last chapter may be cited Sirius, which at a distance of 92 trillion kilometers (57 trillion miles) from here still dazzles us with its burning fires; Procyon or α of the Little Dog, as remote as 112 trillion kilometers (691⁄2 trillion miles); Altaïr of the Eagle, at 160 trillion kilometers (99 trillion miles); the white Vega, at 204 trillion kilometers (1261⁄2 trillion miles); Capella, at 276 trillion kilometers (171 trillion miles); and the Pole-Star at 344 trillion kilometers (2131⁄2 trillion miles). The light that flies through Space at a velocity of 300,000 kilometers (186,000 miles) per second, takes thirty-six years and a half to reach us from this distant sun: i.e., the luminous ray we are now receiving from Polaris has been traveling for more than the third of a century. When you, gentle reader, were born, the ray that arrives to-day from the Pole-Star was already speeding on its way. In the first second after it had started it traveled 300,000 kilometers; in the second it added another 300,000 which at once makes 600,000 kilometers; add another 300,000 kilometers for the third second, and so on during the thirty-six years and a half.
For the rest, among the beautiful and shining stars we became familiar with in the last chapter, we can mention Sirius, which, at a distance of 92 trillion kilometers (57 trillion miles) from here, still dazzles us with its bright light; Procyon or α of the Little Dog, as far away as 112 trillion kilometers (69.5 trillion miles); Altaïr of the Eagle, at 160 trillion kilometers (99 trillion miles); the white Vega, at 204 trillion kilometers (126.5 trillion miles); Capella, at 276 trillion kilometers (171 trillion miles); and the Pole Star at 344 trillion kilometers (213.5 trillion miles). The light that travels through space at a speed of 300,000 kilometers (186,000 miles) per second takes thirty-six and a half years to reach us from this distant sun: that is, the light we are receiving from Polaris has been traveling for more than a third of a century. When you, dear reader, were born, the light arriving today from the Pole Star was already on its way. In the first second after it started, it traveled 300,000 kilometers; in the second, it added another 300,000, making 600,000 kilometers total; add another 300,000 kilometers for the third second, and so on for the thirty-six and a half years.
If we tried to arrange the number 300,000 (which represents the distance accomplished in one second) in superposed rows, as if for an addition sum, as many[Pg 64] times as is necessary to obtain the distance that separates the Pole-Star from our Earth, the necessary operation would comprise 1,151,064,000 rows, and the sheet of paper required for the setting out of such a sum would measure approximately 11,510 kilometers (about 7,000 miles), i.e., almost the diameter of our terrestrial globe, or about four times the distance from Paris to Moscow!
If we tried to arrange the number 300,000 (which represents the distance traveled in one second) in stacked rows, like an addition problem, as many[Pg 64] times as needed to represent the distance between the Pole Star and our Earth, this operation would require 1,151,064,000 rows. The paper needed to lay out such a calculation would measure about 11,510 kilometers (around 7,000 miles), i.e., nearly the diameter of our planet, or about four times the distance from Paris to Moscow!
Is it not impossible to realize that our Sun, with its entire system, is lost in the Heavens at such a distance from his peers in Space? At the distance of the least remote of the stars he would appear as one of the smallest.
Is it not hard to believe that our Sun, along with its entire system, is lost in the vastness of the universe at such a distance from its peers in space? At the distance of the closest stars, it would look like one of the tiniest.
The nearest star to us is α of the Centaur, of first magnitude, a neighbor of the South Pole, invisible in our latitudes. Its distance is 275,000 radii of the terrestrial orbit, i.e., 275,000 times 149 million kilometers, which gives 41 trillions, or 41,000 milliards of kilometers (= 251⁄2 trillion miles). [A milliard = 1,000 millions, the French billion. A trillion = 1,000 milliards, or a million millions, the English billion. The French nomenclature has been retained by the translator.] At a speed of 300,000 kilometers (186,000 miles) per second the light takes four years to come from thence. It is a fine double star.
The nearest star to us is Alpha Centauri, a first-magnitude star and a neighbor of the South Pole, which is not visible from our latitudes. Its distance is 275,000 times the radius of the Earth's orbit, meaning 275,000 times 149 million kilometers, which equals 41 trillion or 41,000 billion kilometers (approximately 25.5 trillion miles). [A billion is 1,000 million in French terminology. A trillion equals 1,000 billion, or a million million, in English. The French naming has been kept by the translator.] At a speed of 300,000 kilometers (186,000 miles) per second, it takes light four years to reach us from there. It’s a beautiful double star.
The next nearest star after this is a little orb invisible to the unaided eye. It has no name, and stands as No. 21,185 in the Catalogue of Lalande. It almost attains the seventh magnitude (6.8). Its distance is 64 trillion kilometers (391⁄2 trillion miles).
The next closest star is a small orb that can't be seen without a telescope. It doesn't have a name and is listed as No. 21,185 in the Lalande Catalogue. It almost reaches the seventh magnitude (6.8). It's located 64 trillion kilometers (391⁄2 trillion miles) away.
The third of which the distance has been measured is the small star in Cygnus, already referred to in Chapter II, in describing the Constellations. Its distance is 69 trillion kilometers (421⁄2 trillion miles). This, too, is a double star. The light takes seven years to reach us.
The third star we've measured the distance to is a small one in Cygnus, mentioned earlier in Chapter II while describing the Constellations. It's 69 trillion kilometers away (421⁄2 trillion miles). This star is also a double star. The light from it takes seven years to reach us.
As we have seen, the fine stars Sirius, Procyon, Aldebaran, Altaïr, Vega, and Capella are more remote.
As we've seen, the bright stars Sirius, Procyon, Aldebaran, Altaïr, Vega, and Capella are farther away.
Our solar system is thus very isolated in the vastness of Infinitude. The latest known planet of our system, Neptune, performs its revolutions in space at 4 milliards, 470 million kilometers (2,771,400,000 miles) from our Sun. Even this is a respectable distance! But beyond this world, an immense gulf, almost a void abyss, extends to the nearest star, α of the Centaur. Between Neptune and Centauris there is no star to cheer the black and cold solitude of the immense vacuum. One or two unknown planets, some wandering comets, and swarms of meteors, doubtless traverse those unknown spaces, but all invisible to us.
Our solar system is really isolated in the vastness of infinity. The farthest known planet in our system, Neptune, orbits at a distance of 4 billion, 470 million kilometers (2,771,400,000 miles) from our Sun. That's already a significant distance! But beyond this planet, there’s a huge gap, almost an empty abyss, that leads to the nearest star, Alpha Centauri. Between Neptune and Centauri, there’s no star to brighten the dark and cold loneliness of the massive void. One or two unknown planets, a few wandering comets, and swarms of meteors definitely move through those unexplored areas, but they're all invisible to us.
Later on we will discuss the methods that have been[Pg 66] employed in measuring these distances. Let us now continue our description.
Later on we will discuss the methods that have been[Pg 66] used to measure these distances. Let’s now continue our description.
Now that we have some notion of the distance of the stars we must approach them with the telescope, and compare them one with another.
Now that we have some idea of how far away the stars are, we need to look at them through a telescope and compare them to each other.
Let us, for example, get close to Sirius: in this star we admire a sun that is several times heavier than our own, and of much greater mass, accompanied by a second sun that revolves round it in fifty years. Its light is exceedingly white, and it notably burns with hydrogen flames, like Vega and Altaïr.
Let’s take a closer look at Sirius: in this star, we see a sun that is several times heavier than our own and much more massive, accompanied by a second sun that orbits it once every fifty years. Its light is extremely white, and it notably shines with hydrogen flames, similar to Vega and Altair.
Now let us approach Arcturus, Capella, Aldebaran: these are yellow stars with golden rays, like our Sun, and the vapor of iron, of sodium, and of many other metals can be identified in their spectrum. These stars are older than the first, and the ruddy ones, such as Antares, Betelgeuse, α of Hercules, are still older; several of them are variable, and are on their way to final extinction.
Now let’s look at Arcturus, Capella, and Aldebaran: these are yellow stars with golden light, similar to our Sun, and we can identify the vapor of iron, sodium, and various other metals in their spectrum. These stars are older than the first ones, and the red stars, like Antares, Betelgeuse, and α of Hercules, are even older; several of them are variable and are nearing their final extinction.
The Heavens afford us a perennial store of treasure, wherein the thinker, poet or artist can find inexhaustible subjects of contemplation.
The heavens offer us a never-ending source of treasure, where thinkers, poets, and artists can find endless topics for reflection.
You have heard of the celestial jewels, the diamonds, rubies, emeralds, sapphires, topazes, and other precious[Pg 67] stones of the sidereal casket. These marvels are met with especially among the double stars.
You’ve heard of the heavenly gems, the diamonds, rubies, emeralds, sapphires, topazes, and other precious[Pg 67] stones from the starry treasure chest. These wonders are particularly found among the double stars.
Our Sun, white and solitary, gives no idea of the real aspect of some of its brothers in Infinitude. There are as many different types as there are suns!
Our Sun, bright and alone, doesn't show the true appearance of some of its countless siblings in the vast universe. There are as many different types as there are stars!
Stars, you will think, are like individuals: each has its distinct characteristics: no two are comparable. And indeed this reflection is justified. While human vanity does homage to Phœbus, divine King of the Heavens, other suns of still greater magnificence form groups of two or three splendid orbs, which roll the prodigious combinations of their double, triple, or multiple systems through space, pouring on to the worlds that accompany them a flood of changing light, now blue, now red, now violet, etc.
Stars, you might think, are like people: each one has its own unique traits, and no two are alike. And this thought is valid. While human pride pays tribute to Phœbus, the divine King of the Heavens, there are other suns of even greater brilliance that form pairs or groups of three stunning orbs, moving the incredible combinations of their double, triple, or multiple systems through space, showering the worlds that orbit them with a cascade of shifting light—sometimes blue, sometimes red, sometimes violet, and so on.
In the inexhaustible variety of Creation there exist Suns that are united in pairs, bound by a common destiny, cradled in the same attraction, and often colored in the most delicate and entrancing shades conceivable. Here will be a dazzling ruby, its glowing color shedding joy; there a deep blue sapphire of tender tone; beyond, the finest emeralds, hue of hope. Diamonds of translucent purity and whiteness sparkle from the abyss, and shed their penetrating light into the vast space. What splendors are scattered broadcast over the sky! what profusion!
In the endless variety of Creation, there are Suns that are paired together, connected by a shared fate, held in the same gravitational pull, and often painted in the most delicate and captivating colors imaginable. Here, a dazzling ruby shines with a joyful glow; there, a soft blue sapphire radiates a gentle tone; further on, the finest emeralds, the color of hope. Diamonds of clear purity and brightness sparkle from the depths, casting their brilliant light into the vast expanse. What splendors are spread across the sky! What abundance!
To the naked eye, the groups appear like ordinary stars, mere luminous points of greater or less brilliancy; but the telescope soon discovers the beauty of these systems; the star is duplicated into two distinct suns, in close proximity. These groups of two or several suns are not merely due to an effect of perspective—i.e., the presence of two or more stars in our line of sight; as a rule they constitute real physical systems, and these suns, associated in a common lot, rotate round one another in a more or less rapid period, that varies for each system.
To the naked eye, the groups look like ordinary stars, just shining points that are brighter or dimmer; but a telescope quickly reveals the beauty of these systems. Each star splits into two separate suns that are close together. These pairs or groups of suns aren’t just an optical illusion—like seeing two or more stars in our line of sight; generally, they are actual physical systems, and these suns, linked by a common fate, orbit around each other at varying speeds, which differ for each system.
One of the most splendid of these double stars, and at the same time one of the easiest to perceive, is ζ in the Great Bear, or Mizar, mentioned above in describing this constellation. It has no contrasting colors, but exactly resembles twin diamonds of the finest water, which fascinate the gaze, even through a small objective.
One of the most impressive of these double stars, and also one of the easiest to see, is ζ in the Great Bear, or Mizar, mentioned earlier when describing this constellation. It doesn't have contrasting colors, but looks just like two identical diamonds of the highest quality, captivating the eye even through a small lens.
Its components are of the second and fourth magnitudes, their distance = 14″[6]. Some idea of their appearance in a small telescope may be obtained from the subjoined figure (Fig. 17).
Its components are of the second and fourth magnitudes, their distance = 14″[6]. You can get an idea of how they look in a small telescope from the figure below (Fig. 17).
Another very brilliant pair is Castor. Magnitudes[Pg 69] second and third. Distance 5.6″. Very easy to observe. γ in the Virgin resolves into two splendid diamonds of third magnitude. Distance, 5.0″. Another double star is γ of the Ram, of fourth magnitude. Distance, 8.9″.
Another very bright pair is Castor. Magnitudes[Pg 69] two and three. Distance 5.6″. Very easy to see. γ in Virgo resolves into two brilliant diamonds of third magnitude. Distance, 5.0″. Another double star is γ in Aries, of fourth magnitude. Distance, 8.9″.

And here are two that are even more curious by reason of their coloring: γ in Andromeda, composed of a fine orange star, and one emerald-green, which again is accompanied by a tiny comrade of the deepest blue. This group in a good telescope is most attractive. Magnitudes, second and fifth. Distance, 10″.
And here are two that are even more interesting because of their colors: γ in Andromeda, which has a beautiful orange star, and one emerald-green star, accompanied by a small companion that is the deepest blue. This group looks really appealing in a good telescope. Magnitudes: second and fifth. Distance: 10″.
β of the Swan, or Albireo, referred to in the last chapter, has been analyzed into two stars: one [Pg 70]golden-yellow, the other sapphire. Magnitudes, third and fifth. Distance, 34″. α of the Greyhounds, known also as the Heart of Charles II, is golden-yellow and lilac. Magnitudes, third and fifth. Distance 20″.[7]
β of the Swan, or Albireo, mentioned in the last chapter, has been found to consist of two stars: one is golden-yellow, and the other is sapphire. Their magnitudes are third and fifth. They are 34″ apart. α of the Greyhounds, also known as the Heart of Charles II, is golden-yellow and lilac. Their magnitudes are third and fifth as well. They are 20″ apart.[7]
α of Hercules revolves a splendid emerald and a ruby in the skies; ζ of the Lyre exhibits a yellow and a green star; Rigel, an electric sun, and a small sapphire; Antares is ruddy and emerald-green; η of Perseus resolves into a burning red star, and one smaller that is deep blue, and so on.
α of Hercules surrounds a beautiful emerald and a ruby in the sky; ζ of the Lyre shows a yellow and a green star; Rigel is a bright blue sun, along with a small sapphire; Antares is reddish and emerald-green; η of Perseus breaks down into a bright red star and a smaller one that is deep blue, and so on.
These exquisite double stars revolve in gracious and splendid couples around one another, as in some majestic valse, marrying their multi-colored fires in the midst of the starry firmament.
These beautiful double stars gracefully and magnificently revolve around each other, like in a grand dance, merging their colorful lights in the expanse of the starry sky.
Here, we constantly receive a pure and dazzling white light from our burning luminary. Its ray, indeed, contains the potentiality of every conceivable color, but picture the fantastic illumination of the worlds that gravitate round these multiple and colored suns as they shed floods of blue and roseate, red, or orange light around them! What a fairy spectacle must life present upon these distant universes!
Here, we constantly receive a bright and shining white light from our glowing star. Its rays actually hold the potential for every imaginable color, but just imagine the incredible light show of the worlds that orbit these varied and colorful suns as they cast waves of blue and pink, red, or orange light around them! What a magical sight life must be in these far-off universes!
Let us suppose that we inhabit a planet illuminated by two suns, one blue, the other red.
Let’s imagine we live on a planet lit by two suns, one blue and the other red.
It is morning. The sapphire sun climbs slowly up the Heavens, coloring the atmosphere with a somber and almost melancholy hue. The blue disk attains the zenith, and is beginning its descent toward the West, when the East lights up with the flames of a scarlet sun, which in its turn ascends the heights of the firmament. The West is plunged in the penumbra of the rays of the blue sun, while the East is illuminated with the purple and burning rays of the ruby orb.
It’s morning. The bright sun rises slowly into the sky, casting a somber and almost melancholy shade over everything. The blue disk reaches its peak and starts its descent toward the West, while the East ignites with the fiery glow of a red sun, which begins to climb higher in the sky. The West is enveloped in the shadows of the blue sun’s rays, while the East is lit up by the warm, purple glow of the red orb.
The first sun is setting when the second noon shines for the inhabitants of this strange world. But the red sun, too, accomplishes the law of its destiny. Hardly has it disappeared in the conflagration of its last rays, with which the West is flushed, when the blue orb reappears on the opposite side, shedding a pale azure light upon the world it illuminates, which knows no night. And thus these two suns fraternize in the Heavens over the common task of renewing a thousand effects of extra-terrestrial light for the globes that are subject to their variations.
The first sun is setting as the second noon shines for the people in this strange world. But the red sun, too, fulfills its destiny. Just as it disappears in the blaze of its last rays, which paint the West, the blue orb reappears on the opposite side, casting a soft blue light on the world it brightens, which knows no night. And so, these two suns work together in the sky, sharing the job of renewing countless effects of otherworldly light for the planets that experience their changes.
Scarlet, indigo, green, and golden suns; pearly and multi-colored Moons; are these not fairy visions, dazzling to our poor sight, condemned while here below to see and know but one white Sun?
Scarlet, indigo, green, and golden suns; pearl and multi-colored moons; aren't these just fairy-tale visions, mesmerizing to our limited sight, stuck here below only able to see and know one white sun?
As we have learned, there are not only double, but triple, and also multiple stars. One of the finest ternary systems is that of γ in Andromeda, above mentioned. Its large star is orange, its second green, its third blue, but the two last are in close juxtaposition, and a powerful telescope is needed to separate them. A triple star more easy to observe is ζ of Cancer, composed of three orbs of fifth magnitude, at a distance of 1″ and 5″; the first two revolve round their common center of gravity in fifty-nine years, the third takes over three hundred years. The preceding figure shows this system in a fairly powerful objective (Fig. 18).
As we have learned, there are not just double stars, but also triple and multiple star systems. One of the best-known triple systems is γ in Andromeda, which we mentioned earlier. Its largest star is orange, the second is green, and the third is blue, but the last two are very close together, and a powerful telescope is needed to distinguish them. A triple star that's easier to observe is ζ in Cancer, made up of three stars of the fifth magnitude, at distances of 1″ and 5″; the first two orbit their common center of gravity in fifty-nine years, while the third takes over three hundred years. The preceding figure shows this system using a fairly powerful telescope (Fig. 18).

In the Lyre, a little above the dazzling Vega, ε is of fourth magnitude, which seems a little elongated to the unaided eye, and can even be analyzed into two contiguous stars by very sharp sight. But on examining this attractive pair with a small glass, it is further obvious that each of these stars is double; so that they form a splendid quadruple system of two couples (Fig. 19): one of fifth and a half and sixth magnitudes, at a distance of 2.4″, the other of sixth and seventh, 3.2″ distant. The distance between the two pairs is 207″.
In the Lyre, just above the bright Vega, epsilon is a fourth magnitude star that appears slightly elongated to the naked eye and can even be seen as two close stars by someone with very sharp vision. However, when examining this attractive pair with a small telescope, it's clear that each of these stars is actually double; together, they form a stunning quadruple system of two pairs (Fig. 19): one pair is fifth and a half and sixth magnitudes, at a distance of 2.4″, while the other pair is sixth and seventh, 3.2″ apart. The distance between the two pairs is 207″.

In speaking of Orion, we referred to the marvelous star θ situated in the no less famous Nebula, below[Pg 74] the Belt; this star forms a dazzling sextuple system, in the very heart of the nebula (Fig. 20). How different to our Sun, sailing through Space in modest isolation!
In talking about Orion, we mentioned the amazing star θ located in the well-known Nebula, below[Pg 74] the Belt; this star is part of a stunning sextuple system, right in the center of the nebula (Fig. 20). It's so different from our Sun, drifting through Space in quiet solitude!
Be it noted that all these stars are animated by prodigious motions that impel them in every direction.
It should be noted that all these stars are moving with incredible speed, pushing them in every direction.

There are no fixed stars. On every side throughout Infinity, the burning suns—enormous globes, blazing centers of light and heat—are flying at giddy speed toward an unknown goal, traversing millions of miles each day, crossing century by century such vast spaces as are inconceivable to the human intellect.
There are no fixed stars. All around in Infinity, the blazing suns—huge balls of light and heat—are racing at incredible speeds toward an unknown destination, traveling millions of miles each day, crossing vast distances over centuries that are unimaginable to the human mind.
If the stars appear motionless to us, it is because they are so remote, their secular movements being only manifested on the celestial sphere by imperceptible displacements. But in reality these suns are in perpetual commotion in the abysses of the Heavens, which they quicken with an extraordinary animation.
If the stars look still to us, it's because they are so far away, their age-old movements only showing up as tiny shifts on the night sky. But in reality, these suns are constantly moving within the depths of the universe, bringing it to life with incredible energy.
These perpetual and cumulative motions must eventually modify the aspect of the Constellations: but these changes will only take effect very slowly; and for thousands and thousands of years longer the heroes and heroines of mythology will keep their respective places in the Heavens, and reign undisturbed beneath the starry vault.
These ongoing and gradual movements will eventually alter the appearance of the constellations: however, these changes will occur very slowly; and for thousands and thousands of years more, the heroes and heroines of mythology will maintain their respective positions in the sky, reigning undisturbed beneath the starry canopy.
Examination of these star motions reveals the fact that our Sun is plunging with all his system (the Earth included) toward the Constellation of Hercules. We are changing our position every moment: in an hour we shall be 70,000 kilometers (43,500 miles) farther than we are at present. The Sun and the Earth will never again traverse the space they have just left, and which they have deserted forever.
Examining these star movements shows that our Sun, along with its entire system (including Earth), is heading towards the Constellation of Hercules. Our location is shifting every moment: in just an hour, we will be 70,000 kilometers (43,500 miles) farther away than we are now. The Sun and the Earth will never travel through the space they just left, which they have abandoned for good.
And here let us pause for an instant to consider the variable stars. Our Sun, which is constant and uniform in its light, does not set the type of all the stars. A great number of them are variable—either periodically, in regular cycles—or irregularly.
And here let's take a moment to think about the variable stars. Our Sun, which gives off a steady and uniform light, doesn't represent all stars. Many of them are variable—sometimes in regular cycles or sometimes unpredictably.
We are already acquainted with the variations of Algol, in Perseus, due to its partial eclipse by a dark globe gravitating in the line of our vision. There are several others of the same type: these are not, properly speaking, variable stars. But there are many others the intrinsic light of which undergoes actual variations.
We’re already familiar with the different versions of Algol in Perseus, caused by its partial eclipse by a dark object moving across our line of sight. There are several others like it: these aren’t exactly variable stars. But there are many others whose inherent brightness actually changes.
In order to realize this, let us imagine that our Earth belongs to such a sun, for example, to a star in the southern constellation of the Whale, indicated by the letter ο, which has been named the "wonderful" (Mira Ceti). Our new sun is shining to-day with a dazzling light, shedding the gladness of his joyous beams upon nature and in our hearts. For two months we admire the superb orb, sparkling in the azure illuminated with its radiance. Then of a sudden, its light fades, and diminishes in intensity, though the sky remains clear. Imperceptibly, our fine sun darkens; the atmosphere becomes sad and dull, there is an anticipation of universal death. For five long months our world is plunged in a kind of penumbra; all nature is saddened in the general woe.
To understand this, let’s picture that our Earth is orbiting a sun, for instance, a star in the southern constellation of the Whale, marked by the letter ο, known as the "wonderful" (Mira Ceti). Our new sun is shining brightly today, spreading joy with its radiant beams across nature and into our hearts. For two months, we marvel at this magnificent orb, sparkling in the blue sky lit up by its glow. Then suddenly, its light starts to fade and lose intensity, even though the sky stays clear. Gradually, our brilliant sun dims; the atmosphere feels gloomy and lifeless, creating a sense of impending doom. For five long months, our world is cast into a sort of twilight; all of nature shares in this collective sorrow.
But while we are bewailing the cruelty of our lot, our cherished luminary revives. The intensity of its light increases slowly. Its brilliancy augments, and finally, at the end of three months, it has recovered its former splendors, and showers its bright beams upon our[Pg 77] world, flooding it with joy. But—we must not rejoice too quickly! This splendid blaze will not endure. The flaming star will pale once more; fade back to its minimum; and then again revive. Such is the nature of this capricious sun. It varies in three hundred and thirty-one days, and from yellow at the maximum, turns red at the minimum. This star, Mira Ceti, which is one of the most curious of its type, varies from the second to the ninth magnitudes: we cite it as one example; hundreds of others might be instanced.
But while we’re mourning the harshness of our situation, our beloved star comes back to life. The brightness of its light increases slowly. Its brilliance grows, and finally, after three months, it regains its former glory, casting its bright rays over our[Pg 77] world, filling it with joy. However—we shouldn’t celebrate too soon! This gorgeous light won’t last. The shining star will fade again; return to its lowest point; and then rise once more. Such is the nature of this unpredictable star. It cycles over three hundred and thirty-one days, changing from yellow at its peak to red at its lowest. This star, Mira Ceti, one of the most fascinating of its kind, fluctuates between the second and ninth magnitudes: we mention it as one example; many others could be named.
Thus the sky is no black curtain dotted with brilliant points, no empty desert, silent and monotonous. It is a prodigious theater on which the most fantastic plays are continually being acted. Only—there are no spectators.
Thus the sky is not a black curtain sprinkled with bright stars, nor is it a deserted, silent, and dull expanse. It is an incredible stage where the most imaginative performances are constantly taking place. Only—there are no audience members.
Again, we must note the temporary stars, which shine for a certain time, and then die out rapidly. Such was the star in Cassiopeia, in 1572, the light of which exceeded Sirius in its visibility in full daylight, burning for five months with unparalleled splendor, dominating all other stars of first magnitude; after which it died out gradually, disappearing at the end of seventeen months, to the terror of the peoples, who saw in it the harbinger of the world's end: that of 1604, in the Constellation of the Serpent, which shone for a year; of 1866, of second magnitude, in the Northern Crown,[Pg 78] which appeared for a few weeks only; of 1876, in the Swan; of 1885, in the Nebula of Andromeda; of 1891, in the Charioteer; and quite recently, of 1901, in Perseus.
Again, we must note the temporary stars, which shine for a certain time and then quickly fade away. Such was the star in Cassiopeia in 1572, whose brightness outshone Sirius and was visible even during the daytime, burning for five months with unmatched brilliance, overshadowing all other first-magnitude stars; after which it gradually faded away, disappearing after seventeen months, causing fear among the people, who saw it as a sign of the world’s end: that of 1604, in the Constellation of the Serpent, which shone for a year; of 1866, a second-magnitude star, in the Northern Crown,[Pg 78] which appeared for only a few weeks; of 1876, in the Swan; of 1885, in the Nebula of Andromeda; of 1891, in the Charioteer; and most recently, of 1901, in Perseus.
These temporary stars, which appear spontaneously to the observers on the Earth, and quickly vanish again, are doubtless due to collisions, conflagrations, or celestial cataclysms. But we only see them long after the epoch at which the phenomena occurred, years upon years, and centuries ago. For instance, the conflagration photographed by the author in 1901, in Perseus, must have occurred in the time of Queen Elizabeth. It has taken all this time for the rays of light to reach us.
These temporary stars, which suddenly show up for observers on Earth and quickly disappear, are certainly caused by collisions, explosions, or cosmic disasters. But we see them only long after the events actually happened, many years, even centuries later. For example, the explosion captured by the author in 1901 in Perseus must have happened during the time of Queen Elizabeth. It has taken all this time for the light from that event to reach us.
The Heavens are full of surprises, on which we can bestow but a fleeting glance within these limits. They present a field of infinite variety.
The skies are full of surprises, which we can only catch a brief glimpse of within these limits. They offer a landscape of endless variety.
Who has not noticed the Milky Way, the pale belt that traverses the entire firmament and is so luminous on clear evenings in the Constellations of the Swan and the Lyre? It is indeed a swarm of stars. Each is individually too small to excite our retina, but as a whole, curiously enough, they are perfectly visible. With opera-glasses we divine the starry constitution: a small telescope shows us marvels. Eighteen millions of stars were counted there with the gauges of William Herschel.
Who hasn't seen the Milky Way, the faint band that stretches across the sky and shines so brightly on clear nights in the constellations of Cygnus and Lyra? It's truly a swarm of stars. Each one is too small individually to capture our attention, but together, they stand out remarkably. With binoculars, we can make out the starry structure: a small telescope reveals amazing details. Eighteen million stars were counted there using the instruments of William Herschel.
Now this Milky Way is a symbol, not of the Universe,[Pg 79] but of the Universes that succeed each other through the vast spaces to Infinity.
Now this Milky Way is a symbol, not of the Universe,[Pg 79] but of the Universes that follow one after another through the vast spaces to Infinity.
Our Sun is a star of the Milky Way. It surrounds us like a great circle, and if the Earth were transparent, we should see it pass beneath our feet as well as over our heads. It consists of a very considerable mass of star-clusters, varying greatly in extent and number, some projected in front of others, while the whole forms an agglomeration.
Our Sun is a star in the Milky Way. It surrounds us like a huge circle, and if the Earth were see-through, we would see it move beneath our feet as well as above our heads. It is made up of a significant amount of star clusters, which vary widely in size and number, with some positioned in front of others, all coming together to form a large mass.

Among this mass of star-groups, several thousands of which are already known to us, we will select one of the most curious, the Cluster in Hercules, which can be[Pg 80] distinguished with the unaided eye, between the stars η and ζ of that constellation. Many photographs of it have been taken in the author's observatory at Juvisy, showing some thousands of stars; and one of these is reproduced in the accompanying figure (Fig. 21). Is it not a veritable universe?
Among this vast collection of star groups, several thousand of which we already know, let's focus on one of the most interesting: the Cluster in Hercules. This can be[Pg 80] seen with the naked eye, located between the stars η and ζ in that constellation. Many photographs of it have been taken in the author's observatory at Juvisy, capturing thousands of stars; one of these is shown in the accompanying figure (Fig. 21). Isn’t it a true universe?

Another of the most beautiful, on account of its regularity, is that of the Centaur (Fig. 22).
Another one of the most beautiful, due to its symmetry, is that of the Centaur (Fig. 22).
These groups often assume the most extraordinary shapes in the telescope, such as crowns, fishes, crabs, open mouths, birds with outspread wings, etc.
These groups often take on the most amazing shapes in the telescope, like crowns, fish, crabs, open mouths, birds with outstretched wings, and more.
We must also note the gaseous nebulæ, universes in[Pg 81] the making, e.g., the famous Nebula in Orion, of which we obtained some notion a while ago in connection with its sextuple star: and also that in Andromeda (Fig. 23).
We also need to mention the gaseous nebulas, universes in[Pg 81] the process of formation, e.g., the well-known Nebula in Orion, which we learned about previously regarding its sextuple star; and also the one in Andromeda (Fig. 23).


Perhaps the most marvelous of all is that of the Greyhounds, which evolves in gigantic spirals round a dazzling focus, and then loses itself far off in the recesses of space. Fig. 24 gives a picture of it.
Perhaps the most amazing of all is the one of the Greyhounds, which spirals in huge loops around a brilliant center, and then disappears far away into the depths of space. Fig. 24 gives a picture of it.

Without going thus far, and penetrating into telescopic depths, my readers can get some notion of these star-clusters with the help of a small telescope or opera-glasses, or even with the unaided eye, by looking at the beautiful group of the Pleiades, already familiar to us on another page, and using it as a test of vision. The little map subjoined (Fig. 25) will be an assistance in recognizing them, and in estimating their magnitudes, which are in the following order:
Without going this far and delving into detailed observations, my readers can get an idea of these star clusters with a small telescope, binoculars, or even just their eyes by looking at the stunning group of the Pleiades, which we've already discussed on another page, and using it as a way to test their vision. The small map below (Fig. 25) will help in identifying them and judging their sizes, which are in the following order:
Alcyone | 3.0. |
Electra | 4.5. |
Atlas | 4.6. |
Maia | 5.0. |
Merope | 5.5. |
Taygeta | 5.8. |
Pleione | 6.3. |
Celæno | 6.5. |
Asterope | 6.8. |
Good eyes distinguish the first six, sharp sight detects the three others.
Good eyes identify the first six, and sharp vision spots the other three.
In the times of the ancient Greeks, seven were accounted of equal brilliancy, and the poets related that the seventh star had fled at the time of the Trojan War. Ovid adds that she was mortified at not being embraced by a god, as were her six sisters. It is probable that only the best sight could then distinguish Pleione, as in our own day. The angular distance from Atlas to Pleione is 5′.
In ancient Greek times, seven stars were considered equally brilliant, and poets said the seventh star disappeared during the Trojan War. Ovid mentioned that she was upset for not being embraced by a god like her six sisters. It's likely that only the best eyesight could spot Pleione back then, just like today. The angular distance from Atlas to Pleione is 5′.
The length of this republic, from Atlas and Pleione to Celæno, is 4′/23″ of time, or 1°6′ of arc; the breadth, from Merope to Asterope, is 36′.[8]
The length of this republic, from Atlas and Pleione to Celæno, is 4′/23″ of time, or 1°6′ of arc; the breadth, from Merope to Asterope, is 36′.[8]
In the quadrilateral, the length from Alcyone to Electra is 36′, and the breadth from Merope to Maia 25′. To us it appears as though, if the Full Moon were placed in front of this group of nine stars, she would cover it entirely, for to the naked eye she appears much larger than all the Pleiades together. But this is not so. She only measures 31′, less than half the distance from Atlas to Celæno; she is hardly broader than the distance[Pg 85] from Alcyone to Atlas, and could pass between Merope and Taygeta without touching either of these stars. This is a perennial and very curious optical illusion. When the Moon passes in front of the Pleiades, and occults them successively, it is hard to believe one's eyes. The fact occurred, e.g., on July 23, 1897, during a fine occultation observed at the author's laboratory of Juvisy (Fig. 26).
In the quadrilateral, the distance from Alcyone to Electra is 36′, and the width from Merope to Maia is 25′. It seems that if the Full Moon were placed in front of this group of nine stars, it would completely cover them, since to the naked eye, it looks much larger than all the Pleiades combined. But that’s not true. The Moon measures only 31′, which is less than half the distance from Atlas to Celæno; it is barely wider than the distance[Pg 85] from Alcyone to Atlas, and it could fit between Merope and Taygeta without touching either star. This is a long-lasting and fascinating optical illusion. When the Moon passes in front of the Pleiades and obscures them one by one, it’s hard to believe what you’re seeing. This happened, e.g., on July 23, 1897, during a clear occultation observed at the author's laboratory in Juvisy (Fig. 26).

Photography here discovers to us, not 6, 9, 12, 15, or 20 stars, but hundreds and millions.
Photography here shows us not 6, 9, 12, 15, or 20 stars, but hundreds of millions.
These are the most brilliant flowers of the celestial garden.
These are the brightest flowers of the heavenly garden.

We, alas, can but glance at them rapidly. In contemplating them we are transported into immensities both of space and time, for the stellar periods measured by these distant universes often overpower in their magnitude the rapid years in which our terrestrial days are estimated. For instance, one of the double stars we spoke of above, γ of the Virgin, sees its two components, translucent diamonds, revolve around their common center of gravity, in one hundred and eighty years. How many events took place in France, let us say, in a single year of this star!—The Regency, Louis XV, Louis XVI, the Revolution, Napoleon, Louis XVIII, Louis[Pg 87] Philippe, the Second Republic, Napoleon III, the Franco-German War, the Third Republic.... What revolutions here, during a single year of this radiant pair! (Fig. 27.)
We can only quickly glance at them. When we think about them, we’re taken into vast expanses of both space and time, because the ages of these distant galaxies often dwarf the few years that define our earthly existence. For example, one of the double stars we mentioned earlier, γ of the Virgin, has its two components, like translucent diamonds, orbiting around their common center of gravity over the course of one hundred and eighty years. Just think about how many significant events occurred in France, for instance, during just one year of this star’s existence!—The Regency, Louis XV, Louis XVI, the Revolution, Napoleon, Louis XVIII, Louis[Pg 87] Philippe, the Second Republic, Napoleon III, the Franco-German War, the Third Republic.... So many revolutions right here, during a single year of this shining pair! (Fig. 27.)
But the pageant of the Heavens is too vast, too overwhelming. We must end our survey.
But the spectacle of the Heavens is too vast, too overwhelming. We must end our exploration.
Our Milky Way, with its millions of stars, represents for us only a portion of the Creation. The illimitable abysses of Infinitude are peopled by other universes as vast, as imposing, as our own, which are renewed in all directions through the depths of Space to endless distance. Where is our little Earth? Where our Solar System? We are fain to fold our wings, and return from the Immense and Infinite to our floating island.
Our Milky Way, with its millions of stars, is just a small part of Creation. The endless depths of Infinitude are filled with other galaxies that are as vast and awe-inspiring as ours, stretching in all directions through the depths of Space for countless distances. Where is our tiny Earth? Where is our Solar System? We’re eager to fold our wings and return from the Immense and Infinite back to our little floating island.
CHAPTER IV
OUR STAR THE SUN
In the incessant agitation of daily life in which we are involved by the thousand superfluous wants of modern "civilization," one is prone to assume that existence is complete only when it reckons to the good an incalculable number of petty incidents, each more insignificant than the last. Why lose time in thinking or dreaming? We must live at fever heat, must agitate, and be infatuated for inanities, must create imaginary desires and torments.
In the constant busyness of daily life, driven by the countless unnecessary demands of modern "civilization," it's easy to believe that life is only fulfilling when it includes a huge number of trivial moments, each more unimportant than the one before. Why waste time thinking or daydreaming? We have to live in a frenzy, get excited, and obsess over trivial things, creating fake desires and pains.
The thoughtful mind, prone to contemplation and admiration of the beauties of Nature, is ill at ease in this perpetual vortex that swallows everything—satisfaction, in a life that one has not time to relish; love of the beautiful, that one views with indifference; it is a whirlpool that perpetually hides Truth from us, forgotten forever at the bottom of her well.
The reflective mind, inclined to ponder and appreciate the beauty of Nature, feels uneasy in this constant whirlwind that consumes everything—contentment in a life that one doesn't have time to enjoy; appreciation for beauty, seen with apathy; it's a whirlpool that continually obscures Truth from us, lost forever at the bottom of her well.
And why are our lives thus absorbed in merely material interests? To satisfy our pride and vanity! To make ourselves slaves to chimeras! If the Moon[Pg 89] were inhabited, and if her denizens could see us plainly enough to note and analyze the details of human existence on the surface of our planet, it would be curious and perhaps a little humiliating for us, to see their statistics. What! we should say, is this the sum of our lives? Is it for this that we struggle, and suffer, and die? Truly it is futile to give ourselves such trouble.
And why are our lives so consumed by just material interests? To satisfy our pride and vanity! To make ourselves slaves to illusions! If the Moon[Pg 89] were inhabited, and if its inhabitants could see and analyze the details of human life here on Earth, it would be both interesting and a bit embarrassing for us to see their statistics. What! we might say, is this really the sum of our lives? Is it for this that we struggle, suffer, and die? Honestly, it seems pointless to put ourselves through all this.
And yet the remedy is simple, within the power of every one; but one does not think of it just because it is too easy, although it has the immense advantage of lifting us out of the miseries of this weary world toward the inexpressible happiness that must always awaken in us with the knowledge of the Truth: we need only open our eyes to see, and to look out. Only—one hardly ever thinks of it, and it is easier to let one's self be blinded by the illusion and false glamor of appearances.
And yet the solution is straightforward, within everyone’s reach; but people often overlook it because it’s too easy, even though it has the huge benefit of lifting us out of the struggles of this exhausting world toward the indescribable joy that comes from understanding the Truth: we just need to open our eyes and look around. Only—people rarely think of it, and it’s easier to let themselves be deceived by the illusion and false allure of appearances.
Think what it would be to consecrate an hour each day to voluntary participation in the harmonious Choir of Nature, to raise one's eyes toward the Heavens, to share the lessons taught by the Pageant of the Universe! But, no: there is no time, no time for the intellectual life, no time to become attached to real interests, no time to pursue them.
Think about what it would be like to dedicate an hour each day to willingly joining the beautiful Choir of Nature, to lift your eyes to the Heavens, to learn from the display of the Universe! But, no: there’s no time, no time for intellectual pursuits, no time to connect with genuine interests, no time to chase after them.
Among the objects marshaled for us in the immense spectacle of Nature, nothing without exception has[Pg 90] struck the admiration and attention of man as much as the Sun, the God of Light, the fecundating orb, without which our planet and its life would never have issued from nonentity, the visible image of the invisible god, as said Cicero, and the poets of antiquity. And yet how many beyond the circle of those likely to read these pages know that this Sun is a star in the Milky Way, and that every star is a sun? How many take any account of the reality and grandeur of the Universe? Inquire, and you will find that the number of people who have any notion, however rudimentary, of its construction, is singularly restricted. Humanity is content to vegetate, much after the fashion of a race of moles.
Among the objects presented to us in the vast show of Nature, nothing has[Pg 90] captured the admiration and attention of people as much as the Sun, the God of Light, the life-giving orb, without which our planet and its life would never have emerged from nothingness, the visible image of the invisible god, as Cicero and the poets of ancient times said. And yet, how many beyond the group likely to read these pages know that this Sun is a star in the Milky Way and that every star is a sun? How many consider the reality and grandeur of the Universe? Ask around, and you’ll find that the number of people with even a basic understanding of its structure is incredibly limited. Humanity tends to exist much like a race of moles.
Henceforward, you will know that you are living in the rays of a star, which, from its proximity, we term a sun. To the inhabitants of other systems of worlds, our splendid Sun is only a more or less brilliant, luminous point, according as the spot from which it is observed is nearer or farther off. But to us its "terrestrial" importance renders it particularly precious; we forget all the sister stars on its account, and even the most ignorant hail it with enthusiasm without exactly knowing what its rôle in the universe may be, simply because they feel that they depend on it, and that without it life would become extinct on this globe. Yes, it is the[Pg 91] beneficent rays of the Sun that shed upon our Earth the floods of light and heat to which Life owes its existence and its perpetual propagation.
From now on, you'll understand that you're living in the light of a star, which we call the sun because it's so close to us. To people from other worlds, our beautiful Sun appears as a bright dot that varies in intensity based on how far away it is. But to us, its importance makes it incredibly valuable; we tend to overlook all the other stars because of it. Even those who know little about it celebrate it enthusiastically, even if they don't fully grasp its role in the universe, simply because they sense their dependence on it and know that life would not survive on this planet without it. Yes, it is the[Pg 91] life-giving rays of the Sun that provide our Earth with the light and heat essential for Life to exist and thrive.
Hail, vast Sun! a little star in Infinitude, but for us a colossal and portentous luminary. Hail, divine Benefactor! How should we not adore, when we owe him the glow of the warm and cheery days of summer, the gentle caresses by which his rays touch the undulating ears, and gild them with the touch? The Sun sustains our globe in Space, and keeps it within his rays by the mysteriously powerful and delicate cords of attraction. It is the Sun that we inhale from the embalmed corollas of the flowers that uplift their gracious heads toward his light, and reflect his splendors back to us. It is the Sun that sparkles in the foam of the merry wine; that charms our gaze in those first days of spring, when the home of the human race is adorned with all the charms of verdant and flowering youth. Everywhere we find the Sun; everywhere we recognize his work, extending from the infinitely great to the infinitely little. We bow to his might, and admire his power. When in the sad winter day he disappears behind the snowy eaves, we think his fiery globe will never rise to mitigate the short December days which are alleviated with his languid beams.
Hail, vast Sun! a tiny star in the endless universe, but for us a huge and significant light. Hail, divine Benefactor! How could we not worship you, when we owe you the warmth and joy of summer days, the gentle way your rays touch the swaying grass, and brighten it with your light? The Sun holds our planet in space and keeps it within your rays through mysteriously powerful and delicate forces of attraction. It’s from the flowers, which lift their lovely heads towards your light and reflect your brilliance back to us, that we breathe in your essence. It’s the Sun that sparkles in the bubbles of our happy wine; that captures our attention in those early spring days, when humanity’s home is decorated with all the beauty of lush greenery and blooming youth. Everywhere we find the Sun; we see your influence, reaching from the incredibly vast to the incredibly small. We bow to your strength and admire your power. On those gloomy winter days when you disappear behind the snowy roofs, we worry that your fiery globe will never rise again to ease the short December days that are barely brightened by your weak rays.
April restores him to superb majesty, and our hearts[Pg 92] are filled with hope in the illumination of those beauteous, sunny hours.
April brings him back to his glorious self, and our hearts[Pg 92] are filled with hope in the light of those beautiful, sunny moments.
Our celestial journey carried us far indeed from our own Solar System. Guided by the penetrating eye of the telescope, we reached such distant creations that we lost sight of our cherished luminary.
Our journey through space took us far away from our own Solar System. With the powerful gaze of the telescope guiding us, we reached such distant places that we lost sight of our beloved star.
But we remember that he burns yonder, in the midst of the pale cosmic cloud we term the Milky Way. Let us approach him, now that we have visited the Isles of Light in the Celestial Ocean; let us traverse the vast plains strewn with the burning gold of the Suns of the Infinite.
But we remember that he burns over there, in the midst of the pale cosmic cloud we call the Milky Way. Let's get closer to him, now that we have explored the Isles of Light in the Celestial Ocean; let's cross the vast plains scattered with the burning gold of the Suns of the Infinite.
We embark upon a ray of light, and glide rapidly to the portals of our Universe. Soon we perceive a tiny speck, scintillating feebly in the depths of Space, and recognize it as our own celestial quarters. This little star shines like the head of a gold pin, and increases in size as we advance toward it. We traverse a few more trillion miles in our rapid course, and it shines out like a fine star of the first magnitude. It grows larger and larger. Soon we divine that it is our humble Earth that is shining before us, and gladly alight upon her. In future we shall not quit our own province of the Celestial Kingdom, but will enter into[Pg 93] relations with this solar family, which interests us the more in that it affects us so closely.
We set off on a beam of light and quickly glide toward the entrances of our Universe. Soon we see a tiny dot flickering dimly in the vastness of Space, recognizing it as our own home. This little star shines like the head of a gold pin and gets bigger as we move closer. We travel a few more trillion miles on our swift path, and it shines like a bright star of the first magnitude. It keeps growing larger. Soon we realize that it is our humble Earth glowing before us, and we happily land on it. From now on, we won't leave our own part of the Celestial Kingdom, but will engage with this solar family, which interests us even more because it affects us so closely.[Pg 93]

The Sun, which is manifested to us as a fine white disk at noon, while it is fiery red in the evening, at its setting, is an immense globe, whose colossal dimensions[Pg 94] surpass those of our terrestrial atom beyond all conceivable proportion.
The Sun, which appears to us as a bright white disk at noon and turns fiery red in the evening as it sets, is a massive sphere, whose enormous size[Pg 94] far exceeds that of our tiny planet in every imaginable way.
In diameter, it is, in effect, 1081⁄2 times as large as the Earth; that is to say, if our planet be represented by a globe 1 meter in diameter, the Sun would figure as a sphere 1081⁄2 meters across. This is shown on the accompanying figure (Fig. 28), which is in exact proportion.
In diameter, it is actually 1081⁄2 times larger than the Earth; meaning if our planet were represented by a globe that's 1 meter in diameter, the Sun would be depicted as a sphere 1081⁄2 meters wide. This is illustrated in the accompanying figure (Fig. 28), which is to scale.
If our world were set down upon the Sun, with all its magnificence, all its wealth, its mountains, its seas, its monuments, and its inhabitants, it would only be an imperceptible speck. It would occupy less space in the central orb than one grain in a grenade. If the Earth were placed in the center of the Sun, with the Moon still revolving round it at her proper distance of 384,000 kilometers (238,500 miles), only half the solar surface would be covered.
If our world were placed on the Sun, with all its beauty, all its riches, its mountains, its oceans, its landmarks, and its people, it would just be a tiny dot. It would take up less space on the Sun than a grain of sand in a grenade. If the Earth were in the center of the Sun, with the Moon still orbiting it at its usual distance of 384,000 kilometers (238,500 miles), only half of the Sun's surface would be covered.
In volume the Sun is 1,280,000 times vaster than our abode, and 324,000 times heavier in mass. That the giant only appears to us as a small though very brilliant disk, is solely on account of its distance. Its apparent dimensions by no means reveal its majestic proportions to us.
In volume, the Sun is 1,280,000 times larger than our home and 324,000 times heavier in mass. The reason it looks like a small but very bright disk to us is entirely due to its distance. Its apparent size doesn’t show us its true massive proportions.
When observed with astronomical instruments, or photographed, we discover that its surface is not smooth, as might be supposed, but granulated, presenting a[Pg 95] number of luminous points dispersed over a more somber background. These granulations are somewhat like the pores of a fruit, e.g., a fine orange, the color of which recalls the hue of the Sun when it sinks in the evening, and prepares to plunge us into darkness. At times these pores open under the influence of disturbances that arise upon the solar surface, and give birth to a Sun-Spot. For centuries scientists and lay people alike refused to admit the existence of these spots, regarding them as so many blemishes upon the King of the Heavens. Was not the Sun the emblem of inviolable purity? To find any defect in him were to do him grievous injury. Since the orb of day was incorruptible, those who threw doubt on his immaculate splendor were fools and idiots. And so when Scheiner, one of the first who studied the solar spots with the telescope, published the result of his experiments in 1610, no one would believe his statements.
When we observe it with telescopes or take photographs, we find that its surface isn’t smooth as you might think, but rather granulated, displaying a[Pg 95] number of bright spots scattered over a darker background. These granulations are somewhat like the pores of a fruit, like a fine orange, which reminds us of the Sun’s color when it sets in the evening and prepares to plunge us into darkness. Sometimes these pores open up due to disturbances on the solar surface, leading to the formation of a Sun-Spot. For centuries, both scientists and everyday people refused to accept the existence of these spots, viewing them as blemishes on the King of the Heavens. Wasn’t the Sun a symbol of pure perfection? To find any flaw in it would be a serious offense. Since the daytime star was considered incorruptible, anyone who doubted its pristine brilliance was seen as foolish. So when Scheiner, one of the first to study the solar spots with a telescope, published his findings in 1610, no one believed him.
Yet, from the observations of Galileo and other astronomers, it became necessary to accept the evidence, and stranger still to recognize that it is by these very spots that we are enabled to study the physical constitution of the Sun.
Yet, from the observations of Galileo and other astronomers, it became necessary to accept the evidence, and even more surprising to realize that it is through these very spots that we can study the physical structure of the Sun.
They are generally rounded or oval in shape, and exhibit two distinct parts; first, the central portion, which is black, and is called the nucleus, or umbra; second,[Pg 96] a clearer region, half shaded, which has received the name of penumbra. These parts are sharply defined in outline; the penumbra is gray, the nucleus looks black in relation to the dazzling brilliancy of the solar surface; but as a matter of fact it radiates a light 2,000 times superior in intensity to that of the full moon.
They are usually rounded or oval in shape and consist of two distinct parts: first, the central area, which is black and is called the nucleus or umbra; second, [Pg 96] a lighter region that is partially shaded, known as the penumbra. These parts are clearly defined in outline; the penumbra appears gray, while the nucleus looks black compared to the bright brilliance of the sun's surface. However, in reality, it radiates light that is 2,000 times more intense than that of a full moon.

Some idea of the aspect of these spots may be obtained from the accompanying reproduction of a photograph of the Sun (taken September 8, 1898, at the[Pg 97] author's observatory at Juvisy), and from the detailed drawing of the large spot that broke out some days later (September 13), crossed by a bridge, and furrowed with flames. As a rule, the spots undergo rapid transformations.
Some idea of what these spots look like can be gathered from the accompanying reproduction of a photograph of the Sun (taken September 8, 1898, at the[Pg 97] author's observatory in Juvisy), and from the detailed drawing of the large spot that appeared a few days later (September 13), crossed by a bridge and filled with flames. Generally, the spots change quickly.

These spots, which appear of insignificant dimensions[Pg 98] to the observers on the Earth, are in reality absolutely gigantic. Some that have been measured are ten times as large as the Earth's diameter, i.e., 120,000 kilometers (74,500 miles).
These spots, which seem to be tiny[Pg 98] to people on Earth, are actually massive. Some that have been measured are ten times bigger than the Earth's diameter, meaning 120,000 kilometers (74,500 miles).
Sometimes the spots are so large that they can be seen with the unaided eye (protected with black or dark-blue glasses). They are not formed instantaneously, but are heralded by a vast commotion on the solar surface, exhibiting, as it were, luminous waves or faculæ. Out of this agitation arises a little spot, that is usually round, and enlarges progressively to reach a maximum, after which it diminishes, with frequent segmentation and shrinkage. Some are visible only for a few days; others last for months. Some appear, only to be instantly swallowed in the boiling turmoil of the flaming orb. Sometimes, again, white incandescent waves emerge, and seem to throw luminous bridges across the central umbra. As a rule the spots are not very profound. They are funnel-shaped depressions, inferior in depth to the diameter of the Earth, which, as we have seen, is 108 times smaller than that of the Sun.
Sometimes the spots are so large that they can be seen with the naked eye (wearing black or dark-blue glasses). They don't form instantly but are announced by a huge disturbance on the solar surface, showing what looks like luminous waves or faculæ. From this agitation, a small spot usually forms, which is typically round, and grows gradually to reach a maximum size, after which it shrinks, often splitting and getting smaller. Some are visible for only a few days; others can last for months. Some appear only to be immediately engulfed in the boiling activity of the fiery orb. Occasionally, bright, glowing waves emerge and seem to create luminous bridges across the central dark area. Generally, the spots aren't very deep. They are funnel-shaped depressions, shallower than the diameter of the Earth, which, as we have noted, is 108 times smaller than that of the Sun.
The Sun-Spots are not devoid of motion, and from their movements we learn that the radiant orb revolves upon itself in about twenty-five days. This rotation was determined in 1611, by Galileo, who, while [Pg 99]observing the spots, saw that they traversed the solar disk from east to west, following lines that are oblique to the plane of the ecliptic, and that they disappear at the western border fourteen days after their arrival at the eastern edge. Sometimes the same spot, after being invisible for fourteen days, reappears upon the eastern edge, where it was observed twenty-eight days previously. It progresses toward the center of the Sun, which is reached in seven days, disappears anew in the west, and continues its journey on the hemisphere opposed to us, to reappear under observation two weeks later, if it has not meantime been extinguished. This observation proves that the Sun revolves upon itself. The reappearance of the spots occurs in about twenty-seven days, because the Earth is not stationary, and in its movement round the burning focus, a motion effected in the same direction as the solar rotation, the spots are still visible two and a half days after they disappeared from the point at which they had been twenty-five days previously. In reality, the rotation of the Sun occupies twenty-five and a half days, but strangely enough this globe does not rotate in one uniform period, like the Earth; the rotation periods, or movements of the different parts of the solar surface, diminish from the Sun's equator toward its poles. The period is twenty-five days at the equator, twenty-six at[Pg 100] the twenty-fourth degree of latitude, north or south, twenty-seven at the thirty-seventh degree, twenty-eight at the forty-eighth. The spots are usually formed between the equator and this latitude, more especially between the tenth and thirtieth degrees. They have never been seen round the poles.
The sunspots aren’t without motion, and from their movements, we find out that the sun rotates on its axis in about twenty-five days. This rotation was discovered in 1611 by Galileo, who, while [Pg 99] observing the spots, noticed that they moved across the solar disk from east to west, following paths that are angled to the plane of the ecliptic, and that they vanish at the western edge fourteen days after arriving at the eastern edge. Sometimes, the same spot, after being invisible for fourteen days, shows up again on the eastern edge, where it was seen twenty-eight days earlier. It moves toward the center of the Sun, which it reaches in seven days, disappears again in the west, and continues its journey on the side of the Sun facing away from us, to reappear under observation two weeks later, unless it has been extinguished in the meantime. This observation confirms that the Sun rotates on its own axis. The spots reappear in about twenty-seven days because the Earth is not stationary, and in its orbit around the blazing center, a rotation in the same direction as the solar rotation, the spots are still visible two and a half days after they’ve disappeared from the point where they were twenty-five days earlier. In reality, the sun’s rotation takes twenty-five and a half days, but oddly enough, this globe does not rotate in one uniform period, like Earth; the rotation periods, or movements of different parts of the solar surface, decrease from the Sun's equator toward its poles. The period is twenty-five days at the equator, twenty-six at [Pg 100] the twenty-fourth degree of latitude, either north or south, twenty-seven at the thirty-seventh degree, and twenty-eight at the forty-eighth. The spots are usually formed between the equator and this latitude, especially between the tenth and thirtieth degrees. They have never been observed near the poles.
Toward the edges of the Sun, again, are very brilliant and highly luminous regions, which generally surround the spots, and have been termed faculæ (facula, a little torch). These faculæ, which frequently occupy a very extensive surface, seem to be the seat of formidable commotions that incessantly revolutionize the face of our monarch, often, as we said, preceding the spots. They can be detected right up to the poles.
Toward the edges of the Sun, there are again very bright and highly luminous areas that generally surround the spots, known as faculæ (facula, a little torch). These faculæ, which often cover a large area, appear to be the source of intense activities that constantly change the appearance of our star, often appearing before the spots. They can be seen all the way to the poles.
Our Sun, that appears so calm and majestic, is in reality the seat of fierce conflagrations. Volcanic eruptions, the most appalling storms, the worst cataclysms that sometimes disturb our little world, are gentle zephyrs compared with the solar tempests that engender clouds of fire capable at one burst of engulfing globes of the dimensions of our planet.
Our Sun, which looks so calm and majestic, is actually the source of intense fires. Volcanic eruptions, extreme storms, and the worst disasters that occasionally shake our small world are gentle breezes compared to the solar storms that create clouds of fire powerful enough to engulf planets the size of ours in an instant.
To compare terrestrial volcanoes with solar eruptions is like comparing the modest night-light that consumes a midge with the flames of the fire that destroys a town.
To compare land volcanoes with solar eruptions is like comparing the small night-light that burns a gnat with the flames of the fire that takes down a town.
The solar spots vary in a fairly regular period of[Pg 101] eleven to twelve years. In certain years, e.g., 1893, they are vast, numerous and frequent; in other years, e.g., 1901, they are few and insignificant. The statistics are very carefully preserved. Here, for instance, is the surface showing sun-spots expressed in millionths of the extent of the visible solar surface:
The solar spots change in a relatively regular cycle of[Pg 101] eleven to twelve years. In some years, like 1893, they are large, numerous, and common; in other years, like 1901, they are few and minor. The data is kept very meticulously. Here, for example, is the surface displaying sunspots represented in millionths of the visible solar surface:
1889 | 78 |
1890 | 99 |
1891 | 569 |
1892 | 1,214 |
1893 | 1,464 |
1895 | 974 |
1896 | 543 |
1897 | 514 |
1898 | 375 |
1899 | 111 |
1900 | 75 |
1901 | 29 |
1902 | 62 |
The years 1889 and 1901 were minima; the year 1893 a maximum.
The years 1889 and 1901 were minima; the year 1893 a maximum.
It is a curious fact that terrestrial magnetism and the boreal auroras exhibit an oscillation parallel to that of the solar spots, and apparently the same occurs with regard to temperature.
It’s an interesting fact that Earth's magnetic field and the northern lights show a variation that aligns with solar spots, and it seems the same is true for temperature.
We must regard our sun as a globe of gas in a state of combustion, burning at high temperature, and giving off a prodigious amount of heat and light. The dazzling surface of this globe is called a photosphere (light sphere). It is in perpetual motion, like the waves of an ocean of fire, whose roseate and transparent flames measure[Pg 102] some 15,000 kilometers (9,300 miles) in height. This stratum of rose-colored flames has received the name of chromosphere (color sphere). It is transparent; it is not directly visible, but is seen only during the total eclipses of the Sun, when the dazzling disk of that luminary is entirely concealed by the Moon; or with the aid of the spectroscope. The part of the Sun that we see is its luminous surface, or photosphere.
We should think of our sun as a massive ball of gas that’s burning at a high temperature, producing a huge amount of heat and light. The bright surface of this sphere is called the photosphere (light sphere). It is always in motion, like the waves of an ocean of fire, with its pink and transparent flames reaching[Pg 102] about 15,000 kilometers (9,300 miles) high. This layer of pink flames is known as the chromosphere (color sphere). It’s transparent; it’s not directly visible and can only be seen during a total solar eclipse, when the brilliant disk of the Sun is completely covered by the Moon, or with a spectroscope. The part of the Sun we can see is its shining surface, or photosphere.
From this agitated surface there is a constant ejection of gigantic eruptions, immense jets of flame, geysers of fire, projected at a terrific speed to prodigious heights.
From this restless surface, there are constant massive eruptions, huge jets of flame, and geysers of fire, shot out at incredible speeds to amazing heights.
For years astronomers were greatly perplexed as to the nature of these incandescent masses, known as prominences, which shot out like fireworks, and were only visible during the total eclipses of the Sun. But now, thanks to an ingenious invention of Janssen and Lockyer, these eruptions can be observed every day in the spectroscope, and have been registered since 1868, more particularly in Rome and in Catania, where the Society of Spectroscopists was founded with this especial object, and publishes monthly bulletins in statistics of the health of the Sun.
For years, astronomers were really confused about the nature of these bright masses, called prominences, that shot out like fireworks and could only be seen during total solar eclipses. But now, thanks to a clever invention by Janssen and Lockyer, these eruptions can be observed every day using a spectroscope and have been recorded since 1868, especially in Rome and Catania. In those places, the Society of Spectroscopists was established with this specific goal and publishes monthly updates on the Sun's health.
These prominences assume all imaginable forms, and often resemble our own storm-clouds; they rise above the chromosphere with incredible velocity, often [Pg 103]exceeding 200 kilometers (124 miles) per second, and are carried up to the amazing height of 300,000 kilometers (186,000 miles).
These prominences take on all kinds of shapes and often look like our own storm clouds; they shoot up from the chromosphere at an astonishing speed, often [Pg 103] exceeding 200 kilometers (124 miles) per second, and reach heights of 300,000 kilometers (186,000 miles).

The Sun is surrounded with these enormous flames on every side; sometimes they shoot out into space like splendid curving roseate plumes; at others they rear their luminous heads in the Heavens, like the[Pg 104] cleft and waving leaves of giant palm-trees. Having illustrated a remarkable type of solar spot, it is interesting to submit to the reader a precise observation of these curious solar flames. That reproduced here was observed in Rome, January 30, 1885. It measured 228,000 kilometers (141,500 miles) in height, eighteen times the diameter of the earth (represented alongside in its relative magnitude). (Fig. 31.)
The Sun is surrounded by massive flames on all sides; sometimes they shoot out into space like beautiful curved pink feathers; at other times, they rise high in the sky like the[Pg 104] split and swaying leaves of giant palm trees. After describing a remarkable type of solar spot, it's interesting to share a detailed observation of these fascinating solar flames. The one shown here was observed in Rome on January 30, 1885. It measured 228,000 kilometers (141,500 miles) in height, eighteen times the diameter of the Earth (shown next to it for scale). (Fig. 31.)
Solar eruptions have been seen to reach, in a few minutes, a height of more than 100,000 kilometers (62,000 miles), and then to fall back in a flaming torrent into that burning and inextinguishable ocean.
Solar eruptions have been observed reaching heights of over 100,000 kilometers (62,000 miles) in just a few minutes, only to then fall back in a blazing torrent into that fiery and unquenchable ocean.
Observation, in conjunction with spectral analysis, shows these prominences to be due to formidable explosions produced within the actual substance of the Sun, and projecting masses of incandescent hydrogen into space with considerable force.
Observation, combined with spectral analysis, reveals that these prominences result from powerful explosions happening within the Sun itself, launching masses of glowing hydrogen into space with significant force.
Nor is this all. During an eclipse one sees around the black disk of the Moon as it passes in front of the Sun and intercepts its light, a brilliant and rosy aureole with long, luminous, branching feathers streaming out, like aigrettes, which extend a very considerable distance from the solar surface. This aureole, the nature of which is still unknown to us, has received the name of corona. It is a sort of immense atmosphere, extremely rarefied. Our superb torch, accordingly, is a brazier[Pg 105] of unparalleled activity—a globe of gas, agitated by phenomenal tempests whose flaming streamers extend afar. The smallest of these flames is so potent that it would swallow up our world at a single breath, like the bombs shot out by Vesuvius, that fall back within the crater.
Nor is this all. During an eclipse, you can see a brilliant and rosy halo around the black disk of the Moon as it moves in front of the Sun and blocks its light. This halo has long, glowing, branching streams radiating outward, like decorative feathers, extending a considerable distance from the solar surface. This halo, the nature of which we still don't fully understand, is called the corona. It's like an enormous atmosphere, extremely thin. Our magnificent sun, therefore, is a blazing furnace[Pg 105] of unmatched energy—a ball of gas, stirred by incredible storms whose fiery tendrils stretch far away. Even the smallest of these flames is so powerful that it could consume our world in a single breath, much like the explosive blasts from Vesuvius that fall back into the crater.
What now is the real heat of this incandescent focus? The most accurate researches estimate the temperature of the surface of the Sun at 7,000°C. The internal temperature must be considerably higher. A crucible of molten iron poured out upon the Sun would be as a stream of ice and snow.
What is the actual heat of this glowing center? The best research suggests the surface temperature of the Sun is around 7,000°C. The internal temperature is likely much higher. A crucible of molten iron poured onto the Sun would be like a stream of ice and snow.
We can form some idea of this calorific force by making certain comparisons. Thus, the heat given out appears to be equal to that which would be emitted by a colossal globe of the same dimensions (that is, as voluminous as twelve hundred and eighty thousand terrestrial globes), entirely covered with a layer of incandescent coal 28 kilometers (18 miles) in depth, all burning at equal combustion. The heat emitted by the Sun, at each second, is equal to that which would result from the combustion of eleven quadrillions six hundred thousand milliards of tons of coal, all burning together. This same heat would bring to the boil in an hour, two trillions nine hundred milliards of cubic kilometers of water at freezing-point.
We can get an idea of this heat energy by making a few comparisons. The heat released seems to be equal to that which would come from a massive globe of the same size (that is, as large as one million two hundred eighty thousand Earth-sized globes), completely covered with a layer of glowing coal 28 kilometers (18 miles) deep, all burning evenly. The heat emitted by the Sun each second is equivalent to the combustion of eleven quadrillion six hundred trillion tons of coal, all burning at once. This same heat could boil two trillion nine hundred billion cubic kilometers of water at freezing point in just one hour.
Our little planet, gravitating at 149,000,000 kilometers (93,000,000 miles) from the Sun, arrests on the way, and utilizes, only the half of a milliard part of this total radiation.
Our little planet, orbiting at 149,000,000 kilometers (93,000,000 miles) from the Sun, captures and uses only half of a billionth of this total radiation.
How is this heat maintained? One of the principal causes of the heat of the Sun is its condensation. According to all probabilities, the solar globe represents for us the nucleus of a vast nebula, that extended in primitive times beyond the orbit of Neptune, and which in its contraction has finally produced this central focus. In virtue of the law of transformation of motion into heat, this condensation, which has not yet reached its limit, suffices to raise this colossal globe to its level of temperature, and to maintain it there for millions of years. In addition, a substantial number of meteors is forever falling into it. This furnace is a true pandemonium.
How is this heat kept up? One of the main reasons for the Sun's heat is its condensation. It's likely that the solar body is the core of a huge nebula that, in ancient times, extended beyond the orbit of Neptune, and its contraction has ultimately created this central point. Because of the law of converting motion into heat, this ongoing condensation, which hasn't reached its limit yet, is enough to raise this massive body to its current temperature and keep it there for millions of years. Additionally, a significant number of meteors are constantly falling into it. This furnace is a real pandemonium.
The Sun weighs three hundred and twenty-four thousand times more than the Earth—that is to say, eighteen hundred and seventy octillions of kilograms:
The Sun is three hundred twenty-four thousand times heavier than the Earth, which means it weighs one thousand eight hundred seventy octillion kilograms:
1,870,000,000,000,000,000,000,000,000,000
(1,842,364,532,019,704,433,497,536,945 tons).
1.87 septillion
(1,842,364,532,019,704,433,497,536,945 tons).
In Chapter XI we shall explain the methods by which it has been found possible to weigh the Sun and determine its exact distance.
In Chapter XI we will explain the ways that have been discovered to measure the Sun's weight and find its exact distance.
I trust these figures will convey some notion of the importance and nature of the Sun, the stupendous orb on whose rays our very existence depends. Its apparent dimension (which is only half a degree, 32′, and would be hidden from sight, like that of the full moon, which is about the same, by the tip of the little finger held out at arm's length), represents, as we have seen, a real dimension that is colossal, i.e., 1,383,000 kilometers (more than 857,000 miles), and this is owing to the enormous distance that separates us from it. This distance of 149,000,000 kilometers (93,000,000 miles) is sufficiently hard to appreciate. Let us say that 11,640 terrestrial globes would be required to throw a bridge from here to the Sun, while 30 would suffice from the Earth to the Moon. The Moon is 388 times nearer to us than the Sun. We may perhaps conceive of this distance by calculating that a train, moving at constant speed of 1 kilometer (0.6214 mile) a minute, would take 149,000,000 minutes, that is to say 103,472 days, or 283 years, to cross the distance that separates us from this orb. Given the normal duration of life, neither the travelers who set out for the Sun, nor their children, nor their grandchildren, would arrive there: only the seventh generation would reach the goal, and only the fourteenth could bring us back news of it.
I hope these numbers help illustrate the significance and nature of the Sun, the massive star on whose light our lives depend. Its visible size (which is just half a degree, 32′, and would be blocked from view by the tip of a little finger held out at arm's length, similar to the full moon) represents an actual size that is enormous, about 1,383,000 kilometers (over 857,000 miles), due to the vast distance between us and the Sun. This distance of 149,000,000 kilometers (93,000,000 miles) is difficult to comprehend. To put it in perspective, you would need 11,640 Earths to create a bridge from here to the Sun, while only 30 would be enough to connect the Earth to the Moon. The Moon is 388 times closer to us than the Sun. We might grasp this distance better by noting that a train traveling at a steady speed of 1 kilometer (0.6214 mile) per minute would take 149,000,000 minutes, which is 103,472 days, or 283 years, to reach the Sun. Given a typical human lifespan, neither the travelers who set out for the Sun, nor their kids or grandkids, would ever get there: only the seventh generation would arrive, and only the fourteenth could send us back news from it.
Children often cry for the Moon. If one of these[Pg 108] inquisitive little beings could stretch out its arms to touch the Sun, and burn its fingers there, it would not feel the burn for one hundred and sixty-seven years (when it would no longer be an infant), for the nervous impulse of sensation can only be transmitted from the ends of the fingers to the brain at a velocity of 28 meters per second.
Children often cry for the Moon. If one of these[Pg 108] curious little ones could reach out its arms to touch the Sun and burn its fingers there, it wouldn’t feel the burn for one hundred and sixty-seven years (when it would no longer be a baby), because the nerve signals for sensation can only travel from the ends of the fingers to the brain at a speed of 28 meters per second.
'Tis long. A cannon-ball would reach the Sun in ten years. Light, that rapid arrow that flies through space at a velocity of 300,000 kilometers (186,000 miles per second), takes only eight minutes seventeen seconds to traverse this distance.
It's a long way. A cannonball would take ten years to reach the Sun. Light, that swift arrow that zips through space at a speed of 300,000 kilometers (186,000 miles per second), only takes eight minutes and seventeen seconds to cover that distance.
This brilliant Sun is not only sovereign of the Earth; he is also the head of a vast planetary system.
This brilliant Sun isn't just the ruler of the Earth; it's also the center of a huge planetary system.
The orbs that circle round the Sun are opaque bodies, spherical in shape, receiving their light and heat from the central star, on which they absolutely depend. The name of planets given to them signifies "wandering" stars. If you observe the Heavens on a fine starry night, and are sufficiently acquainted with the principal stars of the Zodiac as described in a preceding chapter, you may be surprised on certain evenings to see the figure of some zodiacal constellation slightly modified by the temporary presence of a brilliant orb perhaps surpassing in its luminosity the finest stars of the first magnitude.
The spheres that orbit the Sun are solid objects shaped like balls, getting their light and heat from the central star, which they completely rely on. The term "planets" refers to them as "wandering" stars. If you look at the night sky on a clear, starry night and you know the main stars of the Zodiac mentioned in a previous chapter, you might be surprised on some evenings to see the shape of a zodiac constellation subtly altered by the temporary appearance of a bright sphere that may shine even brighter than the best first-magnitude stars.
If you watch this apparition for some weeks, and examine its position carefully in regard to the adjacent stars, you will observe that it changes its position more or less slowly in the Heavens. These wandering orbs, or planets, do not shine with intrinsic light; they are illuminated by the Sun.
If you observe this appearance for a few weeks and closely examine its position relative to the nearby stars, you'll notice that it gradually shifts in the sky. These wandering objects, or planets, don't emit their own light; they are lit up by the Sun.
The planets, in effect, are bodies as opaque as the Earth, traveling round the God of Day at a speed proportional to their distance. They number eight principal orbs, and may be divided into two quite distinct groups by which we may recognize them: the first comprises four planets, of relatively small dimensions in comparison with those of the second group, which are so voluminous that the least important of them is larger than the other four put together.
The planets are basically solid bodies like Earth, orbiting the Sun at speeds related to their distance from it. There are eight main planets, which can be divided into two clear groups for identification: the first group consists of four smaller planets, while the second group contains much larger ones, with even the smallest in this group being bigger than all four of the smaller ones combined.
In order of distance from the Sun, we first encounter:
In order of distance from the Sun, we first come across:
MERCURY, VENUS, THE EARTH, AND MARS
Mercury, Venus, Earth, and Mars
These are the worlds that are nearest to the orb of day.
These are the worlds that are closest to the sun.
The four following, and much more remote, are, still in order of distance:
The four that follow, and are much farther away, are still listed in order of distance:
JUPITER, SATURN, URANUS, AND NEPTUNE
Jupiter, Saturn, Uranus, and Neptune
This second group is separated from the first by a vast space occupied by quite a little army of minute planets, tiny cosmic bodies, the largest of which measures[Pg 110] little more than 100 kilometers (62 miles) in diameter, and the smallest some few miles only.
This second group is separated from the first by a large area filled with a small army of tiny planets, little cosmic bodies, the largest of which measures[Pg 110] a little more than 100 kilometers (62 miles) in diameter, and the smallest just a few miles across.
The planets which form these three groups represent the principal members of the solar family. But the Sun is a patriarch, and each of his daughters has her own children who, while obeying the paternal influence of the fiery orb, are also obedient to the world that governs them. These secondary asters, or satellites, follow the planets in their course, and revolve round them in an ellipse, just as the others rotate round the Sun. Every one knows the satellite of the Earth, the Moon. All the other planets of our system have their own moons, some being even more favored than ourselves in this respect, and having several. Mars has two; Jupiter, five; Saturn, eight; Uranus, four; and Neptune, one (at least as yet discovered).
The planets that make up these three groups are the main members of the solar system. However, the Sun is like a father figure, and each of his "daughters" (the planets) has their own children (moons) who, while influenced by the fiery father, also follow the rules of the world that controls them. These secondary bodies, or satellites, move in their orbits around the planets, just like the planets orbit around the Sun. Everyone knows the Earth’s satellite, the Moon. All the other planets in our system have their own moons as well, with some having even more than we do. Mars has two; Jupiter has five; Saturn has eight; Uranus has four; and Neptune has one (at least one that has been discovered so far).
In order to realize the relations between these worlds, we must appreciate their distances by arranging them in a little table:
In order to understand the connections between these worlds, we need to recognize their distances by organizing them in a small table:
Distance in Millions of Kilometers. | Distance in Millions of Miles. | |
Mercury | 57 | 35 |
Venus | 108 | 67 |
The Earth | 149 | 93 |
Mars | 226 | 140 |
Jupiter | 775 | 481 |
Saturn | 1,421 | 882 |
Uranus | 2,831 | 1,755 |
Neptune | 4,470 | 2,771 |
The Sun is at the center (or, more properly speaking, at the focus, for the planets describe an ellipse) of this system, and controls them. Neptune is thirty times farther from the Sun than the Earth. These disparities of distance produce a vast difference in the periods of the planetary revolutions; for while the Earth revolves round the Sun in a year, Venus in 224 days, and Mercury in 88, Mars takes nearly 2 years to accomplish his journey, Jupiter 12 years, Saturn 29, Uranus 84, and Neptune 165.
The Sun is at the center (or, more accurately, at the focus, since the planets move in an ellipse) of this system and controls them. Neptune is thirty times further from the Sun than the Earth. These differences in distance lead to a huge variation in the time it takes for the planets to orbit; while the Earth takes a year to go around the Sun, Venus does it in 224 days, and Mercury in 88 days. Mars takes almost 2 years to complete its orbit, Jupiter takes 12 years, Saturn takes 29 years, Uranus takes 84 years, and Neptune takes 165 years.
Even the planets and their moons do not represent the Sun's complete paternity. There are further, in the solar republic, certain vagabond and irregular orbs that travel at a speed that is often most immoderate, occasionally approaching the Sun, not to be consumed therein, but, as it appears, to draw from its radiant source the provision of forces necessary for their perigrinations through space. These are the Comets, which pursue an extremely elongated orbit round the Sun, to which at times they approximate very closely, at other times being excessively distant.
Even the planets and their moons don’t fully capture the Sun’s role as a parent. There are also some wandering and irregular bodies in the solar system that travel at incredibly high speeds, sometimes getting close to the Sun, not to be consumed by it, but seemingly to draw energy from its bright source for their journeys through space. These are the Comets, which follow a highly elongated orbit around the Sun, getting very close at times while being excessively far away at others.
And now to recapitulate our knowledge of the Solar Empire. In the first place, we see a colossal globe of fire dominating and governing the worlds that belong to him. Around him are grouped planets, in number eight principal, formed of solid and obscure matter, gravitating[Pg 112] round the central orb. Other secondary orbs, the satellites, revolve round the planets, which keep them within the sphere of their attraction. And lastly, the comets, irregular celestial bodies, track the whole extent of the great solar province. To these might be added the whirlwinds of meteors, as it were disaggregated comets, which also circle round the Sun, and give origin to shooting stars, when they come into collision with the Earth.
And now let's summarize what we know about the Solar Empire. First of all, we see a huge ball of fire dominating and controlling the worlds that belong to it. Around it are eight main planets made of solid and dark matter, gravitating[Pg 112] around the central orb. There are also secondary bodies, the moons, which orbit the planets, held within their gravitational pull. Lastly, the comets, irregular celestial objects, roam throughout the vast solar system. We can also include the meteor showers, like broken-up comets, which circle around the Sun and create shooting stars when they collide with the Earth.
Having now a general idea of our celestial family, and an appreciation of the potent focus that controls it, let us make direct acquaintance with the several members of which it is composed.
Having a general understanding of our celestial family and recognizing the powerful force that governs it, let’s get to know the various members that make it up.
CHAPTER V
THE PLANETS
A.—Mercury, Venus, the Earth, Mars
A.—Mercury, Venus, Earth, Mars
And now we are in the Solar System, at the center, or, better, at the focus of which burns the immense and dazzling orb. We have appreciated the grandeur and potency of the solar globe, whose rays spread out in active waves that bear a fecundating illumination to the worlds that gravitate round him; we have appreciated the distance that separates the Sun from the Earth, the third of the planets retained within his domain, or at least I trust that the comparisons of the times required by certain moving objects to traverse this distance have enabled us to conceive it.
And now we find ourselves in the Solar System, at the center, or more accurately, at the focus of the immense and dazzling orb. We've come to recognize the grandeur and power of the solar globe, whose rays spread out in vibrant waves that deliver a life-giving light to the worlds orbiting around it; we've also grasped the distance that separates the Sun from the Earth, the third planet within its domain, or at least I hope that the comparisons of the time it takes for certain moving objects to cover this distance have helped us understand it.
We said that the four planets nearest to the Sun are Mercury, at a distance of 57 million kilometers (35,000,000 miles); Venus, at 108 million (67,000,000 miles); the Earth, at 149 million (93,000,000 miles); and Mars at 226 million (140,000,000 miles). Let us begin our planetary journey with these four stations.
We said that the four planets closest to the Sun are Mercury, which is 57 million kilometers (35 million miles) away; Venus, at 108 million kilometers (67 million miles); Earth, at 149 million kilometers (93 million miles); and Mars, at 226 million kilometers (140 million miles). Let’s start our journey through the planets with these four stops.
MERCURY
MERCURY
A little above the Sun one sometimes sees, now in the West, in the lingering shimmer of the twilight, now in the East, when the tender roseate dawn announces the advent of a clear day, a small star of the first magnitude which remains but a very short time above the horizon, and then plunges back into the flaming sun. This is Mercury, the agile and active messenger of Olympus, the god of eloquence, of medicine, of commerce, and of thieves. One only sees him furtively, from time to time, at the periods of his greatest elongations, either after the setting or before the rising of the radiant orb, when he presents the aspect of a somewhat reddish star.
A little above the Sun, you can sometimes see, now in the West during the fading light of twilight, and now in the East when the soft pink dawn signals the start of a clear day, a small first-magnitude star that only stays visible for a short time above the horizon before diving back into the bright sun. This is Mercury, the quick and lively messenger of Olympus, the god of communication, medicine, trade, and thieves. He is only seen fleetingly, now and then, during his greatest elongations, either after the sun has set or before it rises, when he appears as a slightly reddish star.
This planet, like the others, shines only by the reflection of the Sun whose illumination he receives, and as he is in close juxtaposition with it, his light is bright enough, though his volume is inconsiderable. He is smaller than the Earth. His revolution round the Sun being accomplished in about three months, he passes rapidly, in a month and a half, from one side to the other of the orb of day, and is alternately a morning and an evening star. The ancients originally regarded it as two separate planets; but with attentive observation,[Pg 115] they soon perceived its identity. In our somewhat foggy climates, it can only be discovered once or twice a year, and then only by looking for it according to the indications given in the astronomic almanacs.
This planet, like the others, shines only by reflecting the Sun's light, which it receives because it's so close to it, making its brightness sufficient despite its small size. It's smaller than Earth. It completes its orbit around the Sun in about three months and moves quickly, taking just a month and a half to travel from one side of the Sun to the other, appearing alternately as a morning and an evening star. The ancients initially thought it was two different planets, but with careful observation,[Pg 115] they quickly realized it was the same one. In our somewhat cloudy climates, it can only be seen once or twice a year, and even then, you have to search for it based on the guidance provided in astronomical almanacs.

Mercury courses round the Sun at a distance of 57,000,000 kilometers (35,000,000 miles), and accomplishes his revolution in 87 days, 23 hours, 15 minutes; i.e., 2 months, 27 days, 23 hours, or a little less than three of our months. If the conditions of life are the[Pg 116] same there as here, the existence of the Mercurians must be four times as short as our own. A youth of twenty, awaking to the promise of the life he is just beginning in this world, is an octogenarian in Mercury. There the fair sex would indeed be justified in bewailing the transitory nature of life, and might regret the years that pass too quickly away. Perhaps, however, they are more philosophic than with us.
Mercury travels around the Sun at a distance of 57,000,000 kilometers (35,000,000 miles) and completes its orbit in 87 days, 23 hours, and 15 minutes; that is, 2 months, 27 days, and 23 hours, or just under three of our months. If life conditions are the same there as here, the lives of Mercurians must be about four times shorter than ours. A 20-year-old waking up to the possibilities of life here is like an octogenarian on Mercury. There, women would really have a reason to lament the fleeting nature of life and might regret how quickly the years pass. However, maybe they are more philosophical about it than we are.

The orbit of Mercury, which of course is within that of the Earth, is not circular, but elliptical, and very eccentric, so elongated that at certain times of the year this planet is extremely remote from the solar focus, and receives only half as much heat and light as at the opposite period; and, in consequence, his distance from the Earth varies considerably.
The orbit of Mercury, which is inside that of Earth, isn’t circular but elliptical and quite eccentric. It's so elongated that at certain times of the year this planet is very far from the Sun and receives only half as much heat and light as it does at the opposite time; as a result, its distance from Earth varies significantly.

This globe exhibits phases, discovered in the seventeenth century by Galileo, which recall those of the Moon. They are due to the motions of the planet round the Sun, and are invisible to the unaided eye, but with even a small instrument, one can follow the gradations and study Mercury under every aspect. Sometimes, again, he passes exactly in front of the Sun, and his disk is projected like a black point upon the luminous surface of the flaming orb. This occurred, notably, on May 10, 1891, and November 10, 1894; and the phenomenon[Pg 118] will recur on November 12, 1907, and November 6, 1914.
This globe shows phases, discovered in the seventeenth century by Galileo, that are similar to those of the Moon. They happen because of the planet's orbit around the Sun, and they're not visible to the naked eye. However, with even a small instrument, you can observe the differences and study Mercury from various angles. Sometimes, it passes directly in front of the Sun, making its disk appear as a black dot against the bright surface of the glowing orb. This happened, for instance, on May 10, 1891, and November 10, 1894; and the phenomenon[Pg 118] will happen again on November 12, 1907, and November 6, 1914.
Mercury is the least of all the worlds in our system (with the exception of the cosmic fragments that circulate between the orbit of Mars and that of Jupiter). His volume equals only 5/100 that of the Earth. His diameter, in comparison with that of our planet, is in the ratio of 373 to 1,000 (a little more than 1⁄3) and measures 4,750 kilometers (2,946 miles). His density is the highest of all the worlds in the great solar family, and exceeds that of our Earth by about 1⁄3; but weight there is less by almost 1⁄2.
Mercury is the smallest planet in our solar system (except for the cosmic debris that orbits between Mars and Jupiter). Its volume is only 5% that of Earth. Its diameter compared to our planet is on a scale of 373 to 1,000 (slightly more than 1⁄3) and it measures 4,750 kilometers (2,946 miles). Mercury has the highest density of all the planets in the solar system, surpassing that of Earth by about 1⁄3; however, its weight is nearly 1⁄2 less.
Mercury is enveloped in a very dense, thick atmosphere, which doubtless sensibly tempers the solar heat, for the Sun exhibits to the Mercurians a luminous disk about seven times more extensive than that with which we are familiar on the Earth, and when Mercury is at perihelion (that is, nearest to the Sun), his inhabitants receive ten times more light and heat than we obtain at midsummer. In all probability, it would be impossible for us to set foot on this planet without being shattered by a sunstroke.
Mercury is surrounded by a very dense, thick atmosphere, which definitely moderates the sun's heat. The Sun appears to the people of Mercury as a bright disk about seven times larger than what we see on Earth. When Mercury is at perihelion (the point closest to the Sun), its inhabitants receive ten times more light and heat than we do in the middle of summer. It's highly likely that we couldn't even step foot on this planet without suffering from severe sunburn.
Yet we may well imagine that Nature's fecundity can have engendered beings there of an organization different from our own, adapted to an existence in the proximity of fire. What magnificent landscapes may there be[Pg 119] adorned with the luxuriant vegetation that develops rapidly under an ardent and generous sun?
Yet we can easily imagine that Nature's ability to create life could have produced beings there with a different structure than ours, suited to living close to fire. What amazing landscapes might there be[Pg 119] filled with the lush vegetation that flourishes quickly under a warm and generous sun?

Observations of Mercury are taken under great difficulties, just because of the immediate proximity of[Pg 120] the solar furnace; yet some have detected patches that might be seas. In any case, these observations are contradictory and uncertain.
Observing Mercury is really challenging because it's so close to the sun; however, some people have noticed areas that could be seas. Regardless, these observations are mixed and uncertain.
Up to the present it has been impossible to determine the duration of the rotation. Some astronomers even think that the Sun's close proximity must have produced strong tides, that would, as it were, have immobilized the globe of Mercury, just as the Earth has immobilized the Moon, forcing it perpetually to present the same side to the Sun. From the point of view of habitation, this situation would be somewhat peculiar; perpetual day upon the illumined half, perpetual night upon the other hemisphere, and a fairly large zone of twilight between the two. Such a condition would indeed be different from the succession of terrestrial days and nights.
Up until now, it's been impossible to figure out how long Mercury takes to rotate. Some astronomers even believe that the Sun's close distance must have created strong tidal forces, which would have effectively locked Mercury in place, just like how the Earth has locked the Moon, causing it to always show the same side to the Sun. From a habitability perspective, this situation would be pretty unusual; there would be constant daylight on one side, constant darkness on the other, and a significant twilight zone in between. This scenario would definitely be unlike the typical cycle of days and nights we experience on Earth.
As seen from Mercury, the Earth we inhabit would shine out in the starry sky[9] as a magnificent orb of first[Pg 121] magnitude, with the Moon alongside, a faithful little companion. They should form a fine double star, the Earth being a brilliant orb of first magnitude, and the Moon of third, a charming couple, and admired doubtless as an enchanted and privileged abode.
From Mercury, the Earth we live on would glow in the night sky[9] as a stunning sphere of first magnitude, with the Moon nearby, a loyal little companion. Together, they would create a beautiful double star, the Earth shining brightly as a first magnitude orb, and the Moon at third magnitude, a delightful pair, surely admired as a magical and special home.
It is at midnight during the oppositions of the Earth with the Sun that our planet is the most beautiful and brilliant, as is Jupiter for ourselves. The constellations are the same, viewed from Mercury or from the Earth.
It is at midnight during the times when the Earth is opposite the Sun that our planet looks the most beautiful and brilliant, just like Jupiter does for us. The constellations are the same when viewed from Mercury or from Earth.
But is this little solar planet inhabited? We do not yet know. We can only reply: why not?
But is this small solar planet inhabited? We don’t know yet. We can only respond: why not?
VENUS
VENUS
When the sunset atmosphere is crimson with the glorious rays of the King of Orbs, and all Nature assumes the brooding veil of twilight, the most indifferent eyes are often attracted and captivated by the presence of a star that is almost dazzling, and illuminates with its white and limpid light the heavens darkened by the disappearance of the God of Day.
When the sunset sky is red with the glorious rays of the sun, and all of nature takes on the quiet cloak of twilight, even the most indifferent observers are often drawn in and captivated by a star that shines almost brilliantly, lighting up the darkened heavens after the sun has set.
Hail, Venus, Queen of the Heavens! the "Shepherd's Star," gentle mother of the loves, goddess of beauty, eternally adored and cherished, sung and immortalized upon Earth, by poets and artists. Her splendid brilliancy attracted notice from earliest antiquity, and we find her,[Pg 122] radiant and charming, in the works of the ancients, who erected altars to her and adorned their poetry with her grace and beauty. Homer calls her Callisto the Beautiful; Cicero names her Vesper, the evening star, and Lucifer, the star of the morning—for it was with this divinity as with Mercury. For a long while she was regarded as two separate planets, and it was only when it came to be observed that the evening and the morning star were always in periodic succession, that the identity of the orb was recognized.
Hail, Venus, Queen of the Heavens! The "Shepherd's Star," gentle mother of love, goddess of beauty, forever adored and cherished, celebrated and immortalized on Earth by poets and artists. Her brilliant glow caught attention from ancient times, and we see her,[Pg 122] radiant and enchanting, in the works of the ancients, who built altars to her and enriched their poetry with her grace and beauty. Homer calls her Callisto the Beautiful; Cicero refers to her as Vesper, the evening star, and Lucifer, the morning star—just like Mercury. For a long time, she was thought to be two separate planets, and it was only when it was noted that the evening and morning star followed each other in a regular pattern that her true identity was recognized.
Her radiant splendor created her mythological personality, just as the agility of Mercury created that of the messenger of the gods.
Her glowing beauty shaped her legendary persona, just like Mercury's quickness defined him as the messenger of the gods.
We do not see her aerial chariot in the Heavens drawn by a flight of doves with white and fluttering wings, but we follow the lustrous orb led on through space by solar attraction. And in the beautiful evenings when she is at her greatest distance from our Sun, the whole world admires this white and dazzling Venus reigning as sovereign over our twilight[10] for hours after sunset, and in addition to the savants who are practically occupied with astronomy, millions of eyes are raised to this celestial splendor, and for a moment millions of human beings feel some curiosity about the mysteries of the Infinite. The brutalities of daily life would fain petrify our dreams, but thought is not yet stifled to the point of checking all aspirations after eternal truth, and when we gaze at the starry sky it is hard not to ask ourselves the nature of those other worlds, and the place occupied by our own planet in the vast concert of sidereal harmony.
We don't see her chariot in the sky pulled by a flight of doves with white, fluttering wings, but we follow the bright orb traveling through space due to solar pull. And on beautiful evenings when she’s farthest from our Sun, the whole world admires this bright and dazzling Venus, reigning as the queen of our twilight for hours after sunset. Besides the savants who are deeply into astronomy, millions of eyes are turned toward this celestial beauty, and for a moment, countless people feel curious about the mysteries of the Infinite. The harshness of everyday life tries to freeze our dreams, but our thoughts are not completely suffocated to stop all hopes for eternal truth. When we look at the starry sky, it's hard not to wonder about those other worlds and where our own planet fits in the vast symphony of the universe.

Even through a small telescope, Venus offers remarkable phases.
Even with a small telescope, Venus shows impressive phases.

Fig. 37 gives some notion of the succession of these, and of the planet's variations in magnitude during its journey round the Sun. Imagine it to be rotating in a year of 224 days, 16 hours, 49 minutes, 8 seconds at a distance of 108 million kilometers (67,000,000 miles), the Earth being at 149 million kilometers (93,000,000 miles). Like Mercury, at certain periods it passes between the Sun and ourselves, and as its illuminated hemisphere is of course turned toward the orb of day, we at those times perceive only a sharp and very luminous crescent. At[Pg 125] such periods Venus is entirely, so to say, against the Sun, and presents to us her greatest apparent dimension (Fig. 38). Sometimes, again, like Mercury, she passes immediately in front of the Sun, forming a perfectly round black spot; this happened on December 8, 1874, and December 6, 1882; and will recur on June 7, 2004, and June 5, 2012. These transits have been utilized in celestial geometry in measuring the distance of the Sun.
Fig. 37 gives an idea of the sequence of these events and the planet's changes in size as it travels around the Sun. Picture it rotating in a year that lasts 224 days, 16 hours, 49 minutes, and 8 seconds, at a distance of 108 million kilometers (67,000,000 miles), while Earth is at 149 million kilometers (93,000,000 miles). Like Mercury, there are times when it passes between the Sun and us, and since its illuminated side is obviously facing the sun, we see only a thin, very bright crescent during those times. At[Pg 125] these times, Venus is fully against the Sun, showing us her largest apparent size (Fig. 38). Occasionally, similar to Mercury, she moves directly in front of the Sun, creating a perfectly round black spot; this occurred on December 8, 1874, and December 6, 1882, and will happen again on June 7, 2004, and June 5, 2012. These transits have been used in celestial geometry to measure the distance to the Sun.
You will readily divine that the distance of Venus varies considerably according to her position in relation to the Earth: when she is between the Sun and ourselves she is nearest to our world; but it is just at those times that we see least of her surface, because she exhibits to us only a slender crescent. Terrestrial astronomers are accordingly very badly placed for the study of her physical constitution. The best observations can be made when she is situated to right or left of the Sun, and shows us about half her illuminated disk—during the day for choice, because at night there is too much irradiation from her dazzling light.
You’ll easily realize that the distance of Venus changes a lot depending on her position relative to Earth: when she’s between the Sun and us, she’s closest to our planet; but it’s precisely during those times that we see the least of her surface, since she only shows us a thin crescent. As a result, astronomers on Earth are not in a great position to study her physical makeup. The best observations can be made when she’s positioned to the right or left of the Sun, revealing about half of her illuminated disk—preferably during the day, since there’s too much glare from her bright light at night.
These phases were discovered by Galileo, in 1610. His observations were among the first that confirmed the veracity of the system of Copernicus, affording an evident example of the movement of the planets round the sun. They are often visible to the unaided eye with good sight, either at dusk, or through light clouds.
These phases were discovered by Galileo in 1610. His observations were some of the first to confirm the accuracy of Copernicus's system, providing a clear example of how the planets orbit the sun. They can often be seen with the naked eye if you have good vision, either at dusk or through thin clouds.

Venus, surrounded by a highly dense and rarefied atmosphere, which increases the difficulties of observing her surface, might be called the twin sister of the Earth, so similar are the dimensions of the two worlds. But, strange as it may seem to the many admirers, who are ready to hail in her an abode of joy and happiness, it is most probable that this planet, attractive as she is at a distance, would be a less desirable habitation than our floating island. In fact, the atmosphere of Venus is perpetually covered with cloud, so that the weather there must be always foggy. No definite geographical configuration can be discovered on her, despite the hopes of the eighteenth-century astronomers. We are not even sure that she rotates upon herself, so contradictory are the observations, and so hard is it to distinguish anything clearly upon her surface. A single night of observation suffices to show the rotation[Pg 127] of Mars or of Jupiter; but the beautiful Evening Star remains obstinately veiled from our curiosity.
Venus, wrapped in a thick and hazy atmosphere that makes it tough to see her surface, could be called Earth’s twin sister because the sizes of the two planets are so similar. But, surprisingly to many fans who view her as a place of joy and happiness, this planet is probably less desirable to live on than our floating island. In reality, Venus's atmosphere is constantly shrouded in clouds, meaning it must always be foggy there. No clear geographical features can be seen on her, despite the hopes of 18th-century astronomers. We aren't even certain if she spins on her axis, as the observations are so conflicting and it's so difficult to make out anything on her surface. Just one night of observation is enough to reveal the rotation[Pg 127] of Mars or Jupiter, but the beautiful Evening Star remains stubbornly hidden from our curiosity.
Several astronomers, and not the least considerable, think that the tides produced by the Sun upon her seas, or globe in its state of pristine fluidity, must have been strong enough to seize and fix her, as the Earth did for the Moon, thus obliging her to present always the same face to the Sun. Certain telescopic observations would even seem to confirm this theoretical deduction from the calculations of celestial mechanics.
Several astronomers, including some significant figures, believe that the tides created by the Sun on her seas, or the planet in its original fluid state, must have been powerful enough to capture and lock her in place, just like the Earth did with the Moon, forcing her to always show the same side to the Sun. Some telescopic observations even seem to support this theoretical conclusion drawn from celestial mechanics calculations.
The author ventures to disagree with this opinion, its apparent probability notwithstanding, because he has invariably received a contrary impression from all his telescopic observations. He has quite recently (spring of 1903) repeated these observations. Choosing a remarkably clear and perfectly calm atmosphere, he examined the splendid planet several times with great attention in the field of the telescope. The right or eastern border (reversed image) was dulled by the atmosphere of Venus; this is the line of separation between day and night. Beneath, at the extreme northern edge, he was attracted on each occasion by a small white patch, a little whiter than the rest of the surface of the planet, surrounded by a light-gray penumbra, giving the exact effect of a polar snow, very analogous to that observed at the poles of Mars. To the author this white[Pg 128] spot on the boreal horn of Venus does not appear to be due to an effect of contrast, as has sometimes been supposed.
The author disagrees with this opinion, even though it seems likely, because he has consistently noticed something different during all his telescope observations. Recently, in spring 1903, he repeated these observations. Choosing a particularly clear and calm atmosphere, he closely examined the magnificent planet multiple times through the telescope. The eastern edge (reflected image) was obscured by Venus's atmosphere; this marks the line between day and night. At the far northern edge, he was drawn to a small white patch, slightly brighter than the rest of the planet's surface, surrounded by a light-gray shadow, creating an effect similar to polar snow, much like what is seen at the poles of Mars. To the author, this white[Pg 128] spot on the northern tip of Venus doesn’t seem to be just a contrast effect, as has been suggested before.
Now, if the globe of Venus has poles, it must turn upon itself.
Now, if Venus has poles, it must rotate on its axis.
Unfortunately it has proved impossible to distinguish any sign upon the disk, indicative of the direction and speed of its rotary movement, although these observations were made, with others, under excellent conditions.—Three o'clock in the afternoon, brilliant sun, sky clear blue, the planet but little removed from the meridian—at which time it is less dazzling than in the evening.
Unfortunately, it has turned out to be impossible to identify any markings on the disk that indicate the direction and speed of its rotation, even though these observations were made, along with others, under excellent conditions. —At three o'clock in the afternoon, with a bright sun and a clear blue sky, the planet is only slightly off the meridian—when it is less blinding than in the evening.
There is merely the impression; but it is so definite as to prevent the author from adopting the new hypothesis, in virtue of which the planet, as it gravitates round the Sun, presents always the same hemisphere.
There is just the impression; but it is so strong that it stops the author from accepting the new hypothesis, according to which the planet, as it orbits around the Sun, always shows the same side.
If this hypothesis were a reality, Venus would certainly be a very peculiar world. Eternal day on the one side; eternal night on the other. Maximum light and heat at the center of the hemisphere perpetually turned to the Sun; maximum cold and center of night at the antipodes. This icy hemisphere would possibly be uninhabitable, but the resources of Nature are so prodigious, and the law of Life is so imperious, so persistent, under the most disadvantageous and deplorable[Pg 129] terrestrial conditions, that it would be transcending our rights to declare an impossibility of existence, even in this eternal night. The currents of the atmosphere would no doubt suffice to set up perpetual changes of temperature between the two hemispheres, in comparison with which our trade-winds would be the lightest of breezes.
If this hypothesis were true, Venus would definitely be a very unusual world. Eternal day on one side; eternal night on the other. Maximum light and heat at the center of the hemisphere constantly facing the Sun; maximum cold and darkness at the opposite side. This icy hemisphere might be uninhabitable, but nature's resources are so vast, and the principle of life is so strong and enduring, even under the most challenging and grim earthly conditions, that it would be beyond our rights to claim that existence is impossible, even in this eternal night. The atmospheric currents would likely create continuous temperature changes between the two hemispheres, making our trade winds feel like just a whisper.
Yes, mystery still reigns upon this adjacent earth, and the most powerful instruments of the observatories of the whole world have been unable to solve it. All we know is that the diameter, surface, volume and mass of this planet, and its weight at the surface, do not differ sensibly from those that characterize our own globe: that this planet is sister to our own, and of the same order, hence probably formed of the same elements. We further know that, as seen from Venus (Fig. 39), the Earth on which we live is a magnificent star, a double orb more brilliant even than when viewed from Mercury. It is a dazzling orb of first magnitude, accompanied by its moon, a star of the second and a half magnitude.
Yes, mystery still surrounds this neighboring planet, and even the most advanced instruments at observatories worldwide haven't been able to figure it out. All we know is that its diameter, surface area, volume, mass, and weight on its surface are very similar to our own planet. This planet is a sibling to Earth, likely made from the same elements. We also know that, when viewed from Venus (Fig. 39), the Earth we live on appears as a stunning star, a double orb that shines even brighter than when seen from Mercury. It is a brilliant orb of the first magnitude, accompanied by its moon, which is a star of the second and a half magnitude.
And thus the worlds float on in space, distant symbols of hopes not realized on any one of them, all at different stages of their degree of evolution, representing an ever-growing progress in the sequence of the ages.
And so the worlds drift through space, remote symbols of dreams that haven’t come true on any of them, each at various stages of their evolution, representing ongoing progress through the ages.

When we contemplate this radiant Venus, it is difficult, even if we can not form any definite idea as to her actual state as regards habitation, to assume that she[Pg 131] must be a dreary desert, and not, on the contrary, to hail in her a celestial land, differing more or less from our own dwelling-place, travailing with her sisters in the accomplishment of the general plan of Nature.
When we think about this bright Venus, it’s hard, even if we can’t really picture her actual condition regarding habitation, to believe that she[Pg 131] must be a gloomy wasteland, and instead, to see her as a heavenly place, somewhat different from our own home, working alongside her counterparts to fulfill the overall design of Nature.
Such are the characteristic features of our celestial neighbor. In quitting her, we reach the Earth, which comes immediately next her in order of distance, 149 million kilometers (93,000,000 miles) from the Sun, but as we shall devote an entire chapter to our own planet, we will not halt at this point, but cross in one step the distance that separates Mars from Venus.
Such are the key features of our celestial neighbor. As we leave her behind, we arrive at Earth, which is the next closest planet, located 149 million kilometers (93,000,000 miles) from the Sun. Since we will dedicate an entire chapter to our own planet, we won't pause here, but instead, we'll leap across the distance that separates Mars from Venus.
Let us only remark in passing, that our planet is the largest of the four spheres adjacent to the Sun. Here are their comparative diameters:
Let’s just note in passing that our planet is the biggest of the four spheres next to the Sun. Here are their comparative diameters:
The Earth = 1. | In Kilometers. | In Miles. | |
Mercury | 0.373 | 4,750 | 2,946 |
Venus | 0.999 | 12,730 | 7,894 |
Earth | 1.000 | 12,742 | 7,926 |
Mars | 0.528 | 6,728 | 4,172 |
It will be seen that Venus is almost identical with the Earth.
It will be seen that Venus is almost identical to Earth.
MARS
MARS
Two hundred and twenty-six millions of kilometers (140,000,000 miles) from the Sun is the planet Mars, gravitating in an orbit exterior to that which the Earth takes annually round the same center.
Two hundred and twenty-six million kilometers (140,000,000 miles) from the Sun is the planet Mars, orbiting in a path outside the one the Earth follows each year around the same center.
Unfortunate Mars! What evil fairy presided at his birth? From antiquity, all curses seem to have fallen upon him. He is the god of war and of carnage, the protector of armies, the inspirer of hatred among the peoples, it is he who pours out the blood of Humanity in international hecatombs. Here, again, as in the case of Mercury and Venus, the appearance has originated the idea. Mars, in fact, burns like a drop of blood in the depths of the firmament, and it is this ruddy color that inspired its name and attributes, just as the dazzling whiteness of Venus made her the goddess of love and beauty. Why, indeed, should the origins of mythology be sought elsewhere than in astronomy?
Unfortunate Mars! What evil fairy was present at his birth? Throughout history, it seems like all curses have fallen on him. He is the god of war and slaughter, the guardian of armies, the instigator of hatred among nations; he is the one who spills the blood of humanity in massive international sacrifices. Here, just like with Mercury and Venus, the appearance has led to the idea. Mars, in reality, burns like a drop of blood in the vast sky, and it's this reddish color that inspired its name and attributes, just as the bright whiteness of Venus made her the goddess of love and beauty. Why, in fact, should we look for the origins of mythology anywhere other than in astronomy?
While Humanity was attributing to the presumptive influence of Mars the defects inherent in its own terrestrial nature, this world, unwitting of our sorrows, pursued the celestial path marked out for it in space by destiny.
While humanity was blaming the supposed influence of Mars for the flaws in its own earthly nature, this world, unaware of our struggles, continued on the celestial path laid out for it in space by fate.
This planet is, as we have said, the first encountered after the Earth. Its orbit is very elongated, very eccentric. Mars accomplishes it in a period of 1 year, 321 days, 22 hours, i.e., 1 year, 10 months, 21 days, or 687 days. The velocity of its transit is 23 kilometers (14.5 miles) per second; that of the Earth is 30 (19 miles). Our planet, traveling through space at an average distance of 149 million kilometers (93,000,000 miles) from[Pg 133] the central focus, is separated from Mars by an average distance of 76 million kilometers (47,000,000 miles); but as its orbit is equally elliptic and elongated it follows that at certain epochs the two planets approach one another by something less than 60 million kilometers (37,000,000 miles). These are the periods selected for making the best observations upon our neighbor of the ruddy rays. The oppositions of Mars arrive about every twenty-six months, but the periods of its greatest proximity, when this planet approaches to within 56 million kilometers (34,700,000 miles) of the Earth, occur only every fifteen years.
This planet is, as we've mentioned, the first one encountered after Earth. Its orbit is very elongated and eccentric. Mars completes its orbit in 1 year, 321 days, and 22 hours, which is equivalent to 1 year, 10 months, and 21 days, or 687 days. It travels at a speed of 23 kilometers (14.5 miles) per second, while Earth moves at 30 kilometers (19 miles) per second. Our planet orbits around the central focus at an average distance of 149 million kilometers (93,000,000 miles) and is separated from Mars by an average distance of 76 million kilometers (47,000,000 miles). However, since its orbit is also elliptical and elongated, there are times when the two planets come closer to each other, within 60 million kilometers (37,000,000 miles). These are the best times to make observations of our reddish neighbor. Mars is in opposition about every twenty-six months, but the periods of its closest approach, when it gets within 56 million kilometers (34,700,000 miles) of Earth, happen only every fifteen years.
Mars is then passing perihelion, while our world is at aphelion (or greatest distance from the Sun). At such epochs this globe presents to us an apparent diameter 63 times smaller than that of the Moon, i.e., a telescope that magnifies 63 times would show him to us of the same magnitude as our satellite viewed with the unaided eye, and an instrument that magnified 630 times would show him ten times larger in diameter.
Mars is now at its closest point to the Sun, while our planet is at its farthest distance from it. At this time, Earth presents an apparent diameter that is 63 times smaller than that of the Moon, meaning a telescope that magnifies 63 times would make Mars appear the same size as the Moon does to the naked eye, and an instrument that magnifies 630 times would make it appear ten times larger in diameter.
In dimensions he differs considerably from our world, being almost half the size of the Earth. In diameter he measures only 6,728 kilometers (4,172 miles), and his circumference is 21,125 kilometers (13,000 miles). His surface is only 29⁄100 of the terrestrial surface, and his volume only 15⁄100 of our own.
In size, he is quite different from our world, being nearly half the size of Earth. His diameter is just 6,728 kilometers (4,172 miles), and his circumference is 21,125 kilometers (13,000 miles). His surface area is only 29⁄100 of the Earth's surface, and his volume is just 15⁄100 of ours.
This difference in volume causes Mars to be an earth in miniature. When we study his aspects, his geography, his meteorology, we seem to see in space a reduction of our own abode, with certain dissimilarities that excite our curiosity, and make him even more interesting to us.
This difference in size makes Mars like a smaller version of Earth. When we look at its features, geography, and weather, it feels like we’re seeing a scaled-down version of our own planet, with some differences that spark our curiosity and make it even more intriguing to us.
The Martian world weighs nine times and a half less than our own. If we represent the weight of the Earth by 1,000, that of Mars would be represented by 105. His density is much less than our own; it is only 7⁄10 that of the Earth. A man weighing 70 kilograms, transported to the adjacent globe, would weigh only 26 kilograms.
The Martian world weighs about nine and a half times less than ours. If we represent Earth's weight as 1,000, Mars would be represented as 105. Its density is much lower than ours; it's only 7⁄10 that of Earth. A person weighing 70 kilograms on Earth would weigh only 26 kilograms on Mars.
The earliest telescopic observations revealed the existence of more or less accentuated markings upon the surface of Mars. The progress of optics, admitting of greater magnifications, exhibited the form of these patches more clearly, while the study of their motions enabled the astronomers to determine with remarkable precision the diurnal rotation of this planet. It occurs in 24 hours, 37 minutes, 23.65 seconds. Day and night are accordingly a little longer on Mars than on the Earth, but the difference is obviously inconsiderable. The year of Mars consists of 668 Martian days. The inclination of the axis of rotation of this globe upon the plane of its orbit is much the same as our own. In[Pg 135] consequence, its seasons are analogous to ours in intensity, while twice the length, the Martian year being almost equal to two of our years. The intensity of the seasons is indeed more accentuated than upon the Earth, since the orbit of Mars is very elongated. But there, as here, are three quite distinct zones: the torrid, the temperate, and the glacial.
The earliest telescopic observations showed the presence of various noticeable markings on the surface of Mars. As optics advanced and allowed for greater magnification, the shapes of these patches became clearer, and studying their movements helped astronomers determine the planet's rotation with impressive accuracy. A day on Mars lasts 24 hours, 37 minutes, and 23.65 seconds. This means that days and nights are slightly longer on Mars than on Earth, but the difference is minimal. A Martian year is made up of 668 Martian days. The tilt of Mars' axis in relation to its orbital plane is quite similar to Earth's. As a result, its seasons are similar to ours in intensity but last for twice as long, since a Martian year is almost equivalent to two Earth years. The intensity of the seasons is actually more pronounced than on Earth because Mars has a very elongated orbit. However, like Earth, Mars has three distinct climate zones: the tropical, the temperate, and the polar.
By means of the telescope we can follow the variations of the Martian seasons, especially in what concerns the polar snows, which regularly aggregate during the winter, and melt no less regularly during the heat of the summer. These snows are very easily observed, and stand out clearly with dazzling whiteness. The reader can judge of them by the accompanying figure, which sums up the author's observations during one of the recent oppositions of Mars (1900–1901). The size of the polar cap diminished from 4,680 kilometers to 840. The solstice of the Martian summer was on April 11th. The snows were still melting on July 6th. Sometimes they disappear almost entirely during the Martian month that corresponds to our month of August, as never happens with our polar ice. Hence, though this planet is farther away from the Sun than ourselves, it does not appear to be colder, or, at any rate, it is certain that the polar snows are much less thick.
Using a telescope, we can track the changes in Martian seasons, especially regarding the polar ice, which builds up during the winter and melts away during the hot summer months. These ice caps are easy to observe, shining brightly in white. You can see what I mean in the accompanying figure, which summarizes my observations during one of the recent oppositions of Mars (1900–1901). The size of the polar cap shrank from 4,680 kilometers to 840. The summer solstice on Mars was on April 11th. The ice was still melting on July 6th. Sometimes they almost completely vanish during the Martian month that lines up with our August, which doesn't happen with our polar ice. So, even though Mars is farther from the Sun than we are, it doesn't seem to be colder, or at least, it's clear that the polar ice is much thinner.
On the other hand, there are hardly ever clouds on[Pg 136] Mars; the Martian atmosphere is almost always limpid, and one can say that fine weather is the chronic state of the planet. At times, light fogs or a little vapor will appear in certain regions, but they are soon dissipated, and the sky clears up again.
On the other hand, there are rarely clouds on[Pg 136] Mars; the Martian atmosphere is almost always clear, and you could say that nice weather is the usual state of the planet. Occasionally, light fog or some vapor may appear in certain areas, but they quickly fade away, and the sky clears up again.

Since the invention of the telescope, a considerable number of drawings have been made, depicting Mars under every aspect, and the agreement between these numerous observations gives us a sufficient acquaintance with the planet to admit of our indicating the characteristic features of its geography, and of drawing out areographic maps (Ares, Mars). Its appearance can be judged of from the two drawings here reproduced, as made (February, 1901) at the Observatory of Juvisy, and from the general chart drawn from the total sum of observations (Figs. 41, 42 and 43).
Since the invention of the telescope, many drawings have been created, showing Mars from various angles, and the consistency among these numerous observations gives us enough knowledge about the planet to identify the key features of its geography and to create areographic maps (Ares, Mars). Its appearance can be assessed from the two drawings reproduced here, made (February, 1901) at the Observatory of Juvisy, and from the overall chart compiled from all observations (Figs. 41, 42 and 43).
It will be seen at the first glance that the geography of Mars is very different from that of our own globe:[Pg 137] while three-quarters of the Earth are covered with the liquid element, Mars seems to be more evenly divided, and must indeed have rather more land than water. We find no immense oceans surrounding the continents, and separating them like islands; on the contrary, the seas are reduced to long gulfs compressed between the shores, like the Mediterranean for example, nor is it even certain that these gray spots do all represent true seas. It has been agreed to term sea the parts that are lightly tinged with green, and to give the name of continent to the spots colored yellow. That is the hue of the Martian soil, due either to the soil itself, which would resemble that of the Sahara, or, to take a less arid region, that seen on the line between Marseilles and Nice, in the vicinity of the Esterels; or perhaps to some peculiar vegetation. During ascents in a balloon, the author has often remarked that the hue of the ripe corn, with the Sun shining on it, is precisely that presented to us by the continents of Mars in the best hours for observation.
At first glance, it’s clear that the geography of Mars is very different from our own planet:[Pg 137] while three-quarters of Earth is covered in water, Mars appears to have a more balanced distribution, likely having more land than water. There are no vast oceans surrounding continents, separating them like islands; instead, the seas are limited to long gulfs squeezed between the shores, similar to the Mediterranean, for instance, and it’s even questionable whether these gray areas truly represent seas. It has been agreed to call the parts that have a light green tint sea, and to label the yellow areas as continent. That color represents the Martian soil, which may resemble the soil of the Sahara or, in a less arid area, that found between Marseilles and Nice near the Esterels; or it could be due to some unique vegetation. During balloon ascents, the author has often noted that the color of ripe corn, under the Sun, is exactly the same as the color of the continents of Mars during the best observational hours.

As to the "seas," it is pretty certain that there must be water, or some kind of liquid, deriving above all from the melting of the polar snows in spring and summer; but it may possibly be in conjunction with some vegetation, aquatic plants, or perhaps vast meadows, which appear to us from here to be the more considerable in proportion as the water that nourishes them has been more abundant.
As for the "seas," it's pretty clear that there has to be water, or some type of liquid, mainly coming from the melting polar snow in spring and summer. However, it might also be mixed with some greenery, like aquatic plants, or maybe even large meadows, which seem to us to be more significant as the water that supports them is more plentiful.

Mars, like our globe, is surrounded with a protective atmosphere, which retains the rays of the Sun, and must preserve a medium temperature favorable to the conservation of life upon the surface of the planet. But the[Pg 139] circulation of the water, so important to terrestrial life, whether animal or vegetable, which is effected upon our planet by the evaporation of the seas, clouds, winds, rains, wells, rivers and streams, comes about quite differently on Mars; for, as was remarked above, it is rarely that any clouds are observed there. Instead of being vertical, as here, this circulation is horizontal: the water coming from the source of the polar snows finds its way into the canals and seas, and returns to be condensed at the poles by a light drift of invisible vapors directed from the equator to the poles. There is never any rain.
Mars, like our planet, has a protective atmosphere that traps sunlight and helps maintain a temperature suitable for life on its surface. However, the[Pg 139] water circulation, which is essential for life on Earth, whether plant or animal, occurs very differently on Mars. As mentioned earlier, clouds are rarely seen there. Instead of moving vertically as they do here, the circulation is horizontal: water from the polar ice flows into the canals and seas and is then condensed at the poles by a gentle movement of invisible vapors that travel from the equator to the poles. Rain never falls.
We have spoken of canals. One of the great puzzles of the Martian world is incontestably the appearance of straight lines that furrow its surface in all directions, and seem to connect the seas. M. Schiaparelli, the distinguished Director of the Observatory of Milan, who discovered them in 1877, called them canals, without, however, postulating anything as to their real nature. Are they indeed canals? These straight lines, measuring sometimes 600 kilometers (372 miles) in length, and more than 100 kilometers (62 miles) in breadth, have much the same hue as the seas on which they open. For a quarter of a century they have been surveyed by the greater number of our observers. But it must be confessed that, even with the best instruments, we only approach Mars at a distance of 60,000 kilometers (37,200 miles), which is still a little far off, and we may be sure that we do not distinguish the true details of the surface.[11] These details at the limits of visibility produce the appearance of canals to our eyes. They may possibly be lines of lakes, or oases. The future will no doubt clear up this mystery for us.
We’ve talked about canals. One of the biggest mysteries of Mars is definitely the presence of straight lines that crisscross its surface in every direction and seem to connect the seas. M. Schiaparelli, the notable Director of the Milan Observatory, discovered them in 1877 and called them canals, but he didn’t make any claims about what they really are. Are they actually canals? These straight lines can be up to 600 kilometers (372 miles) long and more than 100 kilometers (62 miles) wide, and they look very similar to the seas they connect to. For the last 25 years, many of our observers have studied them. But we have to admit that even with the best instruments, we only get to see Mars from about 60,000 kilometers (37,200 miles) away, which is still too far to clearly see the actual details of the surface.[11] These details, at the edge of what we can see, create the illusion of canals to us. They could really be lines of lakes or oases. The future will surely help us solve this mystery.
As to the inhabitants of Mars, this world is in a situation as favorable as our Earth for habitation, and it would be difficult to discover any reason for perpetual sterility there. It appears to us, on the contrary, by its rapid and frequent variations of aspect, to be a very living world. Its atmosphere, which is always clear, has not the density of our own, and resembles that of the highest mountains. The conditions of existence there vary from ours, and appear to be more delicate, more ethereal.
As for the inhabitants of Mars, this planet is as suitable for life as our Earth, and it would be hard to find any reason for it to be permanently barren. On the contrary, it seems to us, due to its quick and frequent changes in appearance, to be a very vibrant world. Its atmosphere, which is always clear, isn’t as thick as ours and is similar to that of the highest mountains. The living conditions there differ from ours and seem to be more fragile, more ethereal.
There as here, day succeeds to night, spring softens the rigors of winter; the seasons unfold, less disparate than our own, of which we have such frequent reason to complain. The sky is perpetually clear. There are never tempests, hurricanes, nor cyclones, the wind never gets up any force there, on account of the rarity of the atmosphere, and the low intensity of weight.
There, just like here, day follows night, and spring eases the harshness of winter; the seasons progress, less different than our own, about which we often find reasons to complain. The sky is always clear. There are never storms, hurricanes, or cyclones; the wind never picks up much strength there, due to the thin atmosphere and the low intensity of pressure.
Differing from ours, this world may well be a more congenial habitation. It is more ancient than the Earth, smaller, less massive. It has run more quickly through the phases of its evolution. Its astral life is more advanced, and its Humanity should be superior to our own, just as our successors a million years hence, for example, will be less coarse and barbarous than we are at present: the law of progress governs all the worlds, and, moreover, the physical constitution of the planet Mars is less dense than our own.
Unlike our own, this world might be a more welcoming place to live. It’s older than Earth, smaller, and lighter. It has progressed more rapidly through its evolutionary stages. Its life in the cosmos is more developed, and its humanity should be more advanced than ours, just like our future descendants a million years from now will be less uncivilized and primitive than we are now: the law of progress applies to all worlds, and additionally, the physical makeup of the planet Mars is less dense than ours.
There is no need to despair of entering some day into communication with these unknown beings. The luminous points that have been observed are no signals, but high summits or light clouds illuminated by the rising or setting sun. But the idea of communication with them in the future is no more audacious and no less scientific than the invention of spectral analysis, X-rays, or wireless telegraphy.
There’s no need to lose hope about one day communicating with these unknown beings. The bright spots that have been seen are not signals, but rather high peaks or light clouds lit up by the rising or setting sun. The idea of communicating with them in the future is just as feasible and scientific as the inventions of spectral analysis, X-rays, or wireless telegraphy.
We may suppose that the study of astronomy is further advanced in Mars than on the Earth, because humanity itself has advanced further, and because the starry sky is far finer there, far easier to study, owing to the limpidity of its pure, clear atmosphere.
We can assume that the study of astronomy is more advanced on Mars than on Earth, because humanity itself has progressed further, and because the starry sky is much more beautiful and easier to study there, thanks to the clarity of its pure, clear atmosphere.
Two small moons (hardly larger than the city of Paris) revolve rapidly round Mars; they are called Phobos and Deimos. The former, at a distance of[Pg 143] 6,000 kilometers (3,730 miles) from the surface, accomplishes its revolution rapidly, in seven hours, thirty-nine minutes, and thus makes the entire circle of the Heavens three times a day. The second gravitates at 20,000 kilometers (12,400 miles), and turns round its center of attraction in thirty hours and eighteen minutes. These two satellites were discovered by Mr. Hall, at the University of Washington, in the month of August, 1877.
Two small moons (hardly bigger than the city of Paris) orbit Mars quickly; they're called Phobos and Deimos. Phobos, located about[Pg 143] 6,000 kilometers (3,730 miles) from the surface, completes its orbit fast, in seven hours and thirty-nine minutes, allowing it to circle Mars three times a day. Deimos, on the other hand, orbits at a distance of 20,000 kilometers (12,400 miles) and takes thirty hours and eighteen minutes to complete one rotation around Mars. These two moons were discovered by Mr. Hall at the University of Washington in August 1877.
Among the finest and most interesting of the celestial phenomena admired by the Martians, at certain epochs of the year,—now at night when the Sun has plunged into his fiery bed, now in the morning, a little before the aurora,—is a magnificent star of first magnitude, never far removed from the orb of day, which presents to them the same aspects as does Venus to ourselves. This splendid orb, which has doubtless received the most flattering names from those who contemplate it, this radiant star of a beautiful greenish blue, courses in space accompanied by a little satellite, sparkling like some splendid diamond, after sunset, in the clear sky of Mars. This superb orb is the Earth, and the little star accompanying it is the Moon.
Among the most remarkable and intriguing celestial phenomena admired by the Martians at certain times of the year—now at night when the Sun has dipped below the horizon, now in the morning just before dawn—is a stunning first-magnitude star, which is never far from the Sun. It appears to them like Venus does to us. This brilliant orb, which has undoubtedly earned the most flattering names from those who gaze upon it, this shining star with a lovely greenish-blue hue, travels through space with a little satellite that sparkles like a dazzling diamond in the clear Martian sky after sunset. This magnificent orb is the Earth, and the little star that travels with it is the Moon.

Yes, to the Martians our Earth is a star of the morning and evening; doubtless they have determined her phases. Many a vow, and many a hope must have been wafted toward her, more than one broken heart must have permitted its unrealized dreams to wander[Pg 145] forth to our planet as to an abode of happiness where all who have suffered in their native world might find a haven. But our planet, alas! is not as perfect as they imagine.
Yes, to the Martians, our Earth is a morning and evening star; they’ve probably studied its phases. Many promises and hopes must have been sent its way, and more than one broken heart has let its unfulfilled dreams drift toward our planet, hoping it would be a place of happiness where those who have suffered in their own world could find refuge. But our planet, sadly, is not as perfect as they think.
We must not dally upon Mars, but hasten our celestial excursion toward Jupiter.
We shouldn’t waste time on Mars, but quickly move our space journey toward Jupiter.
CHAPTER VI
THE PLANETS
B.—Jupiter, Saturn, Uranus, Neptune.
B.—Jupiter, Saturn, Uranus, Neptune.
Before we attack the giant world of our system, we must halt for a few moments upon the minor planets which circulate between the orbit of Mars and that of Jupiter. These minute asters, little worlds, the largest of which measures scarcely more than 100 kilometers (62 miles) in diameter, are fragments of cosmic matter that once belonged to a vast ring, formed at the time when the solar system was only an immense nebula; and which, instead of condensing into a single globe coursing between Mars and Jupiter, split up into a considerable quantity of particles constituting at the present time the curious and highly interesting Republic of the Asteroids.
Before we explore the massive expanse of our solar system, we need to take a moment to look at the smaller planets that orbit between Mars and Jupiter. These tiny bodies, the largest of which is barely 100 kilometers (62 miles) across, are remnants of cosmic matter that once belonged to a vast ring, formed when the solar system was just a massive nebula. Instead of coming together to form a single planet between Mars and Jupiter, this material broke apart into a variety of particles that now make up the intriguing and fascinating Republic of the Asteroids.
These lilliputian worlds at first received the names of the more celebrated of the minor mythological divinities—Ceres, Pallas, Juno, Vesta, etc., but as they rapidly increased in number, it was found necessary to call them by modern, terrestrial names, and more than one daughter[Pg 147] of Eve, the Egeria of some astronomer, now has her name inscribed in the Heavens. The first minor planet was discovered on the first day of the nineteenth century, January 1, 1801, by Piazzi, astronomer at Palermo. While he was observing the small stars in the constellation of the Bull beneath the clear Sicilian skies, this famous astronomer noticed one that he had never seen before.
These tiny worlds were initially given names based on some of the more famous minor mythological deities—Ceres, Pallas, Juno, Vesta, etc. However, as their numbers quickly grew, it became necessary to assign them modern, earthly names. More than one daughter[Pg 147] of Eve, the muse of a certain astronomer, now has her name written in the Heavens. The first minor planet was discovered on the very first day of the nineteenth century, January 1, 1801, by Piazzi, an astronomer in Palermo. While he was observing the small stars in the constellation of Taurus under the clear Sicilian skies, this renowned astronomer spotted one that he had never seen before.
The next night, directing his telescope to the same part of the Heavens, he perceived that the fair unknown had moved her station, and the observations of the following days left him no doubt as to the nature of the visitor: she was a planet, a wandering star among the constellations, revolving round the Sun. This newcomer was registered under the name of Ceres.
The next night, pointing his telescope at the same part of the sky, he noticed that the mysterious figure had changed her position, and his observations over the next few days confirmed what he suspected: she was a planet, a wandering star among the constellations, orbiting the Sun. This newcomer was named Ceres.
Since that epoch several hundreds of them have been discovered, occupying a zone that extends over a space of more than 400 million kilometers (249,000,000 miles). These celestial globules are invisible to the naked eye, but no year passes without new and numerous recruits being added to the already important catalogue of these minute asters by the patient observers of the Heavens. To-day, they are most frequently discovered by the photographic method of following the displacement of the tiny moving points upon an exposed sensitive plate.
Since that time, hundreds of them have been discovered, covering an area that stretches over more than 400 million kilometers (249,000,000 miles). These celestial objects are invisible to the naked eye, but every year brings new additions to the already extensive catalog of these tiny stars, thanks to the dedicated observers of the sky. Nowadays, they are most often found using photographic methods that track the movement of these small points on an exposed sensitive plate.
JUPITER
Jupiter
And now let us bow respectfully before Jupiter, the giant of the worlds. This glorious planet is indeed King of the Solar System.
And now let’s respectfully bow down to Jupiter, the giant of the worlds. This magnificent planet is truly the King of the Solar System.
While Mercury measures only 4,750 kilometers (2,946 miles) in diameter, and Mars 6,728 kilometers (4,172), Jupiter is no less than 140,920 kilometers (87,400 miles) in breadth; that is to say, eleven times larger than the Earth. He is 442,500 kilometers (274,357 miles) in circumference.
While Mercury has a diameter of just 4,750 kilometers (2,946 miles), and Mars has a diameter of 6,728 kilometers (4,172 miles), Jupiter is a massive 140,920 kilometers (87,400 miles) wide; that's about eleven times larger than Earth. Its circumference is 442,500 kilometers (274,357 miles).
In volume he is equivalent to 1,279 terrestrial globes; hence he is only a million times smaller than the Sun. The previously described planets of our system, Mercury, Venus, the Earth, and Mars combined, would form only an insignificant mass in comparison with this colossus. A hundred and twenty-six Earths joined into one group would present a surface whose extent would still not be quite as vast as the superficies of this titanic world. This immense globe weighs 310 times more than that which we inhabit. Its density is only the quarter of our own; but weight is twice and a half times as great there as here. The constituents of things and beings are thus composed of materials lighter than those upon the Earth; but, as the planet exerts a force[Pg 149] of attraction twice and a half times as powerful, they are in reality heavier and weigh more. A graceful maiden weighing fifty kilograms would if transported to Jupiter immediately be included in the imposing society of the "Hundred Kilos."
In volume, it’s equivalent to 1,279 Earth-sized globes; so it’s only a million times smaller than the Sun. The planets in our solar system—Mercury, Venus, Earth, and Mars—combined would create a tiny mass compared to this giant. One hundred and twenty-six Earths brought together would have a surface area that’s still not as large as this massive world. This enormous globe weighs 310 times more than our planet. Its density is only a quarter of ours; however, weight is two and a half times greater there than here. The materials that make up things and beings are lighter than those on Earth, but since the planet has a gravitational force[Pg 149] that’s two and a half times stronger, they actually feel heavier. A graceful woman weighing fifty kilograms would, if taken to Jupiter, immediately be part of the "Hundred Kilos" club.
Jupiter rotates upon himself with prodigious rapidity. He accomplishes his diurnal revolution in less than ten hours! There the day lasts half as long as here, and while we reckoned fifteen days upon our calendar, the Jovian would count thirty-six. As Jupiter's year equals nearly twelve of ours, the almanac of that planet would contain 10,455 days! Obviously, our pretty little pocket calendars would never serve to enumerate all the dates in this vast world.
Jupiter spins on its axis at an incredible speed. It completes its daily rotation in under ten hours! This means a day there is only half as long as one here, so while we mark fifteen days on our calendar, the people of Jupiter would count thirty-six. Since Jupiter's year is almost twelve of ours, a calendar for that planet would have 10,455 days! Clearly, our cute little pocket calendars would never be enough to track all the dates in that enormous world.
This splendid globe courses in space at a distance of 775,000,000 kilometers (480,500,000 miles) from the Sun. Hence it is five times (5.2) as remote from the orb of day as our Earth, and its orbit is five times vaster than our own. At that distance the Sun subtends a diameter five times smaller than that which we see, and its surface is twenty-seven times less extensive; accordingly this planetary abode receives on an average twenty-seven times less light and heat than we obtain.
This amazing planet travels through space at a distance of 775,000,000 kilometers (480,500,000 miles) from the Sun. This means it's about five times (5.2) farther away from the Sun than our Earth is, and its orbit is five times larger than ours. From that distance, the Sun appears five times smaller than how we see it, and its surface area is twenty-seven times less. As a result, this planet receives, on average, twenty-seven times less light and heat than we do.
In the telescope Jupiter presents an aspect analogous to that likely to be exhibited by a world covered with clouds, and enveloped in dense vapors (Fig. 45).
In the telescope, Jupiter looks similar to what a planet covered in clouds and surrounded by thick mist would probably appear like (Fig. 45).
It is, in fact, the seat of formidable perturbations, of strange revolutions by which it is perpetually convulsed, for although of more ancient formation than the Earth, this celestial giant has not yet arrived at the stable condition of our dwelling-place. Owing to its considerable volume, this globe has probably preserved its original heat, revolving in space as an obscure Sun, but perhaps still burning. In it we see what our own planet must have been in its primordial epoch, in the pristine times of terrestrial genesis.
It is, in fact, the source of intense disturbances, of unusual changes that constantly shake it up. Even though it is older than the Earth, this celestial giant hasn’t yet reached the stable state of our home planet. Because of its large size, this globe has likely kept its original heat, spinning through space like a hidden Sun, but maybe still radiating warmth. In it, we glimpse what our own planet must have looked like in its early days, in the original times of Earth's creation.

Since its orbital revolution occupies nearly twelve years, Jupiter comes back into opposition with the Sun every 399 days, i.e., 1 year, 34 days, that is with one month and four days' delay each year. At these periods it is located at the extremity of a straight line which, passing by the Earth, is prolonged to the Sun. These are the epochs to be selected for observation. It shines then, all night, like some dazzling star of the first magnitude, of excessive whiteness: nor can it be confounded either with Venus, more luminous still (for she is never visible at midnight, in the full South, but is South-west in the evening, or South-east in the morning), nor with Mars, whose fires are ruddy.
Since it takes almost twelve years for Jupiter to complete its orbit, it aligns with the Sun every 399 days, which is 1 year and 34 days—a delay of one month and four days each year. During these times, it is positioned at the end of a straight line that extends from the Earth to the Sun. These are the best times for observation. It shines all night like a bright star of the first magnitude, with a very white appearance. You can't confuse it with Venus, which is even brighter (since Venus is never visible at midnight directly south, but shows up to the southwest in the evening or southeast in the morning), nor with Mars, which has a reddish glow.
In the telescope, the immense planet presents a superb disk that an enlargement of forty times shows us to be the same size to all appearance as that of the Moon seen with the unaided eye. Its shape is not absolutely spherical, but spheroid—that is, flattened at the poles. The flattening is 1⁄17.
In the telescope, the massive planet looks like a stunning disk that, when magnified forty times, appears about the same size as the Moon does to the naked eye. Its shape isn't perfectly spherical but rather spheroid—that is, it’s flattened at the poles. The flattening is 1⁄17.
We know that the Earth's axis dips a certain quantity on the plane of her orbit, and that it is this inclination that produces the seasons. Now it is not the same for Jupiter. His axis of rotation remains almost vertical throughout the course of his year, and results in the complete absence of climates and seasons. There is neither glacial zone, nor tropic zone; the position of[Pg 152] Jupiter is eternally that of the Earth at the season of the equinox, and the vast world enjoys, as it were, perpetual spring. It knows neither the hoar-frost nor the snows of winter. The heat received from the Sun diminishes gradually from the equator to the poles without abrupt transitions, and the duration of day and night is equal there throughout the entire year, under every latitude. A privileged world, indeed!
We know that the Earth's axis tilts at a certain angle relative to its orbit, and it's this tilt that creates the seasons. But Jupiter is different. Its axis of rotation stays nearly vertical all year round, leading to a complete lack of climates and seasons. There are no icy regions or tropical zones; Jupiter's position is always like Earth's during the equinox, and the vast planet experiences what is essentially perpetual spring. It doesn’t have frost or winter snow. The heat from the Sun gradually decreases from the equator to the poles without sudden changes, and day and night are always equal there throughout the year, no matter where you are. What a special world!
It is surrounded by a very dense, thick atmosphere, which undergoes more extensive variations than could be produced by the Sun at such a distance. Spectral analysis detects a large amount of water-vapor, showing that this planet still possesses a very considerable quantity of intrinsic heat.
It is surrounded by a very thick, dense atmosphere, which experiences more significant changes than the Sun could cause at such a distance. Spectral analysis reveals a substantial amount of water vapor, indicating that this planet still has a considerable amount of internal heat.
Most conspicuous upon this globe are the larger or smaller bands or markings (gray and white, sometimes tinted yellow, or of a maroon or chocolate hue) by which its surface is streaked, particularly in the vicinity of the equator. These different belts vary, and are constantly modified, either in form or color. Sometimes, they are irregular, and cut up; at others they are interspersed with more or less brilliant patches. These patches are not affixed to the surface of the globe, like the seas and continents of the Earth; nor do they circulate round the planet like the satellites, in more or less elongated and regular revolutions, but are relatively mobile, like[Pg 153] our clouds in the atmosphere, while observation of their motion does not give the exact period of the rotation of Jupiter. Some only appear upon the agitated disk to vanish very quickly; others subsist for a considerable period.
Most noticeable on this planet are the large and small bands or markings (gray and white, sometimes tinged with yellow, or in shades of maroon or chocolate) that streak its surface, especially near the equator. These different belts change constantly, either in shape or color. Sometimes, they are irregular and fragmented; at other times, they are mixed with brighter patches. These patches aren't fixed to the surface like the seas and continents of Earth; they don't orbit the planet like moons in regular, elongated paths, but are relatively mobile, like[Pg 153] our clouds in the atmosphere. Observing their movement doesn't provide an exact timing for Jupiter's rotation. Some patches only appear briefly on the turbulent disk before disappearing; others last for a significant amount of time.
One has been observed for over a quarter of a century, and appears to be almost immobile upon this colossal globe. This spot, which was red at its first appearance, is now pale and ghostly. It is oval (vide Fig. 45) and measures 42,000 kilometers (26,040 miles) in length by 15,000 kilometers (9,300 miles) in width. Hence it is about four times as long as the diameter of our Earth; that is, relatively to the size of Jupiter, as are the dimensions of Australia in proportion to our globe. The discussion of a larger number of observations leads us to see in it a sort of continent in the making, a scoria recently ejected from the mobile and still liquid and heated surface of the giant Jupiter. The patch, however, oscillates perceptibly, and appears to be a floating island.
One has been watched for over twenty-five years and seems to be almost motionless on this massive planet. This spot, which was red when it first appeared, is now pale and ghostly. It is oval (see Fig. 45) and measures 42,000 kilometers (26,040 miles) in length and 15,000 kilometers (9,300 miles) in width. So, it’s about four times as long as the diameter of Earth; in terms of Jupiter's size, that’s similar to how Australia compares to our planet. A larger number of observations suggests that this could be a sort of continent forming, a scoria recently thrown out from the shifting, still liquid, and heated surface of the giant Jupiter. However, the patch noticeably shifts and seems to be a floating island.
We must add that this vast world, like the Sun, does not rotate all in one period. Eight different currents can be perceived upon its surface. The most rapid is that of the equatorial zone, which accomplishes its revolution in 9 hours, 50 minutes, 29 seconds. A point situated on the equator is therefore carried forward at a speed of 12,500 meters (7 miles) per second, and it is this giddy[Pg 154] velocity of Jupiter that has produced the flattening of the poles. From the equator to the poles, the swiftness of the currents diminishes irregularly, and the difference amounts to about five minutes between the movement of the equatorial stream, and that of the northern and southern currents. But what is more curious still is that the velocity of one and the same stream is subject to certain fluctuations; thus, in the last quarter of a century, the speed of the equatorial current has progressively diminished. In 1879, the velocity was 9 hours, 49 minutes, 59 seconds, and now it is, as we have already seen, 9 hours, 50 minutes, 29 seconds, which represents a substantial reduction. The rotation of the red patch, at 25 degrees of the southern latitude, is effected in 9 hours, 55 minutes, 40 seconds.
We should note that this vast world, like the Sun, does not rotate all at once. Eight different currents can be seen on its surface. The fastest is in the equatorial zone, completing its rotation in 9 hours, 50 minutes, and 29 seconds. A point on the equator moves at a speed of 12,500 meters (7 miles) per second, and it's this incredible[Pg 154] speed of Jupiter that causes the flattening of the poles. From the equator to the poles, the speed of the currents decreases unevenly, with a difference of about five minutes between the equatorial stream and the northern and southern currents. Even more interesting is that the speed of the same stream can fluctuate; over the last quarter-century, the speed of the equatorial current has gradually decreased. In 1879, it was 9 hours, 49 minutes, and 59 seconds, and now, as we've seen, it's 9 hours, 50 minutes, and 29 seconds, which marks a significant reduction. The rotation of the red spot at 25 degrees south latitude occurs in 9 hours, 55 minutes, and 40 seconds.
We are confronted with a strange and mysterious world. It is the world of the future.
We are faced with a strange and mysterious world. It’s the world of the future.
This giant gravitates in space accompanied by a suite of five satellites. These are:
This giant moves through space with a group of five satellites. These are:
Names. | Distance from surface of Jupiter. | Time of revolution. | ||
Kilometers. | Miles. | Days. | Hours. | |
5. | 200,000 | 124,000 | 11 | |
1. Io | 430,000 | 266,000 | 1 | 18 |
2. Europa | 682,000 | 422,840 | 3 | 13 |
3. Ganymede | 1,088,000 | 674,560 | 7 | 4 |
4. Callisto | 1,914,000 | 1,186,680 | 16 | 16 |
The four principal satellites of Jupiter were discovered at the same time, on the same evenings [Pg 155](January 7 and 8, 1610), by the two astronomers who were pointing their telescopes at Jupiter: Galileo in Italy, and Simon Marius in Germany.
The four main moons of Jupiter were discovered simultaneously, on the same nights [Pg 155] (January 7 and 8, 1610), by two astronomers using telescopes to observe Jupiter: Galileo in Italy and Simon Marius in Germany.
On September 9, 1892, Mr. Barnard, astronomer of the Lick Observatory, California, discovered a new satellite, extremely minute, and very near the enormous planet. It has so far received no name, and is known as the fifth, although the four principal are numbered in the order of their distances.
On September 9, 1892, Mr. Barnard, an astronomer at the Lick Observatory in California, discovered a new satellite that is very small and very close to the huge planet. It hasn't been named yet and is referred to as the fifth, while the four main ones are numbered based on their distances.

The four classical satellites are visible in the smallest instruments (Fig. 46): the third is the most voluminous.
The four main satellites can be seen with even the smallest equipment (Fig. 46): the third is the largest.
Such is the splendid system of the mighty Jupiter. Once, doubtless, this fine planet illuminated the troop of worlds that derived their treasure of vitality from him with his intrinsic light: to-day, however, these moons in their turn shed upon the extinct central globe the pale soft light which they receive from our solar focus,[Pg 156] illuminating the brief Jovian nights (which last less than five hours, on account of the twilight) with their variable brilliancy.
Such is the amazing system of the powerful Jupiter. Once, undoubtedly, this beautiful planet lit up the group of worlds that drew their life force from him with his own light: today, however, these moons, in turn, cast the soft, pale light they receive from our sun onto the dead central globe, [Pg 156], illuminating the short Jovian nights (which last less than five hours because of the twilight) with their changing brightness.
At the distance of the first satellite, Jupiter exhibits a disk fourteen hundred times vaster than that of the Full Moon! What a dazzling spectacle, what a fairy scene must the enormous star afford to the inhabitants of that tiny world! And what a shabby figure must our Earth and Moon present in the face of such a body, a real miniature of the great solar system!
At the distance of the first satellite, Jupiter appears with a disk fourteen hundred times larger than that of the Full Moon! What an amazing sight, what a magical scene this massive planet must offer to the residents of that small world! And what a pitiful sight our Earth and Moon must be next to such a giant, a true miniature of the grand solar system!
Our ancestors were well inspired when they attributed the sovereignty of Olympus to this majestic planet. His brilliancy corresponds with his real grandeur. His dominion in the midnight Heavens is unique. Here again, as for Venus, Mars, and Mercury, astronomy has created the legend of the fables of mythology.
Our ancestors were smart to associate the power of Olympus with this magnificent planet. Its brightness truly reflects its greatness. Its reign in the night sky is unmatched. Once more, just like with Venus, Mars, and Mercury, astronomy has shaped the stories of mythology.
Let us repeat in conclusion that our Earth becomes practically invisible for the inhabitants of the other worlds beyond the distance of Jupiter.
Let’s reemphasize in conclusion that our Earth is essentially invisible to the inhabitants of other worlds beyond the distance of Jupiter.
SATURN
SATURN
Turn back now for a moment to the plan of the Solar System.
Turn back now for a moment to the layout of the Solar System.
We had to cross 775 million kilometers (480,000,000 miles) when we left the Sun, in order to reach the [Pg 157]immense orb of Jupiter, which courses in space at 626 million kilometers (388,000,000 miles) from the terrestrial orbit. From Jupiter we had to traverse a distance of 646 million kilometers (400,000,000 miles) in order to reach the marvelous system of Saturn, where our eyes and thoughts must next alight.
We had to travel 775 million kilometers (480,000,000 miles) after leaving the Sun to reach the [Pg 157] massive planet Jupiter, which moves through space at a distance of 626 million kilometers (388,000,000 miles) from Earth's orbit. From Jupiter, we needed to cover 646 million kilometers (400,000,000 miles) to get to the incredible system of Saturn, where our attention should turn next.
Son of Uranus and Vesta, Saturn was the God of Time and Fate. He is generally represented as an aged man bearing a scythe. His mythological character is only the expression of his celestial aspect, as we have seen for the brilliant Jupiter, for the pale Venus, the ruddy Mars, and the agile Mercury. The revolution of Saturn is the slowest of any among the planets known to the ancients. It takes almost thirty years for its accomplishment, and at that distance the Saturnian world, though it still shines with the brilliancy of a star of the first magnitude, exhibits to our eyes a pale and leaden hue. Here is, indeed, the god of Time, with slow and almost funereal gait.
Son of Uranus and Vesta, Saturn was the God of Time and Fate. He is usually depicted as an old man holding a scythe. His mythological character reflects his celestial nature, just like we’ve seen with the brilliant Jupiter, the pale Venus, the reddish Mars, and the quick Mercury. Saturn's orbit is the slowest of any of the planets known to the ancients. It takes nearly thirty years to complete one revolution, and from that distance, the Saturnian world, while still shining brightly like a first-magnitude star, appears to our eyes as a pale and leaden color. Indeed, here is the god of Time, moving with a slow and almost mournful pace.
Poor Saturn won no favor with the poets and astrologers. He bore the horrid reputation of being the inexhaustible source of misfortune and evil fates,—whereof he is wholly innocent, troubling himself not at all with our world nor its inhabitants.
Poor Saturn didn’t earn any favor from poets and astrologers. He had a terrible reputation as the endless source of misfortune and bad luck—something he’s completely innocent of, as he doesn’t concern himself at all with our world or its people.
This world travels in the vastness of the Heavens at a distance of 1,421 million kilometers (881,000,000 miles)[Pg 158] from the Sun. Hence it is ten times farther from the orb of day than the Earth, though still illuminated and governed by the Sun-God. Its gigantic orbit is ten times larger than our own.
This world travels through the vastness of space at a distance of 1,421 million kilometers (881,000,000 miles)[Pg 158] from the Sun. So, it’s ten times farther from the Sun than the Earth, yet still illuminated and influenced by the Sun-God. Its gigantic orbit is ten times larger than ours.
Its revolution round the Sun is accomplished in 10,759 days, i.e., 29 years, 167 days, and as this strange planet rotates upon itself with great rapidity in 10 hours, 15 minutes, its year comprises no less than 25,217 days. What a calendar! The Saturnians must needs have a prodigious memory not to get hopelessly involved in this interminable number of days. A curious world, where each year stands for almost thirty of our own, and where the day is more than half as short again as ours. But we shall presently find other and more extraordinary differences on this planet.
Its revolution around the Sun takes 10,759 days, meaning 29 years and 167 days. Plus, this strange planet spins very quickly on its axis in 10 hours and 15 minutes, making its year a total of 25,217 days. What a calendar! The Saturnians must have an incredible memory to keep from getting completely lost in this endless number of days. It's a fascinating world where each year represents almost thirty of our years, and where a day is more than half again shorter than ours. But soon we will discover even more extraordinary differences on this planet.
In the first place it is nearly nine and a half times larger than our world. It is a globe, not spherical, but spheroidal, and the flattening of its poles, which is one-tenth, exceeds that of all the other planets, even Jupiter. It follows that its equatorial diameter is 112,500 kilometers (69,750 miles), while its polar diameter measures only 110,000 kilometers (68,200 miles).
In the first place, it's about nine and a half times bigger than our world. It's a globe, not perfectly round, but spheroidal, and the flattening of its poles, which is one-tenth, is greater than that of all the other planets, including Jupiter. This means its equatorial diameter is 112,500 kilometers (69,750 miles), while its polar diameter is only 110,000 kilometers (68,200 miles).
In volume, Saturn is 719 times larger than the Earth, but its density is only 128⁄1,000 of our own; i.e., the materials of which it is composed are much less heavy, so that it weighs only 92 times more than our Earth. Its[Pg 159] surface is 85 times vaster than that of the Earth, no insignificant proportion.
In volume, Saturn is 719 times larger than Earth, but its density is only 128⁄1,000 of ours; i.e., the materials it's made of are much lighter, meaning it weighs only 92 times more than our Earth. Its [Pg 159] surface is 85 times greater than that of Earth, which is quite significant.

The dipping of Saturn's axis of rotation is much the same as our own. Hence we conclude that the seasons of this planet are analogous to ours in relative intensity. Only upon this far-off world each season lasts for seven years. At the distance at which it gravitates in space, the heat and light which it receives from the Sun are 90 times less active than such as reach our selves; but it apparently possesses an atmosphere of great density, which may be constituted so that the heat is preserved, and the planet maintained in a calorific condition but little inferior to our own.
The tilt of Saturn's rotation axis is very similar to ours. So, we can conclude that the seasons on this planet are comparable to ours in relative intensity. However, each season here lasts for seven years. At its distance in space, the heat and light it gets from the Sun are 90 times less intense than what we receive; yet, it seems to have a very dense atmosphere, which might be structured in a way that retains heat, allowing the planet to stay in a warm state that’s not too different from our own.
In the telescope, the disk of Saturn exhibits large belts that recall those of Jupiter, though they are broader[Pg 160] and less accentuated (Fig. 47). There are doubtless zones of clouds or rapid currents circulating in the atmosphere. Spots are also visible whose displacement assists in calculating the diurnal motions of this globe.
In the telescope, Saturn's disk shows large bands similar to Jupiter's, although they are wider[Pg 160] and less pronounced (Fig. 47). There are likely areas of clouds or fast winds moving through the atmosphere. There are also visible spots whose movement helps in determining the planet's daily rotation.
The most extraordinary characteristic of this strange world is, however, the existence of a vast ring, which is almost flat and very large, and entirely envelops the body of the planet. It is suspended in the Saturnian sky, like a gigantic triumphal arch, at a height of some 20,000 kilometers (12,400 miles) above the equator. This splendid arch is circular, like an immense crown illuminated by the Sun. From here we only see it obliquely, and it appears to us elliptical; a part of the ring seems to pass in front of Saturn, and its shadow is visible on the planet, while the opposite part passes behind.
The most remarkable feature of this strange world is the presence of a huge ring that is nearly flat and incredibly large, completely surrounding the planet. It hangs in the sky of Saturn like a massive triumphal arch, at an altitude of about 20,000 kilometers (12,400 miles) above the equator. This stunning arch is circular, resembling a giant crown lit by the Sun. From our viewpoint, we see it at an angle, making it look elliptical; one part of the ring appears to cross in front of Saturn, casting a shadow on the planet, while the other part is positioned behind it.
This ring, which measures 284,000 kilometers (176,080 miles) in diameter, and less than 100 kilometers (62 miles) in breadth, is divided into three distinct zones: the exterior is less luminous than the center, which is always brighter than the planet itself; the interior is very dark, and spreads out like a dusky and faintly transparent veil, through which Saturn can be distinguished.
This ring, measuring 284,000 kilometers (176,080 miles) in diameter and under 100 kilometers (62 miles) in width, is split into three distinct areas: the outer part is dimmer than the center, which is consistently brighter than the planet itself; the inner section is very dark and spreads out like a shadowy and slightly transparent veil, through which Saturn can be seen.
What is the nature of these vast concentric circles that surround the planet with a luminous halo? They[Pg 161] are composed of an innumerable number of particles, of a quantity of cosmic fragments, which are swept off in a rapid revolution, and gravitate round the planet at variable speed and distance. The nearer particles must accomplish their revolution in 5 hours, 50 minutes, and the most distant in about 12 hours, 5 minutes, to prevent them from being merged in the surface of Saturn: their own centrifugal force sustains them in space.
What are these huge concentric circles that create a glowing ring around the planet? They[Pg 161] consist of countless particles and a mix of cosmic debris that are rapidly rotating and gravitating around the planet at different speeds and distances. The particles that are closest take about 5 hours and 50 minutes to complete their orbit, while those farthest out take roughly 12 hours and 5 minutes, keeping them from merging into Saturn's surface: their own centrifugal force keeps them floating in space.

With a good glass the effect of these rings is most striking, and one can not refrain from emotion on contemplating this marvel, whereby one of the brothers of our terrestrial country is crowned with a golden diadem.[Pg 162] Its aspects vary with its perspective relative to the Earth, as may be seen from the subjoined figure (Fig. 48).
With a good glass, the effect of these rings is really impressive, and it's hard not to feel moved when you look at this wonder, where one of the brothers of our planet is crowned with a golden crown.[Pg 162] Its appearance changes depending on its position relative to the Earth, as shown in the figure below (Fig. 48).
We must not quit the Saturnian province without mentioning the eight satellites that form his splendid suite:
We can’t leave the Saturnian region without mentioning the eight moons that make up his impressive entourage:
Names. | Distance from the planet. | Time of revolution. | |||
Kilometers. | Miles. | Days. | Hours. | Minutes. | |
1. Mimas | 207,000 | 128,340 | 22 | 37 | |
2. Enceladus | 257,600 | 159,712 | 1 | 8 | 53 |
3. Tethys | 328,800 | 203,856 | 1 | 21 | 18 |
4. Dione | 421,200 | 261,144 | 2 | 17 | 41 |
5. Rhea | 588,400 | 364,808 | 4 | 12 | 25 |
6. Titan | 1,364,000 | 845,680 | 15 | 22 | 41 |
7. Hyperion | 1,650,000 | 1,023,000 | 21 | 6 | 39 |
8. Japhet | 3,964,000 | 2,457,680 | 79 | 7 | 54 |
Here is a marvelous system, with, what is more, eight different kinds of months for the inhabitants of Saturn; eight moons with constantly varying phases juggling above the rings!
Here is an amazing system, with, what’s more, eight different types of months for the people of Saturn; eight moons with ever-changing phases dancing above the rings!
Now we shall cross at a bound the 1,400 million kilometers (868,000,000 miles) that separate us from the last station but one of the immense solar system.
Now we will jump across the 1,400 million kilometers (868,000,000 miles) that separate us from the second to last station in the vast solar system.
URANUS
URANUS
On March 13, 1781, William Herschel, a Hanoverian astronomer who had emigrated to England, having abandoned the study of music to devote himself to the sublime science of the Heavens, was observing the vast[Pg 163] fields with their constellations of golden stars, when he perceived a luminous point that appeared to him to exceed that of the other celestial luminaries in diameter. He replaced the magnification of his telescope by more powerful eye-pieces, and found that the apparent diameter of the orb increased proportionately with the amplification of the power, which does not happen in the case of stars at infinite distance. His observations on the following evenings enabled him to note the slow and imperceptible movement of this star upon the celestial sphere, and left him in no further doubt: there was no star, but some much nearer orb, in all probability a comet, for the great astronomer dared not predict the discovery of a new planet. And it was thus, under the name of cometary orb, that the seventh child of the Sun was announced. The astronomers sought to determine the motions of the new arrival, to discover for it an elliptical orbit such as most comets have. But their efforts were vain, and after several months' study the conclusion was reached that here was a new planet, throwing back the limits of the solar system to a point far beyond that of the Saturnian frontier, as admitted from antiquity.
On March 13, 1781, William Herschel, a Hanoverian astronomer who had moved to England after giving up music to focus on the amazing science of the heavens, was observing the vast[Pg 163] fields filled with constellations of golden stars when he noticed a bright point that seemed larger than the other celestial objects. He switched to stronger lenses in his telescope and found that the apparent size of the object increased with the magnification, which doesn't happen with stars that are infinitely far away. His observations over the next few evenings allowed him to notice the slow and subtle movement of this star across the night sky, leaving no doubt that it wasn't a star at all but some nearby object, most likely a comet, as the great astronomer hesitated to claim the discovery of a new planet. Thus, it was announced as a cometary orb, the seventh child of the Sun. Astronomers tried to determine its motion and figure out an elliptical orbit typical of most comets. However, their efforts were unfruitful, and after months of study, they concluded that it was indeed a new planet, extending the boundaries of the solar system far beyond the long-accepted limit of Saturn.
This new world received the name of Uranus, father of Saturn, his nearest neighbor in the solar empire. Uranus shines in the firmament as a small star of[Pg 164] sixth magnitude, invisible to the unaided eye for normal sight, at a distance of 2,831,000,000 kilometers (1,755,000,000 miles) from the Sun. Smaller than Jupiter and Saturn, this planet is yet larger than Mercury, Venus, Mars, and the Earth together, thus presenting proportions that claim our respect and admiration.
This new world was named Uranus, the father of Saturn, its closest neighbor in the solar system. Uranus shines in the sky like a small star of[Pg 164] sixth magnitude, invisible to the naked eye under normal conditions, located 2,831,000,000 kilometers (1,755,000,000 miles) from the Sun. While smaller than Jupiter and Saturn, this planet is still larger than Mercury, Venus, Mars, and Earth combined, showcasing proportions that deserve our respect and admiration.
His diameter may be taken at about 55,000 kilometers (34,200 miles), that is, rather more than four times the breadth of the terrestrial diameter. Sixty-nine times more voluminous than the Earth, and seventeen times more extensive in surface, this new world is much less than our own in density. The matter of which it is composed is nearly five times lighter than that of our globe.
His diameter is approximately 55,000 kilometers (34,200 miles), which is a bit more than four times the Earth's diameter. It's sixty-nine times more voluminous than Earth and seventeen times larger in surface area, but this new world is much less dense than ours. The material it's made of is nearly five times lighter than that of our planet.
Spectral analysis shows that this distant planet is surrounded with an atmosphere very different from that which we breathe, enclosing gases that do not exist in ours.
Spectral analysis shows that this distant planet is surrounded by an atmosphere that's very different from the one we breathe, containing gases that don't exist in ours.
The Uranian globe courses over the fields of infinity in a vast orbit seventeen times larger than our own, and its revolution lasts 36,688 days, i.e., 84 years, 8 days. It travels slowly and sadly under the pale and languishing rays of the Sun, which sends it nearly three hundred times less of light and heat than we receive. At this distance the solar disk would present a diameter seventeen times smaller than that which we admire, and a[Pg 165] surface three hundred times less vast. A dull world indeed! And what an interminable year! The idle people who are in the habit of being bored must find time even longer upon Uranus than upon our little Earth, where the days pass so rapidly. And if matters are arranged there as here, a babe of a year old, beginning to babble in its nurse's arms, would already have lived as long as an old man of eighty-four in this world.
The Uranian planet moves through the fields of infinity in a huge orbit that is seventeen times larger than ours, and its revolution takes 36,688 days, i.e., 84 years and 8 days. It moves slowly and sadly under the pale and weak rays of the Sun, which gives it nearly three hundred times less light and heat than we get. At this distance, the solar disk would appear seventeen times smaller than the one we admire, and a[Pg 165] surface three hundred times less expansive. A dull world, for sure! And what an endless year! People who usually get bored must find time even slower on Uranus than on our little Earth, where the days fly by. And if things are set up there like they are here, a one-year-old baby, starting to babble in its caregiver's arms, would have lived as long as an eighty-four-year-old man in this world.
But what most seriously complicates the Calendar of the Uranians is the fact that the four moons which accompany the planet accomplish their revolution in four different kinds of months, in two, four, eight, and thirteen days, as is shown in the following table:
But what really complicates the Calendar of the Uranians is that the four moons orbiting the planet complete their revolutions in four different types of months: two, four, eight, and thirteen days, as shown in the following table:
Distance from the planet. | Time of revolution. | ||||
Kilometers. | Miles. | Days. | Hours. | Minutes. | |
1. Ariel | 196,000 | 121,520 | 2 | 12 | 29 |
2. Umbriel | 276,000 | 171,120 | 4 | 3 | 27 |
3. Titania | 450,000 | 279,000 | 8 | 16 | 56 |
4. Oberon | 600,000 | 372,000 | 13 | 11 | 7 |
The most curious fact is that these satellites do not rotate like those of the other planets. While the moons of the Earth, Mars, Jupiter, and Saturn accomplish their revolution from east to west, the satellites of Uranus rotate in a plane almost perpendicular to the ecliptic, and it is doubtless the same for the rotation of the planet.
The most interesting fact is that these satellites don't rotate like those of the other planets. While the moons of Earth, Mars, Jupiter, and Saturn revolve from east to west, the satellites of Uranus rotate in a plane almost perpendicular to the ecliptic, and it's likely the same for the rotation of the planet.
If we had to quit the Earth, and fixate ourselves upon[Pg 166] another world, we should prefer Mars to Uranus, where everything must be so different from terrestrial arrangements? But who knows? Perhaps, after all, this planet might afford us some agreeable surprises. Il ne faut jurer de rien.
If we had to leave Earth and focus on[Pg 166] another planet, we would choose Mars over Uranus, where everything must be so different from how things are here. But who knows? Maybe this planet could still offer us some pleasant surprises. You can’t be sure of anything.
NEPTUNE
NEPTUNE
And here we reach the frontier of the Solar System, as actually known to us. In landing on the world of Neptune, which circles through the Heavens in eternal twilight at a distance of more than four milliard kilometers (2,480,000,000 miles) from the common center of attraction of the planetary orbs, we once again admire the prodigies of science.
And here we arrive at the edge of the Solar System as we know it. By landing on Neptune, which orbits in eternal twilight over four billion kilometers (2,480,000,000 miles) away from the common center of gravitational pull of the planets, we once again marvel at the wonders of science.
Uranus was discovered with the telescope, Neptune by calculation. In addition to the solar influence, the worlds exert a mutual attraction upon each other that slightly deranges the harmony ordered by the Sun. The stronger act upon the weaker, and the colossal Jupiter alone causes many of the perturbations in our great solar family. Now during regular observations of the position of Uranus in space, some inexplicable irregularities were soon perceived. The astronomers having full faith in the universality of the law of attraction, could not do otherwise than attribute these irregularities[Pg 167] to the influence of some unknown planet situated even farther off. But at what distance?
Uranus was discovered using a telescope, while Neptune was found through calculations. Besides the sun's influence, the planets also pull on each other, which slightly disrupts the harmony created by the Sun. The stronger ones affect the weaker ones, and the massive Jupiter is responsible for many of the disturbances in our solar system. During regular observations of Uranus's position in space, some strange irregularities were soon noticed. The astronomers, believing firmly in the universal law of attraction, couldn’t help but link these irregularities[Pg 167] to the influence of some unknown planet located even farther away. But how far?
A very simple proportion, known as Bode's law, has been observed, which indicates approximately the relative distances of the planets from the Sun. It is as follows: Starting from 0, write the number 3, and double successively,
A very simple proportion, known as Bode's law, has been observed, which indicates approximately the relative distances of the planets from the Sun. It is as follows: Starting from 0, write the number 3, and double successively,
0 3 6 12 24 48 96 192 384.
0 3 6 12 24 48 96 192 384.
Then, add the number 4 to each of the preceding figures, which gives the following series:
Then, add the number 4 to each of the previous figures, which gives the following series:
4 7 10 16 28 52 100 196 388.
4 7 10 16 28 52 100 196 388.
Now it is a very curious fact that if the distance between the Earth and the Sun be represented by 10, the figure 4 represents the orbit of Mercury, 7 that of Venus, 16 of Mars; the figure 28 stands for the medium distance of the minor planets; the distances of Jupiter, Saturn, and Uranus agree with 52, 100, and 196.
Now, it's quite interesting that if we use 10 to represent the distance from the Earth to the Sun, then the number 4 represents Mercury's orbit, 7 stands for Venus, and 16 indicates Mars. The number 28 signifies the average distance of the minor planets, while Jupiter, Saturn, and Uranus correspond to 52, 100, and 196 respectively.
The immortal French mathematician Le Verrier, who pursued the solution of the Uranian problem, supposed naturally that the disturbing planet must be at the distance of 388, and made his calculations accordingly. Its direction in the Heavens was indicated by the form of the disturbances; the orbit of Uranus bulging, as it were, on the side of the disturbing factor.
The legendary French mathematician Le Verrier, who worked on solving the Uranus problem, assumed that the disrupting planet must be at a distance of 388 and calculated based on that. The direction in the sky was shown by the pattern of the disturbances; Uranus's orbit appeared to bulge on the side of the disturbing planet.
On August 31, 1846, Le Verrier announced the position of the ultra-Uranian planet, and on September[Pg 168] 23d following, a German astronomer, Galle, at the Observatory of Berlin, who had just received this intelligence, pointed his telescope toward the quarter of the Heavens designated, and, in fact, attested the presence of the new orb. Without quitting his study table, Le Verrier, by the sole use of mathematics, had detected, and, as it were, touched at pen's point the mysterious stranger.
On August 31, 1846, Le Verrier revealed the location of the planet beyond Uranus, and on September[Pg 168] 23rd, a German astronomer named Galle, at the Berlin Observatory, who had just received this news, aimed his telescope at the specified area of the sky and confirmed the presence of the new celestial body. Without leaving his study, Le Verrier, using nothing but mathematics, had discovered and, in a sense, pinpointed the mysterious new planet.
Only, it is proved by observation and calculation that it is less remote than was expected from the preceding law, for it gravitates at a distance of 300, given that from the Earth to the Sun as 10.
Only, it has been shown through observation and calculations that it is closer than expected based on the previous law, since it gravitates at a distance of 300, given that the distance from the Earth to the Sun is 10.
This planet was called Neptune, god of the seas, son of Saturn, brother of Jupiter. The name is well chosen, since the King of the Ocean lives in darkness in the depths of the sea, and Le Verrier's orb is also plunged in the semi-obscurity of the depths of the celestial element. But it was primarily selected to do justice to an English astronomer, Adams, who had simultaneously made the same calculations as Le Verrier, and obtained the same results—without publishing them. His work remained in the records of the Greenwich Observatory.
This planet was named Neptune, the god of the seas, son of Saturn, and brother of Jupiter. The name is fitting because the King of the Ocean resides in darkness in the depths of the sea, and Le Verrier's planet is also submerged in the semi-darkness of the celestial realm. However, it was mainly chosen to give credit to an English astronomer, Adams, who had made the same calculations as Le Verrier at the same time and achieved the same results—without publishing them. His work stayed in the records of the Greenwich Observatory.
The English command the seas, and wherever they dip their finger into the water and find it salt, they feel themselves "at home," and know that "Neptune's trident[Pg 169] is the scepter of the world," hence this complimentary nomenclature.
The English rule the seas, and wherever they touch the water and find it salty, they feel "at home," and understand that "Neptune's trident[Pg 169] is the scepter of the world," which is why they use this flattering term.
Neptune is separated by a distance of four milliards, four hundred million kilometers from the solar center.
Neptune is about four billion, four hundred million kilometers away from the center of the solar system.
At such a distance, thirty times greater than that which exists between the Sun and our world, Neptune receives nine hundred times less light and heat than ourselves; i.e., Spitzbergen and the polar regions of our globe are furnaces compared with what must be the Neptunian temperature. Absolutely invisible to the unaided eye, this world presents in the telescope the aspect of a star of the eighth magnitude. With powerful magnifications it is possible to measure its disk, which appears to be slightly tinged with blue. Its diameter is four times larger than our own, and measures about 48,000 kilometers (29,900 miles), its surface is sixteen times vaster than that of the Earth, and to attain its volume we should have to put together fifty-five globes similar to our own. Weight at its surface must be about the same as here, but its medium density is only 1⁄3 that of the Earth.
At a distance thirty times greater than that between the Sun and our planet, Neptune gets nine hundred times less light and heat than we do; in other words, Spitzbergen and the polar regions of our Earth are like furnaces compared to the likely temperature on Neptune. Completely invisible to the naked eye, this world looks like a star of the eighth magnitude through a telescope. With powerful magnification, it's possible to measure its disk, which appears to have a slight blue tint. Its diameter is four times larger than ours, measuring about 48,000 kilometers (29,900 miles), its surface area is sixteen times bigger than that of Earth, and to match its volume, we would need fifty-five planets like ours. The weight at its surface is probably about the same as here, but its average density is only 1/3 that of Earth.
It gravitates slowly, dragging itself along an orbit thirty times vaster than that of our globe, and its revolution takes 164 years, 281 days, i.e., 164 years, 9 months. A single year of Neptune thus covers several generations[Pg 170] of terrestrial life. Existence must, indeed, be strange in that tortoise-footed world!
It moves slowly, pulling itself around an orbit thirty times larger than our planet, and it takes 164 years and 281 days to complete one revolution, which is 164 years and 9 months. One year on Neptune spans several generations[Pg 170] of life on Earth. Life must be really unusual in that slow-moving world!
While in their rotation period, Mercury accomplishes 47 kilometers (293⁄8 miles) per second, and the Earth 291⁄2 (181⁄8 miles), Neptune rolls along his immense orbit at a rate of only 51⁄2 kilometers (about 31⁄4 miles) per second.
While rotating, Mercury travels at 47 kilometers (293⁄8 miles) per second, while Earth moves at 291⁄2 (181⁄8 miles). Neptune, on the other hand, moves through its massive orbit at a speed of just 51⁄2 kilometers (about 31⁄4 miles) per second.
The vast distance that separates us prevents our distinguishing any details of his surface, but spectral analysis reveals the presence of an absorbent atmosphere in which are gases unknown to the air of our planet, and of which the chemical composition resembles that of the atmosphere of Uranus.
The long distance between us makes it hard to see any details on its surface, but spectral analysis shows that it has an absorbent atmosphere containing gases we've never encountered on Earth. Its chemical makeup is similar to that of Uranus's atmosphere.
One satellite has been discovered for Neptune. It has a considerable inclination, and rotates from east to west.
One moon has been discovered for Neptune. It has a significant tilt and rotates from east to west.
And here we have reached the goal of our interplanetary journey. After visiting the vast provinces of the solar republic, we feel yet greater admiration and gratitude toward the luminary that governs, warms, and illuminates the worlds of his system.
And here we have arrived at the goal of our journey through the planets. After exploring the vast regions of the solar republic, we feel even more admiration and gratitude for the star that rules, warms, and lights up the worlds in its system.
In conclusion, let us again insist that the Earth,—a splendid orb as viewed from Mercury, Venus, and Mars,—begins to disappear from Jupiter, where she becomes no more than a tiny spark oscillating from[Pg 171] side to side of the Sun, and occasionally passing in front of him as a small black dot. From Saturn the visibility of our planet is even more reduced. As to Uranus and Neptune, we are invisible there, at least to eyes constructed like our own. We do not possess in the Universe the importance with which we would endow ourselves.
In conclusion, let's emphasize once more that the Earth—a beautiful planet as seen from Mercury, Venus, and Mars—starts to fade from view on Jupiter, where it becomes just a tiny spark moving back and forth across[Pg 171] the Sun, occasionally passing in front of it as a small black dot. From Saturn, our planet is even less visible. As for Uranus and Neptune, we're completely invisible there, at least to eyes like ours. We don't hold the significance in the Universe that we tend to think we have.
Neptune up to the present guards the portals of our celestial system; we will leave him to watch over the distant frontier; but before returning to the Earth, we must glance at certain eccentric orbs, at the mad, capricious comets, which imprint their airy flight upon the realms of space.
Neptune still protects the gates of our solar system; we'll let him keep an eye on the farthest boundary. But before we head back to Earth, we should take a look at some unusual planets and the wild, unpredictable comets that leave their mark as they soar through the cosmos.
CHAPTER VII
THE COMETS
Shooting Stars, Bolides, Uranoliths or Meteoric Stones
Shooting stars, fireballs, space rocks, or meteorites
What marvels have been reviewed by our dazzled eyes since the outset of these discussions! We first surveyed the magnificent host of stars that people the vast firmament of Heaven; next we admired and wondered at suns very differently constituted from our own; then returning from the depths of space, crossing at a bound the abyss that separates us from these mysterious luminaries, the distant torches of our somber night, terrible suns of infinity, we landed on our own beloved orb, the superb and brilliant day-star. Thence we visited his celestial family, his system, in which our Earth is a floating island. But the journey would be incomplete if we omitted certain more or less vagabond orbs, that occasionally approach the Sun and Earth, some of which may even collide with us upon their celestial path. These are in the first place the comets, then the shooting stars, the fire-balls, and meteorites.
What’s up amazing sights have captivated our eyes since the beginning of these discussions! We first gazed at the stunning array of stars that fill the vast sky above; then we admired and marveled at suns that are very different from our own; after that, we returned from the depths of space, crossing the gap that separates us from these mysterious lights, the distant beacons of our dark night, unimaginable suns of infinity, and landed on our own cherished planet, the radiant day-star. From there, we explored his celestial family, his system, where our Earth is like a floating island. But our journey wouldn’t be complete without mentioning some more unpredictable celestial bodies that occasionally approach the Sun and Earth, some of which might even collide with us on their cosmic path. These include comets, shooting stars, fireballs, and meteorites.
Glittering, swift-footed heralds of Immensity, these[Pg 173] comets with golden wings glide lightly through Space, shedding a momentary illumination by their presence. Whence come they? Whither are they bound?
Glittering, swift-footed messengers of the vastness, these[Pg 173] comets with golden wings glide effortlessly through Space, casting a brief light with their arrival. Where do they come from? Where are they headed?
What problems they propound to us, when, as in some beautiful display of pyrotechnics, the arch of Heaven is illuminated with their fantastic light!
What issues they throw at us when, like a stunning fireworks show, the sky is lit up with their amazing light!
But first of all—what is a Comet?
But first of all—what's a Comet?
If instead of living in these days of the telescope, of spectrum analysis, and of astral photography, we were anterior to Galileo, and to the liberation of the human spirit by Astronomy, we should reply that the comet is an object of terror, a dangerous menace that appears to mortals in the purity of the immaculate Heavens, to announce the most fatal misfortunes to the inhabitants of our planet. Is a comet visible in the Heavens? The reigning prince may make his testament and prepare to die. Another apparition in the firmament bodes war, famine, the advent of grievous pestilence. The astrologers had an open field, and their fertile imagination might hazard every possible conjecture, seeing that misfortunes, great or small, are not altogether rare in this sublunar world.
If instead of living in this era of telescopes, spectrum analysis, and astrophotography, we were back before Galileo, during a time when Astronomy hadn't freed the human spirit, we would say that a comet is a terrifying sight, a dangerous threat that shows up in the clear night sky to signal the worst disasters for the people of our planet. If a comet appears in the sky, the ruling prince might as well write his will and get ready to face death. Another showing in the heavens foretells war, famine, and the arrival of deadly diseases. Astrologers had plenty of opportunities, and their imaginative minds could come up with all kinds of predictions, knowing that misfortunes, big or small, are not exactly uncommon in this world beneath the moon.
How many intellects, and those not the most vulgar, from antiquity to the middle of the last century cursed the apparition of these hirsute stars, which brought desolation to the heart of man, and poured their fatal[Pg 174] effluvia upon the head of poor Humanity. The history of the superstitions and fears that they inspired of old would furnish matter for the most thrilling of romances. But, on the other hand, the volume would be little flattering to the common-sense of our ancestors. Despite the respect we owe our forefathers, let us recall for a moment the prejudices attaching to the most famous comets whose passage, as observed from the Earth, has been preserved to us in history.
How many great minds, and not just the most ignorant, from ancient times to the middle of the last century, cursed the appearance of these hairy stars, which brought despair to humanity and spread their deadly[Pg 174] influence over poor Humanity. The history of the superstitions and fears they inspired in the past could fill the most exciting of novels. However, on the flip side, that book would not be very flattering to the common sense of our ancestors. Even though we should respect our forefathers, let’s take a moment to remember the biases linked to the most famous comets whose appearances, as recorded from Earth, have been passed down to us through history.

Without going back to the Deluge, we note that the Romans established a relation between the Great Comet[Pg 175] of 43 B.C. and the death of Cæsar, who had been assassinated a few months previously. It was, they asserted, the soul of their great Captain, transported to Heaven to reign in the empyrean after ruling here below. Were not the Emperors Lords of both Earth and Heaven?
Without referencing the Flood, we observe that the Romans created a connection between the Great Comet[Pg 175] of 43 BCE and the death of Caesar, who had been assassinated a few months earlier. They claimed it was the soul of their great leader, taken to Heaven to rule in the celestial realm after his time on earth. Were the Emperors not the rulers of both Earth and Heaven?
We must in justice recognize that certain more independent spirits emancipated themselves from these superstitions, and we may cite the reply of Vespasian to his friends, who were alarmed at the evil presage of a flaming comet: "Fear nothing," he said, "this bearded star concerns me not; rather should it threaten my neighbor the King of the Parthians, since he is hairy and I am bald."
We need to acknowledge that some more independent thinkers freed themselves from these superstitions, and we can reference Vespasian’s response to his friends, who were worried about the ominous sign of a blazing comet: "Don’t worry," he said, "this hairy star doesn’t affect me; it should concern my neighbor, the King of the Parthians, since he has hair and I’m bald."
In the year 837 one of these mysterious visitants appeared in the Heavens. It was in the reign of Lewis the Debonair. Directly the King perceived the comet, he sent for an astrologer, and asked what he was to conclude from the apparition. As the answers were unsatisfactory he tried to avert the augury by prayers to Heaven, by ordaining a general fast to all his Court, and by building churches. Notwithstanding, he died three years later, and the historians profited by this slender coincidence to set up a correlation between the fatal star and the death of the Sovereign. This comet, famous in history, is no other than that of Halley, in one of its appearances.
In 837, one of these mysterious visitors appeared in the sky. It was during the reign of Louis the Pious. As soon as the King saw the comet, he called for an astrologer and asked what he should make of the sighting. When the answers weren’t helpful, he tried to change the omen by praying to Heaven, declaring a general fast for everyone at his Court, and building churches. Despite these efforts, he died three years later, and historians took advantage of this minor coincidence to link the comet to the King’s death. This comet, famous in history, is none other than Halley’s Comet, during one of its appearances.
This comet returned to explore the realms near the Sun in 1066, at the moment when William of Normandy was undertaking the Conquest of England, and was misguided enough to go across and reign in London, instead of staying at home and annexing England, thus by his action founding the everlasting rivalry between France and this island. A beneficial influence was attributed to the comet in the Battle of Hastings.
This comet came back to investigate the areas near the Sun in 1066, right when William of Normandy was invading England, and mistakenly chose to go over and rule in London instead of staying home and claiming England for himself, thereby establishing the eternal rivalry between France and this island. The comet was thought to have had a positive impact during the Battle of Hastings.
A few centuries later it again came into sight from the Earth, in 1456, three years after the capture of Constantinople by the Turks. Feeling ran high in Europe, and this celestial omen was taken for a proof of the anger of the Almighty. The moment was decisive; the Christians had to be rescued from a struggle in which they were being worsted. At this conjuncture, Pope Calixtus resuscitated a prayer that had fallen into disuse, the Angelus; and ordered that the bells of the churches should be rung each day at noon, that the Faithful might join at the same hour in prayer against the Turks and the Comet. This custom has lasted down to our own day.
A few centuries later, it reappeared in the sky, in 1456, three years after the Turks captured Constantinople. Emotions were running high in Europe, and this celestial sign was seen as proof of God's anger. The moment was critical; Christians needed to be saved from a challenging situation in which they were losing. At this time, Pope Calixtus revived a prayer that had been forgotten, the Angelus; and he ordered that church bells ring every day at noon so that the faithful could pray together against the Turks and the comet. This tradition has continued to this day.
Again, to the comet of 1500 was attributed the tempest that caused the death of Bartholomew Diaz, a celebrated Portuguese navigator, who discovered the Cape of Good Hope.
Again, the comet of 1500 was blamed for the storm that led to the death of Bartholomew Diaz, a famous Portuguese navigator who discovered the Cape of Good Hope.
In 1528 a bearded star of terrific aspect alarmed the[Pg 177] world, and the more serious spirits were influenced by this menacing comet, which burned in the Heavens like "a great and gory sword." In a chapter on Celestial Monsters the celebrated surgeon Ambroise Paré describes this awful phenomenon in terms anything but seductive, or reassuring, showing us the menacing sword surrounded by the heads it had cut off (Fig. 50).
In 1528, a bearded star of terrifying appearance shocked the[Pg 177] world, and many serious thinkers were affected by this threatening comet, which blazed in the sky like "a great and bloody sword." In a chapter about Celestial Monsters, the famous surgeon Ambroise Paré describes this dreadful phenomenon in a way that is far from appealing or comforting, depicting the threatening sword surrounded by the heads it had severed (Fig. 50).

After Ambroise Paré (1528).

Omens of battle, 1547.
Battle omens, 1547.
Deer and warriors, July 19, 1550.
Deer and warriors, July 19, 1550.
Cavalry, and a bloody branch crossing the sun, June 11, 1554.]
Cavalry, and a bloody branch crossing the sun, June 11, 1554.]
Our fathers saw many other prodigies in the skies; their descendants, less credulous, can study the facsimile reproduced in Fig. 51, of the drawings published in the year 1557 by Conrad Lycosthenes in his curious Book of Prodigies.
Our fathers witnessed many other wonders in the sky; their descendants, less gullible, can look at the replica shown in Fig. 51 of the drawings published in 1557 by Conrad Lycosthenes in his interesting Book of Prodigies.
So, too, it is asserted that Charles V renounced the jurisdiction of his Estates, which were so vast that "the Sun never slept upon them," because he was terrified by the comet of 1556 which burned in the skies with an alarming brilliancy, into passing the rest of his days in prayer and devotion.
So, it is also claimed that Charles V gave up the authority of his Estates, which were so huge that "the Sun never set on them," because he was frightened by the comet of 1556 that blazed in the sky with a shocking brightness, leading him to spend the rest of his life in prayer and devotion.
It is certain that comets often exhibit very strange characteristics, but the imagination that sees in them such dramatic figures must indeed be lively. In the Middle Ages and the Renaissance these were swords of fire, bloody crosses, flaming daggers, etc., all horrible objects ready to destroy our poor human race!
It’s clear that comets often show very strange traits, but anyone who imagines them as dramatic figures must have a vivid imagination. In the Middle Ages and the Renaissance, they were seen as swords of fire, bloody crosses, flaming daggers, and other terrifying things ready to wipe out humanity!
At the time of the Romans, Pliny made some curious distinctions between them: "The Bearded Ones let loose their hair like a majestic beard; the Javelin darts forth like an arrow; if the tail is shorter and ends in a point, it is called the Sword; this is the palest of all the Comets; it shines like a sword, without rays; the Plate or Disk is named in conformity with its figure; its color is amber, the Barrel is actually shaped like a barrel, as it might be in smoke, with light streaming through it; the Horn imitates the figure of a horn erected in the sky,[Pg 180] and the Lamp that of a burning flame; the Equine represents a horse's mane, shaken violently with a circular motion. There are bristled comets; these resemble the skins of beasts with the fur on them, and are surrounded by a nebulosity. Lastly, the tails of certain comets have been seen to menace the sky in the form of a lance."
At the time of the Romans, Pliny made some interesting distinctions between them: "The Bearded Ones let their hair flow like a majestic beard; the Javelin shoots out like an arrow; if the tail is shorter and tapers to a point, it’s called the Sword; this is the palest of all the Comets; it glows like a sword, without rays; the Plate or Disk is named for its shape; its color is amber, the Barrel is actually shaped like a barrel, as if it were in smoke, with light shining through it; the Horn mimics the shape of a horn raised in the sky,[Pg 180] and the Lamp looks like a burning flame; the Equine represents a horse's mane, swaying wildly in a circular motion. There are bristly comets; these look like animal hides with fur, surrounded by a haze. Lastly, the tails of some comets have been seen threatening the sky in the shape of a lance."
These hairy orbs that appear in all directions, and whose trajectories are sometimes actually perpendicular to the plane of the ecliptic, appear to obey no regular law. Even in the seventeenth century the perspicacious Kepler had not divined their true character, seeing in them, like most of his contemporaries, emanations from the earth, a sort of vapor, losing itself in space. These erratic orbs could not be assimilated with the other members of our grand solar family where, generally speaking, everything goes on in regular order.
These hairy orbs that show up in every direction, and whose paths are sometimes actually at right angles to the plane of the ecliptic, seem to follow no consistent rules. Even in the seventeenth century, the insightful Kepler hadn’t figured out their true nature, seeing them, like most of his contemporaries, as emissions from the earth, a kind of vapor fading into space. These unpredictable orbs couldn’t be grouped with the other members of our vast solar family where, generally speaking, everything happens in an orderly fashion.
And even in our own times, have we not seen the people terrified at the sight of a flaming comet? Has not the end of the world by the agency of comets been often enough predicted? These predictions are so to speak periodic; they crop up each time that the return of these cosmical formations is announced by the astronomers, and always meet with a certain number of timid souls who are troubled as to our destinies.
And even in our time, haven’t we seen people scared by the sight of a blazing comet? Haven’t the world’s end predictions due to comets been claimed often enough? These predictions seem to be regular; they appear every time astronomers announce the return of these celestial bodies, and they always find a number of anxious people who worry about our fate.
To-day we know that these wanderers are subject to the general laws that govern the universe. The great Newton announced that, like the planets, they were obedient to universal attraction; that they must follow an extremely elongated curve, and return periodically to the focus of the ellipse. From the basis of these data Halley calculated the progress of the comet of 1682, and ascertained that its motions presented such similarity with the apparitions of 1531 and 1607, that he believed himself justified in identifying them and in announcing its return about the year 1759. Faithful to the call made upon it, irresistibly attracted by the Orb of Day, the comet, at first pale, then ardent and incandescent, returned at the date assigned to it by calculation, three years after the death of the illustrious astronomer. Shining upon his grave it bore witness to the might of human thought, able to snatch the profoundest secrets from the Heavens!
Today we know that these wanderers are subject to the general laws that govern the universe. The great Newton announced that, like the planets, they follow universal attraction; they must trace an extremely elongated path and return periodically to the focus of the ellipse. Based on this information, Halley calculated the trajectory of the comet of 1682 and determined that its movements were similar to the appearances in 1531 and 1607, which led him to confidently identify them and predict its return around 1759. True to its call and irresistibly drawn by the Sun, the comet, initially faint and then bright and fiery, returned on the date calculated, three years after the death of the renowned astronomer. Shining over his grave, it testified to the power of human thought, capable of uncovering the deepest secrets of the Heavens!
This fine comet returns every seventy-six years, to be visible from the Earth, and has already been seen twenty-four times by the astonished eyes of man. It appears, however, to be diminishing in magnitude. Its last appearance was in 1835, and we shall see it again in 1910, a little sooner than its average period, the attraction of Jupiter having this time slightly accelerated its course, while in 1759 it retarded it.
This remarkable comet comes back every seventy-six years, making it visible from Earth, and it has already been spotted twenty-four times by amazed humans. However, it seems to be getting fainter. Its most recent appearance was in 1835, and we'll see it again in 1910, a bit sooner than usual, since Jupiter's gravitational pull has sped up its path this time, while in 1759, it slowed it down.
The comets thus follow a very elongated orbit, either elliptic, turning round the Sun, or parabolic, dashing out into space. In the first case, they are periodic (Fig. 52), and their return can be calculated. In the second they surprise us unannounced, and return to the abysses of eternity to reappear no more.
The comets have a very elongated orbit, either elliptical, circling around the Sun, or parabolic, shooting off into space. In the first case, they are periodic (Fig. 52), and we can calculate their return. In the second case, they catch us off guard, disappearing into the depths of eternity, never to be seen again.

Their speed is even greater than that of the planets, it is equivalent to this, multiplied by the square root of 2, that is to say by 1.414. Thus at the distance of the Earth from the Sun this velocity = 29,500 meters (18 miles) per second, multiplied by the above number, that is, 41,700 meters (over 25 miles). At the distance of Mercury it = 47 × 1.414 or 66,400 meters (over 40 miles) per second.
Their speed is even greater than that of the planets; it equals this, multiplied by the square root of 2, which is 1.414. So, at the distance from the Earth to the Sun, this velocity is 29,500 meters (18 miles) per second, multiplied by that number, which means it’s 41,700 meters (over 25 miles) per second. At the distance of Mercury, it equals 47 × 1.414, or 66,400 meters (over 40 miles) per second.
Among the numerous comets observed, we do not as yet know more than some twenty of which the orbit has been determined. Periodicity in these bearded orbs[Pg 183] is thus exceptional, if we think of the innumerable multitude of comets that circle through the Heavens. Kepler did not exaggerate when he said "there are as many comets in the skies as there are fishes in the sea." These scouts of the sidereal world constitute a regular army, and if we are only acquainted with the dazzling generals clad in gold, it is because the more modest privates can only be detected in the telescope. Long before the invention of the latter, these wanderers in the firmament roamed through space as in our own day, but they defied the human eye, too weak to detect them. Then they were regarded as rare and terrible objects that no one dared to contemplate. To-day they may be counted by hundreds. They have lost in prestige and in originality; but science is the gainer, since she has thus endowed the solar system with new members. No year passes without the announcement of three or four new arrivals. But the fine apparitions that attract general attention by their splendor are rare enough.
Among the many comets we've observed, we still only know the orbits of about twenty. Periodicity in these "hairy stars" is quite rare, considering the countless comets that move through the skies. Kepler wasn't exaggerating when he said, "there are as many comets in the skies as there are fish in the sea." These wanderers of the starry world form a regular army, and while we're only familiar with the brilliant leaders dressed in gold, the more humble ones can only be seen through a telescope. Long before this invention, these travelers of the sky moved through space just like today, but they eluded the human eye, which was too weak to see them. Back then, they were seen as rare and frightening phenomena that no one dared to look at. Today, we can count them by the hundreds. They've lost some of their prestige and uniqueness, but science has benefited because it has added new members to the solar system. No year goes by without the announcement of three or four new ones. However, the beautiful displays that capture everyone's attention with their brilliance remain quite rare.
These eccentric visitors do not resemble the planets, for they have no opaque body like the Earth, Venus, Mars, or any of the rest. They are transparent nebulosities, of extreme lightness, without mass nor density. We have just photographed the comet of the moment, July, 1903: the smallest stars are visible through its tail, and even through the nucleus.
These unusual visitors don’t look like the planets because they don’t have a solid form like Earth, Venus, Mars, or the others. They are transparent clouds, incredibly light, without mass or density. We’ve just captured a photo of the comet of the moment, July 1903: the tiniest stars can be seen through its tail and even through its core.
They arrive in every direction from the depths of space, as though to reanimate themselves in the burning, luminous, electric solar center.
They come from all directions of space, as if to revive themselves in the blazing, bright, electric center of the sun.
Attracted by some potent charm toward this dazzling focus, they come inquisitive and ardent, to warm themselves at its furnace. At first pale and feeble, they are born again when the Sun caresses them with his fervid heat. Their motions accelerate, they haste to plunge wholly into the radiant light. At length they burst out luminous and superb, when the day-star penetrates them with his burning splendor, illuminates them with a marvelous radiance, and crowns them with glory. But the Sun is generous. Having showered benefits upon these gorgeous celestial butterflies that flutter round him as round some altar of the gods, he grants them liberty to visit other heavens, to seek fresh universes....
Attracted by a powerful allure towards this dazzling center, they arrive curious and eager, aiming to warm themselves at its furnace. Initially pale and weak, they are revitalized when the Sun embraces them with its intense heat. Their movements quicken as they rush to immerse themselves completely in the radiant light. Eventually, they burst forth bright and magnificent when the sun penetrates them with its fierce splendor, illuminating them with a stunning glow and crowning them with glory. But the Sun is generous. After showering these beautiful celestial butterflies, which flit around him like they're at a divine altar, he gives them the freedom to explore other realms, to seek new universes....
The original parabola is converted into an ellipse, if the imprudent adventurer in returning to the Sun passes near some great planet, such as Jupiter, Saturn, Uranus, or Neptune, and suffers its attraction. It is then imprisoned by our system, and can no longer escape from it. After reenforcement at the solar focus, it must return to the identical point at which it felt the first pangs of a new destiny. Henceforward, it belongs to our celestial family, and circles in a closed curve.[Pg 185] Otherwise, it is free to continue its rapid course toward other suns and other systems.
The original parabola turns into an ellipse if the reckless traveler, on its way back to the Sun, gets close to a massive planet like Jupiter, Saturn, Uranus, or Neptune and feels its gravitational pull. It then gets trapped by our solar system and can’t break free. After getting a boost from the Sun, it must return to the exact spot where it first experienced the beginnings of a new fate. From then on, it is part of our celestial family and travels in a closed orbit.[Pg 185] Otherwise, it can keep speeding along toward other stars and systems.
As a rule, the telescope shows three distinct parts in a comet. There is first the more brilliant central point, or nucleus, surrounded by a nebulosity called the hair, or brush, and prolonged in a luminous appendix stretching out into the tail. The head of the comet is the brush and the nucleus combined.
As a general rule, the telescope reveals three distinct parts in a comet. First, there's the brighter central point, or nucleus, surrounded by a fuzzy area known as the hair or brush, extending into a glowing appendage that forms the tail. The head of the comet is the combination of the brush and the nucleus.

It is usually supposed that the tail of a comet follows it throughout the course of its peregrinations. Nothing of the kind. The appendix may even precede the nucleus; it is always opposite the Sun,—that is to say, it is situated on the prolongation of a straight line, starting from the Sun, and passing through the nucleus (Fig. 53). The tail does not exist, so long as the comet is at a distance from the orb of day; but in approaching the Sun, the nebulosity is heated and dilates, giving birth[Pg 186] to those mysterious tails and fantastic streamers whose dimensions vary considerably for each comet. The dilations and transformations undergone by the tail suggest that they may be due to a repulsive force emanating from the Sun, an electric charge transmitted doubtless through the ether. It is as though Phœbus blew upon them with unprecedented force.
It’s commonly thought that a comet's tail follows it during its travels. That’s not the case. The tail can actually come before the head; it’s always opposite the Sun—meaning it’s located along a straight line that starts from the Sun and passes through the head (Fig. 53). The tail doesn’t exist when the comet is far from the Sun; but as it gets closer, the gas and dust heat up and spread out, creating those mysterious tails and colorful streamers whose sizes vary greatly from one comet to another. The changes and transformations that happen to the tail suggest they might be caused by a repulsive force coming from the Sun, likely an electrical charge transmitted through space. It’s as if the Sun is blowing on them with incredible force.
Telescopic comets are usually devoid of tail, even when they reach the vicinity of the Sun. They appear as pale nebulosities, rounded or oval, more condensed toward the center, without, however, showing any distinct nucleus. These stars are only visible for a minute fraction of their course, when they reach a point not far from the Sun and the terrestrial orbit.
Telescopic comets usually don’t have tails, even when they get close to the Sun. They look like pale fuzzy blobs, rounded or oval, denser in the middle, but without any clear nucleus. These comets are only visible for a brief moment during their journey, when they’re near the Sun and the Earth’s orbit.
The finest comets of the last century were those of 1811, 1843, 1858, 1861, 1874, 1880, 1881, and 1882. The Great Comet of 1811, after spreading terror over certain peoples, notably in Russia, became the providence of the vine-growers. As the wine was particularly good and abundant that year, the peasants attributed this happy result to the influence of the celestial visitant.
The best comets of the last century were those of 1811, 1843, 1858, 1861, 1874, 1880, 1881, and 1882. The Great Comet of 1811, after causing panic among some people, especially in Russia, turned into a blessing for grape-growers. Since the wine that year was especially good and plentiful, the farmers credited this fortunate outcome to the presence of the comet.
In 1843 one of these strange messengers from the Infinite appeared in our Heavens. It was so brilliant that it was visible in full daylight on February 28th, alongside of the Sun. This splendid comet was [Pg 187]accompanied by a marvelous rectilinear tail measuring 300,000,000 kilometers (186,000,000 miles) in length, and its flight was so rapid that it turned the solar hemisphere at perihelion in two hours, representing a speed of 550 kilometers (342 miles) a second.
In 1843, one of these strange messengers from the Infinite appeared in our skies. It was so bright that it could be seen in broad daylight on February 28th, next to the Sun. This amazing comet was [Pg 187] accompanied by a stunning straight tail that measured 300,000,000 kilometers (186,000,000 miles) long, and it moved so quickly that it swept across the solar hemisphere at perihelion in just two hours, achieving a speed of 550 kilometers (342 miles) per second.
But the most curious fact is that this radiant apparition passed so near the Sun that it must have traversed its flames, and yet emerged from them safe and sound.
But the most interesting fact is that this bright figure passed so close to the Sun that it must have gone through its flames, and yet came out of them unharmed.
Noteworthy also was the comet of 1858 (Fig. 49), discovered at Florence by Donati. Its tail extended to a length of 90,000,000 kilometers (55,900,000 miles), and its nucleus had a diameter of at least 900 kilometers (559 miles). It is a curious coincidence that the wine was remarkably excellent and abundant in that year also.
Notable as well was the comet of 1858 (Fig. 49), discovered in Florence by Donati. Its tail stretched to a length of 90,000,000 kilometers (55,900,000 miles), and its nucleus had a diameter of at least 900 kilometers (559 miles). It’s an interesting coincidence that the wine was exceptionally good and plentiful that year as well.
The comet of 1861 almost rivaled the preceding.
The comet of 1861 nearly matched the one before it.
Coggia's Comet, in 1874, was also remarkable for its brilliancy, but was very inferior to the last two. Finally, the latest worthy of mention appeared in 1882. This magnificent comet also touched the Sun, traveling at a speed of 480 kilometers (299 miles) per second. It crossed the gaseous atmosphere of the orb of day, and then continued its course through infinity. On the day of, and that following, its perihelion, it could be detected with the unaided eye in full daylight, enthroned in the[Pg 188] Heavens beside the dazzling solar luminary. For the rest, it was neither that of 1858 nor of 1861.
Coggia's Comet in 1874 was also notable for its brightness, but it was much less impressive than the last two. Finally, the most recent one worth mentioning appeared in 1882. This stunning comet also grazed the Sun, traveling at a speed of 480 kilometers (299 miles) per second. It passed through the Sun's gaseous atmosphere and then continued its journey through space. On the day of and the day after its closest approach to the Sun, it could be seen with the naked eye in broad daylight, shining brightly next to the brilliant solar star. Apart from that, it wasn't like the comets of 1858 or 1861.
Since 1882 we have not been favored with a visit from any fine comet; but we are prepared to give any such a reception worthy of their magnificence: first, because now that we have fathomed them we are no longer awestruck; second, because we would gladly study them more closely.
Since 1882, we haven't had the pleasure of a visit from any spectacular comet; however, we're ready to give a warm welcome fit for their grandeur. First, because now that we understand them better, we’re no longer in awe; second, because we'd happily examine them more closely.
In short, these hirsute stars, whose fantastic appearance impressed the imagination of our ancestors so vividly, are no longer formidable. Their mass is inconsiderable; they seem to consist mainly of the lightest of gases. Analysis of their incandescence reveals a spectrum closely resembling that of many nebulæ; the presence of carbon is more particularly obvious. Even the nucleus is not solid, and is often transparent.
In short, these hairy stars, whose amazing appearance captivated our ancestors so much, are no longer intimidating. They have little mass; they mostly seem to be made up of the lightest gases. Analysis of their brightness shows a spectrum that looks a lot like that of many nebulae; the presence of carbon is especially noticeable. Even the core isn’t solid and is often transparent.
It is fair to say that the action of a comet might be deleterious if one of these orbs were to arrive directly upon us. The transformation of motion into heat, and the combination of the cometary gases with the oxygen of our atmosphere might produce a conflagration, or a general poisoning of the atmosphere.
It’s safe to say that if a comet were to come right at us, it could be harmful. The way its movement turns into heat, along with the comet's gases mixing with the oxygen in our atmosphere, could lead to a fire or a widespread poisoning of the air.
But the collision of a comet with a planet is almost an impossibility. This phenomenon could only occur if the comet crossed the planetary orbit at the exact[Pg 189] moment at which the planet was passing. When we think of the immensity of space, of the extraordinary length of way traversed by a world in its annual journey round the Sun, and the speed of its rotation, we see why this coincidence is hardly likely to occur. Thus, among the hundreds of comets catalogued, a few only cut the terrestrial orbit. One of them, that of 1832, traversed the path of our globe in the nights of October 29 and 30 in that year; but the Earth only passed the same point thirty days later, and at the critical period was more than 80,000,000 kilometers (50,000,000 miles) away from the comet.
But the chance of a comet colliding with a planet is almost impossible. This could only happen if the comet crossed the planet's orbit at the exact[Pg 189] moment when the planet was passing through. When we consider the vastness of space, the incredible distance a planet travels in its yearly journey around the Sun, and its rotation speed, it's clear why this coincidence is so unlikely. Therefore, among the hundreds of comets that have been cataloged, only a few intersect with Earth's orbit. One of them, from 1832, crossed our planet's path on the nights of October 29 and 30 that year; however, Earth only reached that same point thirty days later and was over 80,000,000 kilometers (50,000,000 miles) away from the comet at that critical time.
On June 30, 1861, however, the Earth passed through the extremity of the tail of the Great Comet of that year. No one even noticed it. The effects were doubtless quite immaterial.
On June 30, 1861, though, the Earth passed through the very end of the tail of that year's Great Comet. Nobody even noticed it. The effects were probably insignificant.
In 1872 we were to collide with Biela's Comet, lost since 1852; now, as we shall presently see, we came with flying colors out of that disagreeable situation, because the comet had disintegrated, and was reduced to powder. So we may sleep in peace as regards future danger likely to come to us from comets. There is little fear of the destruction of humanity by these windy bags.
In 1872, we were supposed to crash into Biela's Comet, which had been missing since 1852; however, as we will soon see, we emerged from that tricky situation quite well because the comet had broken apart and turned into dust. So we can rest easy about any future threats from comets. There's little chance of humanity being wiped out by these fluffy celestial objects.
These ethereal beauties whose blond locks float carelessly upon the azure night are not concerned with us; they seem to have no other preoccupation than to[Pg 190] race from sun to sun, visiting new Heavens, indifferent to the astonishment they produce in us. They speed restlessly and tirelessly through infinity; they are the Amazons of space.
These otherworldly beauties with their flowing blonde hair drifting in the dark blue night don’t pay us any mind; they seem to have no worries aside from [Pg 190] racing from one sun to another, exploring new realms, completely indifferent to the awe they inspire in us. They rush relentlessly and endlessly through the cosmos; they are the Amazons of space.
What suns, what worlds must they have visited since the moment of their birth! If these splendid fugitives could relate the story of their wanderings, how gladly should we listen to the enchanting descriptions of the various abodes they have journeyed to! But alas! these mysterious explorers are dumb; they tell none of their secrets, and we must needs respect their enigmatic silence.
What suns, what worlds must they have seen since the moment they were born! If these amazing travelers could share their stories, how eagerly would we hear the captivating tales of all the places they've been! But sadly, these mysterious explorers can't speak; they reveal none of their secrets, and we have to honor their puzzling silence.
Yet, some of them have left us a modest token of remembrance, an almost impalpable nothing, sufficient, however, to enable us to address our thanks to the considerate messenger.
Yet, some of them have left us a small token of remembrance, an almost intangible nothing, enough, however, to allow us to express our gratitude to the thoughtful messenger.
Can there be any one upon the Earth who has not been struck by the phosphorescent lights that glide through the somber night, leaving a brilliant silver or golden track—the luminous, ephemeral trail of a meteor?
Can there really be anyone on Earth who hasn't been amazed by the glowing lights that move through the dark night, leaving a shining silver or golden path—the bright, fleeting trail of a meteor?
Sometimes, when Night has silently spread the immensity of her wings above the weary Earth, a shining speck is seen to detach itself in the shades of evening from the starry vault, shooting lightly through the constellations to lose itself in the infinitude of space.
Sometimes, when Night has quietly stretched her vast wings over the tired Earth, a bright spot appears to break free from the starry sky, darting gracefully through the constellations to disappear into the endlessness of space.

These bewitching sparks attract our eyes and chain our senses. Fascinating celestial fireflies, their[Pg 192] dainty flames dart in every direction through space, sowing the fine dust of their gilded wings upon the fields of Heaven. They are born to die; their life is only a breath; yet the impression which they make upon the imagination of mortals is of the profoundest.
These enchanting sparks catch our eyes and captivate our senses. Fascinating celestial fireflies, their[Pg 192] delicate flames flicker in every direction through space, scattering the fine dust of their golden wings across the fields of Heaven. They are meant to die; their life is just a fleeting moment; yet the impact they leave on the imagination of humans is incredibly deep.
The young girl dreaming in the delicious tranquillity of the transparent night smiles at this charming sister in the Heavens (Fig. 54). What can not this adorable star announce to the tender and loving heart? Is it the shy messenger of the happiness so long desired? Its unpremeditated appearance fills the soul with a ray of hope and makes it tremble. It is a golden beam that glides into the heart, expanding it in the thrills of a sudden and ephemeral pleasure.... The radiant meteor seems to quit the velvet of the deep blue sky to respond to the appeal of the imploring voice that seeks its succor.
The young girl dreaming in the peaceful calm of the clear night smiles at this beautiful sister in the sky (Fig. 54). What could this lovely star be trying to tell the tender and loving heart? Is it the shy messenger of the happiness that has been longed for? Its unexpected appearance fills the soul with a spark of hope and makes it quiver. It’s a golden ray that slips into the heart, expanding it with the thrill of a fleeting joy... The bright meteor seems to leave the soft, deep blue sky to answer the call of the pleading voice that seeks its help.
What secrets has it not surprised! And who bears malice against it? It is the friend of the betrothed who invoke its passage to confide their wishes, and associate it with their dreams. Tradition holds that if a wish be formulated during the visible passage of a meteor it will certainly be fulfilled before the year is out. Between ourselves, however, this is but a surviving figment of the ancestral imagination, for this celestial jewel takes no such active part in the doings of Humanity.... Besides, try to express a wish distinctly in a second!
What secrets has it not revealed! And who holds a grudge against it? It’s the friend of those engaged who call upon its appearance to share their hopes and connect it with their dreams. Tradition says that if you make a wish while a meteor is visible, it will definitely come true before the year ends. However, between us, this is just a lingering remnant of old beliefs, since this celestial gem doesn’t really play any role in human affairs... Besides, good luck trying to clearly express a wish in just a second!
It is a curious fact that while comets have so often spread terror on the Earth, shooting stars should on the contrary have been regarded with benevolent feelings at all times. And what is a shooting star? These dainty excursionists from the celestial shores are not, as is supposed, true stars. They are atoms, nothings, minute fragments deriving in general from the disintegration of comets. They come to us from a vast distance, from millions on millions of miles, and circle in swarms around the Sun, following a very elongated ellipse which closely resembles that of the cometary orbit. Their flight is extremely rapid, reaching sometimes more than 40 kilometers (25 miles) per second, a cometary speed that is, as we have seen, greatly above that of our terrestrial vehicle, which amounts to 29 to 30 kilometers (about 19 miles).
It’s interesting that while comets have often frightened people on Earth, shooting stars have generally been seen as something positive. So, what exactly is a shooting star? These delicate travelers from the skies aren't really stars at all. They are tiny particles, essentially nothing, small fragments that usually come from the breakup of comets. They travel to us from great distances, millions upon millions of miles away, and orbit the Sun in groups, following a long, stretched-out path that looks a lot like a comet’s orbit. They move incredibly fast, sometimes reaching over 40 kilometers (25 miles) per second, which is much quicker than the speed of our earthly vehicles, which is about 29 to 30 kilometers (around 19 miles).
These little corpuscles are not intrinsically luminous; but when the orbit of a swarm of meteors crosses our planet, a violent shock arises, the speed of which may be as great as 72 kilometers (45 miles) in the first second if we meet the star shower directly; the average rate, however, does not exceed 30 to 40 kilometers (19 to 25 miles), for these meteors nearly always cross our path obliquely. The height at which they arrive is usually 110 kilometers (68 miles), and 80 kilometers (50 miles) at the moment of disappearance of the meteor; but[Pg 194] shooting stars have been observed at 300 kilometers (186 miles).
These tiny particles aren't naturally bright; however, when a swarm of meteors crosses our planet, it creates a powerful shock that can reach speeds of up to 72 kilometers (45 miles) in the first second if we encounter the meteor shower directly. On average, though, the speed is between 30 to 40 kilometers (19 to 25 miles) because these meteors usually cross our path at an angle. They typically arrive at a height of about 110 kilometers (68 miles) and vanish at around 80 kilometers (50 miles), but[Pg 194] some shooting stars have been seen at heights of 300 kilometers (186 miles).
The friction caused by this collision high up in the atmosphere transforms the motion into heat. The molecules incandesce, and burn like true stars with a brilliancy that is often magnificent.
The friction from this collision high in the atmosphere turns motion into heat. The molecules glow and burn like real stars with a brightness that is often spectacular.
But their glory is of short duration. The excessive heat resulting from the shock consumes the poor firefly; its remains evaporate, and drop slowly to the Earth, where they are deposited on the surface of the soil in a sort of ferruginous dust mixed with carbon and nickel. Some one hundred and forty-six milliards of them reach us annually, as seen by the unaided eye, and many more in the telescope; the effect of these showers of meteoric matter is an insensible increase in the mass of our globe, a slight lessening of its rotary motion, and the acceleration of the lunar movements of revolution.
But their glory is short-lived. The intense heat from the impact burns up the poor firefly; its remnants evaporate and slowly fall to the Earth, where they settle on the soil as a kind of rusty dust mixed with carbon and nickel. Around one hundred and forty-six billion of them reach us each year, visible to the naked eye, and many more through a telescope; the result of these showers of meteoric material is a barely noticeable increase in the mass of our planet, a slight decrease in its rotational speed, and a speeding up of the Moon's orbit.
Although the appearance of shooting stars is a common enough phenomenon, visible every night of the year, there are certain times when they arrive in swarms, from different quarters of the sky. The most remarkable dates in this connection are the night of August 10th and the morning of November 14th. Every one knows the shooting stars of August 10th, because they arrive in the fine warm summer evenings so favorable to general contemplation of the Heavens. The [Pg 195]phenomenon lasts till the 12th, and even beyond, but the maximum is on the 10th. When the sky is very clear, and there is no moon, hundreds of shooting stars can be counted on those three nights, sometimes thousands. They all seem to come from the same quarter of the Heavens, which is called the radiant, and is situated for the August swarm in the constellation of Perseus, whence they have received the name of Perseids. Our forefathers also called them the tears of St. Lawrence, because the feast of that saint is on the same date. These shooting stars describe a very elongated ellipse, and their orbit has been identified with that of the Great Comet of 1862.
Even though shooting stars are a common sight, visible every night of the year, there are certain times when they come in groups from different parts of the sky. The most notable times for this are the night of August 10th and the morning of November 14th. Everyone knows about the shooting stars on August 10th because they show up on warm summer evenings that are perfect for stargazing. The [Pg 195] phenomenon lasts until the 12th and sometimes even longer, but the peak is on the 10th. When the sky is really clear and there’s no moon, you can count hundreds of shooting stars over those three nights, sometimes even thousands. They all seem to come from the same area of the sky, known as the radiant, which for the August shower is located in the constellation Perseus, giving them the name Perseids. Our ancestors referred to them as the tears of St. Lawrence because his feast day falls on the same date. These shooting stars trace a very elongated ellipse, and their orbit has been linked to that of the Great Comet of 1862.
The shower of incandescent asteroids on November 14th is often much more abundant than the preceding. In 1799, 1833, and 1866, the meteors were so numerous that they were described as showers of rain, especially on the first two dates. For several hours the sky was furrowed with falling stars. An English mariner, Andrew Ellicot, who made the drawing we reproduce (Fig. 55), described the phenomenon as stupendous and alarming (November 12, 1799, 3 A.M.). The same occurred on November 13, 1833. The meteors that scarred the Heavens on that night were reckoned at 240,000. These shooting stars received the name of Leonids, because their radiant is situated in the constellation of the Lion.
The shower of bright asteroids on November 14th is often way more plentiful than the one before it. In 1799, 1833, and 1866, the meteors were so countless that they were called showers of rain, especially on the first two occasions. For several hours, the sky was streaked with falling stars. An English sailor, Andrew Ellicot, who created the illustration we show (Fig. 55), described the event as incredible and frightening (November 12, 1799, 3 AM). The same thing happened on November 13, 1833. The meteors that lit up the sky that night were estimated at 240,000. These shooting stars are known as the Leonids, because their source is located in the constellation of the Lion.

Based on a drawing from that time.
This swarm follows the same orbit as the comet of 1866, which travels as far as Uranus, and comes back to[Pg 197] the vicinity of the Sun every thirty-three years. Hence we were entitled to expect another splendid apparition in 1899, but the expectations of the astronomers were disappointed. All the preparations for the appropriate reception of these celestial visitors failed to bring about the desired result. The notes made in observatories, or in balloons, admitted of the registration of only a very small number of meteors. The maximum was thirteen. During that night, some 200 shooting stars were counted. There were more in 1900, 1901, and, above all, in 1902. This swarm has become displaced.
This swarm follows the same path as the comet of 1866, which travels all the way to Uranus and returns to[Pg 197] the area around the Sun every thirty-three years. So, we had every reason to expect another amazing sighting in 1899, but astronomers were left disappointed. Despite all the preparations made to welcome these celestial visitors, the results were not what we hoped for. Observations made from observatories or balloons only recorded a very small number of meteors. The highest count was thirteen. That night, about 200 shooting stars were spotted. There were more in 1900, 1901, and especially in 1902. This swarm has shifted.
The night of November 27th again is visited by a number of shooting stars that are the disaggregated remains of the Comet of Biela. This comet, discovered by Biela in 1827, accomplished its revolution in six and a half years, and down to 1846 it responded punctually to the astronomers who expected its return as fixed by calculation. But on January 13, 1846, the celestial wanderer broke in half: each fragment went its own way, side by side, to return within sight from the Earth in 1852. It was their last appearance. That year the twin comets could still be seen, though pale and insignificant. Soon they vanished into the depths of night, and never appeared again. They were looked for in vain, and were despaired of, when on November 27, 1872, instead of the shattered comet,[Pg 198] came a magnificent rain of shooting stars. They fell through the Heavens, numerous as the flakes of a shower of snow.
The night of November 27th is once again graced by a number of shooting stars, which are the scattered remnants of Biela's Comet. This comet, discovered by Biela in 1827, completed its orbit in six and a half years, and up until 1846, it returned right on schedule as predicted by astronomers. But on January 13, 1846, the wandering celestial body split in two: each piece went its separate way, side by side, and became visible from Earth again in 1852. That was their final sighting. While the twin comets could still be spotted that year, they appeared faint and insignificant. Soon after, they disappeared into the night and never returned. They were searched for in vain, and hope was nearly lost when, on November 27, 1872, instead of the broken comet,[Pg 198] a stunning shower of shooting stars appeared. They fell through the sky, as numerous as snowflakes in a blizzard.
The same phenomenon recurred on November 27, 1885, and confirmed the hypothesis of the demolition and disaggregation of Biela's Comet into shooting stars.
The same phenomenon happened again on November 27, 1885, confirming the idea that Biela's Comet had broken apart and transformed into shooting stars.
There is an immense variety in the brilliancy of the shooting stars, from the weak telescopic sparks that vanish like a flash of lightning, to the incandescent bolides or fire-balls that explode in the atmosphere.
There is a huge range in the brightness of shooting stars, from the faint telescopic sparks that disappear like a flash of lightning, to the bright bolides or fire-balls that burst in the atmosphere.
Fig. 56 shows an example of these, and it represents a fire-ball observed at the Observatory of Juvisy on the night of August 10, 1899. It arrived from Cassiopeia, and burst in Cepheus.
Fig. 56 shows an example of these, and it represents a fireball observed at the Observatory of Juvisy on the night of August 10, 1899. It came from Cassiopeia and exploded in Cepheus.
This phenomenon may occur by day as well as by night. It is often accompanied by one or several explosions, the report of which is sometimes perceptible to a considerable distance, and by a shower of meteorites. The globe of fire bursts, and splits up into luminous fragments, scattered in all directions. The different parts of the fire-ball fall to the surface of the Earth, under the name of aerolites, or rather of uranoliths, since they arrive from the depths of space, and not from our atmosphere.
This phenomenon can happen both during the day and at night. It's often accompanied by one or more explosions, the sound of which can sometimes be heard from quite a distance, along with a shower of meteorites. The fireball bursts and breaks into glowing fragments scattered in every direction. The different pieces of the fireball land on Earth, referred to as aerolites, or more accurately, uranoliths, since they come from the depths of space, not from our atmosphere.
From the most ancient times we hear of showers of uranoliths to which popular superstitions were attached; and the Greeks even gave the name of Sideros to iron, the first iron used having been sidereal.
From ancient times, we've heard about showers of uranoliths that were surrounded by popular superstitions; the Greeks even named iron Sideros, as the first iron they used was from the stars.


No year passes without the announcement of several showers of uranoliths, and the phenomenon sometimes causes great alarm to those who witness it. One of the most remarkable explosions is that which occurred above Madrid, February 10, 1896, a fragment from which,[Pg 201] sent me by M. Arcimis, Director of the Meteorological Institute, fell immediately in front of the National Museum (Fig. 57). The phenomenon occurred at 9.30 A.M., in brilliant sunshine. The flash of the explosion was so dazzling that it even illuminated the interior of the houses; an alarming clap of thunder was heard seventy seconds after, and it was believed that an explosion of dynamite had occurred. The fire-ball burst at a height of fourteen miles, and was seen as far as 435 miles from Madrid!
No year goes by without the report of several showers of uranoliths, and this event often causes significant concern for those who see it. One of the most notable explosions took place above Madrid on February 10, 1896; a fragment from this event, [Pg 201], was sent to me by M. Arcimis, the Director of the Meteorological Institute, and fell right in front of the National Museum (Fig. 57). The phenomenon happened at 9:30 AM on a sunny day. The flash from the explosion was so bright that it even lit up the insides of houses; a loud clap of thunder was heard seventy seconds later, and many believed a dynamite explosion had occurred. The fireball exploded at a height of fourteen miles and was visible up to 435 miles away from Madrid!
In one of Raphael's finest pictures (The Madonna of Foligno) a fire-ball may be seen beneath a rainbow (Fig. 58), the painter wishing to preserve the remembrance of it, as it fell near Milan, on September 4, 1511. This picture dates from 1512.
In one of Raphael's best works (The Madonna of Foligno), there's a fireball visible under a rainbow (Fig. 58), as the artist wanted to commemorate its appearance, which happened near Milan on September 4, 1511. This painting is from 1512.
The dimensions of these meteorites vary considerably; they are of all sizes, from the impalpable dust that floats in the air, to the enormous blocks exposed in the Museum of Natural History in Paris. Many of them weigh several million pounds. That represented below fell in Mexico during the shower of meteors of November 27, 1885. It weighed about four pounds.
The sizes of these meteorites vary greatly; they come in all sizes, from the tiny dust that floats in the air to the massive chunks displayed at the Museum of Natural History in Paris. Many of them weigh several million pounds. The one shown below fell in Mexico during the meteor shower on November 27, 1885. It weighed about four pounds.

These bolides and uranoliths come to us from the depths of space; but they do not appear to have the same origin as the shooting stars. They may arise from worlds destroyed by explosion or shock, or even from planetary volcanoes. The lightest of them may have been expelled from the volcanoes of the Moon. Some of the most massive, in which iron predominates, may even have issued from the bowels of the Earth, projected into space by some volcanic explosion, at an epoch when our globe was perpetually convulsed by cataclysms of extraordinary violence. They return to us to-day after being removed from the Earth to distances proportional to the initial speed imparted to them. This origin seems the more admissible as the stones that fall from the skies exhibit a mineral composition identical with that of the terrestrial materials.
These meteors and space rocks come to us from the depths of space, but they don't seem to have the same origin as shooting stars. They may originate from worlds blown apart by explosions or shocks, or even from volcanic eruptions on planets. The lighter ones might have been expelled from the Moon's volcanoes. Some of the heavier ones, which are rich in iron, might have come from deep within the Earth, sent into space by some volcanic eruption during a time when our planet was constantly shaken by extremely violent cataclysms. They return to us today after being launched from the Earth at speeds that determine how far they traveled. This idea seems more plausible since the stones that fall from the sky have a mineral composition that matches terrestrial materials.

In any case, these uranoliths bring us back at least by their fall to our Earth, and from henceforward we will remain upon it, to study its position in space, and to take account of the place it fills in the Universe, and of the astronomical laws that govern our destiny.
In any case, these uranoliths remind us, at least with their arrival on our planet, that from now on we will stay here to examine its position in space and to consider the role it plays in the Universe, as well as the astronomical laws that shape our fate.
CHAPTER VIII
THE EARTH
Our grand celestial journey lands us upon our own little planet, on this globe that gravitates between Mars and Venus (between War and Love), circulating like her brothers of the solar system, around the colossal Sun.
Our amazing journey through the universe brings us to our own little planet, situated between Mars and Venus (between War and Love), orbiting like its brothers in the solar system around the massive Sun.
The Earth! The name evokes in us the image of Life, and calls up the theater of our activities, our ambitions, our joys and sorrows. Does it not, in fact, to ignorant eyes, represent the whole of the universe?
The Earth! The name brings to mind the image of Life and conjures the stage of our activities, our dreams, our happiness, and our struggles. Doesn't it, to unknowing eyes, represent the entirety of the universe?
And yet, what is the Earth?
And yet, what’s Earth?
The Earth is a star in the Heavens. We learned this much in our first lesson. It is a globe of opaque material, similar to the planets Mercury, Venus, Mars, Jupiter, etc., as previously described. Isolated on all sides in space, it revolves round the Sun, along a vast orbit that it accomplishes in a year. And while it thus glides along the lines of solar attraction, the terrestrial ball rotates rapidly upon itself in twenty-four hours.
The Earth is a star in the sky. We learned this in our first lesson. It's a sphere made of solid material, much like the planets Mercury, Venus, Mars, Jupiter, and others, as mentioned before. Surrounded by empty space, it orbits the Sun in a huge path that it completes in a year. While it moves along these lines of solar pull, the Earth also spins quickly on its axis every twenty-four hours.
These statements may appear dubious at first sight, and contradictory to the evidence of our senses.
These statements might seem questionable at first glance and go against what we can observe.
Now that the surface of the Earth has been explored in all directions, there is no longer room to doubt that it is a globe, a sort of ball that we adhere to. A journey round the world is common enough to-day, and always yields the most complete evidence of the spherical nature of the Earth. On the other hand, the curvature of the seas is a no less certain proof. When a ship reaches the dark-blue line that appears to separate the sky from the ocean, it seems to be hanging on the horizon. Little by little, however, as it recedes, it drops below the horizon line; the tops of the masts being the last to disappear. The observer on board ship witnesses the same phenomenon. The low shores are first to disappear, while the high coasts and mountains are much longer visible.
Now that we've explored the Earth's surface in every direction, there's no longer any doubt that it's a globe, like a ball that we stand on. Traveling around the world is pretty common nowadays, and it always provides solid evidence of the Earth's round shape. Additionally, the curve of the oceans is another clear proof. When a ship reaches the dark blue line that seems to separate the sky from the sea, it looks like it's floating on the horizon. However, as it moves away, it gradually drops below the horizon; the tops of the masts are the last to vanish. A person on the ship sees the same thing happen. The lower shores disappear first, while the higher coasts and mountains remain visible for a much longer time.
The aspect of the Heavens gives another proof of the Earth's rotundity. As one travels North or South, new stars rise higher and higher above the horizon in the one direction or the other, and those which shine in the latitude one is leaving, gradually disappear. If the surface of the Earth were flat, the ships on the sea would be visible as long as our sight could pierce the distance, and all the stars of the Heavens would be equally visible from the different quarters of the world.
The appearance of the sky provides further evidence of the Earth's roundness. As you move North or South, new stars appear higher and higher on the horizon in one direction or the other, while those in the latitude you are leaving slowly fade away. If the surface of the Earth were flat, ships at sea would be visible for as far as our sight could reach, and all the stars in the sky would be just as visible from different parts of the world.
Lastly, during the eclipses of the Moon, the shadow projected by the Earth upon our satellite is always round.[Pg 207] This is another proof of the spherical nature of the terrestrial globe.
Lastly, during lunar eclipses, the shadow cast by the Earth on our Moon is always round.[Pg 207] This is further evidence of the Earth's spherical shape.
We described the Earth as an orb in the Heavens, similar to all the other planets of the great solar family. We see these sister planets of our world circulating under the starry vault, like luminous points whose brilliancy is sometimes dazzling. For us they are marvelous celestial birds hovering in the ether, upheld by invisible wings. The Earth is just the same. It is supported by nothing. Like the soap-bubble that assumes a lovely iridescence in the rays of the Sun, or, better, like the balloon rapidly cleaving the air, it is isolated from every kind of support.
We describe the Earth as a sphere in the sky, just like all the other planets in our solar system. We see these sister planets of our world moving under the starry sky, shining like bright points that can be incredibly dazzling. To us, they are amazing celestial birds gliding through the atmosphere, lifted by invisible wings. The Earth is no different. It's not supported by anything. Like a soap bubble that shows beautiful colors in the sunlight, or even better, like a balloon swiftly moving through the air, it is completely independent of any support.
Some minds have difficulty in conceiving this isolation, because they form a false notion of weight.
Some people struggle to grasp this isolation because they have a misleading idea of weight.
The astronomers of antiquity, who divined it, knew not how to prevent the Earth from falling. They asked anxiously what the strong bands capable of holding up this block of no inconsiderable weight could be. At first they thought it floated on the waters like an island. Then they postulated solid pillars, or even supposed it might turn on pivots placed at the poles. But on what would all these imaginary supports have rested? All these fanciful foundations of the Earth had to be given up, and it was recognized as a globe, isolated in every part. This illusion of the ancients, which still obtains[Pg 208] for a great many citizens of our globule, arises, as we said, from a false conception of weight.
The ancient astronomers, who figured it out, didn't know how to keep the Earth from falling. They anxiously wondered what strong supports could hold up this heavy mass. Initially, they believed it floated on water like an island. Then they imagined solid pillars or even thought it might rotate on axles at the poles. But what would all these imaginary supports stand on? They had to abandon all these fanciful ideas about the Earth's foundations and recognized it as a globe, isolated in every aspect. This ancient illusion, which still persists[Pg 208] for many people on our planet, stems from a misunderstanding of weight.
Weight and attraction are one and the same force.
Weight and attraction are essentially the same force.
A body can only fall when it is attracted, drawn by a more important body. Now, in whatever direction we may wander upon the globe, our feet are always downward. Down is therefore the center of the Earth.
A body can only fall when it is pulled by a more massive body. So, no matter where we go on the planet, our feet are always pointing down. Down is therefore the center of the Earth.
The terrestrial globe may be regarded as an immense ball of magnet, and its attraction holds us at its surface. We weigh toward the center. We may travel over this surface in all directions; our feet will always be below, whatever the direction of our steps. For us, "below" is the inside of our planet, and "above" is the immensity of the Heavens that extend above our heads, right round the globe.
The Earth can be seen as a huge magnetic ball, and its pull keeps us on its surface. We are drawn toward the center. We can move across this surface in any direction; our feet will always be underneath us, no matter where we go. For us, "below" is the inside of the planet, and "above" is the vastness of the sky that stretches above us all around the globe.
This once understood, where could the Earth fall to? The question is an absurdity. "Below" being toward the center, it would have to fall out of itself.
This understood, where could the Earth possibly fall to? The question is ridiculous. "Below" means towards the center, so it would have to fall out of itself.
Let us then picture the Earth as a vast sphere, detached from all that exists around it, in the infinity of the Heavens. A point diametrically opposed to another is called its antipodes. New Zealand is approximately the antipodes to France. Well, for the inhabitants of New Zealand and of France the top is reciprocally opposed, and the bottom, or the feet, are diametrically in opposition. And yet, for one as for the other, the[Pg 209] bottom is the soil they are held to, and the top is space above their heads.
Let’s imagine the Earth as a huge sphere, separated from everything else in the infinite universe. A point directly opposite another is called its antipodes. New Zealand is roughly the antipodes of France. For the people of New Zealand and France, the top is directly opposite, and the bottom, or their feet, are diametrically opposing. Yet, for both, the[Pg 209] bottom is the ground they stand on, and the top is the sky above them.
The Earth turns on itself in twenty-four hours. Whatever is above us, e.g., at midday, we call high; twelve hours later, at midnight, we give the same qualification to the part of space that was under our feet at noon. What is in the sky, and over our heads, at a given hour, is under our feet, and yet always in the sky, twelve hours later. Our position, in relation to the space that surrounds us, changes from hour to hour, and "top" and "bottom" vary also, relatively to our position.
The Earth spins on its axis every twenty-four hours. Whatever is above us, like at noon, we refer to as "high;" twelve hours later, at midnight, we use the same term for the area of space that was below us at noon. What’s in the sky, above us at a specific time, is directly beneath us, but still in the sky, twelve hours later. Our location in relation to the surrounding space changes every hour, and what we consider "top" and "bottom" also shifts based on our position.
Our planet is thus a ball, slightly flattened at the poles (by about 1⁄292). Its diameter, at the equator, is 12,742 kilometers (7,926 miles); from one pole to the other is a little less, owing to the flattening of the polar caps. The difference is some 43 kilometers (about 27 miles).
Our planet is essentially a sphere, slightly flattened at the poles (by about 1⁄292). Its diameter at the equator is 12,742 kilometers (7,926 miles); from one pole to the other is a bit less, due to the flattening of the polar areas. The difference is about 43 kilometers (around 27 miles).
Its circumference is 40,000 kilometers (24,900 miles). This ball is surrounded by an aerial envelope, the atmosphere, the height of which can not be less than 300 kilometers (186 miles), according to the observations made on certain shooting stars.
Its circumference is 40,000 kilometers (24,900 miles). This sphere is surrounded by a layer of air, the atmosphere, which cannot be less than 300 kilometers (186 miles) high, based on observations of certain shooting stars.
We all know that this layer of air, at the bottom of which we live, is a beautiful azure blue that seems to separate us from the sidereal abyss, spreading over our heads in a kind of vault that is often filled with clouds,[Pg 210] and giving the illusion of resting far off on the circle of the horizon. But this is only an illusion. In reality, there is neither vault nor horizon; space is open in all directions. If the atmosphere did not exist, or if it were completely transparent, we should see the stars by day as by night, for they are continually round us, at noon as at midnight, and we can see them in the full daylight, with the help of astronomical instruments. In fact, certain stars (the radiant Venus and the dazzling Jupiter) pierce the veil of the atmosphere, and are visible with the unaided eye in full daylight.
We all know that the layer of air we live in is a beautiful sky blue that seems to separate us from the vast universe, spreading above us like a dome often filled with clouds,[Pg 210] giving the illusion that it rests far away on the horizon. But this is just an illusion. In reality, there is no dome or horizon; space is open in all directions. If the atmosphere didn't exist, or if it were completely clear, we would see the stars during the day just as we do at night, because they are always around us, at noon as well as at midnight, and we can see them in full daylight with the help of telescopes. In fact, certain stars (the bright Venus and the brilliant Jupiter) shine through the atmosphere and can be seen with the naked eye in broad daylight.
The terrestrial surface is 510,000,000 square kilometers (200,000,000 square miles). The waters of the ocean cover three-quarters of this surface, i.e., 383,200,000 square kilometers (150,000,000 square miles), and the continents only occupy 136,600,000 square kilometers (55,000 square miles). France represents about the thousandth part of the total superficies of the globe.
The Earth's surface is 510 million square kilometers (200 million square miles). The oceans cover three-quarters of this area, which is 383.2 million square kilometers (150 million square miles), while the continents only take up 136.6 million square kilometers (55 million square miles). France makes up about one-thousandth of the Earth's total surface area.
Despite the asperities of mountain ranges, and the abysses hollowed out by the waters, the terrestrial globe is fairly regular, and in relation to its volume its surface is smoother than that of an orange. The highest summits of the Himalaya, the profoundest depths of the somber ocean, do not attain to the millionth part of its diameter.
Despite the roughness of mountain ranges and the deep valleys created by water, the Earth is fairly regular, and in proportion to its size, its surface is smoother than that of an orange. The tallest peaks of the Himalayas and the deepest parts of the dark ocean don't even reach a millionth of its diameter.
In weight, the Earth is five and a half times heavier[Pg 211] than would be a globe of water of the same dimensions. That is to say:
In weight, the Earth is five and a half times heavier[Pg 211] than a globe of water of the same size. In other words:
6,957,930,000,000,000,000,000,000 kilograms
(6,833,000,000,000,000,000,000 tons).
6.96 sextillion kilograms
(6.83 sextillion tons).
The atmospheric atmosphere with which it is surrounded represents.
The surrounding atmosphere it is in represents.
6,263,000,000,000,000,000 kilograms
(6,151,000,000,000,000 tons).
6.263 quintillion kilograms
(6.151 trillion tons).
Each of us carries an average weight of some 17,000 kilograms (16 tons) upon his shoulders. Perhaps some one will ask how it is that we are not crushed by this weight, which is out of all proportion with our strength, but to which, nevertheless, we appear insensible. It is because the aerial fluid enclosed within our bodies exerts a pressure equal and opposite to the external atmospheric pressure, and these pressures are at equilibrium.
Each of us carries an average weight of about 17,000 kilograms (16 tons) on our shoulders. Some might wonder how we’re not crushed by this weight, which seems way too much for our strength, yet we seem unaffected by it. It’s because the air inside our bodies pushes back with a force equal to the outside atmospheric pressure, and these pressures are balanced.
The Earth is characterized by no essential or particular differences relatively to the other worlds of our system. Like Venus of the limpid rays, like the dazzling Jupiter, like all the planets, she courses through space, carrying into Infinitude our hopes and destinies. Bigger than Mercury, Venus, and Mars, she presents a very modest figure in comparison with the enormous Jupiter, the strange system of Saturn, of Uranus, and even of Neptune. For us her greatest interest is that[Pg 212] she serves as our residence, and if she were not our habitation we should scarcely notice her. Dark in herself, she burns at a distance like a star, returning to space the light she receives from the Sun. At the distance of our satellite, she shines like an enormous moon, fourteen times larger and more luminous than our gentle Phœbe. Observed from Mercury or Venus, she embellishes the midnight sky with her sparkling purity as Jupiter does for us. Seen from Mars, she is a brilliant morning and evening star, presenting phases similar to those which Mars and Venus show from here. From Jupiter, the terrestrial globe is little more than an insignificant point, nearly always swallowed up in the solar rays. As to the Saturnians, Uranians, and Neptunians, if such people exist, they probably ignore our existence altogether. And in all likelihood it is the same for the rest of the universe.
The Earth doesn't have any significant or unique differences compared to the other worlds in our solar system. Like Venus with its clear rays, like the bright Jupiter, like all the planets, it moves through space, carrying our hopes and destinies into infinity. Larger than Mercury, Venus, and Mars, it seems quite small when compared to the massive Jupiter, the unusual system of Saturn, Uranus, and even Neptune. For us, the most important aspect is that[Pg 212] it is our home, and if it weren't our dwelling, we might hardly notice it. Dark on its own, it shines from a distance like a star, reflecting the light it gets from the Sun. At the distance of our moon, it glows like a giant moon, fourteen times larger and brighter than our gentle Phœbe. From Mercury or Venus, it decorates the midnight sky with its sparkling brightness, just like Jupiter does for us. Seen from Mars, it appears as a bright morning and evening star, showing phases similar to those of Mars and Venus when seen from here. From Jupiter, Earth looks like a tiny dot, often lost in the sunshine. As for the inhabitants of Saturn, Uranus, and Neptune, if they exist, they probably don't even know we’re here. And most likely, that's true for the rest of the universe too.
We must cherish no illusions as to the importance of our natal world. It is true that the Earth is not wanting in charm, with its verdant plains enameled in the delicious tones of a robust and varied vegetation, its plants and flowers, its spring-time and its birds, its limpid rivers winding through the meadows, its mountains covered with forests, its vast and profound seas animated with an infinite variety of living creatures. The spectacle of Nature is magnificent, superb, admirable[Pg 213] and marvelous, and we imagine that this Earth fills the universe, and suffices for it. The Sun, the Moon, the stars, the boundless Heavens, seem to have been created for us, to charm our eyes and thoughts, to illumine our days, and shed a gentle radiance upon our nights. This is an agreeable illusion of our senses. If our Humanity were extinguished, the other worlds of the Heavens, Venus, Mars, etc., would none the less continue to gravitate in the Heavens along with our defunct planet, and the close of human life (for which everything seems to us to have been created) would not even be perceived by those other worlds, that nevertheless are our neighbors. There would be no revolution, no cataclysm. The stars would go on shining in the firmament, just as they do to-day, shedding their divine light over the immensity of the Heavens. Nothing would be changed in the general aspect of the Universe. The Earth is only a modest atom, lost in the innumerable army of the worlds and suns that people the universe.
We shouldn't have any illusions about the significance of our home planet. It's true that Earth has its own charm, with its lush plains decorated in beautiful shades of diverse vegetation, its plants and flowers, its springtime and birds, its clear rivers flowing through the meadows, its mountains wrapped in forests, and its vast oceans teeming with an endless variety of life. The beauty of Nature is stunning, impressive, and awe-inspiring, and we might imagine that this Earth encompasses the universe and is all it needs. The Sun, the Moon, the stars, and the endless sky seem to have been created for us, to delight our eyes and minds, to brighten our days, and to cast a gentle glow over our nights. This is a pleasing illusion of our senses. If humanity were to disappear, the other worlds in the sky—like Venus and Mars—would still continue to orbit along with our dead planet, and the end of human life (which we perceive everything to have been created for) wouldn’t even be noticed by those nearby worlds. There would be no upheaval, no catastrophe. The stars would keep shining in the sky, just as they do today, casting their divine light across the vastness of the cosmos. Nothing would change in the overall look of the Universe. Earth is just a small speck, lost among the countless worlds and suns that populate the universe.
Every morning the Sun rises in the East, setting fire with his ardent rays to the sky, which is dazzling with his splendor. He ascends through space, reaches a culminating point at noon, and then descends toward the West, to sink at night into the purple of the sunset.
Every morning, the Sun rises in the East, lighting up the sky with its bright rays. It climbs higher and higher until it reaches its peak at noon, then heads down towards the West, where it disappears into the purple of the sunset at night.
And then the stars, grand lighthouses of the Heavens,[Pg 214] in their turn incandesce. They too rise in the East, ascend the vault of Heaven, and then descend to the West, and vanish. All the orbs, Sun, Moon, planets, stars, appear to revolve round us in twenty-four hours.
And then the stars, huge lighthouses of the sky,[Pg 214] light up. They also rise in the East, travel across the sky, and then set in the West, disappearing from sight. All the celestial bodies—Sun, Moon, planets, stars—seem to revolve around us in a twenty-four hour cycle.
This journey of the orbs around us is only an illusion of the senses.
This journey of the orbs around us is just an illusion of our senses.
Whether the Earth be at rest, and the sky animated with a rotary movement round her, or whether, on the contrary, the stars are fixed, and the Earth in motion, in either case, for us appearances are the same. If the Earth turns, carrying all that pertains to it in its motion—the seas, the atmosphere, the clouds, and ourselves,—we are unable to perceive it, because all the objects that surround us keep their respective positions among themselves. Hence we must resort to logic, and reason out the two hypotheses.
Whether the Earth is stationary and the sky revolves around it, or whether the stars are fixed and the Earth is in motion, in either case, everything looks the same to us. If the Earth rotates, taking everything with it—the oceans, the atmosphere, the clouds, and ourselves—we can't notice it because everything around us stays in the same position relative to one another. So we have to use logic to sort through the two possibilities.
For the accomplishment of this rapid journey of the Sun and stars around the Earth, it would be necessary that all the orbs of the sky should be in some way attached to a vault, or to circles, as was formerly supposed. This conception is childish. The peoples of antiquity had no notion of the size of the universe, and their error is almost excusable. The distance separating Heaven from the Infernal Regions has been measured, according to Hesiod, by Vulcan's anvil, which fell from the skies[Pg 215] to the Earth in nine days and nine nights, and it would have taken as long again to continue its journey from the surface of the Earth to the bowels of Hades.
For the quick journey of the Sun and stars around the Earth to happen, it was thought that all the celestial bodies had to be attached to a dome or circles, as was believed in the past. This idea is quite naïve. Ancient people didn't understand the size of the universe, and their mistake is somewhat forgivable. According to Hesiod, the distance between Heaven and the Underworld was measured by Vulcan's anvil, which fell from the skies[Pg 215] to the Earth in nine days and nights, and it would have taken as long again for it to travel from the Earth's surface to the depths of Hades.
To-day we have a more exact notion of the grandeur of the Universe. We know that millions and trillions of miles separate the stars from one another. And by representing these distances, we can form some idea of the difficulty there would be in admitting the rotation of the universe round the Earth.
Today we have a clearer understanding of the vastness of the Universe. We know that millions and trillions of miles separate the stars from each other. By visualizing these distances, we can grasp the challenges of accepting the idea that the universe rotates around the Earth.
The distance from here to the Sun is 149,000,000 kilometers (93,000,000 miles). In order to turn in twenty-four hours round the Earth, that orb would have to fly through Space at a velocity of more than 10,000 kilometers (6,200 miles) a second.
The distance from here to the Sun is 149,000,000 kilometers (93,000,000 miles). To orbit the Earth in twenty-four hours, that object would need to travel through Space at a speed of over 10,000 kilometers (6,200 miles) per second.
Yes! the Sun, splendid orb, source of our existence and of that of all the planets, a colossal globe, over a million times more voluminous than the Earth, and 324 thousand times heavier, would have to accomplish this immense revolution in order to turn round the minute point that is our lilliputian world!
Yes! The Sun, a magnificent sphere, the source of our existence and that of all the planets, a massive globe, over a million times larger than the Earth, and 324 thousand times heavier, has to make this huge rotation to revolve around the tiny point that is our little world!
This in itself would suffice to convince us of the want of logic in such an argument. But the Sun is not alone in the Heavens. We should have to suppose that all the planets and all the stars were engaged in the same fantastic motions.
This alone would be enough to show us the lack of logic in such an argument. But the Sun isn't the only one in the sky. We would have to assume that all the planets and all the stars were involved in the same bizarre movements.
Jupiter is about five times as far off as the Sun; his[Pg 216] velocity would have to be 53,000 kilometers (32,860 miles) per second.
Jupiter is roughly five times further away than the Sun; his[Pg 216] speed would have to be 53,000 kilometers (32,860 miles) per second.
Neptune, thirty times farther off, would have to execute 320,000 kilometers (198,000 miles) per second.
Neptune, being thirty times farther away, would have to travel at 320,000 kilometers (198,000 miles) per second.
The nearest star, α of the Centaur, situated at a distance 275,000 times that of the Sun, would have to run, to fly through space, at a rate of 2,941,000,000 kilometers (1,823,420,000 miles) per second.
The closest star, α Centauri, located 275,000 times farther away than the Sun, would need to travel through space at a speed of 2,941,000,000 kilometers (1,823,420,000 miles) per second.
All the other stars are incomparably farther off, at infinity.
All the other stars are way farther away, at infinity.
And this fantastic rotation would all be accomplished round a minute point!
And this amazing rotation would all be completed around a tiny point!
To put the problem in this way is to solve it. Unless we deny the astronomic measures, and the most convincing geometric operations, the Earth's diurnal motion of rotation is a certainty.
To frame the problem this way is to find the solution. Unless we reject astronomical measurements and the most convincing geometric calculations, the Earth's daily rotation is a fact.
To suppose that the stars revolve round the Earth is to suppose, as one author humorously suggests, that in order to roast a pheasant the chimney, the kitchen, the house, and all the countryside must needs turn round it.
To think that the stars rotate around the Earth is to believe, as one writer jokingly puts it, that in order to roast a pheasant, the chimney, the kitchen, the house, and the entire countryside would have to spin around it.
If the Earth turns in twenty-four hours upon itself, a point upon the equator would simply travel at a rate of 465 meters (1,525 feet) per second. This speed, while considerable in comparison with the movements observed upon the surface of our planet, is as nothing compared[Pg 217] with the fantastic rapidity at which the Sun and stars would have to move, in order to rotate round our globe.
If the Earth rotates once every twenty-four hours, a point on the equator would move at a speed of 465 meters (1,525 feet) per second. This speed, while impressive compared to movements on the surface of our planet, is nothing compared[Pg 217] to the incredible speed at which the Sun and stars would need to move to orbit around our globe.
Thus we have to choose between these two hypotheses: either to make the entire Heavens turn round us in twenty-four hours, or to suppose our globe to be animated by a motion of rotation upon itself. For us, the impression is the same, and as we are insensible to the motion of the Earth, its immobility would seem almost natural to us. So that, in last resort, here as in many other instances, the decision must be made by simple common sense. Science long ago made its choice. Moreover, all the progress of Astronomy has confirmed the rotary movement of the Earth in twenty-four hours, and its movement of revolution round the Sun in a year; while at the same time a great number of other motions have been discovered for our wandering planet.
So, we have to choose between two ideas: either the entire universe revolves around us every twenty-four hours, or our planet rotates on its own axis. For us, both feel the same, and since we can't feel the Earth moving, its stillness seems almost natural. Ultimately, as in many cases, the decision comes down to simple common sense. Science made its choice a long time ago. Plus, all advancements in Astronomy have supported the idea that the Earth rotates in twenty-four hours and revolves around the Sun in a year, while many other movements of our wandering planet have also been discovered.
The learned philosophers of antiquity divined the double movement of our planet. The disciples of Pythagoras taught it more than two thousand years ago, and the ancient authors quote among others Nicetas of Syracuse, and Aristarchus of Samos, as being among the first to promote the doctrine of the Earth's movement. But at that remote period no one had any idea of the real distances of the stars, and the argument did not seem to be based on any adequate evidence. Ptolemy, after a long discussion of the diurnal motion of our[Pg 218] planet, refutes it, giving as his principal reason that if the Earth turned, the objects that were not fixed to its surface would appear to move in a contrary direction, and that a body shot into the air would fall back to the West of its starting-point, the Earth having turned meantime from West to East. This objection has no weight, because the Earth controls not only all the objects fixed to the soil, but also the atmosphere, and the clouds that surround it like a light veil, and all that exists upon its surface. The atmosphere, the clouds, the waters of the ocean, things and beings, all are adherent to it and make one body with it, participating in its movement, as sometimes happens to ourselves in the compartment of a train, or the car of an aerostat. When, for instance, we drop an object out of such a car, this object, animated with the acquired velocity, does not fall to a point below the aerostat, but follows the balloon, as though it were gliding along a thread. The author has made this experiment more than once in aerial journeys.
The knowledgeable philosophers of ancient times figured out the dual movement of our planet. The followers of Pythagoras taught this over two thousand years ago, and ancient writers mention Nicetas of Syracuse and Aristarchus of Samos as some of the first to support the idea of the Earth's movement. However, back then, no one had a real grasp of the actual distances to the stars, and the argument didn’t seem to be backed by solid evidence. Ptolemy, after a lengthy debate about the daily rotation of our[Pg 218] planet, refutes it, arguing mainly that if the Earth was rotating, objects not attached to its surface would appear to move in the opposite direction, and that an object launched into the air would land to the west of where it was thrown, as the Earth would have turned from west to east in the meantime. This objection isn’t valid because the Earth not only affects all the objects fixed to the ground but also the atmosphere and the clouds that surround it like a light veil, along with everything that exists on its surface. The atmosphere, the clouds, the ocean's waters, everything is attached to it and moves with it, just like we sometimes experience in a train compartment or a balloon. For instance, when we drop something from such a vehicle, that object, carrying the same speed it had, doesn’t fall directly below the balloon, but rather follows it, as if it were sliding along a thread. The author has performed this experiment multiple times during aerial travels.
Thus, the hypothesis of the Earth's motion has become a certainty. But in addition to reasoning, direct proof is not wanting.
Thus, the idea of the Earth's motion has become certain. But besides reasoning, there is also direct proof available.
1. The spheroidal shape of the Earth, slightly flattened at the poles and swollen at the equator, has been produced by the rotary motion, by the centrifugal force that it engenders.
1. The Earth’s round shape, a bit flattened at the poles and bulging at the equator, has been created by its spinning motion and the centrifugal force that comes from it.
2. In virtue of this centrifugal force, which is at its maximum at the equator, objects lose a little of their weight in proportion as they are farther removed from the polar regions where centrifugal force is almost nil.
2. Because of this centrifugal force, which is strongest at the equator, objects weigh slightly less as they are farther away from the polar regions where centrifugal force is nearly zero.
3. In virtue of this same centrifugal force, the length of the pendulum in seconds is shorter at the equator than in Paris, and the difference is one of 3 millimeters.
3. Because of this same centrifugal force, the length of the pendulum in seconds is shorter at the equator than it is in Paris, and the difference is 3 millimeters.
4. A weight abandoned to itself and falling from a certain height, should follow the vertical if the Earth were motionless. Experiment, frequently repeated, shows a slight deviation to the East, of the plumb-line that marks the vertical. We more especially observed this at the Pantheon during the recent experiments.
4. A weight dropped freely from a certain height should fall straight down if the Earth were still. Repeated experiments show a slight shift to the East in the plumb line that indicates the vertical. We particularly noticed this at the Pantheon during the recent tests.
5. The magnificent experiment of Foucault at the Pantheon, just renewed under the auspices of the Astronomical Society of France, demonstrates the rotary motion of the Earth to all beholders. A sufficiently heavy ball (28 kilograms, about 60 pounds) is suspended from the dome of the edifice by an excessively fine steel thread. When the pendulum is in motion, a point attached to the bottom of the ball marks its passage upon two little heaps of sand arranged some yards away from the center. At each oscillation this point cuts the sand, and the furrow gets gradually longer to the right hand of an observer placed at the center of the pendulum. The plane of the oscillations remains[Pg 220] fixed, but the Earth revolves beneath, from West to East. The fundamental principle of this experiment is that the plane in which any pendulum is made to oscillate remains invariable even when the point of suspension is turned. This demonstration enables us in some measure to see the Earth turning under our feet.
5. The amazing experiment by Foucault at the Pantheon, recently renewed under the supervision of the Astronomical Society of France, shows everyone the Earth's rotation. A heavy ball (28 kilograms, about 60 pounds) is hung from the dome of the building by an extremely thin steel thread. When the pendulum swings, a point attached to the bottom of the ball marks its path on two small mounds of sand placed a few yards away from the center. With each swing, this point drags through the sand, and the groove gradually gets longer on the right side of an observer standing at the center of the pendulum. The plane of the oscillations stays[Pg 220] fixed, but the Earth rotates beneath it, from west to east. The key principle of this experiment is that the plane in which any pendulum swings stays the same even when the point of suspension is turned. This demonstration allows us to somewhat witness the Earth turning beneath our feet.
The annual displacements of the stars are again confirmatory of the Earth's motion round the Sun. During the course of the year, the stars that are least remote from our solar province appear to describe minute ellipses, in perspective, in the Heavens. These small apparent variations in the position of the nearest stars reproduce the annual rotation of the Earth round the Sun, in perspective.
The yearly movements of the stars again confirm the Earth's orbit around the Sun. Throughout the year, the stars that are closest to our solar system seem to trace tiny ellipses in the sky. These small shifts in the positions of the nearest stars reflect the Earth's annual rotation around the Sun.
We could adduce further observations in favor of this double movement, but the proofs just given are sufficiently convincing to leave no doubt in the mind of the reader.
We could provide more observations to support this double movement, but the evidence shared so far is convincing enough to leave no doubt in the reader's mind.
Nor are these two the only motions by which our globe is rocked in space. To its diurnal rotation and its annual rotation we may add another series of ten more motions: some very slow, fulfilling themselves in thousands of years, others, more rapid, being constantly renewed. It is, however, impossible in these restricted pages to enter into the detail reserved for more complete works. We must not forget that our present aim is to[Pg 221] sum up the essentials of astronomical knowledge as simply as possible, and to offer our readers only the "best of the picking."
Nor are these two the only ways our planet moves through space. Along with its daily rotation and yearly orbit, we can add another series of ten more movements: some very slow, taking thousands of years to complete, while others are quicker and happen continuously. However, it's impossible in these limited pages to go into detail that is better suited for more comprehensive works. We shouldn’t lose sight of the fact that our current goal is to[Pg 221] summarize the essentials of astronomical knowledge as simply as possible and to provide our readers with only the "best of the best."
The two principal motions of which we have just spoken give us the measure of time, the day of twenty-four hours, and the year of 3651⁄4 days.
The two main movements we've just discussed provide us with the measurement of time: the 24-hour day and the year of 3651⁄4 days.
The Earth turning upon itself in twenty-four hours from West to East, presents all its parts in succession to the Sun fixed in space. Illuminated countries have the day, those opposite, in the shadow of the Earth, are plunged into night. The countries carried by the Earth toward the Sun have morning, those borne toward his shadow, evening. Those which receive the rays of the day-star directly have noon; those which are just opposite have midnight.
The Earth spins on its axis every twenty-four hours from West to East, showing each part to the Sun that remains in one place. The areas lit by the Sun experience daytime, while those on the opposite side, in the shadow of the Earth, are in darkness. The regions moving toward the Sun are in the morning, while those moving into the shadow are experiencing evening. Places that receive direct sunlight have noon, and those directly opposite them have midnight.
The rotation of our planet in this way gives us the measure of time; it has been divided arbitrarily into twenty-four periods called hours; each hour into sixty minutes; each minute into sixty seconds.
The way our planet rotates gives us a way to measure time; it has been divided into twenty-four segments called hours; each hour into sixty minutes; each minute into sixty seconds.
In consequence, each country turns in twenty-four hours round the axis of the Earth. The difference in hours between the different regions of the globe is therefore regulated by the difference of geographical position. The countries situated to the West are behind us; the Sun only gets there after it has shone upon our meridian.[Pg 222] When it is midday in Paris, it is only 11.51 A.M. in London; 11.36 A.M. in Madrid; 11.14 A.M. at Lisbon; 11.12 A.M. at Mogador; 7.06 A.M. at Quebec; 6.55 A.M. at New York; 5.14 A.M. in Mexico; and so on. The countries situated to the East are, on the contrary, ahead of us. When it is noon in Paris, it is already 56 minutes after midday at Vienna; 1.25 P.M. at Athens; 2.21 P.M. at Moscow; 3.16 P.M. at Teheran; 4.42 P.M. at Bombay; and so on. We are here speaking of real times, and not of the conventional times.
As a result, each country rotates around the Earth's axis every twenty-four hours. The time difference between various regions of the globe is determined by their geographical locations. Countries located to the West are behind us; the Sun reaches them only after it has passed over our meridian.[Pg 222] When it's noon in Paris, it's just 11:51 AM in London; 11:36 AM in Madrid; 11:14 AM in Lisbon; 11:12 AM in Mogador; 7:06 AM in Quebec; 6:55 AM in New York; 5:14 AM in Mexico; and so on. Countries located to the East, on the other hand, are ahead of us. When it's noon in Paris, it's already 12:56 P.M. in Vienna; 1:25 P.M. in Athens; 2:21 PM in Moscow; 3:16 P.M. in Tehran; 4:42 P.M. in Bombay; and so on. We are discussing actual times, not conventional ones.

If we could make the tour of the world in twenty-four hours, starting at midday from some place to go round the globe, and traveling westward with the Sun, we should have him always over our heads. In traveling round the world from West to East, one goes in front of the Sun, and gains by one day; in taking the opposite direction, from East to West, one loses a day.
If we could travel around the world in twenty-four hours, starting at noon from a location and heading west with the Sun, we would always have it directly overhead. When going around the world from west to east, you move ahead of the Sun and gain a day; however, if you go the other way, from east to west, you lose a day.
In reality, the exact duration of the Earth's diurnal rotation is twenty-three hours, fifty-six minutes, four seconds. That is the sidereal day. But, while turning upon itself, the Earth circulates upon its orbit, and at the end of a diurnal rotation it is still obliged to turn during three minutes, fifty-six seconds in order to present exactly the same meridian to the fixed Sun which, in consequence of the rotary period of our planet, is a little behind. The solar day is thus one of twenty-four hours. There are 366 rotations in the year.
In reality, the exact length of a day on Earth is twenty-three hours, fifty-six minutes, and four seconds. That's the sidereal day. However, while it spins on its axis, the Earth also moves in its orbit, and by the end of one full rotation, it still needs to turn for three minutes and fifty-six seconds to align the same meridian with the fixed Sun, which lags a bit due to our planet's rotation. As a result, the solar day lasts twenty-four hours. There are 366 rotations in a year.
And now let us come back to the consequences of the Earth's motion. In the first place our planet does not turn vertically nor on its side, but is tipped or inclined a certain quantity: 23° 27′.
And now let's return to the effects of the Earth's motion. First of all, our planet doesn't rotate upright or on its side, but is tilted at an angle of 23° 27′.
Now, throughout its annual journey round the Sun, the inclination remains the same. That is what produces the seasons and climates. The countries which have a larger circle to travel over in the hemisphere of the solar illumination have the longer days, those which have a smaller circle, shorter days. At the equator there is constantly, and all through the year, a twelve-hour day, and a night of twelve hours.
Now, throughout its yearly orbit around the Sun, the tilt remains constant. This is what creates the seasons and different climates. Countries that have a larger area in the sunlight have longer days, while those with a smaller area have shorter days. At the equator, there is consistently a twelve-hour day and a twelve-hour night all year round.

In summer, the pole dips toward the Sun, and the rays of the orb of day cover the corresponding hemisphere with their light. Six months later this same hemisphere is in winter, and the opposite hemisphere is in its turn presented to the Sun. June 21 is the summer solstice for the northern hemisphere, and is at the same time winter for the southern pole. Six months later, on December 21, we have winter, while the southern[Pg 225] hemisphere is completely exposed to the Sun. Between these two epochs, when the radiant orb shines exactly upon the equator, that is on March 21, we have the spring equinox, that delicious flowering season when all nature is enchanting and enchanted; on September 21 we have the autumn equinox, melancholy, but not devoid of charm.
In summer, the pole tilts toward the Sun, and the rays of the day’s star fill the corresponding hemisphere with light. Six months later, that same hemisphere experiences winter, while the opposite hemisphere is turned toward the Sun. June 21 is the summer solstice for the northern hemisphere and, at the same time, winter for the southern pole. Six months later, on December 21, we have winter in the north, while the southern[Pg 225] hemisphere is fully exposed to the Sun. Between these two moments, when the bright orb shines directly on the equator, which is on March 21, we celebrate the spring equinox, that beautiful blooming season when all of nature is enchanting and enchanted; on September 21, we have the autumn equinox, which is melancholic but still full of charm.
The terrestrial sphere has been divided into different zones, with which the different climates are in relation:
The Earth has been divided into different zones, which correspond to the various climates:
1. The tropical zone, which extends 23° 27′ from one part to the other of the equator. This is the hottest region. It is limited by the circle of the tropics.
1. The tropical zone, which stretches 23° 27′ from one side of the equator to the other. This is the hottest area. It is defined by the circle of the tropics.
2. The temperate zones, which extend from 23° 27′ to 66° 23′ of latitude, and where the Sun sets every day.
2. The temperate zones, which reach from 23° 27′ to 66° 23′ latitude, where the Sun sets every day.
3. The glacial zones, drawn round the poles, at 66° 33′ latitude, where the Sun remains constantly above or below the horizon for several days, or even several months. These glacial zones are limited by the polar circles.
3. The icy zones surrounding the poles, at 66° 33′ latitude, where the Sun stays either completely above or below the horizon for several days or even months. These icy zones are bounded by the polar circles.
We must add that the axis of the Earth is a straight line that is supposed to pass through the center of the globe and come out at two diametrically opposite points called the poles. The diurnal rotation of the Earth is effected round this axis.
We need to mention that the axis of the Earth is a straight line that is thought to go through the center of the planet and extend out to two opposite points known as the poles. The Earth's daily rotation occurs around this axis.
The name equator is given to a great circle situated between the two poles, at equal distance, which divides[Pg 226] the globe into two hemispheres. The equator is divided into 360 parts or degrees, by other circles that go from one pole to the other. These are the longitudes or meridians (see Fig. 62). The distance between the equator and the pole is divided into larger or smaller circles, which have received the name of latitudes, 90 degrees are reckoned on the one side and the other of the equator, in the direction of the North and South poles, respectively. The longitudes are reckoned from some point either to East or West: the latitudes are reckoned North and South, from the equator. In going from East to West, or inversely, the longitude changes, but in passing from North to South of any spot, it is the latitude that alters.
The term equator refers to a large circle located between the two poles, equidistant from both, which divides[Pg 226] the Earth into two hemispheres. The equator is split into 360 parts or degrees by other circles that extend from one pole to another. These are known as longitudes or meridians (see Fig. 62). The distance from the equator to the poles is divided into larger and smaller circles called latitudes, with 90 degrees counted on either side of the equator towards the North and South poles, respectively. Longitudes are measured from a specific point either to the East or West, while latitudes are measured North and South from the equator. When moving from East to West or vice versa, the longitude changes, but when traveling from North to South, it is the latitude that shifts.

The circles of latitude are smaller in proportion as one approaches the poles. The circumference of the world is 40,076,600 meters at the equator. At the[Pg 227] latitude of Paris (48° 50′) it is only 26,431,900 meters. A point situated at the equator has more ground to travel over in order to accomplish its rotation in twenty-four hours than a point nearer the pole.
The circles of latitude get smaller as you get closer to the poles. The circumference of the Earth is 40,076,600 meters at the equator. At the[Pg 227] latitude of Paris (48° 50′), it's only 26,431,900 meters. A point at the equator has to cover more ground to complete its rotation in twenty-four hours than a point closer to the pole.
We have already stated that this velocity of rotation is 465 meters per second at the equator. At the latitude of Paris it is not more than 305 meters. At the poles it is nil.
We’ve already mentioned that this rotational speed is 465 meters per second at the equator. At the latitude of Paris, it's only 305 meters. At the poles, it is none.
The longitudes, or meridians, are great circles of equal length, dividing the Earth into quarters, like the parts of an orange or a melon. These circumvent the globe, and measure some 40,000,000 (40,008,032) meters. We may remember in passing that the length of the meter has been determined as, by definition, the ten-millionth part of the quarter of a celestial meridian.
The longitudes, or meridians, are great circles of equal length that divide the Earth into quarters, similar to the sections of an orange or a melon. They wrap around the globe and measure about 40,000,000 (40,008,032) meters. It's worth noting that the length of a meter is defined as one ten-millionth of the quarter of a celestial meridian.
Thus, while rotating upon itself, the Earth spins round the Sun, along a vast orbit traced at 149,000,000 kilometers (93,000,000 miles) from the central focus, a sensibly elliptical orbit, as we have already pointed out. It is a little nearer the Sun on January 1st than on July 1st, at its perihelion (peri, near, helios, Sun), than at its aphelion (apo, far, helios, Sun). The difference = 6,000,000 kilometers (3,720,000 miles), and its velocity is a little greater at perihelion than at aphelion.
So, while spinning on its axis, the Earth orbits the Sun along a vast path that's about 149,000,000 kilometers (93,000,000 miles) away from it, following an almost elliptical shape, as we’ve already mentioned. It’s a bit closer to the Sun on January 1st than on July 1st, at its perihelion (peri, near, helios, Sun), compared to its aphelion (apo, far, helios, Sun). The difference is 6,000,000 kilometers (3,720,000 miles), and its speed is slightly higher at perihelion than at aphelion.
This second motion produces the year. It is accomplished in three hundred and sixty-five days, six hours,[Pg 228] nine minutes, nine seconds. Such is the complete revolution of our planet round the orb of day. It has received the name of sidereal year. But this is not how we calculate the year in practical life. The civil year, known also as the tropical year, is not equivalent to the Earth's revolution, because a very slow gyratory motion, called "the precession of the equinoxes," the cycle of which occupies 25,765 years, drags the spring equinox back some twenty minutes in each year.
This second motion creates the year. It takes three hundred sixty-five days, six hours,[Pg 228] nine minutes, and nine seconds to complete. That’s the full orbit of our planet around the sun, known as the sidereal year. However, this isn't how we typically count the year in everyday life. The civil year, also called the tropical year, doesn’t match the Earth's orbit because of a slow wobble called "the precession of the equinoxes," which takes 25,765 years to complete and pushes the spring equinox backwards by about twenty minutes each year.
The civil year is, accordingly, three hundred and sixty-five days, five hours, forty-eight minutes, forty-six seconds.
The civil year is made up of three hundred and sixty-five days, five hours, forty-eight minutes, and forty-six seconds.
In order to simplify the calendar, this accumulating fraction of five hours, forty-eight minutes, forty-six seconds (about a quarter day) is added every four years to a bissextile year (leap-year), and thus we have uneven years of three hundred and sixty-five, and three hundred and sixty-six days. Every year of which the figure is divisible by four is a leap-year. By adding a quarter day to each year, there is a surplus of eleven minutes, fourteen seconds. These are subtracted every hundred years by not taking as bissextile those secular years of which the radical is not divisible by four. The year 1600 was leap-year: 1700, 1800, and 1900 were not; 2000 will be. The agreement between the calendar and nature has thus[Pg 229] been fairly perfect, since the establishment of the Gregorian Calendar in 1582.
To simplify the calendar, an accumulating fraction of five hours, forty-eight minutes, and forty-six seconds (about a quarter of a day) is added every four years to a leap year. This results in uneven years of three hundred sixty-five and three hundred sixty-six days. Any year that can be divided by four is a leap year. By adding a quarter day to each year, there’s a surplus of eleven minutes and fourteen seconds. Every hundred years, these are subtracted by not counting those secular years that aren't divisible by four as leap years. The year 1600 was a leap year; 1700, 1800, and 1900 were not; and 2000 will be. Since the establishment of the Gregorian Calendar in 1582, the alignment between the calendar and nature has been fairly perfect.[Pg 229]
Since the terrestrial orbit measures not less than 930,000,000 kilometers (576,600,000 miles), which must be traversed in a year, the Earth flies through Space at 2,544,000 kilometers (1,577,280 miles) a day, or 106,000 kilometers (65,720 miles) an hour, or 29,500 meters (18 miles) per second on an average, a little faster at perihelion, a little slower at aphelion. This giddy course, a thousand times more rapid than the speed of an express-train, is effected without commotion, shock, or noise. Reasoning alone enables us to divine the prodigious movement that carries us along in the vast fields of the Infinite, in mid-heaven.
Since the Earth's orbit is at least 930,000,000 kilometers (576,600,000 miles), which we complete in a year, the Earth travels through space at 2,544,000 kilometers (1,577,280 miles) a day, or 106,000 kilometers (65,720 miles) an hour, or 29,500 meters (18 miles) per second on average, moving a bit faster at perihelion and a bit slower at aphelion. This incredible journey, a thousand times faster than an express train, happens without any turbulence, shock, or noise. It's through logic alone that we can grasp the immense movement that carries us through the vastness of the universe, in the sky above.
Returning to the calendar, it must be remarked in conclusion, that the human race has not exhibited great sense in fixing the New Year on January 1. No more disagreeable season could have been selected. And further, as the ancient Roman names of the months have been preserved, which in the time of Romulus began with March, the "seventh" month, "September," is our ninth month; October (the eighth) is the tenth; November (the ninth) has become the eleventh; and December (the tenth) has taken the place of the twelfth. Verily, we are not hard to please!
Returning to the calendar, it should be noted that humanity hasn't shown much common sense in choosing January 1 as the New Year. There's no worse season that could have been picked. Additionally, since the ancient Roman names of the months have been kept, what was once March, the "seventh" month, is now our ninth month; October (the eighth) is now the tenth; November (the ninth) has turned into the eleventh; and December (the tenth) has become the twelfth. Truly, we are not hard to satisfy!
These months, again, are unequal, as every one[Pg 230] knows. Witness the simple expedient of remembering the long and short months, by closing the left hand and counting the knobs and hollows of the fist, the former corresponding to the long months, the latter to the short: first knob = January; first hollow, February; second knob, March; and so on.[12]
These months, once again, are not all the same length, as everyone knows. Just think about the easy trick of remembering which months are long and which are short by using your left hand. Close your fist and count the knuckles and dips: the knuckles stand for the long months, and the dips represent the short ones. First knuckle = January; first dip = February; second knuckle = March; and so on.[12]

Should not the real renewal of the year coincide with the awakening of Nature, with the spring on the terrestrial hemisphere occupied by the greater portion of Humanity, with the date of March 21st? Should not the months be equalized, and their names modified? Why should we not follow the beautiful evolution dictated by the Sun and by the movement of our planet? But our poor Earth may roll on a long time yet before its inhabitants will become reasonable.
Shouldn't the true renewal of the year coincide with Nature waking up, with spring in the part of the world where most of Humanity lives, on March 21st? Shouldn't the months be equalized and their names changed? Why shouldn't we follow the beautiful cycle set by the Sun and the movement of our planet? But our poor Earth might keep spinning for a long time before its inhabitants become sensible.
CHAPTER IX
THE MOON
It is the delightful hour when all Nature pauses in the tranquil calm of the silent night.
It is the lovely hour when all of nature stops in the peaceful stillness of the quiet night.
The Sun has cast his farewell gleams upon the weary Earth. All sound is hushed. And soon the stars will shine out one by one in the bosom of the somber firmament. Opposite to the sunset, in the east, the Full Moon rises slowly, as it were calling our thoughts toward the mysteries of eternity, while her limpid night spreads over space like a dew from Heaven.
The Sun has sent its last rays down to the tired Earth. Everything is quiet. Soon, the stars will appear one by one in the dark sky. In the east, opposite the sunset, the Full Moon rises slowly, as if inviting us to contemplate the mysteries of eternity, while her clear light covers the space like dew from Heaven.
In the odorous woods, the trees are silhouetted strangely upon the sky, seeming to stretch their knotted arms toward this celestial beauty. On the river, smooth as a mirror, wherein the pale Phœbe reflects her splendor, the maidens go to seek the floating image of their future spouse. And in response to their prayers, she rends the veil of cloud that hides her from their eyes, and pours the reflection of her gentle beams upon the sleeping waters.
In the fragrant woods, the trees are oddly outlined against the sky, appearing to reach their gnarled branches toward this heavenly beauty. On the river, as smooth as a mirror, where the pale moon reflects its radiance, young women go in search of the dreamlike image of their future partner. In answer to their wishes, she tears away the veil of clouds that conceals her from view and casts the glow of her soft light upon the tranquil waters.
From all time the Moon has had the privilege of[Pg 233] charming the gaze, and attracting the particular attention of mortals. What thoughts have not been wafted to her pale, yet luminous disk? Orb of mystery and of solitude, brooding over our silent nights, this celestial luminary is at once sad and splendid in her glacial purity, and her limpid rays provoke a reverie full of charm and melancholy. Mute witness of terrestrial destinies, her nocturnal flame watches over our planet, following it in its course as a faithful satellite.
From all time, the Moon has had the privilege of[Pg 233] charming our gaze and capturing the special attention of humans. What thoughts haven’t been sent her way, to her pale but luminous face? She is an orb of mystery and solitude, watching over our quiet nights. This celestial body is both sad and beautiful in her icy purity, and her clear rays inspire a dreaminess that is both enchanting and melancholic. A silent witness to earthly fates, her nightlight watches over our planet, following it on its journey like a loyal companion.
The human eye first uplifted to the Heavens was struck, above all, with the brilliancy of this solitary globe, straying among the stars. The Moon first suggested an easy division of time into months and weeks, and the first astronomical observations were limited to the study of her phases.
The human eye, lifted for the first time to the sky, was wowed mostly by the brightness of this lone sphere, wandering among the stars. The Moon was the first to inspire a simple way to break time into months and weeks, and early astronomical observations focused mainly on studying its phases.
Daughter of the Earth, the Moon was born at the limits of the terrestrial nebula, when our world was still no more than a vast gaseous sphere, and was detached from her at some critical period of colossal solar tide. Separating with regret from her cradle, but attached to the Earth by indissoluble ties of attraction, she rotates round us in a month, from west to east, and this movement keeps her back a little each day in relation to the stars. If we watch, evening by evening, beginning from the new moon, we shall observe that she is each night a little farther to the left, or east, than on the preceding[Pg 234] evening. This revolution of the Moon around our planet produces the phases, and gives the measure of our months.
Daughter of the Earth, the Moon was born at the edge of the terrestrial nebula when our world was still just a huge ball of gas, and she was separated from it during a critical period of massive solar tides. She left her cradle reluctantly but remains connected to Earth by strong gravitational ties, orbiting us once a month from west to east. This movement pulls her back slightly each day in relation to the stars. If we watch evening by evening, starting from the new moon, we’ll notice that she’s a bit farther to the left, or east, each night compared to the previous[Pg 234] evening. This orbit of the Moon around our planet creates its phases and defines the length of our months.

During her monthly journey she always presents the same face to us. One might think that the fear of losing us had immobilized her globe, and prevented her from turning. And so we only know of her the vague sketch of a human face that has been observed through all the ages.
During her monthly journey, she always shows us the same face. One might think that the fear of losing us has frozen her globe and stopped her from turning. So, all we know of her is the vague outline of a human face that has been seen throughout the ages.
It seems, in fact, as though she were looking down upon us from the Heavens, the more so as the principal spots of her disk vaguely recall the aspect of a face. If we try to draw it without the aid of instruments we observe dark regions and clear regions that each interprets in his own fashion. To the author, for instance, the full Moon has the appearance represented in the following figure. The spots resemble two eyes and the sketch of a nose; resulting in a vague human figure, as indicated on the lower disk. Others see a man carrying a bundle of wood, a hare, a lion, a dog, a kangaroo, a sickle, two heads embracing, etc.[13] But generally speaking, there is a tendency to see a human figure in it.
It really seems like she’s looking down on us from the sky, especially since the main spots on her surface kind of resemble a face. If we try to sketch it without tools, we notice dark and light areas that everyone interprets differently. For the author, for example, the full Moon looks like the figure shown in the following illustration. The spots look like two eyes and the outline of a nose, creating a vague human figure, as shown in the lower image. Others see a man with a bundle of wood, a hare, a lion, a dog, a kangaroo, a sickle, two heads together, etc.[13] But overall, there’s a common tendency to see a human figure in it.
If this appearance is helped a little by drawing, it gives the profile of a man's head fairly well sketched, and furnished with an abundant crop of hair (Fig. 66).[Pg 236] Others go much more into detail, and draw a woman's head that is certainly too definite, like this of M. Jean Sardou (Fig. 67). Others, again, like M. Zamboni, see behind the man's profile the likeness of a young girl being embraced by him (Fig. 68). There is certainly some imagination about these. And yet, on the first suitable occasion, look at the Moon through an opera-glass, a few days after the first quarter, and you will not fail to see the masculine profile just described, and even to imagine the "kiss in the Moon."
If this look is enhanced a bit by drawing, it provides a fairly good sketch of a man's head, complete with a full head of hair (Fig. 66). [Pg 236] Some people go into much more detail and draw a woman's head that is definitely too defined, like this one by M. Jean Sardou (Fig. 67). Others, like M. Zamboni, perceive behind the man's profile the image of a young girl being embraced by him (Fig. 68). There’s definitely some imagination involved in these. Yet, at the first chance you get, look at the Moon through opera glasses a few days after the first quarter, and you're sure to see the masculine profile just described, and maybe even imagine the "kiss in the Moon."


These vague aspects disappear as soon as the Moon is examined with even the least powerful instruments:[Pg 238] the spots are better defined, and the illusions of indistinct vision vanish. Compare this direct photograph of the Moon, taken by the author some years ago (Fig. 69): here is neither a human figure, man, dog, hare, nor faggot; simply deep geographical configurations, and in the lower region, a luminous point whence certain light bands spread out, some being prolonged to a considerable distance. And yet, from a little way off, does it not form the man's face above indicated?
These unclear details fade away as soon as the Moon is looked at with even the simplest instruments:[Pg 238] the features become clearer, and the illusions of blurry vision disappear. Compare this direct photograph of the Moon, taken by the author a few years ago (Fig. 69): there’s no human figure, dog, hare, or stick; just deep geographical shapes, and in the lower area, a bright spot from which certain beams of light spread out, some extending quite far. And yet, from a distance, doesn't it resemble the face of a man as previously described?

From the earliest astronomical observations made with the aid of instruments by Galileo, in 1609, people tried to find out what the dark spots could represent,[Pg 239] and they were called seas, because water absorbs light, and reflects it less than terra firma. The Moon of itself possesses no intrinsic light, any more than our planet, and only shines by the light of the Sun that illuminates it. As it rotates round the Earth, and constantly changes its position with respect to the Sun, we see more or less of its illuminated hemisphere, and the result is the phases that every one knows so well.
From the earliest astronomical observations made with instruments by Galileo in 1609, people tried to figure out what the dark spots could be, and they were called seas because water absorbs light and reflects it less than terra firma. The Moon doesn’t have its own light, just like our planet, and it only shines by the light of the Sun that hits it. As it orbits the Earth and constantly changes its position relative to the Sun, we see more or less of its illuminated side, resulting in the phases that everyone knows so well.[Pg 239]


At the commencement of each lunation, the Moon is between the Sun and the Earth, and its non-illuminated hemisphere is turned toward us. This is the New[Pg 241] Moon, invisible to us; but two days later, the slim crescent of Diana sheds a gentle radiance upon the Earth. Gradually the crescent enlarges. When the Moon arrives at right angles with ourselves and with the Sun, half the illuminated hemisphere is presented to us. This is the first quarter. At the time of Full Moon, it is opposite the Sun, and we see the whole of the hemisphere illuminated. Then comes the decline: the brilliant disk is slightly corroded at first; it diminishes from day to day, and about a week before the New Moon our fair friend only shows her profile before she once more passes in front of the Sun: this is the last quarter.
At the start of each lunar cycle, the Moon is positioned between the Sun and the Earth, showing us its dark side. This is the New[Pg 241] Moon, which we can’t see; but two days later, the thin crescent of the Moon casts a soft glow on the Earth. Gradually, the crescent gets bigger. When the Moon is at a right angle with us and the Sun, we see half of the lit side. This is the first quarter. During the Full Moon, it’s on the opposite side of the Sun, and we see the entire lit hemisphere. Then, the Moon begins to wane: the bright disk is slightly less full at first; it shrinks day by day, and about a week before the New Moon, our lovely friend only shows her silhouette before she once again passes in front of the Sun: this is the last quarter.

When the Moon is crescent, in the first evenings of the lunation, and after the last quarter, the rest of the[Pg 242] disk is visible, illuminated feebly by a pale luminosity. This is known as the ashy light. It is due to the shine of the Earth, reflecting the light received from the Sun into space. Accordingly the ashy light is the reflection of our own sent back to us by the Moon. It is the reflection of a reflection.
When the Moon is in its crescent phase during the early nights of the lunar cycle, and after the last quarter, the rest of the[Pg 242] disk is faintly visible, lit up by a soft glow. This is called the ashy light. It comes from the Earth’s shine, which reflects sunlight back into space. In this way, the ashy light is actually our own light being reflected back to us by the Moon. It’s the reflection of a reflection.
This rotation of the Moon round the Earth is accomplished in twenty-seven days, seven hours, forty-three minutes, eleven seconds; but as the Earth is simultaneously revolving round the Sun, when the Moon returns to the same point (the Earth having become displaced relatively to the Sun), the Moon has to travel two days longer to recover its position between the Sun and the Earth, so that the lunar month is longer than the sidereal revolution of the Moon, and takes twenty-nine days, twelve hours, forty-four minutes, three seconds. This is the duration of the sequence of phases.
This rotation of the Moon around the Earth takes twenty-seven days, seven hours, forty-three minutes, and eleven seconds. However, since the Earth is also moving around the Sun, when the Moon returns to the same point (the Earth has moved relative to the Sun), the Moon has to travel an additional two days to get back in position between the Sun and the Earth. As a result, the lunar month is longer than the sidereal revolution of the Moon, lasting twenty-nine days, twelve hours, forty-four minutes, and three seconds. This is the length of the cycle of phases.
This revolution is accomplished at a distance of 384,000 kilometers (238,000 miles). The velocity of the Moon in its orbit is more than 1 kilometer (0.6214 mile) per second. But our planet sweeps it through space at a velocity almost thirty times greater.
This revolution happens at a distance of 384,000 kilometers (238,000 miles). The Moon travels in its orbit at a speed of over 1 kilometer (0.6214 miles) per second. However, our planet moves it through space at a speed nearly thirty times faster.
The diameter of the Moon represents 273⁄1,000 that of the Earth, i.e., 3,480 kilometers (2,157 miles).
The diameter of the Moon is 273⁄1,000 that of the Earth, i.e. 3,480 kilometers (2,157 miles).
Its surface = 38,000,000 square kilometers (15,000,000 square miles), a little more than the [Pg 243]thirteenth part of the terrestrial surface, which = 510,000,000 (200,000,000 square miles).
Its surface is 38,000,000 square kilometers (15,000,000 square miles), a little more than the [Pg 243] thirteenth part of the Earth's surface, which is 510,000,000 (200,000,000 square miles).
In volume, the Moon is fifty times less than the Earth. Its mass or weight is only 1⁄81 that of the terrestrial globe. Its density = 0.615, relatively to that of the Earth, i.e., a little more than three times that of water. Weight at its surface is very little: 0.174. A kilogram transported thither would only weigh 174 grams.
In terms of volume, the Moon is fifty times smaller than the Earth. Its mass is only 1⁄81 that of our planet. Its density is 0.615 compared to that of the Earth, meaning it is just over three times denser than water. The weight on its surface is very slight: 0.174. A kilogram taken there would weigh only 174 grams.
At the meager distance of 384,000 kilometers (238,000 miles) that separates us from it (about thirty times the diameter of the Earth), the Moon is a suburb of our terrestrial habitation. What does this small distance amount to? It is a mere step in the universe.
At the short distance of 384,000 kilometers (238,000 miles) that separates us from it (about thirty times the Earth's diameter), the Moon feels like a nearby part of our home. What does this small distance really mean? It's just a tiny step in the vast universe.
A telegraphic message would get there in one and a half second; a projectile fired from a gun would arrive in eight days, five hours; an express-train would be due in eight months, twenty-two days. It is only the 1⁄388 part of the distance that separates us from the Sun, and only the 100⁄1,000,000 part of the distance of the stars nearest to us. Many men have tramped the distance that separates us from the Moon. A bridge of thirty terrestrial globes would suffice to unite the two worlds.
A telegraphic message would reach its destination in one and a half seconds; a projectile fired from a gun would take eight days and five hours to arrive; an express train would get there in eight months and twenty-two days. We are only a 1⁄388 part of the distance from the Sun, and just 100⁄1 million part of the distance to the nearest stars. Many people have walked the distance between us and the Moon. A bridge made of thirty Earth-sized planets would be enough to connect the two worlds.
Owing to this great proximity, the Moon is the best known of all the celestial spheres. Its geographical[Pg 244] (or more correctly, selenographical, Selene, moon) map was drawn out more than two centuries ago, at first in a vague sketch, and afterward with more details, until to-day it is as precise and accurate as any of our terrestrial maps of geography.
Due to its close distance, the Moon is the most well-known of all the celestial bodies. Its geographical[Pg 244] (or more accurately, selenographical, Selene, moon) map was first created over two hundred years ago, initially as a rough sketch, and later with more details, until today it is as precise and accurate as any of our Earth maps.
Before the invention of the telescope, from antiquity to the seventeenth century, people lost themselves in conjectures as to the nature of this strange lunar figure. It was held to be a mysterious world, the more extraordinary in that it always presented the same face to us. Some compared it to an immense mirror reflecting the image of the Earth. Others pictured it as a silver star, an enchanted abode where all was wealth and happiness. For many a long day it was the fashion to think, quite irrationally, that the inhabitants of the Moon were fifteen times bigger than ourselves.
Before the invention of the telescope, from ancient times to the seventeenth century, people speculated about the nature of this strange lunar figure. It was seen as a mysterious world, especially since it always showed us the same face. Some compared it to a huge mirror reflecting the image of the Earth. Others imagined it as a silver star, a magical place where everything was abundant and joyful. For a long time, it was a popular belief, albeit irrational, that the inhabitants of the Moon were fifteen times larger than us.
The invention of telescopes, however, brought a little order and a grain of truth into these fantastic assumptions. The first observations of Galileo revolutionized science, and his discoveries filled the best-ordered minds with enthusiasm. Thenceforward, the Moon became our property, a terrestrial suburb, where the whole world would gladly have installed itself, had the means of getting there been as swift as the wings of the imagination. It became easy enough to invent a thousand enchanting descriptions of the charms of our[Pg 245] fair sister, and no one scrupled to do so. Soon, it was observed that the Moon closely resembled the Earth in its geological features; its surface bristles with sharp mountain peaks that light up in so many luminous points beneath the rays of the Sun. Alongside, dark and shaded parts indicate the plains; moreover, there are large gray patches that were supposed to be seas because they reflect the solar light less perfectly than the adjacent countries. At that epoch hardly anything was known of the physical constitution of the Moon, and it was figured as enveloped with an atmospheric layer, analogous to that at the bottom of which we carry on our respiration.
The invention of telescopes, however, brought some order and a bit of truth to these wild ideas. Galileo's first observations changed science forever, and his discoveries excited even the most rational thinkers. From then on, the Moon became our territory, like a nearby neighborhood where everyone would have happily moved if getting there was as fast as our imagination. It was easy to come up with countless enchanting descriptions of the beauty of our[Pg 245]
To-day we know that these "seas" are destitute of water, and that if the lunar globe possesses an atmosphere, it must be excessively light.
Today we know that these "seas" are devoid of water, and that if the moon has an atmosphere, it must be extremely thin.
The Moon became the favorite object of astronomers, and the numerous observations made of it authorized the delineation of very interesting selenographic charts. In order to find one's way among the seas, plains, and mountains that make up the lunar territory, it was necessary to name them. The seas were the first to be baptized, in accordance with their reputed astrological influences. Accordingly, we find on the Moon, the Sea of Fecundity, the Lake of Death, the Sea of Humors, the Ocean of Tempests, the Sea of Tranquillity,[Pg 246] the Marsh of Mists, the Lake of Dreams, the Sea of Putrefaction, the Peninsula of Reverie, the Sea of Rains, etc.
The Moon became the favorite target for astronomers, and the many observations made of it led to the creation of some very interesting lunar maps. To navigate through the seas, plains, and mountains that make up the lunar landscape, it was essential to give them names. The seas were the first to be named, based on their supposed astrological influences. As a result, we find on the Moon the Sea of Fertility, the Lake of Death, the Sea of Moods, the Ocean of Storms, the Sea of Tranquility,[Pg 246] the Marsh of Mists, the Lake of Dreams, the Sea of Decay, the Peninsula of Daydreams, the Sea of Rains, and so on.
With regard to the luminous parts and the mountains, it was at first proposed to call them after the most illustrious astronomers, but the fear of giving offense acted as a check on Hevelius and Riccioli, authors of the first lunar maps (1647, 1651), and they judged it more prudent to transfer the names of the terrestrial mountains to the Moon. The Alps, the Apennines, the Pyrenees, the Carpathians, are all to be found up there; then, as the vocabulary of the mountains was not adequate, the scientists reasserted their rights, and we meet in the Moon, Aristotle, Plato, Hipparchus, Ptolemy, Copernicus, Kepler, Newton, as well as other more modern and even contemporaneous celebrities.
Regarding the bright spots and the mountains, it was initially suggested to name them after the most famous astronomers, but the worry about offending anyone held back Hevelius and Riccioli, the creators of the first lunar maps (1647, 1651). They decided it was wiser to carry over the names of earthbound mountains to the Moon. The Alps, the Apennines, the Pyrenees, and the Carpathians are all up there; then, since the list of mountain names wasn’t sufficient, the scientists asserted their rights again, and we find Aristotle, Plato, Hipparchus, Ptolemy, Copernicus, Kepler, and Newton on the Moon, along with some more modern and even contemporary figures.
We have not space to reproduce the general chart of the Moon (that published by the author measures not less than a meter, with the nomenclature); but the figure subjoined gives a summary sufficient for the limits of this little book. Here are the names of the principal lunar mountains, with the numbers corresponding to them upon the map.
We don’t have enough space to include the complete chart of the Moon (the one published by the author is at least a meter long and includes the nomenclature); however, the figure below provides a summary that's sufficient for the boundaries of this small book. Here are the names of the main lunar mountains, along with their corresponding numbers on the map.

(From Fowler's "Telescopic Astronomy.")
1 | Furnerius | 14 | Albategnius | 27 | Arzachel |
2 | Petavius | 15 | Hipparchus | 28 | Walter |
3 | Langrenus | 16 | Manilius | 29 | Clavius |
4 | Macrobius | 17 | Eudoxus | 30 | Tycho |
5 | Cleomedes | 18 | Aristotle | 31 | Bullialdus |
6 | Endymion | 19 | Cassini | 32 | Schiller |
7 | Altas | 20 | Aristillus | 33 | Schickard |
8 | Hercules | 21 | Plato | 34 | Gassendi |
9 | Romer | 22 | Archimedes | 35 | Kepler |
10 | Posidonius | 23 | Eratosthenes | 36 | Grimaldi |
11 | Fracastorius | 24 | Copernicus | 37 | Aristarchus |
12 | Theophilus | 25 | Ptolemy | ||
13 | Piccolomini | 26 | Alphonsus |
A | Mare Crisum | F | Mare Imbrium | V | Altai Mountains |
B | Mare Fercunditatis | G | Sinus Iridum | W | Mare Vaporum |
C | Mare Nectaris | H | Oceanus Procellarum | X | Apennine Mountains |
D | Mare Tranquilitatis | I | Mare Humorum | Y | Caucasus Mountains |
E | Mare Serenitatis | K | Mare Nubium | Z | Alps |
The constantly growing progress of optics leads to perpetual new discoveries in science, and at the present time we can say that we know the geography of the Moon as well as, and even better than, that of our own planet. The heights of all the mountains of the Moon are measured to within a few feet. (One cannot say as much for the mountains of the Earth.) The highest are over 7,000 meters (nearly 25,000 feet). Relatively to its proportions, the satellite is much more mountainous than the planet, and the plutonian giants are much more numerous there than here. If we have peaks, like the Gaorisankar, the highest of the Himalayas and of the whole Earth, whose elevation of 8,840 meters (29,000 feet) is equivalent to 1⁄1,140 the diameter of our globe, there are peaks on the Moon of 7,700 meters (25,264 feet), e.g., those of Doerfel and Leibniz, the height of which is equivalent to 1⁄470 the lunar diameter.
The ever-growing advancements in optics lead to constant new discoveries in science, and right now, we can say that we understand the geography of the Moon as well as, if not better than, that of our own planet. We can measure the heights of all the Moon’s mountains to within a few feet. (You can’t say the same for Earth’s mountains.) The highest ones exceed 7,000 meters (nearly 25,000 feet). Relative to its size, the Moon is much more mountainous than Earth, and the giant peaks there are far more numerous than here. For instance, while we have peaks like Gaorisankar, the tallest in the Himalayas and the entire Earth, which stands at 8,840 meters (29,000 feet)—equivalent to 1⁄1,140 the diameter of our globe—there are peaks on the Moon reaching 7,700 meters (25,264 feet), such as those of Doerfel and Leibniz, whose heights are equivalent to 1⁄470 the lunar diameter.
Tycho's Mountain is one of the finest upon our satellite. It is visible with the naked eye (and perfectly with opera-glasses) as a white point shining like a kind of star upon the lower portion of the disk. At the time of full moon it is dazzling, and projects long rays from afar upon the lunar globe. So, too, Mount Copernicus, whose brilliant whiteness sparkles in space. But the strangest thing about these lunar mountains is that they are all hollow, and can be measured as well in depth as in height. A type of mountain as strange to us as are the seas without water! In effect, these mountains[Pg 249] of the moon are ancient volcanic craters, with no summits, nor covers.
Tycho's Mountain is one of the best on our moon. You can see it with the naked eye (and really well through binoculars) as a bright white point that shines like a star in the lower part of the moon's surface. When it's a full moon, it's blindingly bright and sends out long rays across the lunar landscape. Mount Copernicus is similar, with its brilliant whiteness sparkling in the void of space. But the weirdest thing about these lunar mountains is that they’re all hollow and can be measured in both depth and height. They’re a type of mountain as odd to us as seas without water! In reality, these mountains[Pg 249] of the moon are ancient volcanic craters, with no peaks or coverings.
At the top of the highest peaks, there is a large circular depression, prolonged into the heart of the mountain, sometimes far below the level of the surrounding plains, and as these craters often measure several hundred kilometers, one is obliged, if one does not want to go all round them in crossing the mountain, to descend almost perpendicularly into the depths and cross there, to reascend the opposite side, and return to the plain. These alpine excursions incontestably deserve the name of perilous ascents!
At the top of the highest peaks, there’s a large circular dip that extends deep into the mountain, sometimes well below the level of the surrounding plains. Because these craters can measure several hundred kilometers, if you don’t want to go all the way around them while crossing the mountain, you have to descend almost straight down into the depths, cross through there, then climb back up the other side to return to the plain. These alpine trips definitely deserve to be called risky climbs!
No country on the Earth can give us any notion of the state of the lunar soil: never was ground so tormented; never globe so profoundly shattered to its very bowels. The mountains are accumulations of enormous rocks tumbled one upon the other, and round the awful labyrinth of craters one sees nothing but dismantled ramparts, or columns of pointed rocks like cathedral spires issuing from the chaos.
No country on Earth can give us any idea of the state of the lunar soil: never has ground been so battered; never has a globe been so thoroughly ripped apart to its core. The mountains are piles of massive rocks stacked on top of each other, and around the dreadful maze of craters, all you see are broken walls or columns of jagged rocks rising up like cathedral spires from the chaos.
As we said, there is no atmosphere, or at least so little at the bottom of the valleys that it is imperceptible. No clouds, no fog, no rain nor snow. The sky is an eternally black space, vaultless, jeweled with stars by day as by night.
As we mentioned, there's no atmosphere, or at least so little at the bottom of the valleys that you can't even notice it. No clouds, no fog, no rain or snow. The sky is an endlessly black space, without a ceiling, sparkling with stars both day and night.
Let us suppose that we arrive among these savage[Pg 250] steppes at daybreak: the lunar day is fifteen times longer than our own, because the Sun takes a month to illuminate the entire circuit of the Moon; there are no less than 354 hours from the rising to the setting of the Sun. If we arrive before the sunrise, there is no aurora to herald it, for in the absence of atmosphere there can be no sort of twilight. Of a sudden on the dark horizon come flashes of the solar light, striking the summits of the mountains, while the plains and valleys are still in darkness. The light spreads slowly, for while on the Earth in central latitudes the Sun takes only two minutes and a quarter to rise, on the Moon it takes nearly an hour, and in consequence the light it sends out is very weak for some minutes, and increases excessively slowly. It is a kind of aurora, but lasts a very short time, for when at the end of half an hour, the solar disk has half risen, the light appears as intense to the eye as when it is entirely above the horizon; the radiant orb is seen with its protuberances and its burning atmosphere. It rises slowly, like a luminous god, in the depths of the black sky, a profound and formless sky in which the stars shine all day, since they are not hidden by any atmospheric veil such as conceals them from us during the daylight.
Let’s imagine that we arrive in these savage[Pg 250] steppes at dawn: the lunar day is fifteen times longer than ours, because the Sun takes a month to shine on the entire surface of the Moon; there are 354 hours from sunrise to sunset. If we get there before the sun comes up, there’s no dawn to signal it, since without an atmosphere, there’s no twilight. Suddenly, the dark horizon sparks with flashes of sunlight, hitting the mountain tops while the plains and valleys remain in darkness. The light spreads slowly, because on Earth, in mid-latitudes, the Sun rises in just over two minutes, but on the Moon, it takes nearly an hour, making the initial light very weak and increasing gradually. It’s like a brief dawn, but it lasts only a short time; by the time half an hour passes and the sun has risen halfway, the light looks just as bright as when it’s fully above the horizon; the shining orb is visible with its bulges and fiery atmosphere. It rises slowly, like a radiant god, in the deep black sky, a vast and formless sky where the stars shine all day, since there’s no atmospheric veil to hide them from our sight during the daytime.

The absence of sensible atmosphere must produce an effect on the temperature of the Moon analogous to that perceived on the high mountains of our globe, where the rarefaction of the air does not permit the solar heat to concentrate itself upon the surface of the soil, as it does below the atmosphere, which acts as a forcing-house: the Sun's heat is not kept in by anything, and[Pg 252] incessantly radiates out toward space. In all probability the cold is extremely and constantly rigorous, not only during the nights, which are fifteen times longer than our own, but even during the long days of sunshine.
The lack of a sensible atmosphere must affect the Moon's temperature similarly to how it is on high mountains on Earth, where thin air doesn’t allow solar heat to stay concentrated on the ground like it does under an atmosphere that acts like a greenhouse. The Sun's heat isn’t trapped by anything and[Pg 252] constantly radiates away into space. It's highly likely that the cold is extremely and continuously harsh, not just during the nights—which are fifteen times longer than ours—but even during the long days of sunlight.
We give two different drawings to represent these curious aspects of lunar topography. The first (Fig. 72) is taken in the neighborhood of the Apennines, and shows a long chain of mountains beneath which are three deep rings, Archimedes, Aristillus, and Autolycus: the second (Fig. 73) depicts the lunar ring of Flammarion,[14] whose outline is constructed of dismantled ramparts, and whose depths are sprinkled with little craters. The first of these two drawings was made in England by Nasmyth, the second in Germany by Krieger: they both give an exact idea of what one sees in the telescope with different modes of solar illumination.
We provide two different illustrations to showcase these intriguing features of lunar topography. The first (Fig. 72) is from the area near the Apennines and displays a long mountain range with three deep craters: Archimedes, Aristillus, and Autolycus. The second (Fig. 73) shows the Flammarion lunar ring,[14] whose shape consists of eroded walls, and its depths are dotted with small craters. The first illustration was created in England by Nasmyth, while the second was made in Germany by Krieger: both accurately represent what one can see through a telescope under different solar lighting conditions.
In the Moon's always black and starry sky a majestic star that is not visible from the Earth, and exhibits this peculiarity that it is stationary in the Heavens, while all the others pass behind it, may constantly be admired, by day as well as by night; and it is also of considerable[Pg 253] apparent magnitude. This orb, some four times as large as the Moon in diameter, and thirteen to fourteen times more extensive in surface, is our Earth, which presents to the Moon a sequence of phases similar to those which our satellite presents to us, but in the inverse direction. At the moment of New Moon, the Sun fully illuminates the terrestrial hemisphere turned toward our satellite, and we get "Full Earth"; at the time of Full Moon, on the contrary, the non-illuminated hemisphere of the Earth is turned toward the satellite, and we get "New Earth": when the Moon shows us first quarter, the Earth is in last quarter, and so on. The drawing subjoined gives an idea of these aspects.
In the Moon's always dark and starry sky, there’s a majestic star that can't be seen from Earth. It has the unique feature of being stationary in the heavens while all the other stars move behind it, making it visible day and night. It has a significant[Pg 253] brightness. This body, about four times larger than the Moon in diameter and thirteen to fourteen times larger in surface area, is our Earth. It shows the Moon a series of phases similar to what our satellite shows us, but in the opposite order. During the New Moon, the Sun fully lights up the side of Earth facing the Moon, and we see a "Full Earth." Conversely, during the Full Moon, the dark side of Earth is facing the Moon, giving us a "New Earth." When the Moon is at its first quarter, the Earth is at its last quarter, and so on. The accompanying drawing illustrates these appearances.

What a curious sight our globe must be during this long night of fourteen times twenty-four hours! Independent of its phases, which bring it from first quarter to full earth for the middle of the night, and from full earth to last quarter for sunrise, how interested we should be to see it thus stationary in the sky, and turning on itself in twenty-four hours.
What a strange sight our planet must be during this long night of fourteen times twenty-four hours! Aside from its phases, which take it from the first quarter to a full view of Earth at midnight, and then from that full view to the last quarter at sunrise, how fascinated we would be to see it just sitting there in the sky, spinning on its axis in twenty-four hours.

Yes, thanks to us, the inhabitants of the lunar hemisphere turned toward us are gratified by the sight of a[Pg 255] splendid nocturnal torch, doubtless less white than our own despite the clouds with which the terrestrial globe is studded, and shaded in a tender tone of bluish emerald-green. The royal orb of their long nights, the Earth, gives them moonlight of unparalleled beauty, and we may say without false modesty that our presence in the lunar sky must produce marvelous and absolutely fairy-like effects.
Yes, thanks to us, the people on the part of the moon facing us are delighted by the sight of a[Pg 255] beautiful nighttime light, probably less bright than our own despite the clouds scattered across the Earth, and shaded in a soft bluish-green hue. The majestic glow of their long nights, the Earth, provides them with moonlight of unmatched beauty, and we can honestly say that our presence in the lunar sky must create amazing and truly magical effects.
Maybe, they envy us our globe, a dazzling dwelling-place whose splendor radiates through space; they see its greenish clarity varying with the extent of cloud that veils its seas and continents, and they observe its motion of rotation, by which all the countries of our planet are revealed in succession to its admirers.
Maybe they envy us our planet, a stunning home whose beauty shines through space; they notice its greenish hues changing with the clouds that cover its oceans and lands, and they watch its rotation, which reveals all the countries of our world one after another to its admirers.
We are talking of these pageants seen from the Moon, and of the inhabitants of our satellite as if they really existed. The sterile and desolate aspect of the lunar world, however, rather brings us to the conclusion that such inhabitants are non-existent, although we have no authorization for affirming this. That they have existed seems to me beyond doubt. The lunar volcanoes had a considerable activity, in an atmosphere that allowed the white volcanic ashes to be carried a long way by the winds, figuring round the craters the stellar rays that are still so striking. These cinders were spread over the soil, preserving all its asperities of outline,[Pg 256] a little heaped up on the side to which they were impelled. The magnificent photographs recently made at the Paris Observatory by MM. Loewy and Puiseux are splendid evidence of these projections. In this era of planetary activity there were liquids and gases on the surface of the lunar globe, which appear subsequently to have been entirely absorbed. Now the teaching of our own planet is that Nature nowhere remains infertile, and that the production of Life is a law so general and so imperious that life develops at its own expense, sooner than abstain from developing. Accordingly, it is difficult to suppose that the lunar elements can have remained inactive, when only next door they exhibited such fecundity upon our globe. Yes, the Moon has been inhabited by beings doubtless very different from ourselves, and perhaps may still be, although this globe has run through the phases of its astral life more rapidly than our own, and the daughter is relatively older than the mother.
We're talking about these spectacles seen from the Moon and the inhabitants of our satellite as if they really existed. The barren and desolate look of the lunar world, however, leads us to conclude that such inhabitants might not exist, even though we can't definitively say so. That they once existed seems beyond doubt to me. The lunar volcanoes were quite active, in an atmosphere that allowed white volcanic ash to be blown over long distances by the wind, creating striking patterns around the craters still visible today. These ashes were spread across the surface, keeping all its jagged outlines, a bit piled up on the side they were blown to. The stunning photographs recently taken at the Paris Observatory by Messrs. Loewy and Puiseux are amazing proof of these projections. During this time of planetary activity, there were liquids and gases on the surface of the Moon, which seem to have been completely absorbed later on. Now, the lesson from our own planet shows that Nature never stays barren for long, and that the emergence of Life is such a strong and universal law that life tends to develop rather than avoid developing. Therefore, it's hard to believe that the lunar elements could have remained inactive when, right next door, they showed such fertility on our planet. Yes, the Moon was inhabited by beings likely very different from ourselves, and may still be, even though this celestial body has gone through its life stages faster than our own, making the daughter relatively older than the mother.
The duration of the life of the worlds appears to have been in proportion with their masses. The Moon cooled and mineralized more quickly than the Earth. Jupiter is still fluid.
The lifespan of the worlds seems to be linked to their masses. The Moon cooled and solidified faster than the Earth. Jupiter is still in a liquid state.
The progress of optics brings us already very close to this neighboring province. 'Tis a pity we can not get a little nearer!
The advancements in optics have brought us quite close to this related field. It's a shame we can't get a little closer!
A telescopic magnification of 2,000 puts the Moon at 384,000⁄2,000 or 192 kilometers (some 120 miles) from our eye. Practically we can obtain no more, either from the most powerful instruments, or from photographic enlargements. Sometimes, exceptionally, enlargements of 3,000 can be used. This = 384,000⁄3,000 or 128 kilometers (some 80 miles). Undoubtedly, this is an admirable result, which does the greatest honor to human intelligence. But it is still too far to enable us to determine anything in regard to lunar life.
A telescope with 2,000x magnification brings the Moon to 384,000⁄2,000 or 192 kilometers (about 120 miles) away from us. In reality, we can't get any closer, whether using the most powerful tools or through photo enlargements. Sometimes, in rare cases, we can achieve a magnification of 3,000, which equals 384,000⁄3,000 or 128 kilometers (around 80 miles). Without a doubt, this is an incredible achievement that highlights human intelligence. However, it’s still too far to let us figure out anything about life on the Moon.
Any one who likes to be impressed by grand and magnificent sights may turn even a modest field-glass upon our luminous satellite, at about first quarter, when the relief of its surface, illuminated obliquely by the Sun, is at its greatest value. If you examine our neighbor world at this period, for choice at the hour of sunset, you will be astonished at its brilliancy and beauty. Its outlines, its laces, and embroideries, give the image of a jewel of shining silver, translucent, fluid, palpitating in the ether. Nothing could be more beautiful, nothing purer, and more celestial, than this lunar globe floating in the silence of space, and sending back to us as in some fairy dream the solar illumination that floods it. But yesterday I received the same impression, watching a great ring half standing out, and following the progress of the Sun as it mounted the lunar horizon to touch these[Pg 258] silvered peaks. And I reflected that it is indeed inconceivable that 999,999⁄1,000,000 of the inhabitants of our planet should pass their lives without ever having attended to this pageant, nor to any of those others which the divine Urania scatters so profusely beneath the wondering gaze of the observers of the Heavens.
Anyone who enjoys being impressed by grand and magnificent sights can take even a simple pair of binoculars and look at our bright moon, especially around the first quarter phase, when its surface features shine the most due to the Sun's angle. If you observe our neighboring world at this time, preferably during sunset, you'll be amazed by its brightness and beauty. Its contours, its intricate details, create an image of a jewel made of shining silver, transparent, fluid, and shimmering in the sky. Nothing could be lovelier or more pure than this lunar body floating silently in space, reflecting the sunlight that floods it back to us like some kind of fairy tale. Just yesterday, I had the same feeling while watching a great ring stand out as I followed the Sun as it rose above the lunar horizon, illuminating those[Pg 258] silver peaks. I pondered how it's truly unimaginable that999,999⁄1 million of the people on our planet go through their lives without ever appreciating this spectacle, or any of the many others that the divine Urania so generously spreads beneath the amazed gaze of those who observe the heavens.
CHAPTER X
THE ECLIPSES
Among all the celestial phenomena at which it may be our lot to assist during our contemplation of the universe, one of the most magnificent and imposing is undoubtedly that which we are now going to consider.
Among all the amazing sights we might see while pondering the universe, one of the most breathtaking and impressive is definitely what we're about to discuss.
The hirsute comets, and shooting stars with their graceful flight, captivate us with a mysterious and sometimes fantastic attraction. We gladly allow our thoughts, mute questioners of the mysteries of the firmament, to rest upon the brilliant, golden trail they leave behind them. These unknown travelers bring a message from eternity; they tell us the tale of their distant journeys. Children of space, their ethereal beauty speaks of the immensity of the universe.
The hairy comets and shooting stars with their elegant paths captivate us with a mysterious and sometimes incredible allure. We happily let our thoughts, silent seekers of the universe's mysteries, linger on the bright, golden trails they leave behind. These unknown travelers carry a message from eternity; they share the story of their far-off journeys. Born from space, their otherworldly beauty reflects the vastness of the universe.
The eclipses, on the other hand, are phenomena that touch us more nearly, and take place in our vicinity.
The eclipses, on the other hand, are phenomena that affect us more directly and happen in our surroundings.
In treating of them, we remain between the Earth and the Moon, in our little province, and witness the picturesque effects of the combined movements of our satellite around us.
In discussing them, we stay between the Earth and the Moon, in our small area, and observe the beautiful effects of the combined movements of our satellite around us.
Have you ever seen a total eclipse of the Sun?
Have you ever witnessed a total solar eclipse?
The sky is absolutely clear: no fraction of cloud shadows the solar rays. The azure vault of the firmament crowns the Earth with a dome of dazzling light. The fires of the orb of day shed their beneficent influence generally upon the world.
The sky is completely clear: no clouds are blocking the sunlight. The blue expanse above covers the Earth with a bright dome of light. The sun's rays spread their positive energy all around the world.
Yet, see! The radiance diminishes. The luminous disk of the Sun is gradually corroded. Another disk, as black as ink, creeps in front of it, and little by little invades it entirely. The atmosphere takes on a wan, sepulchral hue; astonished nature is hushed in profound silence; an immense veil of sadness spreads over the world. Night comes on suddenly, and the stars shine out in the Heavens. It seems as though by some mysterious cataclysm the Sun had disappeared forever. But this tribulation is soon over. The divine orb is not extinct. A flaming jet emerges from the shadow, announcing his return, and when he reappears we see that he has lost nothing in splendor or beauty. He is still the radiant Apollo, King of Day, watching over the life of the planetary worlds.
Yet, look! The brightness fades. The shining disk of the Sun is slowly being covered. Another disk, as black as ink, moves in front of it, gradually taking over completely. The atmosphere turns a pale, ghostly color; amazed nature falls into deep silence; a huge veil of sadness blankets the world. Night arrives suddenly, and the stars come out in the sky. It feels as if, by some mysterious disaster, the Sun has vanished forever. But this ordeal doesn't last long. The divine orb isn’t gone. A blazing burst breaks through the darkness, signaling its return, and when it reappears, we see that it hasn't lost any of its brilliance or beauty. It is still the radiant Apollo, the King of Day, watching over the life of the planetary worlds.
This sudden night, darkening the Heavens in the midst of a fine day, can not fail to produce a vivid impression upon the spectators of the superb phenomenon.
This sudden night, darkening the skies in the middle of a beautiful day, is sure to make a strong impression on those witnessing the amazing event.
The eclipse lasts only for a few moments, but long enough to make a deep impression upon our minds, and indeed to inspire anxious spirits with terror and [Pg 261]agitation—even at this epoch, when we know that there is nothing supernatural or formidable about it.
The eclipse lasts just a few moments, but it's long enough to leave a strong impression on our minds and even to fill anxious souls with fear and [Pg 261]agitation—even now, when we know that there's nothing supernatural or threatening about it.
In former days, Humanity would have trembled, in uneasy consternation. Was it a judgment from Heaven? Must it not be the work of some invisible hand throwing the somber veil of night over the celestial torch?
In the past, people would have quaked in uneasy fear. Was it a judgment from above? Could it not be the work of some unseen force casting a dark shroud over the heavenly light?
Had not the Earth strayed off her appointed path, and were we not all to be deprived eternally of the light of our good Sun? Was some monstrous dragon perhaps preparing to devour the orb of day?
Had the Earth not veered off its intended path, would we not all be forever deprived of the light of our good Sun? Was some monstrous dragon possibly getting ready to swallow the sun?
The fable of the dragon devouring the Sun or Moon during the eclipses is universal in Asia as in Africa, and still finds acceptance under more than one latitude. But our readers already know that we may identify the terrible celestial dragon with our gentle friend the Moon, who would not be greatly flattered by the comparison.
The story of the dragon eating the Sun or Moon during eclipses is found all over Asia and Africa, and it’s still believed in many places today. However, our readers already know that we can connect this fierce celestial dragon with our gentle companion, the Moon, who probably wouldn't feel very complimented by that comparison.
We saw in the preceding lesson that the Moon revolves round us, describing an almost circular orbit that she travels over in about a month. In consequence of this motion, the nocturnal orb is sometimes between the Sun and the Earth, sometimes behind us, sometimes at a right angle in relation to the Sun and the Earth. Now, the eclipses of the Sun occur invariably at the time of New Moon, when our satellite passes between the Sun and ourselves, and the eclipses of the Moon, at the[Pg 262] moment of Full Moon, when the latter is opposite to the Sun, and behind us.
We saw in the last lesson that the Moon orbits around us, following an almost circular path that it takes about a month to complete. Because of this movement, the night sky’s orb is sometimes positioned between the Sun and the Earth, sometimes behind us, and sometimes at a right angle to both. Solar eclipses always happen during a New Moon, when our satellite moves between the Sun and us, while lunar eclipses occur during a Full Moon, when it’s opposite the Sun and behind us.
This fact soon enabled the astronomers of antiquity to discover the causes to which eclipses are due.
This fact quickly allowed ancient astronomers to figure out what causes eclipses.
The Moon, passing at the beginning of its revolution between the Sun and the Earth, may conceal a greater or lesser portion of the orb of day. In this case there is an eclipse of the Sun. On the other hand, when it is on the other side of the Earth in relation to the Sun, at the moment of Full Moon, our planet may intercept the solar rays, and prevent them from reaching our satellite. The Moon is plunged into the shadow of the Earth, and is then eclipsed. Such is the very simple explanation of the phenomenon. But why is there not an eclipse of the Sun at each New Moon, and an eclipse of the Moon at each Full Moon?
The Moon, during the start of its orbit when it’s between the Sun and the Earth, can block some or all of the Sun’s light. This is called a solar eclipse. On the flip side, when the Moon is on the opposite side of the Earth from the Sun, during a Full Moon, our planet can block the sunlight from reaching the Moon. This causes the Moon to fall into the shadow of the Earth, resulting in a lunar eclipse. That's a simple explanation of the phenomenon. But why don’t we see a solar eclipse every New Moon and a lunar eclipse every Full Moon?
If the Moon revolved round us in the same plane as the Earth round the Sun, it would eclipse the Sun at each New Moon, and would be itself eclipsed in our shadow at each Full Moon. But the plane of the lunar orbit dips a little upon the plane of the terrestrial orbit, and the eclipses can only be produced when the New Moon or the Full Moon occur at the line of intersection of these two planes, i.e., when the Sun, the Moon, and the Earth are upon the same straight line. In the majority of cases, instead of interposing itself directly in[Pg 263] front of the sovereign of our system, our satellite passes a little above or a little below him, just as its passage behind us is nearly always effected a little above or below the cone of shadow that accompanies our planet, opposite the Sun.
If the Moon orbited us in the same plane that the Earth orbits the Sun, it would block the Sun during every New Moon and would be blocked by our shadow during every Full Moon. However, the lunar orbit is tilted slightly relative to the Earth's orbit, so eclipses only happen when the New Moon or Full Moon occurs at the intersection of these two planes, meaning when the Sun, Moon, and Earth are in a straight line. Most of the time, instead of directly blocking the Sun, our Moon passes a little above or below it, and similarly, when it moves behind us, it usually does so just above or below the shadow cone that follows our planet, opposite the Sun.
When the Moon intervenes directly in front of the Sun, she arrests the light of the radiant orb, and conceals a greater or less portion of the solar disk. The eclipse is partial if the Moon covers only a portion of the Sun; total if she covers it entirely; annular, if the solar disk is visible all round the lunar disk, as appears when the Moon, in her elliptical orbit, is beyond medium distance, toward the apogee.
When the Moon passes directly in front of the Sun, it blocks the light from the bright star and hides a part of the solar disk. The eclipse is partial if the Moon only covers part of the Sun; it’s total if it completely covers the Sun; and it’s annular if the solar disk is visible all around the Moon’s disk, which happens when the Moon is farther away in its elliptical orbit, closer to its apogee.
On the other hand, when the Moon arrives immediately within the cone of shadow that the Earth projects behind it, it is her turn to be eclipsed. She no longer receives the rays of the Sun, and this deprivation is the more marked in that she owes all her brilliancy to the light of the orb of day. The Moon's obscurity is complete if she is entirely plunged into the cone of shadow. In this case, the eclipse is total. But if a portion of her disk emerges from the cone, that part remains illuminated while the light of the other dies out. In that case there is a partial eclipse, and the rounded form of the Earth's shadow can be seen projected upon our satellite, a celestial witness to the spherical nature of our globe.
On the other hand, when the Moon moves right into the shadow that the Earth casts behind it, it's her turn to be eclipsed. She stops receiving sunlight, and this lack of light is even more significant because her brightness comes entirely from the Sun. The Moon is completely dark if she is fully covered by the shadow. In this case, the eclipse is total. But if part of her surface sticks out from the shadow, that part stays lit while the other part goes dark. In this situation, there’s a partial eclipse, and you can see the curved shape of the Earth’s shadow projected on our Moon, providing a celestial reminder of the round shape of our planet.
Under certain conditions, then, the Moon can deprive us of the luminous rays of the Sun, by concealing the orb of day, and in other cases is herself effaced in crossing our shadow. Despite the fables, fears, and anxieties it has engendered, this phenomenon is perfectly natural: the Moon is only playing hide-and-seek with us—a very harmless amusement, as regards the safety of our planet.
Under certain conditions, the Moon can block out the bright rays of the Sun by covering the daytime sky, and in other instances, it disappears as it passes through our shadow. Despite the myths, fears, and worries it has caused, this phenomenon is completely natural: the Moon is simply playing hide-and-seek with us—a very harmless game concerning the safety of our planet.
But as we said just now, these phenomena formerly had the power of terrifying ignorant mortals, either when the orb of light and life seemed on the verge of extinction, or when the beautiful Phœbus was covered with a veil of crape and woe, or took on a deep coppery hue.
But as we just mentioned, these phenomena used to scare clueless people, whether the sun seemed to be about to disappear or when the beautiful Phoebus was shrouded in darkness and sorrow, or took on a deep coppery color.
It would take a volume to describe all the notable events which have been influenced by eclipses, sometimes for good, more often with disastrous consequences. The recital of these tragic stories would not be devoid of interest; it would illustrate the possibilities of ignorance and superstition, and the power man gains from intellectual culture and scientific study.
It would take a whole book to cover all the significant events that have been affected by eclipses, sometimes positively, but more often with disastrous outcomes. Telling these tragic stories would be quite interesting; it would highlight the dangers of ignorance and superstition, as well as the power people gain from education and scientific research.
Herodotus records that the Scythians, having some grievance against Cyaxarus, King of the Medes, revenged themselves by serving up the limbs of one of his children, whom they had murdered, at a banquet as rare game. The scoundrels who committed this [Pg 265]atrocious crime took refuge at the Court of the King of Lydia, who was ill judged enough to protect them. War was accordingly declared between the Medes and Lydians, but a total eclipse of the Sun occurring just when the battle was imminent, had the happy effect of disarming the combatants, who prudently retired each to their own country. This eclipse, which seems to have occurred on May 28, 584 B.C., had been predicted by Thales. The French painter Rochegrosse has painted a striking picture of the scene (Fig. 75).
Herodotus notes that the Scythians, upset with Cyaxarus, the King of the Medes, got their revenge by serving the limbs of one of his murdered children at a banquet as a rare delicacy. The criminals responsible for this [Pg 265] horrific act sought refuge at the court of the King of Lydia, who foolishly chose to protect them. Consequently, war was declared between the Medes and Lydians, but just as the battle was about to begin, a complete eclipse of the Sun occurred, which fortunately led to both sides retreating prudently to their own territories. This eclipse, which likely took place on May 28, 584 BCE, had been predicted by Thales. The French painter Rochegrosse created a striking depiction of the scene (Fig. 75).
In the year 413 B.C. the Athenian General Nicias prepared to return to Greece after an expedition to Sicily. But, terrified by an eclipse of the Moon, and fearing the malign influence of the phenomenon, he put off his departure, and lost the chance of retreat. This superstition cost him his life. The Greek army was destroyed, and this event marks the commencement of the decadence of Athens.
In 413 BCE, the Athenian General Nicias was getting ready to return to Greece after his campaign in Sicily. However, he was scared by a lunar eclipse and worried about its bad omen, so he delayed his departure and missed his chance to escape. This superstition ultimately led to his death. The Greek army was defeated, and this marked the beginning of Athens' decline.
In 331 B.C. an eclipse of the Moon disorganized the troops of Alexander, near Arbela, and the great Macedonian Captain had need of all his address to reassure his panic-stricken soldiers.
In 331 BCE, a lunar eclipse threw Alexander's troops into chaos near Arbela, and the great Macedonian leader had to use all his skills to calm his frightened soldiers.
Agathocles, King of Syracuse, blocked by the Carthaginians in the port of this city, had the good fortune to escape, but was disturbed on the second day of his flight by the arrival of a total eclipse of the Sun which alarmed his companions. "What are you afraid of?" said he, spreading his cloak in front of the Sun. "Are you alarmed at a shadow?" (This eclipse seems to be that of August 15, 309, rather than that of March 2, 310.)
Agathocles, King of Syracuse, trapped by the Carthaginians in the city's port, was fortunate enough to escape. However, on the second day of his flight, he was unsettled by the arrival of a total solar eclipse, which frightened his companions. "What are you scared of?" he asked, spreading his cloak in front of the Sun. "Are you really afraid of a shadow?" (This eclipse appears to be the one from August 15, 309, rather than the one from March 2, 310.)

On June 29, 1033, an epoch at which the approaching end of the world struck terror into all hearts, an annular eclipse of the Sun occurring about midday frustrated the designs of a band of conspirators who intended to strangle the Pope at the altar. This Pope was Benedict IX, a youth of less than twenty, whose conduct is said to have been anything but exemplary. The assassins, terrified at the darkening of the Sun, dared not touch the Pontiff, and he reigned till 1044.[15]
On June 29, 1033, when the looming end of the world filled everyone with fear, a solar eclipse around noon disrupted the plans of a group of conspirators who wanted to kill the Pope at the altar. This Pope was Benedict IX, a young man under twenty, whose behavior was reportedly far from ideal. The assassins, scared by the darkening sky, couldn’t bring themselves to harm the Pontiff, and he remained in power until 1044.[15]
On March 1, 1504, a lunar eclipse saved the life of Christopher Columbus. He was threatened with death by starvation in Jamaica, where the contumacious savages refused to give him provisions. Forewarned of the arrival of this eclipse by the astronomical almanacs, he threatened to deprive the Caribs of the light of the Moon—and kept his word. The eclipse had hardly begun when the terrified Indians flung themselves at his feet, and brought him all that he required.
On March 1, 1504, a lunar eclipse saved Christopher Columbus's life. He was facing death by starvation in Jamaica, where the stubborn locals refused to give him any food. Knowing about the upcoming eclipse from astronomical almanacs, he threatened to take away the light of the Moon from the Caribs—and he followed through. As soon as the eclipse started, the terrified Indians fell at his feet and brought him everything he needed.
In all times and among all people we find traces of popular superstitions connected with eclipses. Here, the abnormal absence of the Moon's light is regarded as a sign of divine anger: the humble penitents betake[Pg 268] themselves to prayer to ward off the divine anger. There, the cruelty of the dread dragon is to be averted: he must be chased away by cries and threats, and the sky is bombarded with shots to deliver the victim from his monstrous oppressor.
In every era and among all cultures, we can see traces of popular superstitions linked to eclipses. Here, the strange absence of the Moon's light is seen as a sign of divine anger: the humble penitents turn to prayer to try to appease this anger. There, the cruelty of the fearsome dragon must be confronted: it needs to be scared away with shouts and threats, and the sky is bombarded with gunfire to free the victim from its monstrous tormentor.
In France the announcement of a solar eclipse for August 21, 1560, so greatly disturbed our ancestors' peace of mind as to make them idiotic. Preparations were made for assisting at an alarming phenomenon that threatened Humanity with deadly consequences! The unhappy eclipse had been preceded by a multitude of ill omens! Some expected a great revolution in the provinces and in Rome, others predicted a new universal deluge, or, on the other hand, the conflagration of the world; the most optimistic thought the air would be contaminated. To preserve themselves from so many dangers, and in accordance with the physicians' orders, numbers of frightened people shut themselves up in tightly closed and perfumed cellars, where they awaited the decrees of Fate. The approach of the phenomenon increased the panic, and it is said that one village curé, being unable to hear the confessions of all his flock, who wanted to discharge their souls of sin before taking flight for a better world, was fain to tell them "there was no hurry, because the eclipse had been put off a fortnight on account of the number of penitents"!
In France, the announcement of a solar eclipse on August 21, 1560, disturbed our ancestors' peace of mind to the point of making them act irrationally. They prepared for an alarming event that was thought to threaten humanity with deadly consequences! The unfortunate eclipse had been preceded by a multitude of bad omens! Some expected a significant uprising in the provinces and in Rome, while others predicted a new universal flood, or alternatively, the end of the world by fire; the most optimistic thought the air would just become polluted. To protect themselves from these many dangers, and following the doctors' advice, many frightened people locked themselves in tightly closed, scented cellars, waiting for Fate’s verdict. The impending event heightened the panic, and it’s said that one village priest, overwhelmed by the confessions of his flock who wanted to cleanse their souls before escaping to a better place, had to tell them "there’s no rush, because the eclipse has been postponed by two weeks due to the number of penitents!"

These fears and terrors are still extant among ignorant peoples. In the night of February 27, 1877, an eclipse of the Moon produced an indescribable panic among the inhabitants of Laos (Indo-China). In order to frighten off the Black Dragon, the natives fired shots at the half-devoured orb, accompanying their volley with[Pg 270] the most appalling yells. Dr. Harmand has memorialized the scene in the lively sketch given on p. 269.
These fears and anxieties still exist among uninformed people. On the night of February 27, 1877, a lunar eclipse caused an indescribable panic among the people of Laos (Indo-China). To scare off the Black Dragon, the locals shot at the partially consumed moon while shouting the most terrifying cries. Dr. Harmand captured the scene in a vivid sketch found on p. 269.
During the solar eclipse of March 15, 1877, an analogous scene occurred among the Turks, who for the moment forgot their preparations for war with Russia, in order to shoot at the Sun, and deliver him from the toils of the Dragon.
During the solar eclipse on March 15, 1877, a similar scene unfolded among the Turks, who temporarily set aside their war preparations against Russia to shoot at the Sun and free it from the clutches of the Dragon.
The lunar eclipse of December 16, 1880, was not unnoticed at Tackhent (Russian Turkestan), where it was received with a terrific din of saucepans, samovars and various implements struck together again and again by willing hands that sought to deliver the Moon from the demon Tchaitan who was devouring her.
The lunar eclipse on December 16, 1880, didn’t go unnoticed in Tashkent (Russian Turkestan), where it was met with a huge noise of saucepans, samovars, and various tools being banged together repeatedly by eager hands trying to rescue the Moon from the demon Tchaitan who was consuming her.
In China, eclipses are the object of imposing ceremonies, whose object is to reestablish the regularity of the celestial motions. Since the Emperor is regarded as the Son of Heaven, his government must in some sort be a reflection of the immutable order of the sidereal harmonies. As eclipses were regarded by astrologers as disturbances of the divine order, their appearance indicates some irregularity in the government of the Celestial Empire. Accordingly, they are received with all kinds of expiatory ceremonies prescribed thousands of years ago, and still in force to-day.
In China, eclipses are marked by grand ceremonies aimed at restoring the regular movement of the heavens. Because the Emperor is seen as the Son of Heaven, his rule should reflect the unchanging order of the celestial harmonies. Astrologers viewed eclipses as disruptions to the divine order, so their occurrence suggests some flaw in the governance of the Celestial Empire. As a result, they are met with various atoning ceremonies that were established thousands of years ago and are still practiced today.
In the twentieth century, as in the nineteenth, the eighteenth, or in ancient epochs, the same awe and terror[Pg 271] operates upon the ignorant populations who abound upon the surface of our planet.
In the twentieth century, like in the nineteenth, eighteenth, or in ancient times, the same feelings of awe and terror[Pg 271] affect the uneducated populations that are plentiful on the surface of our planet.
To return to astronomical realities.
To get back to reality.
We said above that these phenomena were produced when the Full Moon and the New Moon reached the line of intersection, known as the line of nodes, when the plane of the lunar orbit cuts the plane of the ecliptic. As this line turns and comes back in the same direction relatively to the Sun at the end of eighteen years, eleven days, we have only to register the eclipses observed during this period in order to know all that will occur in the future, and to find such as happened in the past. This period was known to the Greeks under the name of the Metonic Cycle, and the Chaldeans employed it three thousand years ago under the name of Saros.
We mentioned earlier that these events happen when the Full Moon and New Moon align with the line of intersection, called the line of nodes, where the plane of the lunar orbit crosses the plane of the ecliptic. As this line shifts back to its original position in relation to the Sun after eighteen years and eleven days, we just need to record the eclipses that occur during this timeframe to predict future events and identify those that occurred in the past. The Greeks referred to this period as the Metonic Cycle, while the Chaldeans used it three thousand years ago, calling it Saros.
On examining this cycle, composed of 223 lunations, we see that there can not be more than seven eclipses in one year, nor less than two. When there are only two, they are eclipses of the Sun.
On looking at this cycle, made up of 223 lunar months, we see that there can’t be more than seven eclipses in a year, and no fewer than two. When there are only two, they are both solar eclipses.
The totality of a solar eclipse can not last more than seven minutes, fifty-eight seconds at the equator, and six minutes, ten seconds in the latitude of Paris. The Moon, on the contrary, may be entirely eclipsed for nearly two hours.
The totality of a solar eclipse cannot last more than seven minutes and fifty-eight seconds at the equator, and six minutes and ten seconds at the latitude of Paris. The Moon, however, can be completely eclipsed for nearly two hours.
Eclipses of the Sun are very rare for a definite spot.[Pg 272] Thus not one occurred for Paris during the whole of the nineteenth century, the last which happened exactly above the capital of France having been on May 22, 1724. I have calculated all those for the twentieth century, and find that two will take place close to Paris, on April 17, 1912, at eighteen minutes past noon (total for Choisy-le-Roi, Longjumeau, and Dourdan, but very brief: seven seconds), and August 11, 1999, at 10.28 A.M. (total for Beauvais, Compiègne, Amiens, St. Quentin, fairly long: two minutes, seventeen seconds). Paris itself will not be favored before August 12, 2026. In order to witness the phenomenon, one must go and look for it. This the author did on May 28, 1900, in Spain.
Eclipses of the Sun are very rare for a specific location.[Pg 272] In fact, none occurred in Paris throughout the entire nineteenth century, with the last one directly over the capital of France happening on May 22, 1724. I have calculated all the eclipses for the twentieth century and found that two will take place near Paris: on April 17, 1912, at 12:18 PM (total for Choisy-le-Roi, Longjumeau, and Dourdan, but very brief: seven seconds), and on August 11, 1999, at 10:28 AM (total for Beauvais, Compiègne, Amiens, St. Quentin, fairly long: two minutes, seventeen seconds). Paris itself won't have another eclipse until August 12, 2026. To see the event, you need to go and find it. I did this on May 28, 1900, in Spain.
The progress of the lunar shadow upon the surface of the Earth is traced beforehand on maps that serve to show the favored countries for which our satellite will dispense her ephemeral night. The above figure shows the trajectory of the total phase of the 1900 eclipse in Portugal, Spain, Algeria, and Tunis.
The path of the moon's shadow across the Earth is mapped out in advance to show the countries that will experience the temporary darkness our satellite creates. The figure above illustrates the trajectory of the total phase of the 1900 eclipse in Portugal, Spain, Algeria, and Tunisia.
The immutable splendor of the celestial motions had never struck the author so impressively as during the observation of this grandiose phenomenon. With the absolute precision of astronomical calculations, our satellite, gravitating round the Earth, arrived upon the theoretical line drawn from the orb of day to our planet, and interposed itself gradually, slowly, and exactly, in front of it. The eclipse was total, and occurred at the moment predicted by calculation. Then the obscure globe of the Moon pursued its regular course, discovered the radiant orb behind, and gradually and slowly completed its transit in front of him. Here, to all observers, was a double philosophical lesson, a twofold impression: that of the greatness, the omnipotence of the inexorable forces that govern the universe, and that of the inexorable valor of man, of this thinking atom straying upon another atom, who by the travail of his feeble intelligence has arrived at the knowledge of the laws by which he, like the rest of the world, is borne away through space, through time, and through eternity.
The unchanging beauty of the movements in the sky had never impacted the author as profoundly as during the observation of this amazing event. With the complete accuracy of astronomical calculations, our satellite, orbiting around the Earth, positioned itself perfectly along the theoretical line drawn from the sun to our planet, and gradually, slowly, and precisely moved in front of it. The eclipse was total and happened at the predicted moment. Then, the dark shape of the Moon continued on its regular path, revealed the bright sun behind it, and gradually and slowly finished its journey across the sky. For all observers, there was a dual philosophical lesson, two impressions: one of the greatness and power of the relentless forces that control the universe, and the other of the unwavering courage of humanity, this thinking being wandering on another being, who through the struggles of limited intelligence has come to understand the laws that carry him, like the rest of the world, through space, through time, and through eternity.
The line of centrality passed through Elche, a picturesque city of 30,000 inhabitants, not far from Alicante, and we had chosen this for our station on account of the probability of fine weather.
The line of centrality went through Elche, a charming city of 30,000 people, close to Alicante, and we picked this as our station because we expected nice weather.
From the terrace of the country house of the hospitable Mayor, a farm transformed into an observatory by our learned friend, Count de la Baume Pluvinel, there were no obstacles between ourselves and any part of the sky or landscape. The whole horizon lay before us. In front was a town of Arab aspect framed in a lovely oasis of palm-trees; a little farther off, the blue sea beyond the shores of Alicante and Murcia: on the other[Pg 275] side a belt of low mountains, and near us fields and gardens. A Company of the Civic Guard kept order, and prevented the entrance of too many curious visitors, of whom over ten thousand had arrived.
From the terrace of the welcoming Mayor's country house, a farm turned into an observatory by our knowledgeable friend, Count de la Baume Pluvinel, there was nothing blocking our view of the sky or landscape. The entire horizon stretched out before us. In front was a town with an Arab vibe, framed by a beautiful oasis of palm trees; a bit further away, the blue sea beyond the shores of Alicante and Murcia: on the other[Pg 275] side, a range of low mountains, and nearby, fields and gardens. A group of the Civic Guard maintained order and kept out too many curious visitors, of whom over ten thousand had arrived.
At the moment when the first contact of the lunar disk with the solar disk was observed in the telescope, we fired a gun, in order to announce the precise commencement of the occultation to the 40,000 persons who were awaiting the phenomenon, and to discover what difference would exist between this telescopic observation and those made with the unaided eyes (protected simply by a bit of smoked glass) of so many improvised spectators. This had already been done by Arago at Perpignan in 1842. The verification was almost immediate for the majority of eyes, and may be estimated at eight or ten seconds. So that the commencement of the eclipse was confirmed almost as promptly for the eye as with the astronomical instruments.
At the moment the first contact between the moon and the sun was seen through the telescope, we fired a gun to announce the exact start of the eclipse to the 40,000 people waiting for the event, and to find out how much difference there was between this telescopic observation and those made with the naked eye (just using a piece of smoked glass) by so many curious onlookers. This had already been done by Arago in Perpignan in 1842. The difference was noticeable almost immediately for most observers, estimated to be around eight to ten seconds. So, the start of the eclipse was confirmed nearly as quickly for the eye as it was with the astronomical instruments.
The sky was splendidly clear; no cloud, no mist, deep blue; blazing Sun. The first period of the eclipse showed nothing particular. It is only from the moment when more than half the solar disk is covered by the lunar disk that the phenomenon is imposing in its grandeur. At this phase, I called the attention of the people standing in the court to the visibility of the stars, and indicating the place of Venus in the sky asked[Pg 276] if any with long sight could perceive her. Eight at once responded in the affirmative. It should be said that the planet was at that time at its period of maximum brilliancy, when for observers blessed with good sight, it is always visible to the unaided eye.
The sky was beautifully clear; no clouds, no mist, deep blue; blazing sun. The first part of the eclipse didn’t show anything special. It's only when more than half of the sun is covered by the moon that the event becomes truly impressive. At this point, I pointed out to the people in the courtyard that they could see the stars, and while indicating the location of Venus in the sky, I asked[Pg 276] if anyone with good eyesight could spot her. Eight people immediately confirmed they could. It’s worth mentioning that the planet was at its brightest during this time, which means it’s always visible to the naked eye for those with good vision.
When some three-quarters of the Sun were eclipsed, the pigeons which had flown back to the farm huddled into a corner, and made no further movement. They told me that evening that the fowls had done the same a little later, returning to the hen-house as though it had been night, and that the small children (who were very numerous at Elche, where the population is certainly not diminishing) left off their games, and came back to their mothers' skirts. The birds flew anxiously to their nests. The ants in one garden were excessively agitated, no doubt disconcerted in their strategics. The bats came out.
When about three-quarters of the Sun was eclipsed, the pigeons that had returned to the farm huddled in a corner and stayed still. That evening, I heard that the chickens had done the same shortly after, going back to the hen-house as if it were night, and that the many small children in Elche (where the population is definitely not decreasing) stopped playing and went back to their mothers. The birds flew nervously to their nests. The ants in one garden were extremely restless, clearly thrown off from their usual routines. The bats came out.
A few days before the eclipse I had prepared the inhabitants of this part of Spain for the observation of the phenomenon by the following description, which sums up the previous accounts of the astronomers:
A few days before the eclipse, I had gotten the people in this part of Spain ready to observe the event with the following description, which summarizes the earlier reports from astronomers:
"The spectacle of a total eclipse of the Sun is one of the most magnificent and imposing that it is possible to see in nature. At the exact moment indicated by calculation, the Moon arrives in front of the Sun, eats into it gradually, and at last entirely covers it. The[Pg 277] light of the day lessens and is transformed. A sense of oppression is felt by all nature, the birds are hushed, the dog takes refuge with his master, the chickens hide beneath their mother's wing, the wind drops, the temperature falls, an appalling stillness is everywhere perceptible, as though the universe were on the verge of some imminent catastrophe. Men's faces assume a cadaverous hue similar to that given at night by the flame of spirits of wine and salt, a livid funereal light, the sinister illumination of the world's last hour.
The sight of a total solar eclipse is one of the most amazing and awe-inspiring natural events you can witness. At the exact moment calculated, the Moon moves in front of the Sun, gradually covering it until it's completely obscured. The[Pg 277] daylight dims and shifts. There's a feeling of heaviness in the air; birds go silent, dogs seek comfort by their owner's side, chickens tuck under their mother's wing, the wind calms, temperatures drop, and a chilling stillness fills the atmosphere, as if the universe is on the brink of some catastrophic event. People's faces take on a ghostly pallor, illuminated by the eerie light reminiscent of a last, unsettling hour.
"At the moment when the last line of the solar crescent disappears, we see, instead of the Sun, a black disk surrounded with a splendid luminous aureole shooting immense jets into space, with roseate flames burning at the base.
"At the moment the last line of the solar crescent fades away, we see, instead of the Sun, a black disk surrounded by a brilliant glowing halo shooting massive jets into space, with pink flames flickering at the base."
"A sudden night has fallen on us, a weird, wan night in which the brightest of the stars are visible in the Heavens. The spectacle is splendid, grandiose, solemn, and sublime."
"A sudden night has come over us, a strange, dim night where the brightest stars are shining in the sky. The sight is stunning, impressive, serious, and breathtaking."
This impression was actually felt by us all, as may be seen from the following notes, written in my schedule of observation during the event, or immediately after:
This feeling was definitely experienced by all of us, as shown in the notes I wrote in my observation schedule during or right after the event:
"3.50 P.M. Light very weak, sky leaden gray, mountains standing out with remarkable clearness from the horizon, and seeming to approach us.
"3:50 PM The light was very weak, the sky a dull gray, and the mountains appeared very clear against the horizon, almost like they were coming closer to us."
"3.55 P.M. Fall of temperature very apparent. Cold wind blowing through the atmosphere.
"3.55 PM The drop in temperature is very noticeable. A cold wind is blowing through the air."
"3.56 P.M. Profound silence through nature, which seems to participate in the celestial phenomenon. Silence in all the groups.
"3.56 PM A deep quiet settles over nature, almost as if it's joining in the celestial event. Silence among all the groups."
"3.57 P.M. Light considerably diminished, becoming wan, strange, and sinister. Landscape leaden gray, sea looks black. This diminution of light is not that of every day after the sunset. There is, as it were, a tint of sadness spread over the whole of nature. One becomes accustomed to it, and yet while we know that the occultation of the Sun by the Moon is a natural phenomenon, we can not escape a certain sense of uneasiness. The approach of some extraordinary spectacle is imminent."
"3.57 PM The light faded significantly, becoming weak, odd, and eerie. The landscape turned a dull gray, and the sea appeared black. This dimming of light isn’t the usual one we see at sunset. There's a sort of sadness that blankets all of nature. You get used to it, but even though we know the eclipse of the Sun by the Moon is a natural event, we can’t shake off a feeling of unease. Something extraordinary is about to happen."
At this point we examined the effects of the solar light upon the seven colors of the spectrum. In order to determine as accurately as possible the tonality of the light of the eclipse, I had prepared seven great sheets, each painted boldly in the colors of the spectrum, violet, indigo, blue, green, yellow, orange, red; and a similar series in pieces of silk. These colors were laid at our feet upon the terrace where my wife, as well as Countess de la Baume, were watching with me. We then saw the first four disappear successively and entirely and turn black in a few seconds, in the following order: violet, indigo, blue, green. The three other colors were [Pg 279]considerably attenuated by the darkness, but remained visible.
At this point, we looked at how sunlight affected the seven colors of the spectrum. To figure out the exact tone of the light during the eclipse, I prepared seven large sheets, each painted in the spectrum colors: violet, indigo, blue, green, yellow, orange, and red, along with a similar collection in pieces of silk. We laid these colors at our feet on the terrace where my wife and Countess de la Baume were watching with me. We then noticed that the first four colors disappeared completely and went black within seconds, in this order: violet, indigo, blue, and green. The remaining three colors were [Pg 279] significantly dimmed by the darkness but still visible.
It should be noted that in the normal order of things—that is, every evening—the contrary appears; violet remains visible after the red.
It should be noted that in the usual course of events—that is, every evening—the opposite happens; violet stays visible after the red.
This experiment shows that the last light emitted by the eclipsed Sun belongs to the least refrangible rays, to the greatest wave-lengths, to the slowest vibrations, to the yellow and red rays. Such therefore is the predominating color of the solar atmosphere.
This experiment shows that the last light emitted by the eclipsed Sun comes from the least refracted rays, the longest wavelengths, and the slowest vibrations, specifically from the yellow and red rays. This is the dominant color of the solar atmosphere.
This experiment completed, we turn back to the Sun. Magical and splendid spectacle! Totality has commenced, the Sun has disappeared, the black disk of the Moon covers it entirely, leaving all round it a magnificent corona of dazzling light. One would suppose it to be an annular eclipse, with the difference that this can be observed with the naked eye, without fatigue to the retina, and drawn quietly.
This experiment finished, we look back at the Sun. What a magical and amazing sight! Totality has started, the Sun has vanished, completely covered by the black disk of the Moon, leaving a stunning corona of brilliant light all around it. You might think it's an annular eclipse, but the difference is that this can be seen with the naked eye, without straining the retina, and can be viewed calmly.
This luminous coronal atmosphere entirely surrounds the solar disk, at a pretty equal depth, equivalent to about the third of half the solar diameter. It may be regarded as the Sun's atmosphere.
This bright coronal atmosphere completely surrounds the solar disk at a fairly consistent depth, about a third of half the solar diameter. It can be seen as the Sun's atmosphere.
Beyond this corona is an aureole, of vaster glory but less luminous, which sends out long plumes, principally in the direction of the equatorial zone of the Sun, and of the belt of activity of the spots and prominences.
Beyond this corona is an aura of greater glory but less brightness, which sends out long streams, mainly toward the equatorial zone of the Sun and the area of activity of the spots and prominences.
At the summit of the disk it is conical in shape. Below it is double, and its right-hand portion ends in a point, not far from Mercury, which shines like a dazzling star of first magnitude, and seems placed there expressly to give us the extent and direction of the solar aureole.
At the top of the disk, it's shaped like a cone. Below that, it has a double structure, and the right side tapers to a point, not far from Mercury, which sparkles like a bright first-magnitude star, seemingly positioned there just to show us the size and direction of the solar halo.
I draw these various aspects (which, moreover, change with the movement of the Moon), and what strikes me most is the distinction in light between this aureole and the coronal atmosphere; the latter appears to be a brilliant silvery white, the former is grayer and certainly less dense.
I observe these different elements (which, by the way, shift with the Moon's movement), and what stands out to me the most is the contrast in light between this aureole and the coronal atmosphere; the latter looks like a bright silver white, while the former is duller and definitely less dense.
My impression is that there are two solar envelopes of entirely different nature, the corona belonging to the globe of the Sun, and forming its atmosphere properly so-called, very luminous; the aureole formed of particles that circulate independently round it, probably arising from eruptions, their form as a whole being possibly due to electric or magnetic forces, counterbalanced by resistances of various natures. In our own atmosphere the volcanic eruptions are distinct from the aerial envelope.
My impression is that there are two solar envelopes of completely different types: the corona, which belongs to the Sun itself and forms its actual atmosphere, is very bright. The aureole is made up of particles that move around it independently, likely resulting from eruptions. Their overall shape might be influenced by electric or magnetic forces, balanced by various resistances. In our atmosphere, volcanic eruptions are separate from the air envelope.
The general configuration of this external halo, spreading more particularly in the equatorial zone, is sufficiently like that of the eclipse of 1889, published in my Popular Astronomy, which also corresponded with a minimum of solar energy. The year 1900 is in fact close upon the minimum of the eleven-year period. This equatorial form is, moreover, what all the astronomers were expecting.
The overall shape of this outer halo, especially expanding in the equatorial region, is quite similar to the eclipse of 1889, which I published in my Popular Astronomy, and it also coincided with a low point in solar energy. The year 1900 is actually near the minimum of the eleven-year cycle. This equatorial shape is, in fact, what all the astronomers had anticipated.

There can no longer be the slightest doubt that the solar envelope varies with the activity of the Sun....
There can no longer be any doubt that the solar envelope changes with the Sun's activity....
"But the total eclipse lasted a much shorter time than I have taken to write these lines. The seventy-nine seconds of totality are over. A dazzling light bursts from the Sun, and tells that the Moon pursuing its orbit has left it. The splendid sight is over. It has gone like a shadow.
"But the total eclipse lasted a much shorter time than I have taken to write these lines. The seventy-nine seconds of totality are over. A dazzling light bursts from the Sun, signaling that the Moon has moved on in its orbit. The magnificent sight is over. It has vanished like a shadow."
"Already over! It is almost a disillusion. Nothing beautiful lasts in this world. Too sad! If only the celestial spectacle could have lasted two, three, or four minutes! It was too short....
"Already over! It’s almost disappointing. Nothing beautiful lasts in this world. So frustrating! If only the amazing show could have lasted two, three, or four minutes longer! It was too short....
"Alas! we are forced to take things as they are.
"Unfortunately, we have to accept things as they are."
"The surprise, the oppression, the terror of some, the universal silence are over. The Sun reappears in his splendor, and the life of nature resumes its momentarily suspended course.
"The shock, the oppression, the fear of some, the overall silence are gone. The Sun shines again in all its glory, and the rhythm of nature returns to its briefly interrupted flow."
"While I was making my drawing, M. l'Abbé Moreux, my colleague from the Astronomical Society of France, who accompanied me to Spain for this observation, was taking one of his own, without any reciprocal communication. These two sketches are alike, and confirmatory.
"While I was working on my drawing, M. l'Abbé Moreux, my colleague from the Astronomical Society of France, who joined me in Spain for this observation, was creating one of his own, without us talking to each other. These two sketches are similar and confirm each other."
"The differential thermometers that I exposed to the Sun, hanging freely, and protected from reflection from the ground, were read every five minutes. The black thermometer went down from 33.1° to 20.7°, that is 12.4°; the white from 29° to 20.2°—that is, 8.8°. The temperature in the shade only varied three degrees.
"The differential thermometers that I had hanging freely in the sun, shielded from ground reflections, were read every five minutes. The black thermometer dropped from 33.1° to 20.7°, a decrease of 12.4°; the white one dropped from 29° to 20.2°, which is 8.8°. The temperature in the shade only changed by three degrees."
"The light received during totality was due: first, to the luminous envelope of the Sun; second, to that of the terrestrial atmosphere, illuminated at forty kilometers (twenty-five miles) on the one side and the other of the line of centrality. It appeared to be inferior to that of the Full Moon, on account of the almost sudden transition. But, in reality, it was more intense, for only first-magnitude stars were visible in the sky, whereas on a night of full moon, stars of second, and even of third magnitude are visible. We recognized, among others, Venus, Mercury, Sirius, Procyon, Capella, Rigel, Betelgeuse."
"The light we saw during totality came from two sources: first, the bright outer layer of the Sun; and second, the Earth's atmosphere, which was lit up about forty kilometers (twenty-five miles) on either side of the center line. It seemed dimmer than the Full Moon because of the almost abrupt change. However, it was actually brighter, as we could only see first-magnitude stars in the sky, while on a full moon night, we could see stars that were second or even third magnitude. Among others, we identified Venus, Mercury, Sirius, Procyon, Capella, Rigel, and Betelgeuse."
From these notes, taken on the spot, it is evident that the contemplation of a total eclipse of the Sun is one of the most marvelous spectacles that can be admired upon our planet.
From these notes, taken on the spot, it’s clear that witnessing a total solar eclipse is one of the most amazing sights to behold on our planet.
Some persons assured me that they saw the shadow of the Moon flying rapidly over the landscape. My attention was otherwise occupied, and I was unable to[Pg 284] verify this interesting observation. The shadow of the Moon in effect took only eleven minutes (3.47 P.M. to 3.58 P.M.) to traverse the Iberian Peninsula from Porto to Alicante, i.e., a distance of 766 kilometers (475 miles). It must therefore have passed over the ground at a velocity of sixty-nine kilometers per minute, or 1,150 meters per second, a speed higher than that of a bullet. It can easily be watched from afar, on the mountains.
Some people told me they saw the shadow of the Moon quickly passing over the landscape. I was distracted at the time and couldn't verify this fascinating observation. The shadow of the Moon actually took only eleven minutes (3:47 P.M. to 3:58 P.M.) to travel across the Iberian Peninsula from Porto to Alicante, which is a distance of 766 kilometers (475 miles). Therefore, it must have moved across the ground at a speed of sixty-nine kilometers per minute, or 1,150 meters per second, faster than a bullet. It can easily be seen from a distance, such as from the mountains.
Some weeks previous to this fine eclipse, when I informed the Spaniards of the belt along which it could be observed, I had invited them to note all the interesting phenomena they might witness, including the effects produced by the eclipse upon animals. Birds returned hurriedly to their nests, swallows lost themselves, sheep huddled into compact packs, partridges were hypnotized, frogs croaked as if it were night, fowls took refuge in the hen-house, and cocks crowed, bats came out, and were surprised by the sun, chicks gathered under their mothers' wing, cage-birds ceased their songs, some dogs howled, others crept shivering to their masters' feet, ants returned to the antheap, grasshoppers chirped as at sunset, pigeons sank to the ground, a swarm of bees went silently back to their hive, and so on.
A few weeks before this amazing eclipse, when I told the Spaniards about the path where it could be seen, I invited them to observe all the interesting phenomena they might notice, including how the eclipse affected animals. Birds quickly returned to their nests, swallows flew off course, sheep huddled together tightly, partridges seemed dazed, frogs croaked as if it were night, chickens sought shelter in the coop, roosters crowed, bats came out only to be surprised by the sun, chicks clustered under their mothers' wings, caged birds stopped singing, some dogs howled while others trembled at their owners' feet, ants went back to their anthill, grasshoppers chirped as if it were sunset, pigeons settled on the ground, and a swarm of bees quietly returned to their hive, and so on.
These creatures behaved as though the night had come, but there were also signs of fear, surprise, even of terror, differing only "in degree" from those [Pg 285]manifested during the grandiose phenomenon of a total eclipse by human beings unenlightened by a scientific education.
These creatures acted as if night had fallen, but there were also signs of fear, surprise, and even terror, which were only "in degree" different from those [Pg 285]shown by people who lack scientific understanding during the dramatic event of a total eclipse.
At Madrid the eclipse was only partial. The young King of Spain, Alfonso XIII, took care to photograph it, and I offer the photograph to my readers (Fig. 79), as this amiable sovereign did me the honor to give it me a few days after the eclipse.
At Madrid, the eclipse was only partial. The young King of Spain, Alfonso XIII, made sure to photograph it, and I share the photograph with my readers (Fig. 79), as this gracious ruler kindly gave it to me a few days after the eclipse.

The technical results of these observations of solar eclipses relate more especially to the elucidation of the grand problem of the physical constitution of the Sun. We alluded to them in the chapter devoted to this orb. The last great total eclipses have been of immense value to science.
The technical results of these observations of solar eclipses are particularly relevant to understanding the major issue of the Sun's physical makeup. We mentioned them in the chapter focused on this celestial body. The recent significant total eclipses have been incredibly valuable to science.
The eclipses of the Moon are less important, less interesting, than the eclipses of the Sun. Yet their aspect must not be neglected on this account, and it may be said to vary for each eclipse.
The eclipses of the Moon are less significant and less exciting than the eclipses of the Sun. However, we shouldn't overlook their appearance because it can change with each eclipse.
Generally speaking, our satellite does not disappear entirely in the Earth's cone of shadow; the solar rays are refracted round our globe by our atmosphere, and curving inward, illumine the lunar globe with a rosy tint that reminds one of the sunset. Sometimes, indeed, this refraction does not occur, owing doubtless to lack of transparency in the atmosphere, and the Moon becomes invisible. This happened recently, on April 11, 1903.
Generally speaking, our satellite doesn't completely vanish in the Earth's shadow; sunlight bends around our planet due to the atmosphere, casting a pinkish glow on the Moon that looks like sunset. However, sometimes this bending doesn’t happen, likely because the atmosphere isn't clear, and the Moon becomes invisible. This occurred recently, on April 11, 1903.
For any spot, eclipses of the Moon are incomparably more frequent than eclipses of the Sun, because the cone of lunar shadow that produces the solar eclipses is not very broad at its contact with the surface of the globe (10, 20, 30, 50, 100 kilometers, according to the distance of the Moon), whereas all the countries of the Earth for which the Moon is above the horizon at the hour of the lunar eclipse are able to see it. It is at all times a remarkable spectacle that uplifts our thoughts to the Heavens, and I strongly advise my readers on no account to forego it.
For any location, lunar eclipses happen way more often than solar eclipses because the shadow cone from the Moon that causes solar eclipses is pretty narrow when it hits the Earth's surface (10, 20, 30, 50, or 100 kilometers, depending on how far the Moon is). In contrast, anyone in the countries where the Moon is above the horizon during a lunar eclipse can see it. It’s always an amazing sight that lifts our thoughts to the skies, and I highly encourage my readers not to miss out on it.
CHAPTER XI
ON METHODS
How Celestial Distances are Determined, and how the Sun is Weighed
How Astronomers Measure Distances in Space and How We Calculate the Sun's Mass
I will not do my readers the injustice to suppose that they will be alarmed at the title of this Lesson, and that they do not employ some "method" in their own lives. I even assume that if they have been good enough to take me on faith when I have spoken of the distances of the Sun and Moon, and Stars, or of the weight of bodies at the surface of Mars, they retain some curiosity as to how the astronomers solve these problems. Hence it will be as interesting as it is useful to complete the preceding statements by a brief summary of the methods employed for acquiring these bold conclusions.
I'll not underestimate my readers by thinking they’ll be shocked by the title of this Lesson or that they don’t use any "method" in their own lives. I even assume that if they’ve been generous enough to trust me when I’ve talked about the distances to the Sun, Moon, and Stars, or the weight of objects on the surface of Mars, they still have some curiosity about how astronomers figure out these challenges. Therefore, it will be both interesting and useful to add to the previous statements with a quick overview of the methods used to reach these bold conclusions.
The Sun seems to touch the Earth when it disappears in the purple mists of twilight: an immense abyss separates us from it. The stars go hand in hand down the constellated sky; and yet one can not think of their inconceivable distance without a shiver.
The Sun looks like it’s about to meet the Earth as it vanishes into the purple haze of twilight: a vast void stands between us and it. The stars move together across the starry sky; yet, just thinking about how far away they really are sends a chill down the spine.
Our neighbor, Moon, floats in space, a stone's throw[Pg 288] from us: but without calculation we should never know the distance, which remains an impassable desert to us.
Our neighbor, Moon, hangs in space, just a stone's throw[Pg 288] away from us: but without any calculation, we would never understand the distance, which feels like an unreachable desert to us.
The best educated persons sometimes find it difficult to admit that these distances of Sun and Moon are better determined and more precise than those of certain points on our minute planet. Hence, it is of particular moment for us to give an exact account of the means employed in determining them.
The most educated people sometimes struggle to acknowledge that the distances of the Sun and Moon are more accurately measured and more precise than those of certain locations on our small planet. Therefore, it is especially important for us to provide a detailed description of the methods used to calculate them.
The calculation of these distances is made by "triangulation." This process is the same that surveyors use in the measurement of terrestrial distances. There is nothing very alarming about it. If the word repels us a little at first, it is from its appearance only.
The calculation of these distances is done through "triangulation." This process is the same one that surveyors use to measure distances on land. There's nothing really alarming about it. If the term seems a bit off-putting at first, it's just because of how it sounds.
When the distance of an object is unknown, the only means of expressing its apparent size is by measurement of the angle which it subtends before our eyes.
When we don’t know how far away an object is, the only way to express its apparent size is by measuring the angle it makes in our field of vision.
We all know that an object appears smaller, in proposition with its distance from us. This diminution is not a matter of chance. It is geometric, and proportional to the distance. Every object removed to a distance of 57 times its diameter measures an angle of 1 degree, whatever its real dimensions. Thus a sphere 1 meter in diameter measures exactly 1 degree, if we see it at a distance of 57 meters. A statue measuring 1.80 meters (about 5 ft. 8 in.) will be equal to an angle of 1 degree, if distant 57 times its height, that is to say, at[Pg 289] 102.60 meters. A sheet of paper, size 1 decimeter, seen at 5.70 meters, represents the same magnitude.
We all know that an object looks smaller depending on how far away it is from us. This size reduction isn’t random. It follows geometric principles and is proportional to the distance. Any object that’s moved to a distance 57 times its diameter appears to measure an angle of 1 degree, regardless of its actual size. So, a sphere that’s 1 meter in diameter will measure exactly 1 degree if we view it from 57 meters away. A statue that’s 1.80 meters tall (about 5 ft. 8 in.) will also equal an angle of 1 degree when it’s 57 times its height away, which is at [Pg 289] 102.60 meters. A sheet of paper that’s 1 decimeter in size appears to have the same measurement when viewed from 5.70 meters away.
In length, a degree is the 57th part of the radius of a circle, i.e., from the circumference to the center.
In length, a degree is the 57th part of the radius of a circle, i.e., from the edge to the center.
The measurement of an angle is expressed in parts of the circumference. Now, what is an angle of a degree? It is the 360th part of any circumference. On a table 3.60 meters round, an angle of one degree is a centimeter, seen from the center of the table. Trace on a sheet of paper a circle 0.360 meters round—an angle of 1 degree is a millimeter.
The measurement of an angle is expressed in parts of the circumference. Now, what does a degree of an angle mean? It’s the 360th part of any circumference. On a table that is 3.60 meters around, an angle of one degree is a centimeter when viewed from the center of the table. If you draw a circle that is 0.360 meters around on a sheet of paper, an angle of 1 degree is a millimeter.

If the circumference of a circus measuring 180 meters be divided into 360 places, each measuring 0.50 meters in width, then when the circus is full a person placed at the center will see each spectator occupying an angle of 1 degree. The angle does not alter with the distance, and whether it be measured at 1 meter, 10 meters, 100 kilometers, or in the infinite spaces of Heaven, it is always the same angle. Whether a degree be represented by a meter or a kilometer, it always remains a degree. As angles measuring less than a degree often have to be calculated, this angle has been subdivided into 60 parts, to which the name of[Pg 290] minutes has been given, and each minute into 60 parts or seconds. Written short, the degree is indicated by a little zero (°) placed above the figure; the minute by an apostrophe (′), and the second by two (″). These minutes and seconds of arc have no relation with the same terms as employed for the division of the duration of time. These latter ought never to be written with the signs of abbreviation just indicated, though journalists nowadays set a somewhat pedantic example, by writing, e.g., for an automobile race, 4h. 18′ 30″, instead of 4h. 18m. 30s.
If the circumference of a circus measuring 180 meters is divided into 360 spots, each 0.50 meters wide, then when the circus is full, a person at the center will see each spectator taking up an angle of 1 degree. This angle doesn't change with distance; whether measured at 1 meter, 10 meters, 100 kilometers, or across the vastness of space, it remains the same. No matter if a degree is represented by a meter or a kilometer, it stays a degree. Since angles measuring less than a degree often need to be calculated, this angle is divided into 60 parts called [Pg 290] minutes, and each minute into 60 parts or seconds. In short, a degree is indicated by a small zero (°) above the number; a minute by an apostrophe (′), and a second by two (″). These minutes and seconds of arc are not related to the same terms used for measuring time. The latter should never be written with the aforementioned symbols, although some journalists now set a slightly pedantic example by writing, e.g., for a car race, 4h. 18′ 30″, instead of 4h. 18m. 30s.
This makes clear the distinction between the relative measure of an angle and the absolute measures, such, for instance, as the meter. Thus, a degree may be measured on this page, while a second (the 3,600th part of a degree) measured in the sky may correspond to millions of kilometers.
This clarifies the difference between the relative measurement of an angle and absolute measurements, like the meter. So, you can measure a degree on this page, while a second (which is 1/3,600 of a degree) measured in the sky might relate to millions of kilometers.
Now the measure of the Moon's diameter gives us an angle of a little more than half a degree. If it were exactly half a degree, we should know by that that it was 114 times the breadth of its disk away from us. But it is a little less, since we have more than half a degree (31′), and the geometric ratio tells us that the distance of our satellite is 110 times its diameter.
Now the measurement of the Moon's diameter gives us an angle of just over half a degree. If it were exactly half a degree, we would know that it was 114 times the width of its disk away from us. But it's a bit less, since we have more than half a degree (31′), and the geometric ratio tells us that the distance to our satellite is 110 times its diameter.
Hence we have very simply obtained a first idea of the distance of the Moon by the measure of its diameter.[Pg 291] Nothing could be simpler than this method. The first step is made. Let us continue.
So, we've easily figured out the Moon's distance by measuring its diameter.[Pg 291] This method couldn't be simpler. We've taken the first step. Let's keep going.
This approximation tells us nothing as yet of the real distance of the orb of night. In order to know this distance in miles, we need to know the width in miles of the lunar disk.
This approximation doesn’t tell us anything yet about the actual distance of the night sky. To determine this distance in miles, we need to know the width of the lunar disk in miles.

This problem has been solved, as follows:
This issue has been resolved as follows:
Two observers go as far as possible from each other, and observe the Moon simultaneously, from two stations situated on the same meridian, but having a wide [Pg 292]difference of latitude. The distance that separates the two points of observation forms the base of a triangle, of which the two long sides come together on the Moon.
Two observers move as far away from each other as possible and watch the Moon at the same time, from two locations on the same meridian but with a significant [Pg 292] difference in latitude. The distance between the two observation points creates the base of a triangle, where the two longer sides meet at the Moon.

It is by this proceeding that the distance of our satellite was finally established, in 1751 and 1752, by two French astronomers, Lalande and Lacaille; the former observing at Berlin, the latter at the Cape of Good Hope. The result of their combined observations showed that the angle formed at the center of the lunar disk by the half-diameter of the Earth is 57 minutes of arc (a little less than a degree). This is known as the parallax of the Moon.
It was through this process that the distance of our satellite was finally determined in 1751 and 1752 by two French astronomers, Lalande and Lacaille; one observing from Berlin and the other from the Cape of Good Hope. Their combined observations revealed that the angle created at the center of the lunar disk by the half-diameter of the Earth is 57 minutes of arc (just under a degree). This is referred to as the parallax of the Moon.
Here is a more or less alarming word; yet it is one that we can not dispense with in discussing the distance of the stars. This astronomical term will soon become familiar in the course of the present lesson, where it[Pg 293] will frequently recur, and always in connection with the measurement of celestial distances. "Do not let us fear," wrote Lalande in his Astronomie des Dames, "do not let us fear to use the term parallax, despite its scientific aspect; it is convenient, and this term explains a very simple and very familiar effect."
Here’s a somewhat concerning term; however, it’s one we can’t avoid when talking about the distance of the stars. This astronomical term will soon become familiar throughout this lesson, where it[Pg 293] will be used often, always in relation to measuring celestial distances. "Let’s not be afraid," wrote Lalande in his Astronomie des Dames, "let’s not hesitate to use the term parallax, despite its scientific sound; it’s practical, and this term describes a very simple and well-known effect."
"If one is at the play," he continues, "behind a woman whose hat is too large, and prevents one from seeing the stage [written a hundred years ago!], one leans to the left or right, one rises or stoops: all this is a parallax, a diversity of aspect, in virtue of which the hat appears to correspond with another part of the theater from that in which are the actors." "It is thus," he adds, "that there may be an eclipse of the Sun in Africa and none for us, and that we see the Sun perfectly, because we are high enough to prevent the Moon's hiding it from us."
"If you're at a play," he continues, "behind a woman whose hat is too big and blocks your view of the stage [written a hundred years ago!], you lean to one side or the other, or you stand up or bend down: all of this is a parallax, a difference in perspective, which makes it seem like the hat is aligned with another part of the theater instead of where the actors are." "This is how," he adds, "there can be a solar eclipse in Africa while we don’t see one, and we can see the Sun perfectly because we’re high enough to keep the Moon from blocking it from our view."
See how simple it is. This parallax of 57 minutes proves that the Earth is removed from the Moon at a distance of about 60 times its half-diameter (precisely, 60.27). From this to the distance of the Moon in kilometers is only a step, because it suffices to multiply the half-diameter of the Earth, which is 6,371 kilometers (3,950 miles) by this number. The distance of our satellite, accordingly, is 6,371 kilometers, multiplied by 60.27—that is, 384,000 kilometers (238,000 miles). The[Pg 294] parallax of the Moon not only tells us definitely the distance of our planet, but also permits us to calculate its real volume by the measure of its apparent volume. As the diameter of the Moon seen from the Earth subtends an angle of 31′, while that of the Earth seen from the Moon is 114′, the real diameter of the orb of night must be to that of the terrestrial globe in the relation of 273 to 1,000. That is a little more than a quarter, or 3,480 kilometers (2,157 miles), the diameter of our planet being 12,742 kilometers (7,900 miles).
See how simple this is. This parallax of 57 minutes shows that the Earth is about 60 times the distance of the Moon's half-diameter away (specifically, 60.27). To find the distance to the Moon in kilometers, you just multiply the Earth’s half-diameter, which is 6,371 kilometers (3,950 miles), by this number. So, the distance to our satellite is 6,371 kilometers multiplied by 60.27, which equals 384,000 kilometers (238,000 miles). The[Pg 294] parallax of the Moon not only gives us the exact distance to our planet but also allows us to calculate its actual volume based on its apparent volume. Since the diameter of the Moon as seen from Earth subtends an angle of 31′, while that of the Earth as seen from the Moon is 114′, the actual diameter of the Moon must relate to the Earth's diameter in the ratio of 273 to 1,000. This is a little over a quarter, or 3,480 kilometers (2,157 miles), whereas the diameter of our planet is 12,742 kilometers (7,900 miles).
This distance, calculated thus by geometry, is positively determined with greater precision than that employed in the ordinary measurements of terrestrial distances, such as the length of a road, or of a railway. This statement may seem to be a romance to many, but it is undeniable that the distance separating the Earth from the Moon is measured with greater care than, for instance, the length of the road from Paris to Marseilles, or the weight of a pound of sugar at the grocer's. (And we may add without comment, that the astronomers are incomparably more conscientious in their measurements than the most scrupulous shop-keepers.)
This distance, calculated using geometry, is determined with more accuracy than the typical measurements we use for things like the length of a road or a railway. This might sound like a stretch to many, but it’s true that the distance from the Earth to the Moon is measured with more precision than, for example, the distance from Paris to Marseilles or the weight of a pound of sugar at the grocery store. (And it’s worth noting that astronomers are far more meticulous in their measurements than even the most careful shopkeepers.)
Had we conveyed ourselves to the Moon in order to determine its distance and its diameter directly, we should have arrived at no greater precision, and we[Pg 295] should, moreover, have had to plan out a journey which in itself is the most insurmountable of all the problems.
Had we traveled to the Moon to measure its distance and diameter directly, we wouldn’t have achieved any greater accuracy, and we[Pg 295] would have also had to figure out a journey that is the most difficult challenge of all.
The Moon is at the frontier of our little terrestrial province: one might say that it traces the limits of our domain in space. And yet, a distance of 384,000 kilometers (238,000 miles) separates the planet from the satellite. This space is insignificant in the immeasurable distances of Heaven: for the Saturnians (if such exist!) the Earth and the Moon are confounded in one tiny star; but for the inhabitants of our globe, the distance is beyond all to which we are accustomed. Let us try, however, to span it in thought.
The Moon is at the edge of our small earthly territory: you could say it defines the boundaries of our space. Yet, there's a distance of 384,000 kilometers (238,000 miles) between the planet and its satellite. This distance is tiny compared to the vastness of the universe: for the people of Saturn (if they really exist!), the Earth and the Moon appear as one little star; but for the people living on our planet, this gap is far greater than anything we're used to. Still, let’s try to bridge that distance in our minds.
A cannon-ball at constant speed of 500 meters (547 yards) per second would travel 8 days, 5 hours to reach the Moon. A train started at a speed of one kilometer per minute, would arrive at the end of an uninterrupted journey in 384,000 minutes, or 6,400 hours, or 266 days, 16 hours. And in less than the time it takes to write the name of the Queen of Night, a telegraphic message would convey our news to the Moon in one and a quarter seconds.
A cannonball traveling at a constant speed of 500 meters (547 yards) per second would take 8 days and 5 hours to reach the Moon. A train moving at a speed of one kilometer per minute would arrive after 384,000 minutes, which is 6,400 hours or 266 days and 16 hours. And in less time than it takes to write the name of the Queen of Night, a telegraph message would send our news to the Moon in just one and a quarter seconds.
Long-distance travelers who have been round the world some dozen times have journeyed a greater distance.
Long-distance travelers who have gone around the world a dozen times have traveled a greater distance.
The other stars (beginning with the Sun) are incomparably farther from us. Yet it has been found[Pg 296] possible to determine their distances, and the same method has been employed.
The other stars (starting with the Sun) are much farther away from us. However, it has been found[Pg 296] possible to measure their distances, and the same method has been used.
But it will at once be seen that different measures are required in calculating the distance of the Sun, 388 times farther from us than the Moon, for from here to the orb of day is 12,000 times the breadth of our planet. Here we must not think of erecting a triangle with the diameter of the Earth for its base: the two ideal lines drawn from the extremities of this diameter would come together between the Earth and the Sun; there would be no triangle, and the measurement would be absurd.
But it’s clear that different methods are needed to calculate the distance to the Sun, which is 388 times farther from us than the Moon. The distance from Earth to the Sun is 12,000 times the diameter of our planet. We shouldn’t consider creating a triangle using the diameter of the Earth as the base: the two imaginary lines drawn from the ends of this diameter would meet somewhere between the Earth and the Sun, so there wouldn’t actually be a triangle, and the measurement would be meaningless.
In order to measure the distance which separates the Earth from the Sun, we have recourse to the fine planet Venus, whose orbit is situated inside the terrestrial orbit. Owing to the combination of the Earth's motion with that of the Star of the Morning and Evening, the capricious Venus passes in front of the Sun at the curious intervals of 8 years, 1131⁄2 years less 8 years, 8 years, 1131⁄2 years plus 8 years.
To measure the distance between the Earth and the Sun, we rely on the beautiful planet Venus, which orbits closer to the Sun than Earth does. Because of the combination of Earth's movement and that of the Morning and Evening Star, the unpredictable Venus crosses in front of the Sun at interesting intervals of 8 years, 1131⁄2 years less 8 years, 8 years, and 1131⁄2 years plus 8 years.
Thus there was a transit in June, 1761, then another 8 years after, in June, 1769. The next occurred 1131⁄2 years less 8 years, i.e., 1051⁄2 years after the preceding, in December, 1874; the next in December, 1882. The next will be in June, 2004, and June, 2012. At these eagerly anticipated epochs, astronomers watch the transit[Pg 297] of Venus across the Sun at two terrestrial stations as far as possible removed from each other, marking the two points at which the planet, seen from their respective stations, appears to be projected at the same moment on the solar disk. This measure gives the width of an angle formed by two lines, which starting from two diametrically opposite points of the Earth, cross upon Venus, and form an identical angle upon the Sun. Venus is thus at the apex of two equal triangles, the bases of which rest, respectively, upon the Earth and on the Sun. The measurement of this angle gives what is called the parallax of the Sun—that is, the angular dimension at which the Earth would be seen at the distance of the Sun.
In June 1761, there was a transit, followed by another one eight years later in June 1769. The next one happened 113½ years later, minus eight years, so 105½ years after the previous one, in December 1874; then another in December 1882. The upcoming transits will be in June 2004 and June 2012. During these highly anticipated events, astronomers observe the transit of Venus across the Sun from two locations as far apart as possible, marking the points where Venus appears to be projected on the solar disk at the same time from both locations. This allows them to measure the angle created by two lines that start from opposite points on Earth, intersecting at Venus and forming the same angle with the Sun. Venus is at the tip of two equal triangles, with the bases resting on Earth and the Sun. Measuring this angle provides the parallax of the Sun, which refers to how the Earth would appear from the distance of the Sun.

Thus, it has been found that the half-diameter of the Earth viewed from the Sun measures 8.82″. Now, we know that an object presenting an angle of one degree is at a distance of 57 times its length.
Thus, it has been found that the half-diameter of the Earth as seen from the Sun measures 8.82″. Now, we know that an object presenting an angle of one degree is at a distance of 57 times its length.
The same object, if it subtends an angle of a minute, or the sixtieth part of a degree, indicates by the measurement[Pg 298] of its angle that it is 60 times more distant, i.e., 3,438 times.
The same object, if it creates an angle of a minute, or one-sixtieth of a degree, shows by the measurement[Pg 298] of its angle that it is 60 times farther away, i.e., 3,438 times.
Finally, an object that measures one second, or the sixtieth part of a minute, is at a distance of 206,265 times its length.
Finally, an object that measures one second, or one-sixtieth of a minute, is located 206,265 times its length away.
Hence we find that the Earth is at a distance from the Sun of 206265⁄8.82—that is, 23,386 times its half-diameter, that is, 149,000,000 kilometers (93,000,000 miles). This measurement again is as precise and certain as that of the Moon.
Hence we find that the Earth is about 206265/8.82 from the Sun—that is, 23,386 times its half-diameter, which is 149,000,000 kilometers (93,000,000 miles). This measurement is as precise and certain as that of the Moon.
I hope my readers will easily grasp this simple method of triangulation, the result of which indicates to us with absolute certainty the distance of the two great celestial torches to which we owe the radiant light of day and the gentle illumination of our nights.
I hope my readers will easily understand this straightforward method of triangulation, which shows us with complete certainty the distance to the two great celestial lights that provide us with the bright light of day and the soft glow of our nights.
The distance of the Sun has, moreover, been confirmed by other means, whose results agree perfectly with the preceding. The two principal are based on the velocity of light. The propagation of light is not instantaneous, and notwithstanding the extreme rapidity of its movements, a certain time is required for its transmission from one point to another. On the Earth, this velocity has been measured as 300,000 kilometers (186,000 miles) per second. To come from Jupiter to the Earth, it requires thirty to forty minutes, according to the distance of the planet. Now, in examining the[Pg 299] eclipses of Jupiter's satellites, it has been discovered that there is a difference of 16 minutes, 34 seconds in the moment of their occurrence, according as Jupiter is on one side or on the other of the Sun, relatively to the Earth, at the minimum and maximum distance. If the light takes 16 minutes, 34 seconds to traverse the terrestrial orbit, it must take less than that time, or 8 minutes, 17 seconds, to come to us from the Sun, which is situated at the center. Knowing the velocity of light, the distance of the Sun is easily found by multiplying 300,000 by 8 minutes, 17 seconds, or 497 seconds, which gives about 149,000,000 kilometers (93,000,000 miles).
The distance of the Sun has also been confirmed through other methods, and the results are perfectly aligned with what we've seen before. The two main methods rely on the speed of light. Light doesn’t travel instantly; even though it moves incredibly fast, it takes time to go from one point to another. On Earth, this speed has been measured at 300,000 kilometers (186,000 miles) per second. For light to travel from Jupiter to Earth, it takes about thirty to forty minutes, depending on the planet’s distance. In studying the[Pg 299] eclipses of Jupiter's moons, researchers found a difference of 16 minutes and 34 seconds in the timing of these events, depending on whether Jupiter is on one side or the other of the Sun, at its closest or furthest distance. If light takes 16 minutes and 34 seconds to travel across the Earth’s orbit, it must take less time — 8 minutes and 17 seconds — to reach us from the Sun, which is at the center. By knowing the speed of light, the distance to the Sun is easily calculated by multiplying 300,000 by 8 minutes and 17 seconds, or 497 seconds, which comes out to about 149,000,000 kilometers (93,000,000 miles).
Another method founded upon the velocity of light again gives a confirmatory result. A familiar example will explain it: Let us imagine ourselves exposed to a vertical rain; the degree of inclination of our umbrella will depend on the relation between our speed and that of the drops of rain. The more quickly we run, the more we need to dip our umbrella in order not to meet the drops of water. Now the same thing occurs for light. The stars, disseminated in space, shed floods of light upon the Heavens. If the Earth were motionless, the luminous rays would reach us directly. But our planet is spinning, racing, with the utmost speed, and in our astronomical observations we are forced to follow its movements, and to incline our telescopes in the direction[Pg 300] of its advance. This phenomenon, known under the name of aberration of light, is the result of the combined effects of the velocity of light and of the Earth's motion. It shows that the speed of our globe is equivalent to 1⁄10,000 that of light, i.e., = about 30 kilometers (19 miles) per second. Our planet accordingly accomplishes her revolution round the Sun along an orbit which she traverses at a speed of 30 kilometers (better 291⁄2) per second, or 1,770 kilometers per minute, or 106,000 kilometers per hour, or 2,592,000 kilometers per day, or 946,080,000 kilometers (586,569,600 miles) in the year. This is the length of the elliptical path described by the Earth in her annual translation.
Another method based on the speed of light gives a similar result. A familiar example helps explain this: Imagine we're standing in a vertical downpour; the angle of our umbrella will depend on the relationship between our running speed and the speed of the raindrops. The faster we run, the more we have to tilt our umbrella to avoid getting wet. The same principle applies to light. The stars scattered across the sky emit light. If the Earth were still, the light rays would reach us directly. But our planet is spinning incredibly fast, and when we observe the stars, we have to adjust our telescopes in the direction[Pg 300] of its motion. This phenomenon, called aberration of light, results from the combined effects of the speed of light and the Earth’s motion. It shows that the speed of our planet is about 1⁄10,000 of the speed of light, which is roughly 30 kilometers (19 miles) per second. Thus, our planet makes its revolution around the Sun along a path it travels at a speed of 30 kilometers (or around 291⁄2) per second, which equals 1,770 kilometers per minute, or 106,000 kilometers per hour, or 2,592,000 kilometers per day, or 946,080,000 kilometers (586,569,600 miles) in a year. This is the distance of the elliptical path that the Earth follows in its annual orbit.
The length of orbit being thus discovered, one can calculate its diameter, the half of which is exactly the distance of the Sun.
The length of the orbit being discovered, one can calculate its diameter, half of which is exactly the distance to the Sun.
We may cite one last method, whose data, based upon attraction, are provided by the motions of our satellite. The Moon is a little disturbed in the regularity of her course round the Earth by the influence of the powerful Sun. As the attraction varies inversely with the square of the distance, the distance may be determined by analyzing the effect it has upon the Moon.
We can mention one last method, which uses data based on attraction from our satellite's movements. The Moon's orbit around the Earth is slightly affected by the strong influence of the Sun. Since attraction changes inversely with the square of the distance, we can find the distance by examining the impact it has on the Moon.
Other means, on which we will not enlarge in this summary of the methods employed for determinations, confirm the precisions of these measurements with [Pg 301]certainty. Our readers must forgive us for dwelling at some length upon the distance of the orb of day, since this measurement is of the highest importance; it serves as the base for the valuation of all stellar distances, and may be considered as the meter of the universe.
Other methods, which we won’t elaborate on in this summary of the techniques used for measurements, confirm the accuracy of these measurements with [Pg 301]certainty. We ask our readers to forgive us for spending some time on the distance to the sun, as this measurement is extremely important; it serves as the foundation for evaluating all stellar distances and can be seen as the meter of the universe.
This radiant Sun to which we owe so much is therefore enthroned in space at a distance of 149,000,000 kilometers (93,000,000 miles) from here. Its vast brazier must indeed be powerful for its influence to be exerted upon us to such a manifest extent, it being the very condition of our existence, and reaching out as far as Neptune, thirty times more remote than ourselves from the solar focus.
This brilliant Sun, to which we owe so much, is positioned in space at a distance of 149,000,000 kilometers (93,000,000 miles) from us. Its immense heat source must be incredibly strong for its influence to affect us so clearly, as it is essential for our existence and extends all the way to Neptune, which is thirty times farther from the Sun than we are.
It is on account of its great distance that the Sun appears to us no larger than the Moon, which is only 384,000 kilometers (238,000 miles) from here, and is itself illuminated by the brilliancy of this splendid orb.
It’s because of how far away it is that the Sun looks no bigger to us than the Moon, which is only 384,000 kilometers (238,000 miles) away, and the Moon shines thanks to the brightness of this amazing celestial body.
No terrestrial distance admits of our conceiving of this distance. Yet, if we associate the idea of space with the idea of time, as we have already done for the Moon, we may attempt to picture this abyss. The train cited just now would, if started at a speed of a kilometer a minute, arrive at the Sun after an uninterrupted course of 283 years, and taking as long to return to the Earth the total would be 566 years. Fourteen generations of stokers would be employed on this celestial excursion[Pg 302] before the bold travelers could bring back news of the expedition to us.
No earthly distance allows us to fully understand this distance. However, if we connect the idea of space with the idea of time, as we've done for the Moon, we can try to imagine this vastness. The train mentioned earlier, if it traveled at a speed of one kilometer per minute, would reach the Sun after an unbroken journey of 283 years, and it would take another 283 years to return to Earth, totaling 566 years. Fourteen generations of train operators would be needed for this space journey[Pg 302] before these brave travelers could update us on their expedition.
Sound is transmitted through the air at a velocity of 340 meters (1,115 feet) per second. If our atmosphere reached to the Sun, the noise of an explosion sufficiently formidable to be heard here would only reach us at the end of 13 years, 9 months. But the more rapid carriers, such as the telegraph, would leap across to the orb of day in 8 minutes, 17 seconds.
Sound travels through the air at a speed of 340 meters (1,115 feet) per second. If our atmosphere extended all the way to the Sun, the sound from a powerful explosion that could be heard here would take almost 13 years and 9 months to arrive. However, faster methods of communication, like the telegraph, would reach the Sun in just 8 minutes and 17 seconds.
Our imagination is confounded before this gulf of 93,000,000 miles, across which we see our dazzling Sun, whose burning rays fly rapidly through space in order to reach us.
Our imagination is overwhelmed by this distance of 93,000,000 miles, across which we see our bright Sun, whose scorching rays travel quickly through space to reach us.
And now let us see how the distances of the planets were determined.
And now let's look at how the distances of the planets were figured out.
We will leave aside the method of which we have been speaking; that now to be employed is quite different, but equally precise in its results.
We will put aside the method we’ve been discussing; the one we’re going to use now is quite different, but just as accurate in its results.
It is obvious that the revolution of a planet round the Sun will be longer in proportion as the distance is greater, and the orbit that has to be traveled vaster. This is simple. But the most curious thing is that there is a geometric proportion in the relations between the duration of the revolutions of the planets and their distances. This proportion was discovered by Kepler,[Pg 303] after thirty years of research, and embodied in the following formula:
It’s clear that a planet’s revolution around the Sun takes longer the farther it is away since it has to cover a bigger path. This is pretty straightforward. But the most interesting part is that there’s a geometric relationship between the length of the planets' revolutions and their distances. This relationship was discovered by Kepler,[Pg 303] after thirty years of research, and summarized in the following formula:
"The squares of the times of revolution of the planets round the Sun (the periodic times) are proportional to the cubes of their mean distances from the Sun."
"The squares of the planets' revolution times around the Sun (the periodic times) are proportional to the cubes of their average distances from the Sun."
This is enough to alarm the boldest reader. And yet, if we unravel this somewhat incomprehensible phrase, we are struck with its simplicity.
This is enough to worry even the bravest reader. And yet, if we break down this somewhat puzzling phrase, we are surprised by its simplicity.
What is a square? We all know this much; it is taught to children of ten years old. But lest it has slipped your memory: a square is simply a number multiplied by itself.
What is a square? We all know this much; it's taught to kids when they're around ten years old. But in case you've forgotten: a square is just a number multiplied by itself.
Thus: 2 × 2 = 4; 4 is the square of 2.
Thus: 2 × 2 = 4; 4 is the square of 2.
Four times 4 is 16; 16 is the square of 4.
Four times 4 is 16; 16 is the square of 4.
And so on, indefinitely.
And so on, forever.
Now, what is a cube? It is no more difficult. It is a number multiplied twice by itself.
Now, what is a cube? It’s just a number multiplied by itself two times.
For instance: 2 multiplied by 2 and again by 2 equals 8. So 8 is the cube of 2. 3 × 3 × 3 = 27; 27 is the cube of 3, and so on.
For example: 2 times 2 and then multiplied by 2 equals 8. So, 8 is the cube of 2. 3 × 3 × 3 = 27; 27 is the cube of 3, and so on.
Now let us take an example that will show the simplicity and precision of the formula enunciated above. Let us choose a planet, no matter which. Say, Jupiter, the giant of the worlds. He is the Lord of our planetary group. This colossal star is five times (precisely, 5.2) as far from us as the Sun.
Now let's take an example that will demonstrate the simplicity and accuracy of the formula mentioned above. Let’s choose a planet, any planet. For instance, Jupiter, the giant among the planets. He is the ruler of our planetary system. This massive star is five times (specifically, 5.2) as far from us as the Sun.
Multiply this number twice by itself 5.2 × 5.2 × 5.2 = 140.
Multiply this number by itself twice: 5.2 × 5.2 × 5.2 = 140.
On the other hand, the revolution of Jupiter takes almost twelve years (11.85). This number multiplied by itself also equals 140. The square of the number 11.85 is equal to the cube of the number 5.2. This very simple law regulates all the heavenly bodies.
On the other hand, Jupiter takes nearly twelve years to orbit the sun (11.85). When you square this number, it also equals 140. The square of 11.85 is the same as the cube of 5.2. This straightforward law governs all the celestial bodies.
Thus, to find the distance of a planet, it is sufficient to observe the time of its revolution, then to discover the square of the given number by multiplying it into itself. The result of the operation gives simultaneously the cube of the number that represents the distance.
Thus, to find the distance of a planet, it's enough to observe the time it takes to complete its orbit, then calculate the square of that number by multiplying it by itself. The result of this operation also gives the cube of the number that represents the distance.
To express this distance in kilometers (or miles), it is sufficient to multiply it by 149,000,000 (in miles 93,000,000), the key to the system of the world.
To express this distance in kilometers (or miles), you just need to multiply it by 149,000,000 (or 93,000,000 miles), which is the key to the system of the world.
Nothing, then, could be less complicated than the definition of these methods. A few moments of attention reveal to us in their majestic simplicity the immutable laws that preside over the immense harmony of the Heavens.
Nothing could be simpler than defining these methods. Just a moment of focus shows us, in their magnificent simplicity, the unchanging laws that govern the vast harmony of the Heavens.
But we must not confine ourselves to our own solar province. We have yet to speak of the stars that reign in infinite space far beyond our radiant Sun.
But we shouldn't limit ourselves to our own solar system. We still need to talk about the stars that shine in the infinite space far beyond our bright Sun.
Strange and audacious as it may appear, the human mind is able to cross these heights, to rise on the wings[Pg 305] of genius to these distant suns, and to plumb the depths of the abyss that separates us from these celestial kingdoms.
Strange and bold as it may seem, the human mind can soar to these heights, flying on the wings[Pg 305] of genius toward these distant suns, and dive into the depths of the abyss that separates us from these heavenly realms.
Here, we return to our first method, that of triangulation. And the distance that separates us from the Sun must serve in calculating the distances of the stars.
Here, we go back to our first method, which is triangulation. The distance between us and the Sun should be used to calculate the distances to the stars.
The Earth, spinning round the Sun at a distance of 149,000,000 kilometers (93,000,000 miles), describes a circumference, or rather an ellipse, of 936,000,000 kilometers (580,320,000 miles), which it travels over in a year. The distance of any point of the terrestrial orbit from the diametrically opposite point which it passes six months later is 298,000,000 kilometers (184,760,000 miles), i.e., the diameter of this orbit. This immense distance (in comparison with those with which we are familiar) serves as the base of a triangle of which the apex is a star.
The Earth orbits the Sun at a distance of 149,000,000 kilometers (93,000,000 miles), tracing out a circumference, or actually an ellipse, of 936,000,000 kilometers (580,320,000 miles) over the course of a year. The distance from any point on this orbit to the point directly opposite it, which it reaches six months later, is 298,000,000 kilometers (184,760,000 miles), i.e., the diameter of the orbit. This enormous distance (compared to those we are familiar with) forms the base of a triangle, with a star at the apex.
The difficulty in exact measurements of the distance of a star consists in observing the little luminous point persistently for a whole year, to see if this star is stationary, or if it describes a minute ellipse reproducing in perspective the annual revolution of the Earth.
The challenge in accurately measuring a star's distance lies in consistently observing the tiny bright point for an entire year to determine if the star is fixed in place or if it traces a tiny ellipse that reflects Earth's yearly orbit.
If it remains fixed, it is lost in such depths of space that it is impossible to gage the distance, and our 298,000,000 kilometers have no meaning in view of such an abyss. If, on the contrary, it is displaced, it[Pg 306] will in the year describe a minute ellipse, which is only the reflection, the perspective in miniature, of the revolution of our planet round the Sun.
If it stays in one spot, it's lost in such vastness of space that we can't measure the distance, and our 298,000,000 kilometers mean nothing against such a void. If, on the other hand, it moves, it[Pg 306] will trace a tiny ellipse over the year, which is just a small-scale reflection, a miniature perspective, of our planet's revolution around the Sun.
The annual parallax of a star is the angle under which one would see the radius, or half-diameter, of the terrestrial orbit from it. This radius of 149,000,000 kilometers (93,000,000 miles) is indeed, as previously observed, the unit, the meter of celestial measures. The angle is of course smaller in proportion as the star is more distant, and the apparent motion of the star diminishes in the same proportion. But the stars are all so distant that their annual displacement of perspective is almost imperceptible, and very exact instruments are required for its detection.
The annual parallax of a star is the angle you would see when looking at the radius, or half-diameter, of Earth's orbit from that star. This radius of 149,000,000 kilometers (93,000,000 miles) is indeed, as mentioned before, the standard unit, the meter, for measuring celestial distances. The angle gets smaller as the star moves further away, and the apparent motion of the star decreases similarly. However, the stars are all so far away that their annual perspective shift is nearly impossible to detect, requiring very precise instruments to spot it.

The researches of the astronomers have proved that there is not one star for which the parallax is equal to that of another. The minuteness of this angle, and the [Pg 307]extraordinary difficulties experienced in measuring the distance of the stars, will be appreciated from the fact that the value of a second is so small that the displacement of any star corresponding with it could be covered by a spider's thread.
The studies by astronomers have shown that no two stars have the same parallax. The tiny size of this angle and the [Pg 307]extraordinary challenges faced in measuring the distance to the stars highlight how small a second is; the shift of any star corresponding to it could be hidden by a spider's thread.
A second of arc corresponds to the size of an object at a distance of 206,265 times its diameter; to a millimeter seen at 206 meters' distance; to a hair, 1⁄10 of a millimeter in thickness, at 20 meters' distance (more invisible to the naked eye). And yet this value is in excess of those actually obtained. In fact:—the apparent displacement of the nearest star is calculated at 75⁄100 of a second (0.75″), i.e., from this star, α of Centaur, the half-diameter of the terrestrial orbit is reduced to this infinitesimal dimension. Now in order that the length of any straight line seen from the front be reduced until it appear to subtend no more than an angle of 0.75″, it must be removed to a distance 275,000 times its length. As the radius of the terrestrial orbit is 149,000,000 kilometers (93,000,000 miles), the distance which separates α of Centaur from our world must therefore = 41,000,000,000,000 kilometers (25,000,000,000,000 miles). And that is the nearest star. We saw in Chapter II that it shines in the southern hemisphere. The next, and one that can be seen in our latitudes, is 61 of Cygnus, which floats in the Heavens 68,000,000,000,000 kilometers[Pg 308] (42,000,000,000,000 miles) from here. This little star, of fifth magnitude, was the first of which the distance was determined (by Bessel, 1837–1840).
A second of arc equals the size of an object that’s 206,265 times its diameter away; it’s like seeing a millimeter from 206 meters away; or a hair, which is 1/10 of a millimeter thick, from 20 meters away (more difficult to see with the naked eye). Yet, this value is greater than what we actually measure. In fact, the apparent shift of the nearest star is calculated at 75/100 of a second (0.75″), which means for the star, α of Centaurus, the half-diameter of Earth's orbit shrinks to this tiny size. To make a straight line appear to subtend an angle of only 0.75″, it has to be positioned 275,000 times its length away. Since the radius of Earth's orbit is 149,000,000 kilometers (93,000,000 miles), the distance from α of Centaurus to our planet must be approximately 41,000,000,000,000 kilometers (25,000,000,000,000 miles). And that’s the nearest star. We saw in Chapter II that it shines in the southern hemisphere. The next star, visible from our location, is 61 of Cygnus, which floats in the sky 68,000,000,000,000 kilometers (42,000,000,000,000 miles) away from here. This small fifth-magnitude star was the first one for which the distance was measured (by Bessel, 1837–1840).
All the rest are much more remote, and the procession is extended to infinity.
All the others are much more distant, and the procession stretches on forever.
We can not conceive directly of such distances, and in order to imagine them we must again measure space by time.
We can’t directly grasp such distances, and to envision them, we need to measure space in terms of time again.
In order to cover the distance that separates us from our neighbor, α of Centaur, light, the most rapid of all couriers, takes 4 years, 128 days. If we would follow it, we must not jump from start to finish, for that would not give us the faintest idea of the distance: we must take the trouble to think out the direct advance of the ray of light, and associate ourselves with its progress. We must see it traverse 300,000 kilometers (186,000 miles) during the first second of the journey; then 300,000 more in the second, which makes 600,000 kilometers; then once more 300,000 kilometers during the third, and so on without stopping for four years and four months. If we take this trouble we may realize the value of the figure; otherwise, as this number surpasses all that we are in the habit of realizing, it will have no significance for us, and will be a dead letter.
To cover the distance between us and our neighbor, Alpha Centauri, light, the fastest messenger, takes 4 years and 128 days. If we want to understand this journey, we can't just leap from start to finish, as that wouldn't give us any sense of the distance. We need to take the time to think about how light travels and connect with its journey. We should visualize it moving 300,000 kilometers (186,000 miles) in the first second; then another 300,000 in the next second, making it 600,000 kilometers; and once again, 300,000 kilometers in the third second, and so on, without stopping for four years and four months. By doing this, we may grasp the significance of that number; otherwise, since it's beyond what we're used to comprehending, it will have no meaning for us and will be just a figure on paper.
If some appalling explosion occurred in this star, and the sound in its flight of 340 meters (1,115 feet) per[Pg 309] second were able to cross the void that separates us from it, the noise of this explosion would only reach us in 3,000,000 years.
If some terrible explosion happened in this star, and the sound, traveling at 340 meters (1,115 feet) per[Pg 309] second, could cross the emptiness that separates us from it, we wouldn’t hear the noise of that explosion for another 3,000,000 years.
A train started at a speed of 106 kilometers (65 miles) per hour would have to run for 46,000,000 years, in order to reach this star, our neighbor in the celestial kingdom.
A train traveling at a speed of 106 kilometers (65 miles) per hour would need to operate for 46,000,000 years to reach this star, our neighbor in the celestial realm.
The distance of some thirty of the stars has been determined, but the results are dubious.
The distance to about thirty of the stars has been measured, but the results are uncertain.
The dazzling Sirius reigns 92,000,000,000,000 kilometers (57,000,000,000,000 miles), the pale Vega at 204,000,000,000,000. Each of these magnificent stars must be a huge sun to burn at such a distance with such luminosity. Some are millions of times larger than the Earth. Most of them are more voluminous than our Sun. On all sides they scintillate at inaccessible distances, and their light strays a long while in space before it encounters the Earth. The luminous ray that we receive to-day from some pale star hardly perceptible to our eyes—so enormous is its distance—may perhaps bring us the last emanation of a sun that expired thousands of years ago.
The brilliant Sirius shines from 92 trillion kilometers (57 trillion miles) away, while the dimmer Vega is at 204 trillion kilometers. Each of these incredible stars must be a massive sun to shine so brightly from such far-off places. Some are millions of times bigger than the Earth. Most of them are larger in volume than our Sun. They sparkle all around us at unreachable distances, and their light travels for a long time through space before it reaches Earth. The light we receive today from some faint star, barely visible to our eyes—due to how far away it is—might be the last glow from a sun that burned out thousands of years ago.
If these methods have been clear to my readers, they may also be interested perhaps in knowing the means employed in weighing the worlds. The process[Pg 310] is as simple and as clear as those of which we have been speaking.
If these methods have been clear to my readers, they might also be interested in learning about the ways used to weigh the worlds. The process[Pg 310] is as straightforward and transparent as the ones we've been discussing.
Weighing the stars! Such a pretension seems Utopian, and one asks oneself curiously what sort of balance the astronomers must have adopted in order to calculate the weight of Sun, Moon, planets or stars.
Weighing the stars! That idea seems unrealistic, and one wonders what kind of scale astronomers must have used to figure out the weight of the Sun, Moon, planets, or stars.
Here, figures replace weights. Ladies proverbially dislike figures: yet it would be easier for some society dame to weigh the Sun at the point of her pen, by writing down a few columns of figures with a little care, than to weigh a 12 kilogram case of fruit, or a dress-basket of 35 kilos, by direct methods.
Here, numbers take the place of weights. Women are known to dislike numbers: yet it would be easier for some socialite to calculate the weight of the Sun with her pen by neatly writing down a few columns of numbers than to directly weigh a 12-kilogram box of fruit or a 35-kilo laundry basket.
Weighing the Sun is an amusement like any other, and a change of occupation.
Weighing the Sun is just another form of entertainment and a shift in activities.
If the Moon were not attracted by the Earth, she would glide through the Heavens along an indefinite straight line, escaping at the tangent. But in virtue of the attraction that governs the movements of all the Heavenly bodies, our satellite at a distance of 60 times the terrestrial half-diameter revolves round us in 27 days, 7 hours, 43 minutes, 111⁄2 seconds, continually leaving the straight line to approach the Earth, and describing an almost circular orbit in space. If at any moment we trace an arc of the lunar orbit, and if a tangent is taken to this arc, the deviation from the[Pg 311] straight line caused by the attraction of our planet is found to be 11⁄3 millimeter per second.
If the Moon weren't pulled in by the Earth, it would move through the sky along a straight line, flying off at a tangent. But because of the gravitational pull that influences the movement of all celestial bodies, our Moon, located 60 times the radius of the Earth away, orbits us every 27 days, 7 hours, 43 minutes, and 111⁄2 seconds, constantly veering off the straight path to get closer to Earth and tracing an almost circular path in space. If we were to draw an arc of the Moon’s orbit at any moment and take a tangent to this arc, the shift from the[Pg 311] straight line due to the Earth's gravity would be 11⁄3 millimeter per second.
This is the quantity by which the Moon drops toward us in each second, during which she accomplishes 1,017 meters of her orbit.
This is how much the Moon falls toward us each second, during which it travels 1,017 meters in its orbit.
On the other hand, no body can fall unless it be attracted, drawn by another body of a more powerful mass.
On the other hand, no object can fall unless it is attracted and pulled by another object with a greater mass.
Beings, animals, objects, adhere to the soil, and weigh upon the Earth, because they are constantly attracted to it by an irresistible force.
Beings, animals, and objects stick to the ground and are pulled toward the Earth because they are constantly drawn to it by an unbreakable force.
Weight and universal attraction are one and the same force.
Weight and universal attraction are the same force.
On the other hand, it can be determined that if an object is left to itself upon the surface of the Earth, it drops 4.90 meters during the first second of its fall.
On the other hand, it can be determined that if an object is left alone on the surface of the Earth, it falls 4.90 meters during the first second of its drop.
We also know that attraction diminishes with the square of the distance, and that if we could raise a stone to the height of the Moon, and then abandon it to the attraction of our planet, it would in the first second fall 4.90 meters divided by the square of 60, or 3,600—that is, of 11⁄3 millimeters, exactly the quantity by which the Moon deviates from the straight line she would pursue if the Earth were not influencing her.
We also know that attraction weakens with the square of the distance, and if we could lift a stone to the height of the Moon and then let it go, it would fall 4.90 meters divided by the square of 60, or 3,600—in other words, 11⁄3 millimeters, which is exactly how much the Moon deviates from the straight line it would follow if the Earth weren't pulling on it.
The reasoning just stated for the Moon is equally applicable to the Sun.
The reasoning just mentioned for the Moon applies to the Sun as well.
The distance of the Sun is 23,386 times the radius of the Earth. In order to know how much the intensity of terrestrial weight would be diminished at such a distance, we should look, in the first place, for the square of the number representing the distance—that is, 23,386 multiplied by itself, = 546,905,000. If we divide 4.90 meters, which represents the attractive force of our planet, by this number, we get 9⁄1,000,000 of a millimeter, and we see that at the distance of the Sun, the Earth's attraction would really be almost nil.
The distance to the Sun is 23,386 times the radius of the Earth. To find out how much the intensity of Earth's weight would decrease at that distance, we first need to calculate the square of that number—23,386 multiplied by itself equals 546,905,000. If we divide 4.90 meters, which represents Earth's gravitational force, by this number, we get 9⁄1 million of a millimeter, showing that at the distance of the Sun, the Earth's gravitational pull would be nearly nil.
Now let us do for our planet what we did for its satellite. Let us trace the annual orbit of the terrestrial globe round the central orb, and we shall find that the Earth falls in each second 2.9 millimeters toward the Sun.
Now let’s do for our planet what we did for its moon. Let’s map the annual orbit of the Earth around the Sun, and we’ll see that the Earth drops 2.9 millimeters toward the Sun every second.
This proportion gives the attractive force of the Sun in relation to that of the Earth, and proves that the Sun is 324,000 times more powerful than our world, for 2.9 millimeters divided by 0.000,009 equals 324,000, if worked out into the ultimate fractions neglected here for the sake of simplicity.
This ratio shows the Sun's gravitational pull compared to that of Earth, proving that the Sun is 324,000 times more powerful than our planet, since 2.9 millimeters divided by 0.000009 equals 324,000, if you calculate it to the finer fractions that are left out here for simplicity.
A great number of stars have been weighed by the same method.
A lot of stars have been measured using the same method.
Their mass is estimated by the movement of a satellite round them, and it is by this method that we are able to affirm that Jupiter is 310 times heavier than[Pg 313] the Earth, Saturn 92 times, Neptune 16 times, Uranus 14 times, while Mars is much less heavy, its weight being only two-thirds that of our own.
Their mass is estimated by observing how a satellite moves around them, and it's through this method that we can confirm that Jupiter is 310 times heavier than[Pg 313] the Earth, Saturn 92 times, Neptune 16 times, Uranus 14 times, while Mars is much lighter, weighing only two-thirds as much as our planet.
The planets which have no satellites have been weighed by the perturbations which they cause in other stars, or in the imprudent comets that sometimes tarry in their vicinity. Mercury weighs very much less than the Earth (only 6⁄100) and Venus about 8⁄10. So the beautiful star of the evening and morning is not so light as her name might imply, and there is no great difference between her weight and our own.
The planets that don’t have moons have been measured by the way they affect other stars or the careless comets that occasionally linger nearby. Mercury is much lighter than Earth (only 6⁄100), and Venus is about 8⁄10. So, the lovely evening and morning star isn’t as light as her name suggests, and there’s not a significant difference between her weight and ours.
As the Moon has no secondary body submitted to her influence, her weight has been calculated by reckoning the amount of water she attracts at each tide in the ocean, or by observing the effects of her attraction on the terrestrial globe. When the Moon is before us, in the last quarter, she makes us travel faster, whereas in the first quarter, when she is behind, she delays us.
As the Moon has no other body affecting her, her weight has been figured out by measuring how much water she pulls at each tide in the ocean or by looking at how her pull affects the Earth. When the Moon is in front of us during the last quarter, she makes us move faster, but in the first quarter, when she’s behind us, she slows us down.
All the calculations agree in showing us that the orb of night is 81 times less heavy than our planet. There is nearly as much difference in weight between the Earth and the Moon as between an orange and a grape.
All the calculations show that the orb of night is 81 times lighter than our planet. The difference in weight between the Earth and the Moon is almost the same as between an orange and a grape.
Not content with weighing the planets of our system, astronomers have investigated the weight of the stars. How have they been enabled to ascertain the quantity[Pg 314] of matter which constitutes these distant Suns—incandescent globes of fire scattered in the depths of space?
Not satisfied with measuring the planets in our solar system, astronomers have looked into the mass of the stars. How have they been able to determine the amount[Pg 314] of matter that makes up these distant Suns—brilliant fireballs scattered throughout the vastness of space?
They have resorted to the same method, and it is by the study of the attractive influence of a sun upon some other contiguous neighboring star, that the weight of a few of these has been calculated.
They have used the same method, and it is by studying the attractive pull of a sun on a nearby neighboring star that the weight of some of these has been determined.
Of course this method can only be applied to those double stars of which the distance is known.
Of course, this method can only be used for those double stars whose distance is known.
It has been discovered that some of the tiny stars that we can hardly see twinkling in the depths of the azure sky are enormous suns, larger and heavier than our own, and millions of times more voluminous than the Earth.
It has been found that some of the small stars we can barely see twinkling in the deep blue sky are actually massive suns, bigger and heavier than our own, and millions of times more voluminous than the Earth.
Our planet is only a grain of dust floating in the immensity of Heaven. Yet this atom of infinity is the cradle of an immense creation incessantly renewed, and perpetually transformed by the accumulated centuries.
Our planet is just a speck of dust drifting in the vastness of space. Yet this tiny piece of infinity is the birthplace of an enormous creation that is constantly renewed and endlessly transformed by the passage of countless centuries.
And what diversity exists in this army of worlds and suns, whose regular harmonious march obeys a mute order....
And what diversity there is in this army of worlds and suns, whose steady, harmonious movement follows a silent order....
But we have as yet said nothing about weight on the surface of the worlds, and I see signs of impatience in my readers, for after so much simple if unpoetical demonstration, they will certainly ask me for the explanation that will prove to them that a kilogram transported to Jupiter or Mars would weigh more or less than here.
But we haven't talked about weight on the surfaces of the worlds yet, and I can see signs of impatience in my readers. After all this straightforward but unromantic explanation, they'll definitely want to know how a kilogram taken to Jupiter or Mars would weigh differently than it does here.
Give me your attention five minutes longer, and I will restore your faith in the astronomers.
Give me your attention for five more minutes, and I'll restore your faith in astronomers.
It must not be supposed that objects at the surface of a world like Jupiter, 310 times heavier than our own, weigh 310 times more. That would be a serious error. In that case we should have to assume that a kilogram transported to the surface of the Sun would there weigh 324,000 times more, or 324,000 kilograms. That would be correct if these orbs were of the same dimensions as the Earth. But to speak, for instance, only of the divine Sun, we know that he is 108 times larger than our little planet.
It shouldn’t be assumed that objects on the surface of a world like Jupiter, which is 310 times heavier than Earth, weigh 310 times more. That would be a big mistake. In that case, we would have to say that a kilogram moved to the surface of the Sun would weigh 324,000 times more, or 324,000 kilograms. That would be true if these bodies were the same size as Earth. But if we just talk about the mighty Sun, we know it's 108 times larger than our small planet.
Now, weight at the surface of a celestial body depends not only on its mass, but also on its diameter.
Now, the weight at the surface of a celestial body depends not just on its mass, but also on its diameter.
In order to know the weight of any body upon the surface of the Sun, we must argue as follows:
In order to know the weight of any object on the surface of the Sun, we must reason as follows:
Since a body placed upon the surface of the Sun is 108 times farther from its center than it is upon a globe of the dimensions of the Earth, and since, on the other hand, attraction diminishes with the square of the distance, the intensity of the weight would there be 108 multiplied by 108, or 11,700 times weaker. Now divide the number representing the mass, i.e., 324,000, by this number 11,700, and it results that bodies at the surface of the Sun are 28 times heavier than here. A woman whose weight was 60 kilos would weigh 1,680 kilograms[Pg 316] there if organized in the same way as on the Earth, and would find walking very difficult, for at each step she would lift up a shoe that weighed at least ten kilograms.
Since a body placed on the surface of the Sun is 108 times farther from its center than it is on a globe the size of Earth, and since attraction decreases with the square of the distance, the intensity of weight there would be 108 multiplied by 108, or 11,700 times weaker. Now, divide the mass number, i.e., 324,000, by 11,700, and it shows that bodies at the surface of the Sun are 28 times heavier than here. A woman weighing 60 kilos would weigh 1,680 kilograms[Pg 316] there if structured the same way as on Earth, making walking very difficult, as each step would involve lifting a shoe that weighed at least ten kilograms.
This reasoning as just stated for the Sun may be applied to the other stars. We know that on the surface of Jupiter the intensity of weight is twice and a third times as great as here, while on Mars it only equals 37⁄100.
This reasoning about the Sun can also apply to other stars. We know that on the surface of Jupiter, the gravitational force is two and a third times stronger than it is here, while on Mars it is only equal to 37⁄100.
On the surface of Mercury, weight is nearly twice as small again as here. On Neptune it is approximately equal to our own.
On the surface of Mercury, weight is almost half of what it is here. On Neptune, it’s about the same as ours.
With deference to the Selenites, everything is at its lightest on the Moon: a man weighing 70 kilograms on the Earth would not weigh more than 12 kilos there.
With respect to the Selenites, everything is much lighter on the Moon: a person weighing 70 kilograms on Earth would weigh only about 12 kilos there.
So all tastes can be provided for: the only thing to be regretted is that one can not choose one's planet with the same facility as one's residence upon the Earth.
So all preferences can be accommodated: the only downside is that one can't choose their planet with the same ease as they can pick where they live on Earth.
CHAPTER XII
LIFE, UNIVERSAL AND ETERNAL
And now, while thanking my readers for having followed me so far in this descriptive account of the marvels of the Cosmos, I must inquire what philosophical impression has been produced on their minds by these celestial excursions to the other worlds? Are you left indifferent to the pageant of the Heavens? When your imagination was borne away to these distant stars, suns of the infinite, these innumerable stellar systems disseminated through a boundless eternity, did you ask what existed there, what purpose was served by those dazzling spheres, what effects resulted from these forces, radiations, energies? Did you reflect that the elements which upon our little Earth determined a vital activity so prodigious and so varied must needs have spread the waves of an incomparably vaster and more diversified existence throughout the immensities of the Universe? Have you felt that all can not be dead and deserted, as we are tempted by the illusions of our terrestrial senses and of our isolation to believe in the silence of the night: that on the contrary, the real aim of[Pg 318] Astronomy, instead of ending with statements of the positions and movements of the stars, is to enable us to penetrate to them, to make us divine, and know, and appreciate their physical constitution, their degree of life and intellectuality in the universal order?
And now, as I thank my readers for following me throughout this exploration of the wonders of the Cosmos, I need to ask what philosophical thoughts have been stirred in your minds by these celestial journeys to other worlds? Are you feeling indifferent to the spectacle of the Heavens? When your imagination was swept away to these distant stars, suns of the infinite, and the countless stellar systems scattered across endless eternity, did you wonder what exists there, what purpose these dazzling spheres serve, and what effects arise from their forces, radiations, and energies? Did you ponder that the elements on our small Earth, which create such incredible and varied life, must surely send ripples of a vastly broader and more diverse existence throughout the Universe? Have you sensed that not everything can be lifeless and barren, despite the illusions our earthly senses and isolation might lead us to believe about the silence of the night? On the contrary, the true goal of[Pg 318] Astronomy, rather than just providing us with the positions and movements of the stars, is to help us reach out to them, to understand, and appreciate their physical makeup, their level of life and intelligence in the grand scheme of things?
On the Earth, it is Life and Thought that flourish; and it is Life and Thought that we seek again in these starry constellations strewn to Infinitude amid the immeasurable fields of Heaven.
On Earth, it’s Life and Thought that thrive; and it’s Life and Thought that we search for again in these starry constellations scattered into Infinity among the vast fields of Heaven.
The humble little planet that we inhabit presents itself to us as a brimming cup, overflowing at every outlet. Life is everywhere. From the bottom of the seas, from the valleys to the mountains, from the vegetation that carpets the soil, from the mold in the fields and woods, from the air we breathe, arises an immense, prodigious, and perpetual murmur. Listen! it is the great voice of Nature, the sum of all the unknown and mysterious voices that are forever calling to us, from the ocean waves, from the forest winds, from the 300,000 kinds of insects that are redundant everywhere, and make a lively community on the surface of our globe. A drop of water contains thousands of curious and agile creatures. A grain of dust from the streets of Paris is the home of 130,000 bacteria. If we turn over the soil of a garden, field, or meadow, we find the earthworms working to produce assimilable slime. If we lift a stone in the[Pg 319] path, we discover a crawling population. If we gather a flower, detach a leaf, we everywhere find little insects living a parasitic existence. Swarms of midges fly in the sun, the trees of the wood are peopled with nests, the birds sing, and chase each other at play, the lizards dart away at our approach, we trample down the antheaps and the molehills. Life enwraps us in an inexorable encroachment of which we are at once the heroes and the victims, perpetuating itself to its own detriment, as imposed upon it by an eternal reproduction. And this from all time, for the very stones of which we build our houses are full of fossils so prodigiously multiplied that one gram of such stone will often contain millions of shells, marvels of geometrical perfection. The infinitely little is equal to the infinitely great.
The small planet we live on is like a full cup, overflowing everywhere. Life is all around us. From the depths of the oceans to the valleys and mountains, from the greenery covering the ground, to the mold in the fields and forests, and from the air we breathe, there’s a constant, incredible murmur. Listen! It’s the powerful voice of Nature, made up of all the unknown and mysterious sounds that continuously call to us—from the ocean waves, the winds in the trees, and from the 300,000 types of insects that are everywhere, forming a vibrant community on the surface of our planet. A single drop of water holds thousands of fascinating, active creatures. A grain of dust from the streets of Paris can host 130,000 bacteria. When we dig in the soil of a garden, field, or meadow, we find earthworms working to create usable dirt. When we lift a stone in the[Pg 319] path, we uncover a bustling population. If we pick a flower or tear off a leaf, we find little insects living parasitically all around us. Clouds of midges dance in the sunlight, nests fill the trees, birds sing and playfully chase each other, lizards scurry away as we approach, and we crush the anthills and molehills beneath our feet. Life surrounds us in an unstoppable invasion, where we are both the heroes and the victims, continually reproducing to our own detriment, as driven by an endless cycle. And this has been the case throughout time, for even the stones used to build our homes are filled with fossils so incredibly numerous that just one gram of such stone may contain millions of shells, perfect in their geometry. The infinitely small is equivalent to the infinitely great.
Life appears to us as a fatal law, an imperious force which all obey, as the result and the aim of the association of atoms. This is illustrated for us upon the Earth, our only field of direct observation. We must be blind not to see this spectacle, deaf not to hear its reaching. On what pretext could one suppose that our little globe which, as we have seen, has received no privileges from Nature, is the exception; and that the entire Universe, save for one insignificant isle, is devoted to vacancy, solitude, and death?
Life seems to us like an unavoidable law, a powerful force that everyone follows, as the result and purpose of atoms coming together. This is clearly shown on Earth, our only place for direct observation. We must be blind not to notice this display and deaf not to hear its call. What reason could one have to think that our tiny planet, which, as we've seen, has no special gifts from Nature, is the exception; and that the whole Universe, except for this one tiny island, is just empty, lonely, and dead?
We have a tendency to imagine that Life can not exist[Pg 320] under conditions other than terrestrial, and that the other worlds can only be inhabited on the condition of being similar to our own. But terrestrial nature itself demonstrates to us the error of this way of thinking. We die in the water: fishes die out of the water. Again, short-sighted naturalists affirm categorically that Life is impossible at the bottom of the sea: 1, because it is in complete darkness; 2, because the terrible pressure would burst any organism; 3, because all motion would be impossible there, and so on. Some inquisitive person sends down a dredge, and brings up lovely creatures, so delicate in structure that the daintiest touch must proceed with circumspection. There is no light in these depths: they make it with their own phosphorescence. Other inquirers visit subterranean caverns, and discover animals and plants whose organs have been transformed by adaptation to their gloomy environment.
We tend to believe that life can't exist[Pg 320] in conditions that aren't like ours, thinking that other worlds can only be inhabited if they resemble our own. But the natural world shows us that this way of thinking is wrong. We can drown in water, while fish can't survive out of it. Furthermore, some narrow-minded scientists insist that life is impossible at the ocean's depths: 1, because it's completely dark; 2, because the extreme pressure would crush any organism; 3, because movement would be impossible there, among other reasons. Then, someone curious sends down a dredge and brings up stunning creatures, so fragile that even the gentlest touch has to be cautious. There’s no light down there; they create their own phosphorescence. Other researchers explore underground caves and find animals and plants whose features have adapted to their dark surroundings.
What right have we to say to the vital energy that radiates round every Sun of the Universe: "Thus far shalt thou come, and no further"? In the name of Science? An absolute mistake. The Known is an infinitesimal island in the midst of the vast ocean of the Unknown. The deep seas which seemed to be a barrier are, as we have seen, peopled with special life. Some one objects: But after all, there is air there, there is oxygen: oxygen is indispensable: a world without oxygen[Pg 321] would be a world of death, an eternally sterile desert. Why? Because we have not yet come across beings that can breathe without air, and live without oxygen? Another mistake. Even if we did not know of any, it would not prove that they do not exist. But as it happens, we do know of such: the anærobia. These beings live without air, without oxygen. Better still: oxygen kills them!
What right do we have to tell the vital energy that surrounds every Sun in the Universe: "You can only go this far, and no further"? In the name of Science? That's a complete mistake. What we know is just a tiny island in the vast ocean of the Unknown. The deep seas that seemed like a barrier are, as we have seen, filled with unique life. Someone might object: But there’s air there, there’s oxygen: oxygen is essential! A world without oxygen[Pg 321] would be a world of death, an endless barren desert. Why? Because we haven’t encountered beings that can breathe without air and live without oxygen? That’s another mistake. Even if we didn’t know of any, it wouldn’t prove that they don’t exist. But as it turns out, we do know of such beings: the anærobia. These organisms live without air, without oxygen. Even more surprisingly: oxygen is harmful to them!
All the evidence goes to show that in interpreting as we ought the spectacle of terrestrial life, and the positive facts acquired by Science, we should enlarge the circle of our conceptions and our judgments, and not limit extra-terrestrial existence to the servile image of what is in existence here below. Terrestrial organic forms are due to local causes upon our planet. The chemical constitution of water and of the atmosphere, temperature, light, density, weight, are so many elements that have gone to form our bodies. Our flesh is composed of carbon, nitrogen, hydrogen, and oxygen combined in the state of water, and of some other elements, among which we may instance sodium chloride (salt). The flesh of animals is not chemically different from our own. All this comes from the water and the air, and returns to them again. The same elements, in very minute quantities, make up all living bodies. The ox that browses on the grass is formed of the same flesh[Pg 322] as the man who eats the beef. All organized terrestrial matter is only carbon combined in variable proportions with hydrogen, nitrogen, oxygen, etc.
All the evidence shows that in properly interpreting the spectacle of life on Earth and the positive facts provided by Science, we should broaden our understanding and judgments, rather than confining the idea of extra-terrestrial life to the limited image of what exists here. The organic forms on Earth are the result of local factors specific to our planet. The chemical makeup of water and the atmosphere, alongside temperature, light, density, and weight, are all elements that contribute to the formation of our bodies. Our flesh consists of carbon, nitrogen, hydrogen, and oxygen, combined as water, along with other elements, including sodium chloride (salt). The flesh of animals isn't chemically different from ours. Everything comes from water and air, and eventually returns to them. The same elements, in tiny quantities, make up all living bodies. The cow that grazes on grass is made of the same flesh[Pg 322] as the person who eats the beef. All organic matter on Earth is simply carbon combined in varying amounts with hydrogen, nitrogen, oxygen, and so on.
But we have no right to forbid Nature to act differently in worlds from which carbon is absent. A world, for example, in which silica replaces carbon, silicic acid carbonic acid, might be inhabited by organisms absolutely different from those which exist on the Earth, different not only in form, but also in substance. We already know stars and suns for which spectral analysis reveals a predominance of silica, e.g., Rigel and Deneb. In a world where chlorine predominated, we might expect to find hydrochloric acid, and all the fecund family of chlorides, playing an important part in the phenomena of life. Might not bromine be associated in other formations? Why, indeed, should we draw the line at terrestrial chemistry? What is to prove that these elements are really simple? May not hydrogen, carbon, oxygen, nitrogen, and sulphur all be compounds? Their equivalents are multiples of the first: 1, 6, 8, 14, 16. And is even hydrogen the most simple of the elements? Is not its molecule composed of atoms, and may there not exist a single species of primitive atom, whose geometric arrangement and various associations might constitute the molecules of the so-called simple elements?
But we can't deny Nature the chance to behave differently in worlds without carbon. For instance, a world where silica takes the place of carbon, and silicic acid replaces carbonic acid, might be home to life forms that are completely different from those on Earth—not just in shape, but also in makeup. We already know of stars and suns where spectral analysis shows a lot of silica, like Rigel and Deneb. In a world where chlorine was dominant, we might expect hydrochloric acid and all the related chlorides to play a major role in life's processes. Could bromine be involved in other compounds? Why should we limit ourselves to just Earth’s chemistry? What evidence do we have that these elements are truly simple? It’s possible that hydrogen, carbon, oxygen, nitrogen, and sulfur are all compounds. Their equivalents are multiples of the first: 1, 6, 8, 14, 16. And is hydrogen really the simplest element? Isn’t its molecule made up of atoms, and could there be a single type of basic atom whose geometric arrangement and different combinations form the molecules of the so-called simple elements?
In our own solar system we discover the essential differences between certain planets. In the spectrum of Jupiter, for instance, we are aware of the action of an unknown substance that manifests itself by a marked absorption of certain red rays. This gas, which does not exist upon the Earth, is seen still more obviously in the atmospheres of Saturn and Uranus. Indeed, upon this last planet the atmosphere appears, apart from its water vapor, to have no sort of analogy with our own. And in the solar spectrum itself, many of the lines have not yet been identified with terrestrial substances.
In our solar system, we see the key differences between certain planets. For example, in Jupiter's spectrum, we notice the presence of an unknown substance that absorbs specific red rays. This gas, which isn't found on Earth, is even more apparent in the atmospheres of Saturn and Uranus. In fact, on Uranus, the atmosphere, aside from its water vapor, seems completely unlike our own. Moreover, many lines in the solar spectrum still haven't been matched with substances found on Earth.
The interrelation of the planets is of course incontrovertible, since they are all children of the same parent. But they differ among themselves, not merely in respect of situation, position, volume, mass, density, temperature, atmosphere, but again in physical and chemical constitution. And the point we would now accent is that this diversity should not be regarded as an obstacle to the manifestations of life, but, on the contrary, as a new field open to the infinite fecundity of the universal mother.
The connection between the planets is undeniable, as they all come from the same origin. However, they vary from one another, not only in terms of location, position, size, weight, density, temperature, and atmosphere, but also in their physical and chemical makeup. We want to emphasize that this diversity should not be seen as a barrier to the expressions of life, but rather as a new area that allows for the limitless creativity of the universal source.
When our thoughts take wing, not only to our neighbors, Moon, Venus, Mars, Jupiter, or Saturn, but still more toward the myriads of unknown worlds that gravitate round the suns disseminated in space, we have no plausible reason for imagining that the inhabitants[Pg 324] of these other worlds of Heaven resemble us in any way, whether in form, or even in organic substance.
When our thoughts soar, not just to our neighbors like the Moon, Venus, Mars, Jupiter, or Saturn, but even more toward the countless unknown worlds that orbit the suns scattered throughout space, we have no good reason to think that the inhabitants[Pg 324] of these other heavenly worlds are similar to us in any way, whether in appearance or even in biological makeup.
The substance of the terrestrial human body is due to the elements of our planet, and notably to carbon. The terrestrial human form derives from the ancestral animal forms to which it has gradually raised itself by the continuous progress of the transformation of species. To us it seems obvious that we are man or woman, because we have a head, a heart, lungs, two legs, two arms, and so on. Nothing is less a matter of course. That we are constituted as we are, is simply the result of our pro-simian ancestors having also had a head, a heart, lungs, legs, and arms—less elegant than your own, it is true, Madam, but still of the same anatomy. And more and more, by the progress of paleontology, we are delving down to the origin of beings. As certain as it is that the bird derives from the reptile by a process of organic evolution, so certain is it that terrestrial Humanity represents the topmost branches of the huge genealogical tree, whereof all the limbs are brothers, and the roots of which are plunged into the very rudiments of the most elementary and primitive organisms.
The physical makeup of the human body comes from the elements of our planet, especially carbon. The human form has evolved from our ancestral animal forms, gradually improving through continuous species transformation. It seems obvious to us that we are male or female because we have a head, a heart, lungs, two legs, two arms, and so on. But that’s not a given. Our bodies are what they are because our pro-simian ancestors also had a head, a heart, lungs, legs, and arms—less refined than yours, of course, Madam, but still of the same basic structure. Increasingly, through advancements in paleontology, we are uncovering the origins of life. Just as it’s clear that birds evolved from reptiles, it’s equally clear that humanity today is the highest branch of an enormous family tree, where all the limbs are related, and the roots dig deep into the most basic and primitive organisms.
The multitude of worlds is surely peopled by every imaginable and unimaginable form. Terrestrial man is endowed with five senses, or perhaps it is better to say six. Why should Nature stop at this point? Why, for[Pg 325] instance, may she not have given to certain beings an electrical sense, a magnetic sense, a sense of orientation, an organ able to perceive the ethereal vibrations of the infra-red or ultra-violet, or permitted them to hear at a distance, or to see through walls? We eat and digest like coarse animals, we are slaves to our digestive tube: may there not be worlds in which a nutritive atmosphere enables its fortunate inhabitants to dispense with this absurd process? The least sparrow, even the dusky bat, has an advantage over us in that it can fly through the air. Think how inferior are our conditions, since the man of greatest genius, the most exquisite woman, are nailed to the soil like any vulgar caterpillar before its metamorphosis! Would it be a disadvantage to inhabit a world in which we might fly whither we would; a world of scented luxury, full of animated flowers; a world where the winds would be incapable of exciting a tempest, where several suns of different colors—the diamond glowing with the ruby, or the emerald with the sapphire—would burn night and day (azure nights and scarlet days) in the glory of an eternal spring; with multi-colored moons sleeping in the mirror of the waters, phosphorescent mountains, aerial inhabitants,—men, women, or perhaps of other sexes,—perfect in their forms, gifted with multiple sensibilities, luminous at will, incombustible as asbestos, perhaps immortal,[Pg 326] unless they commit suicide out of curiosity? Lilliputian atoms as we are, let us once for all be convinced that our imagination is but sterility, in the midst of an infinitude hardly glimpsed by the telescope.
The countless worlds are definitely filled with every imaginable and unimaginable form. We humans have five senses, or maybe it's more accurate to say six. Why would Nature stop there? Why, for[Pg 325] example, couldn't she have given some beings an electrical sense, a magnetic sense, a sense of direction, an organ to detect the ethereal vibrations of infrared or ultraviolet light, or the ability to hear from far away, or see through walls? We eat and digest like basic animals, trapped by our digestive system: could there be worlds where a nutritive atmosphere lets their lucky inhabitants skip this ridiculous process? Even the smallest sparrow or the common bat has an advantage over us by being able to fly. Consider how inferior our situation is, as the most brilliant man or the most delicate woman is stuck to the ground like any ordinary caterpillar before its transformation! Would it be such a downside to live in a world where we could fly wherever we wanted; a world of fragrant luxury, filled with lively flowers; a world where the winds wouldn't stir up a storm, where several suns of different colors—the diamond shimmering with the ruby, or the emerald with the sapphire—would shine day and night (blue nights and red days) in the beauty of eternal spring; with colorful moons resting in the reflection of the waters, glowing mountains, airborne inhabitants—men, women, or perhaps beings of other genders—perfect in their forms, equipped with multiple sensibilities, able to shine at will, unburnable like asbestos, maybe even immortal,[Pg 326] unless they choose to end their lives out of curiosity? Tiny beings that we are, let’s finally accept that our imagination is just a barren landscape, surrounded by an infinity we can barely see through a telescope.
One important point seems always to be ignored expressly by those who blindly deny the doctrine of the plurality of worlds. It is that this doctrine does not apply more particularly to the present epoch than to any other. Our time is of no importance, no absolute value. Eternity is the field of the Eternal Sower. There is no reason why the other worlds should be inhabited now more than at any other epoch.
One crucial point is often overlooked by those who blindly reject the idea of multiple worlds. This idea doesn’t apply more to our current time than to any other period. Our time doesn’t hold any special significance or absolute value. Eternity is the realm of the Eternal Sower. There’s no reason why other worlds should be inhabited now more than at any other time.
What, indeed, is the Present Moment? It is an open trap through which the Future falls incessantly into the gulf of the Past.
What exactly is the Present Moment? It’s an open trap that allows the Future to continuously fall into the abyss of the Past.
The immensity of Heaven bears in its bosom cradles as well as tombs, worlds to come and perished worlds. It abounds in extinct suns, and cemeteries. In all probability Jupiter is not yet inhabited. What does this prove? The Earth was not inhabited during its primordial period: what did that prove to the inhabitants of Mars or of the Moon, who were perhaps observing it at that epoch, a few million years ago?
The vastness of Heaven holds both cradles and tombs, worlds that are yet to come and those that have vanished. It is filled with extinguished suns and graveyards. It’s likely that Jupiter isn’t inhabited yet. What does this show? The Earth wasn’t inhabited during its early days: what would that have shown to the inhabitants of Mars or the Moon, who might have been watching it back then, a few million years ago?
To pretend that our globe must be the only inhabited world because the others do not resemble it, is to reason, not like a philosopher, but, as we remarked[Pg 327] before, like a fish. Every rational fish ought to assume that it is impossible to live out of water, since its outlook and its philosophy do not extend beyond its daily life. There is no answer to this order of reasoning, except to advise a little wider perception, and extension of the too narrow horizon of habitual ideas.
To assume that our planet is the only inhabited world just because the others don't look like it is to think, not like a philosopher, but, as we said[Pg 327] before, like a fish. Every rational fish should believe that it's impossible to live outside of water since its view and its understanding are limited to its everyday life. The only response to this kind of reasoning is to suggest a broader perspective and a widening of the too narrow scope of familiar ideas.
For us the resources of Nature may be considered infinite, and "positive" science, founded upon our senses only, is altogether inadequate, although it is the only possible basis of our reasoning. We must learn to see with the eyes of our spirit.
For us, the resources of Nature can be seen as limitless, and "positive" science, based solely on our senses, is completely insufficient, even though it’s the only possible foundation for our reasoning. We need to learn to see with the eyes of our spirit.
As to the planetary systems other than our own, we are no longer reduced to hypotheses. We already know with certainty that our Sun is no exception, as was suggested, and is still maintained, by some theorists. The discovery in itself is curious enough.
As for planetary systems beyond our own, we are no longer limited to guesses. We now know for sure that our Sun is not unique, despite what some theorists have suggested and continue to argue. The discovery itself is fascinating enough.
It is surely an exceptional situation that, given a sidereal system composed of a central sun, and of one or more stars gravitating round him, the plane of such a system should fall just within our line of vision, and that it should revolve in such a way that the globes of which it is composed pass exactly between this sun and ourselves in turning round him, eclipsing him more or less during this transit. As, on the other hand, the eclipses would be our only means of determining the existence of these unknown planets (save indeed from[Pg 328] perturbation, as in the case of Sirius and Procyon), it might have seemed quixotic to hope for like conditions in order to discover solar systems other than our own. But these exceptional circumstances have reproduced themselves at different parts of the Heavens.
It’s definitely an unusual situation that, in a star system with a central sun and one or more stars orbiting around it, the plane of that system aligns perfectly with our line of sight, and that it rotates in such a way that the celestial bodies within it pass directly between the sun and us while they orbit, momentarily blocking our view of the sun. On the other hand, eclipses would be our only way to detect the existence of these unknown planets (except for when they cause gravitational shifts, like with Sirius and Procyon), so it might have seemed unrealistic to expect similar conditions to find solar systems beyond our own. However, these unique circumstances have occurred in various parts of the sky.
Thus, for instance, we have seen that the variable star Algol owes its variations in brilliancy, which reduce it from second to fourth magnitude every sixty-nine hours, to the interposition of a body between itself and the Earth, and celestial mechanics has already been able to determine accurately the orbit of this body, its dimensions and its mass, and even the flattening of the sun Algol. Here, then, is a system in which we know the sun and an enormous planet, whose revolution is effected in sixty-nine hours with extreme rapidity, as measured by the spectroscope.
Thus, for example, we have observed that the variable star Algol experiences changes in brightness, decreasing from second to fourth magnitude every sixty-nine hours, because of another body passing between it and Earth. Celestial mechanics has already accurately calculated the orbit of this body, its size and mass, and even the flattening of the sun Algol. Here is a system where we know the sun and a massive planet, which completes its revolution in sixty-nine hours at an exceptionally fast pace, as measured by the spectroscope.
The star δ of Cepheus is in the same case: it is an orb eclipsed in a period of 129 hours, and its eclipsing planet also revolves in the plane of our vision. The variable star in Ophiuchus has an analogous system, and observation has already revealed a great number of others.
The star δ in Cepheus is similar: it’s an orb that gets eclipsed every 129 hours, and its eclipsing planet also moves in our line of sight. The variable star in Ophiuchus has a similar setup, and observations have already uncovered many more like them.
Since, then, a certain number of solar systems differing from our own have been revealed, as it were in section, to terrestrial observation, this affords us sufficient evidence of the existence of an innumerable quantity of solar systems scattered through the [Pg 329]immensities of space, and we are no longer reduced to conjecture.
Since then, several solar systems that are different from our own have been revealed, as if in sections, to Earth's observation, providing us with enough evidence of the existence of countless solar systems scattered throughout the [Pg 329]vastness of space, and we are no longer left to guess.
On the other hand, analysis of the motions of several stars, such as Sirius, Procyon, Altaïr, proves that these distant orbs have companions,—planets not yet discovered by the telescope, and that perhaps never will be discovered, because they are obscure, and lost in the radiation of the star.
On the other hand, analyzing the movements of several stars, like Sirius, Procyon, and Altaïr, shows that these distant celestial bodies have companions—planets that haven’t been discovered by telescopes yet and may never be found because they are faint and hidden in the star's brightness.
Some savants have asserted that Life can not germinate if the conditions of the environment differ too much from terrestrial conditions.
Some savants have claimed that life cannot develop if the environmental conditions are too different from those on Earth.
This hypothesis is purely gratuitous, and we will now discuss it.
This assumption is completely unwarranted, and we will now talk about it.
In order to examine what is happening on the Earth, let us mount the ladder of time for a moment, to follow the evolutions of Nature.
To explore what’s happening on Earth, let’s take a moment to climb the ladder of time and trace the developments of Nature.
There was an epoch when the Earth did not exist. Our planet, the future world of our habitation, slept in the bosom of the solar nebula.
There was a time when Earth didn’t exist. Our planet, the future home we live in, was resting in the heart of the solar nebula.
At last it came to birth, this cherished Earth, a gaseous, luminous ball, poor reflection of the King of Orbs, its parent. Millions of years rolled by before the condensation and cooling of this new globe were sufficiently transformed to permit life to manifest itself in its most rudimentary aspects.
At last, this beloved Earth was born, a glowing, gaseous sphere, a faint reflection of its parent, the King of Orbs. Millions of years passed before the cooling and condensation of this new planet changed enough to allow life to appear in its most basic forms.
The first organic forms of the protoplasm, the first aggregations of cells, the protozoons, the zoophytes or plant-animals, the gelatinous mussels of the still warm seas, were succeeded by the fishes, then by the reptiles, the birds, the mammals, and lastly man, who at present occupies the top of the genealogical tree, and crowns the animal kingdom.
The earliest organic forms of protoplasm, the first groups of cells, the protozoa, the zoophytes or plant-animals, and the jelly-like mussels of the still warm seas, were followed by fish, then reptiles, birds, mammals, and finally humans, who currently sit at the top of the evolutionary tree and represent the pinnacle of the animal kingdom.
Humanity is comparatively young upon the Earth. We may attribute some thousands of centuries of existence to it ... and some five years of reason!
Humanity is relatively young on Earth. We can credit it with thousands of centuries of existence... and only about five years of reason!
The terrestrial organisms, from the lowest up to man, are the resultant of the forces in action at the surface of our planet. The earliest seem to have been produced by the combinations of carbon with hydrogen and nitrogen; they were, so to speak, without animation, save for some very rudimentary sensibility; the sponges, corals, polyps, and medusæ, give us a notion of these primitive beings. They were formed in the tepid waters of the primary epoch. As long as there were no continents, no islands emerging from the level of the universal ocean, there were no beings breathing in the air. The first aquatic creatures were succeeded by the amphibia, the reptiles. Later on were developed the mammals and the birds.
The land organisms, from the simplest forms to humans, are the result of the forces acting at the surface of our planet. The earliest ones seem to have come from the combinations of carbon with hydrogen and nitrogen; they were, in a way, lifeless, apart from some very basic sensitivity. The sponges, corals, polyps, and jellyfish give us an idea of these primitive beings. They were created in the warm waters of the early era. As long as there were no continents or islands rising above the ocean's surface, there were no creatures breathing air. The first aquatic animals were followed by amphibians and reptiles. Ultimately, mammals and birds developed later.
What, again, do we not owe to the plant-world of the primary epoch, of the secondary epoch, of the tertiary[Pg 331] epoch, which slowly prepared the good nutritious soil of to-day, in which the roses flourish, and the peach and strawberry ripen?
What, once more, do we not owe to the plant world of the primary era, the secondary era, and the tertiary[Pg 331] era, which gradually created the rich, nutritious soil of today, where roses thrive and peaches and strawberries ripen?
Before it gave birth to a Helen or a Cleopatra, life manifested itself under the roughest forms, and in the most varied conditions. A long-period comet passing in sight of the Earth from time to time would have seen modifications of existence in each of its transits, in accordance with a slow evolution, corresponding to the variation of the conditions of existence, and progressing incessantly, for if Life is the goal of nature, Progress is the supreme law.
Before it produced a Helen or a Cleopatra, life appeared in its roughest forms and in the most diverse conditions. A long-period comet passing by Earth occasionally would have witnessed changes in existence with each of its visits, in line with a gradual evolution that matched the changing conditions of life, continually advancing, because if Life is the aim of nature, Progress is its ultimate rule.
The history of our planet is the history of life, with all its metamorphoses. It is the same for all the worlds, with some exceptions of orbs arrested in their development.
The history of our planet is the history of life, with all its changes. This is true for all worlds, except for some that have stalled in their development.
The constitution of living beings is in absolute relation with the substances of which they are composed, the environment in which they move, temperature, light, weight, density, the length of day and night, the seasons, etc.—in a word, with all the cosmographic elements of a world.
The makeup of living beings is completely connected to the substances they're made of, the environment they live in, temperature, light, weight, density, the duration of day and night, the seasons, and so on—in short, with all the cosmographic elements of a world.
If, for example, we compare between themselves two worlds such as the Earth and Neptune, utterly different from the point of view of distance from the Sun, we could not for an instant suppose that organic structures could[Pg 332] have followed a parallel development on these planets. The average temperature must be much lower on Neptune than on the Earth, and the same holds for intensity of light. The years and seasons there are 165 times longer than with us, the density of matter is three times as weak, and weight is, on the contrary, a little greater. Under conditions so different from our own, the activities of Nature would have to translate themselves under other forms. And doubtless the elementary bodies would not be found there in the same proportions. Consequently we have to conclude that organs and senses would not be the same there as here. The optic nerve, for instance, which has formed and developed here from the rudimentary organ of the trilobite to the marvels of the human eye, must be incomparably more sensitive upon Neptune than in our dazzling solar luminosity, in order to perceive radiations that we do not perceive here. In all probability, it is replaced there by some other organ. The lungs, functioning there in another atmosphere, are different from our own. So, too, for the stomach and digestive organs. Corporeal forms, animal and human, can not resemble those which exist upon the Earth.
If we compare two worlds like Earth and Neptune, which are completely different in terms of their distance from the Sun, we cannot imagine that life forms could[Pg 332] have developed in the same way on these planets. The average temperature on Neptune must be much colder than on Earth, and the light intensity is the same. A year and the seasons there last 165 times longer than ours, the matter is three times less dense, and weight is slightly greater. Under such different conditions, nature would have to take on different forms. It's likely that the basic elements wouldn't be in the same proportions either. Therefore, we can conclude that organs and senses would not be the same there as they are here. For example, the optic nerve, which has evolved here from the simple organ of the trilobite to the wonders of the human eye, would have to be much more sensitive on Neptune than in our bright sunlight to detect wavelengths we can't see. It’s probable that it’s replaced by a different organ there. The lungs, operating in a different atmosphere, would differ from ours too. The same goes for the stomach and digestive organs. Physical forms of animals and humans cannot be like those that exist on Earth.
Certain savants contend that if the conditions differed too much from terrestrial conditions, life could not be produced there at all. Yet we have no right to[Pg 333] limit the powers of Nature to the narrow bounds of our sphere of observation, and to pretend that our planet and our Humanity are the type of all the worlds. That is a hypothesis as ridiculous as it is childish.
Certain experts argue that if the conditions were too different from those on Earth, life couldn't exist there at all. However, we have no right to[Pg 333] restrict the capabilities of Nature to the limited scope of our observations or to assume that our planet and Humanity are the standard for all worlds. That idea is as silly as it is naive.
Do not let us be "personal," like children, and old people who never see beyond their room. Let us learn to live in the Infinite and the Eternal.
Do not let us be "personal," like kids and elderly people who only see what's in their room. Let's learn to live in the Infinite and the Eternal.
From this larger point of view, the doctrine of the plurality of worlds is the complement and the natural crown of Astronomy. What interests us most in the study of the Universe is surely to know what goes on there.
From this broader perspective, the idea of multiple worlds is the complement and the natural pinnacle of Astronomy. What fascinates us most in studying the Universe is undoubtedly discovering what happens there.
These considerations show that, in all the ages, what really constitutes a planet is not its skeleton but the life that vibrates upon its surface.
These thoughts demonstrate that, throughout all ages, what truly makes a planet is not its structure but the life that thrives on its surface.
And again, if we analyze things, we see that for the Procession of Nature, life is all, and matter nothing.
And again, if we break things down, we see that for the Procession of Nature, life is everything, and matter is nothing.
What has become of our ancestors, the millions of human beings who preceded us upon this globe? Where are their bodies? What is left of them? Search everywhere. Nothing is left but the molecules of air, water, dust, atoms of hydrogen, nitrogen, oxygen, carbon, etc., which are incorporated in turn in the organism of every living being.
What happened to our ancestors, the millions of people who came before us on this planet? Where are their remains? What’s left of them? Look anywhere. There’s nothing left but the molecules of air, water, dust, and atoms of hydrogen, nitrogen, oxygen, carbon, and so on, which are then taken up by every living organism.
The whole Earth is a vast cemetery, and its finest[Pg 334] cities are rooted in the catacombs. But now, in crossing Paris, I passed for at least the thousandth time near the Church of St. Germain-l'Auxerrois, and was obliged to turn out of the direct way, on account of excavations. I looked down, and saw that immediately below the pavement, they had just uncovered some stone coffins still containing the skeletons that had reposed there for ten centuries. From time immemorial the passers-by had trampled them unwittingly under foot. And I reflected that it is much the same in every quarter of Paris. Only yesterday, some Roman tombs and a coin with the effigy of Nero were found in a garden near the Observatory.
The entire Earth is a massive graveyard, and its greatest[Pg 334] cities are built on top of catacombs. But now, as I walked through Paris, I passed by the Church of St. Germain-l'Auxerrois for at least the thousandth time and had to take a detour because of construction work. I looked down and saw that just beneath the pavement, they had uncovered some stone coffins still holding the skeletons that had been there for ten centuries. For ages, people had unknowingly walked over them. And I realized that it's pretty much the same in every part of Paris. Just yesterday, some Roman tombs and a coin featuring the image of Nero were discovered in a garden near the Observatory.
And from the most general standpoint of Life, the whole world is in the same case, and even more so, seeing that all that exists, all that lives, is formed of elements that have already been incorporated in other beings, no longer living. The roses that adorn the bosom of the fair ... but I will not enlarge upon this topic.
And from the broadest perspective of life, the entire world is in the same situation, and even more so, considering that everything that exists and lives is made up of elements that have already been part of other beings that are no longer alive. The roses that beautify the chest of the lovely ... but I won't expand on this topic.
And you, so strong and virile, of what elements is your splendid body formed? Where have the elements you absorb to-day in respiration and assimilation been drawn from, what lugubrious adventures have they been subject to? Think away from it: do not insist on this point: on no account consider it....
And you, so strong and manly, what are the building blocks of your amazing body? Where do the elements you take in today through breathing and nourishment come from, and what dark journeys have they been through? Don't dwell on it: please don't focus on this: whatever you do, don't think about it...
And yet, let us dwell on it, since this reality is the most evident demonstration of the ideal; since what[Pg 335] exists is you, is all of us, is Life; and matter is only its substance, like the materials of a house, and even less so, since its particles only pass rapidly through the framework of our bodies. A heap of stones does not make a house. Quintillions of tons of materials would not represent the Earth or any other world.
And yet, let's think about it, because this reality is the clearest proof of the ideal; what[Pg 335] exists is you, is all of us, is Life; and matter is just its substance, like the materials of a house, and even less than that, since its particles just zip right through the structure of our bodies. A pile of stones doesn't make a house. Quintillions of tons of materials wouldn't stand for the Earth or any other planet.
Yes, what really exists, what constitutes a complete orb, is the city of Life. Let us recognize that the flower of life flourishes on the surface of our planet, embellishing it with its perfume; that it is just this life that we see and admire,—of which we form part,—and which is the raison d'être of things; that matter floats, and crosses, and crosses back again, in the web of living beings,—and the reality, the goal, is not matter—it is the life matter is employed upon.
Yes, what truly exists, what makes up a complete whole, is the city of Life. Let’s acknowledge that the flower of life thrives on the surface of our planet, beautifying it with its fragrance; it is this life that we observe and appreciate,—of which we are a part,—and which is the reason for being of everything; that matter moves, and travels, and travels back again, within the network of living beings,—and the truth, the purpose, is not matter—it’s the life that matter is involved with.
Yes, matter passes, and being also, after sharing in the concerted symphony of life.
Yes, matter changes, and being too, after participating in the united harmony of life.
And indeed everything passes rapidly!
And everything goes by quickly!
What irrepressible grief, what deep melancholy, what ineffaceable regrets we feel, when as age comes on we look back, when we see our friends fallen upon the road one after the other, above all when we visit the beloved scenes of our childhood, those homes of other years, that witnessed our first start in terrestrial existence, our first games, our first affections—those affections of childhood that seemed eternal—when we wander over[Pg 336] those fields and valleys and hills, when we see again the landscape whose aspect has hardly changed, and whose image is so intimately linked with our first impressions. There near this fireside the grandfather danced us on his knee, and told us blood-curdling stories; here the kind grandmother came to see if we were comfortably tucked in, and not likely to fall out of the big bed; in this little wood, along these alleys that seemed endless, we spread our nets for birds; in this stream we fished for crayfish; there on the path we played at soldiers with our elders, who were always captains; on these slopes we found rare stones and fossils, and mysterious petrifactions; on this hill we admired the fine sunsets, the appearance of the stars, the form of the constellations. There we began to live, to think, to love, to form attachments, to dream, to question every problem, to breathe intellectually and physically. And now, where is this beloved grandfather? the good grandmother? where are all whom we knew in infancy? where are our dreams of childhood? Winged thoughts still seem to flutter in the air, and that is all. People, caresses, voices, all have gone and vanished. The cemetery has closed over them all. There is a silent void. Were all those fine and sunny hours an illusion? Was it only to weep one day over this negation that our childish hearts were so tenderly attached to these fleeting[Pg 337] shadows? Is there nothing, down the long length of human history, but eternal delusion?
What overwhelming sadness, what deep sorrow, what lasting regrets we feel as we get older and look back, especially when we see our friends falling away one by one, but most of all when we visit the beloved places of our childhood—those homes from years ago that witnessed our first steps in life, our first games, our first loves—those childhood loves that felt everlasting. As we wander over[Pg 336] those fields, valleys, and hills, we see the landscape that hasn’t changed much, and whose image is so closely tied to our earliest memories. There by the fireside, our grandfather danced us on his knee and told us spine-chilling stories; here the caring grandmother would check if we were snug in bed, making sure we wouldn’t fall out of the big bed; in this little wood, along those seemingly endless paths, we set our bird traps; in this stream we fished for crayfish; there on the path we played soldiers with our older cousins, who were always the captains; on these slopes we found rare stones and fossils, and mysterious petrifications; on this hill we admired the beautiful sunsets, the stars appearing, the shapes of the constellations. That’s where we began to live, to think, to love, to create bonds, to dream, to question everything, to breathe both intellectually and physically. And now, where is that beloved grandfather? the kind grandmother? where are all the people we knew as infants? where are our childhood dreams? Thoughts with wings still seem to flutter in the air, and that’s all. People, hugs, voices—everything has disappeared. The cemetery has claimed them all. There is a silent emptiness. Were all those bright, happy moments just an illusion? Was it only to end up mourning this loss that our innocent hearts were so deeply attached to these fleeting[Pg 337] shadows? Is there nothing throughout human history but endless deception?
It is here, above all, that we find ourselves in presence of the greatest problems. Life is the goal, it is Life that produces the conditions of Thought. Without Thought, where would be the Universe?
It is here, above all, that we face the greatest challenges. Life is the goal; it's Life that creates the conditions for Thought. Without Thought, where would the Universe be?
We feel that without life and thought, the Universe would be an empty theater, and Astronomy itself, sublime science, a vain research. We feel that this is the truth, veiled as yet to actual science, and that human races kindred with our own exist there in the immensities of space. Yes, we feel that this is truth.
We believe that without life and thought, the Universe would be a deserted theater, and Astronomy, that magnificent science, a pointless pursuit. We know this is the truth, still hidden from current science, and that other human races similar to ours exist in the vastness of space. Yes, we know this is the truth.
But we would fain go a little further in our knowledge of the universe, and penetrate in some measure the secret of our destinies. We would know if these distant and unknown Humanities are not attached to us by mysterious cords, if our life, which will assuredly be extinguished at some definite moment here below, will not be prolonged into the regions of Eternity.
But we would like to go a little deeper in our understanding of the universe and uncover, to some extent, the secrets of our destinies. We want to know if these distant and unknown societies aren't connected to us by mysterious ties, and if our lives, which will definitely end at some point here on Earth, won't continue on into the realms of Eternity.
A moment ago we said that nothing is left of the body. Millions of organisms have lived, there are no remains of them. Air, water, smoke, dust. Memento, homo, quia pulvis es et in pulverem revertebis. Remember oh man! that dust thou art, and unto dust thou shalt return, says the priest to the faithful, when he scatters the ashes on the day after the carnival.
A moment ago we mentioned that there’s nothing left of the body. Millions of organisms have existed, and there are no traces of them. Just air, water, smoke, and dust. Memento, homo, quia pulvis es et in pulverem revertebis. Remember, oh man, that you are dust, and to dust you shall return, the priest tells the congregation as he sprinkles the ashes the day after the carnival.
The body disappears entirely. It goes where the corpse of Cæsar went an hour after the extinction of his pyre. Nor will there be more remains of any of us. And the whole of Humanity, and the Earth itself, will also disappear one day. Let no one talk of the Progress of Humanity as an end! That would be too gross a decoy.
The body completely vanishes. It goes where Caesar's corpse went an hour after his pyre was extinguished. There won't be any remains of any of us either. And eventually, all of humanity and the Earth itself will disappear too. Let's not pretend that the Progress of Humanity is a destination! That would be too big of a distraction.
If the soul were also to disappear in smoke, what would be left of the vital and intellectual organization of the world? Nothing.
If the soul were to vanish in smoke, what would remain of the vital and intellectual structure of the world? Nothing.
On this hypothesis, all would be reduced to nothing.
On this hypothesis, everything would be reduced to nothing.
Our reason is not immense, our terrestrial faculties are sufficiently limited, but this reason and these faculties suffice none the less to make us feel the improbability, the absurdity, of this hypothesis, and we reject it as incompatible with the sublime grandeur of the spectacle of the universe.
Our reasoning isn’t vast, and our earthly abilities are quite limited, but even so, this reasoning and these abilities are enough for us to sense the unlikelihood and absurdity of this hypothesis, and we dismiss it as being incompatible with the awe-inspiring grandeur of the universe's spectacle.
Undoubtedly, Creation does not seem to concern itself with us. It proceeds on its inexorable course without consulting our sensations. With the poet we regret the implacable serenity of Nature, opposing the irony of its smiling splendor to our mourning, our revolts, and our despair.
Undoubtedly, creation doesn’t seem to care about us. It moves along its unstoppable path without considering our feelings. Like the poet, we lament the unyielding calmness of nature, contrasting its cheerful beauty with our grief, our struggles, and our despair.
Que peu de temps suffit pour changer toutes choses!
Nature au front serein, comme vous oubliez!
Et comme vous brisez dans vos métamorphoses
Les fils mystérieux où nos cœurs sont liés.
[Pg 339]D'autres vont maintenant passer où nous passâmes;
Nous y sommes venus, d'autres vont y venir,
Et le songe qu'avaient ébauché nos deux âmes,
Ils le continueront sans pouvoir le finir.
Car personne ici-bas ne termine et n'acheve;
Les pires des humains sont comme les meilleurs;
Nous nous éveillons tous au même endroit du rêve:
Tout commence en ce monde et tout finit ailleurs.
Répondez, vallon pur, répondez, solitude!
O Nature, abritée en ce désert si beau,
Quand nous serons couchés tous deux, dans l'attitude
Que donne aux morts pensifs la forme du tombeau,
Est-ce que vous serez à ce point insensible,
De nous savoir perdus, morts avec nos amours,
Et de continuer votre fête paisible
Et de toujours sourire et de chanter toujours?[16]
How little time it takes to change everything!
Nature, with your serene presence, how easily you forget!
And how you come into your transformations
The mysterious connections that bring our hearts together.
[Pg 339]Others will now walk where we walked;
We came here, and others will come here,
And the dream that our two souls started,
They'll keep working on it but will never finish it.
For no one here finishes or completes;
The worst of people are like the best;
We all wake up in the same spot in the dream:
Everything begins in this world and everything concludes somewhere else.
Answer me, clear valley, answer me, loneliness!
Oh Nature, embraced by this beautiful desert,
When we're both lying down, in the position
That gives reflective deceased individuals the appearance of a grave,
Will you be so heartless,
To realize we are lost, gone with our loves,
And to keep your celebration going peacefully
And to always smile and sing forever?[16]
Note.—Free Translation.
Note: Free Translation.
How brief a time suffices for all things to change! Serene-fronted Nature, too soon you will forget!... in your metamorphoses ruthlessly snapping the cords that bind our hearts together!
How short a time it takes for everything to change! Calm-faced Nature, you will forget too soon!... in your transformations, heartlessly cutting the ties that connect our hearts!
Others will pass where we pass; we have arrived, and others will arrive after us: the thought sketched out by our souls will be pursued by theirs ... and they will not find the solution of it.
Others will walk the same path we take; we have arrived, and others will come after us: the ideas shaped by our souls will be sought by theirs ... and they will not find the answer to it.
For no one here begins or finishes: the worst are as the best of humans; we all awake at the same moment of the dream: we all begin in this world, and end otherwhere.
For no one here starts or finishes: the worst are like the best of humans; we all wake up at the same moment from the dream: we all begin in this world and end somewhere else.
[Pg 340]Reply, sweet valley, reply, solitude; O Nature, sheltering in this splendid desert, when we are both asleep, and cast by the tomb into the attitude of pensive death.
[Pg 340]Respond, beautiful valley, respond, solitude; O Nature, sheltering us in this magnificent desert, when we are both asleep, and laid by the grave in a thoughtful pose of death.
Will you to the last verge be so insensible, that, knowing us lost, and dead with our loves, you will pursue your cheerful feast, and smile, and sing always?
Will you really be so oblivious, that even knowing we are lost and heartbroken, you will keep enjoying your joyful celebration, smiling and singing all the time?
Yes, mortals may say that when they are sleeping in the grave, spring and summer will still smile and sing; husband and wife may ask themselves if they will meet again some day, in another sphere; but do we not feel that our destinies can not be terminated here, and that short of absolute and final nonentity for everything, they must be renewed beyond, in that starry Heaven to which every dream has flown instinctively since the first origins of Humanity?
Yes, people might say that when they are resting in the grave, spring and summer will still smile and sing; husbands and wives may wonder if they will meet again someday, in another realm; but don’t we feel that our destinies cannot end here, and that unless everything falls into complete and utter nonexistence, they must continue beyond, in that starry Heaven to which every dream has naturally soared since the dawn of Humanity?
As our planet is only a province of the Infinite Heavens, so our actual existence is only a stage in Eternal Life. Astronomy, by giving us wings, conducts us to the sanctuary of truth. The specter of death has departed from our Heaven. The beams of every star shed a ray of hope into our hearts. On each sphere Nature chants the pæan of Life Eternal.
As our planet is just a small part of the Infinite Universe, our existence is merely a phase in Eternal Life. Astronomy, by allowing us to soar, guides us to the sanctuary of truth. The fear of death has left our Heaven. The light from every star brings a glimmer of hope to our hearts. On each sphere, Nature sings the song of Eternal Life.
THE END
THE END
INDEX
A
Aberration, 300
Adams, 168
Agnesi, Marie, 5
Alcar, 34
Aldebaran, 44, 66
Alexandria, 3
Algol, 39
Ancients, views of, 30
Andrew Ellicot, 195
Andromeda, 37, 38
Angles, 289
Antares, 45, 66, 70
Antipodes, 208
Arago, 275
Arcturus, 39, 66
Asteroids, 146, 195
Astronomie des Dames, 9
Attraction, 208
Aureole, 279
Autumn Constellations, 54
Axis, 225
B
Babylonian Tables, 30
Bartholomew Diaz, 176
Bear, Little, 35
Great, 32, 34, 35
Betelgeuse, 49, 66
Biela's Comet, 189, 198
Bode's law, 167
Bolides, 201
C
Cancer, 72
Capella, 38, 66
Cassiopeia, 36
Castor, 44, 68
Catalogue of Lalande, 65
Catharine of Alexandria, 3
Centaur, 52, 64, 65, 80
Ceres, 147
Chaldean pastors, 30
Chaldeans, 271
Chariot of David, 32
Charioteer, 38
Chart of Mars, 140
Châtelet, Marquise du, 4
Chiron, The Centaur, 30, 51
Chromosphere, 102
Clairaut, 3
Clerke, Agnes, 7
Cnidus, 31
Coggia's Comet, 187
Comet of Biela, 197
of 1811, 186
of 1858, 174
Comets, 111, 185
Constellations, 28
figures of, 31
Autumn, 54
[Pg 342]Constellations, Spring, 52
Summer, 53
Winter, 51
Copernicus, 125
Corona Borealis, 40
Corona of the Sun, 104
Cygnus, 40
D
de Blocqueville, Madame, 5
de Breteuil, Gabrielle-Émilie, 4
de Charrière, Madame, 5
Deneb, 41
des Brosses, 5
Diaz, Bartholomew, 176
Dipper, 32, 34
Donati, 187
Double star, stellar dial of, 86
Double stars, 68, 70
Dragon, 36
du Châtelet, Marquise, 4
E
Eagle, 41
Earth, 205
ancient notions of, 19
distance from the sun, 215
how sustained, 21
inclination, 224
in space, 20
motion of, round the Sun, 222
movement of, 217
rotundity of, 206
viewed from Mars, 144
viewed from Mercury, 119
viewed from Venus, 130
weight, 210
Eclipse of Sun, May, 1900, 273
Eclipses, 259
Ellicot, Andrew, 195
Entretiens sur la Pluralité des mondes, 9
Equator, 225
Eudoxus, 31
Evening Star, 123
F
Faculæ, 98, 100
Fire-balls, 198
Flammarion's Lunar Ring, 253
Fleming, Mrs., 7
Fontenelle, 9
Foucault, 219
G
Galileo, 95, 98, 125, 244
Galle, 168
Globe, divisions of, 226
Great Bear, 32, 34, 35
Great Dog, 50
Grecian Calendar, 229
Greek alphabet, 33
H
Hall, Mr., 143
Halley, 181
[Pg 343]Halley's Comet, 3, 175
Heavens, map of, 61
Hercules, 41, 66, 79
Herdsman, 39
Herschel, Caroline, 6
Hevelius, 246
Hipparchus, 31
Houses of the Sun, 43
Huggins, Lady, 8
Huyghens, 49
Hyades, 44
Hypatia, 3
J
Janssen, 102
Jupiter, 148
satellites, 155
telescopic aspect of, 150
K
Klumpke, Miss, 7
Kovalevsky, Sophie, 6
L
Lacaille, 292
Lalande, 3, 9, 65, 292
Latitudes, 226
Leonids, 195
Lepaute, Madame Hortense, 3, 4
Le Verrier, 167
Little Bear, 35
Little Dog, 50
Lockyer, 102
Longitudes, 226
Lucifer, 122
Lunar Apennines, 251
landscape, 254
topography, 252
Lyre, 40
M
Mars, 131
chart of, 140
Measurement, 289
Medes and Lydians, 266
Mercury, 114
Meteorites, 201
Meteors, 190, 191
Metonic Cycle, 271
Milky Way, 78, 87
Mira Ceti, 77
Mitchell, Maria, 7
Mizar, 34, 69
Moon, 232
diameter of, 242
distance of, 292
geological features of, 245
map of, 247
mountains of, 246
phases of, 241
photograph of, 240
revolution of, 234
rotation of, 242
size of, 242
temperature of, 250
total eclipse of, 263
N
Nebula, in Andromeda, 81
[Pg 344]in Orion, 81
in the Greyhounds, 82
Neptune, 65, 166
revolution of, 169
Newton, 181
Nucleus, 95, 185
O
Orion, 48, 49, 81
P
Parallax, 292, 293
annual, 306
Pearl, 40
Pegasus, 38
Penumbra, 96
Periodic Comet, orbit of, 182
Perseids, 195
Perseus, 38, 70, 78
Phenician navigators, 30
Phœbus, 67
Photosphere, 101
Piazzi, 147
Planets, 109, 113, 146
distances, 110, 302
orbits of, 115
orbits of, 116
Pleiades, 38, 39, 44, 83
occultation of, 85
Pleione, 84
Polaris, 63
Pole-star, 34, 63
Poles, 225
Pollux, 44
Pope Calixtus, 176
Prodigies in the heavens, 178
Ptolemy, 31, 217
R
Radiant, 195
Riccioli, 246
Rigel, 49, 70
Roberts, Mrs. Isaac, 7
S
Saidak, 34
Saros, 271
Satellites, 110
Saturn, 156
revolution of, 157
satellites, 162, 165
volume, 158
Saturn's rings, 161
Scarpellini, Madame, 7
Scheiner, 95
Schiaparelli, 139
Secchi, Father, 7
Seven Oxen, 32
Sextuple star, 74
Shepherd's Star, 11
Shooting stars, 193, 194, 196
Sirius, 66, 309
Solar storms, 100
flames, 105
system, 65
Somerville, Mrs., 6
Spring constellations, 52
Stars, distances, 62
double, 68, 70
first magnitude, 57
number of, 60
quadruple, 73
second magnitude, 58
shooting, 193, 194
temporary, 77
[Pg 345]Stars, triple, 72
variable, 75
weight of, 313
Star cluster in Hercules, 79
in the Centaur, 80
St. Catherine, 3
Summer constellations, 53
Sun, 88
houses of the, 43
measurement of distance, 297
photograph of, 96
rotation, 99
temperature of, 105
total eclipse of, 276
weight, 106
Sun and Earth, comparative sizes of, 93
Sun-spots, 95, 101
telescopic aspect of, 97
T
Temporary stars, 77, 78
Three Kings, 49
Total eclipse of the moon, 263
of sun, 276
Triangulation, 288
Triple Star, 72
U
Umbra, 95
Universe, 22, 23, 90
Urania, 8, 9
Uranoliths, 201, 204
Uranus, 162
V
Variable stars, 75
Vega, 40
Venus, 121, 296
phases of, 124
Vesper, 122
Victor Hugo, 24
W
Weighing worlds, 309
Winter constellations, 51
Z
Zodiac, constellations of, 46, 47
Zones, 225
A
Anomaly, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Adams, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Agnesi, Marie, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Alcar, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Aldebaran, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
Alexandria, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Algol, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Ancient perspectives, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Andrew Ellicott, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Andromeda, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
Angles, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Antares, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__
Opposite sides of the world, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Arago, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Arcturus, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
Asteroids, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
Ladies' Astronomy, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Attraction, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Aureole, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Fall Constellations, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Axis, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
B
Babylonian Tablets, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Bartholomew Diaz, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Bear, Little, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Great, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__
Betelgeuse, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
Biela's Comet, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
Bode's law, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Bolides, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
C
Cancer, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Capella, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
Cassiopeia, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Castor, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
Lalande Catalogue, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Catharine of Alexandria, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Centaur, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__
Ceres, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Chaldean pastors, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Chaldeans, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
David's chariot, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Charioteer, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Mars Chart, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Châtelet, Marquise of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Chiron, The Centaur, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
Chromosphere, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Clairaut, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Clerke, Agnes, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Cnidus, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Coggia's Comet, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Comet of Biela, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
of 1811, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
of 1858, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Comets, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
Constellations, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
figures of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Fall, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
[Pg 342]Constellations, Spring, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Summer, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Winter, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Copernicus, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Corona Borealis, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Sun's Corona, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Cygnus, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
D
de Blocqueville, Madame, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
de Breteuil, Gabrielle-Émilie, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
de Charrière, Madame, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Deneb, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
des Brosses, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Diaz, Bartholomew, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Dipper, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
Donati, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Double star, stellar dial of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Double stars, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
Dragon, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
du Châtelet, Marquise, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
E
Eagle, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Earth, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
ancient ideas of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
distance from the sun, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
how maintained, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
inclination, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
in space, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
orbiting the Sun, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
movement of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
roundness of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
viewed from Mars, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
viewed from Mercury, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
viewed from Venus, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
weight, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Solar Eclipse, May 1900, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Eclipses, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Ellicot, Andrew, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Conversations on the Plurality of Worlds, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Equator, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Eudoxus, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Evening Star, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
F
Faculties, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
Fireballs, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Flammarion's Lunar Ring, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Mrs. Fleming, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Fontenelle, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Foucault, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
G
Galileo, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__
Galle, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Divisions of the globe, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Great Bear, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__
Great Dog, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Greek Calendar, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Greek alphabet, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
H
Mr. Hall, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Halley, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
[Pg 343]Halley's Comet, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
Heavens, map of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Hercules, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__
Herdsman, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Herschel, Caroline, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Hevelius, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Hipparchus, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Houses of the Sun, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Huggins, Lady, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Huygens, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Hyades, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Hypatia, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
J
Janssen, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Jupiter, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
satellites, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
telescopic view of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
K
Klumpke, Miss, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Kovalevsky, Sophie, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
L
Lacaille, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Lalande, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__
Latitudes, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Leonids, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Lepaute, Madame Hortense, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
Le Verrier, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Little Bear, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Little Dog, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Lockyer, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Longitudes, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Lucifer, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Lunar Apennines, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
landscape, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
landscape, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Lyre, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
M
Mars, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
chart of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Measurement, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Medes and Lydians, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Mercury, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Meteorites, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Meteors, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
Metonic Cycle, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Milky Way, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
Mira Ceti, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Mitchell, Maria, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Mizar, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
Moon, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
diameter of __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
distance of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
geological features of __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
map of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
mountains of __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
phases of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
photo of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
revolution of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
rotation of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
size of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
temperature of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
total eclipse of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
N
Nebula in Andromeda, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
[Pg 344]in Orion, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
in the Greyhounds, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Neptune, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
revolution of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Newton, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Nucleus, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
O
Orion, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__
P
Parallax, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
annual, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Pearl, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Pegasus, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Penumbra, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Periodic Comet, orbit of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Perseids, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Perseus, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__
Phoenician navigators, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Phoebus, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Photosphere, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Piazzi, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Planets, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__
distances, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
orbits of __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
orbits of __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Pleiades, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__
occultation of __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Pleione, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Polaris, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
North Star, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
Poles, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Pollux, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Pope Calixtus, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Prodigies in the sky, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Ptolemy, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
R
Radiant, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Riccioli, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Rigel, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
Roberts, Mrs. Isaac, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
S
Saidak, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Saros, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Satellites, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Saturn, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
revolution of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
satellites, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
volume, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Saturn's rings, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Scarpellini, Madame, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Scheiner, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Schiaparelli, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Secchi, Dad, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Seven Oxen, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Sextuple star, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Shepherd's Star, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Shooting stars, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__
Sirius, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
Solar flares, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
flames, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
system, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Somerville, Mrs., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Spring constellations, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Stars, distances, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
double, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
first magnitude, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
number of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
quadruple, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
second magnitude, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
shooting, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
temporary, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
[Pg 345]Triple stars, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
variable, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
weight of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Hercules star cluster, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
in the Centaur, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
St. Catherine, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Summer constellations, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Sun, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
houses of the, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
distance measurement, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
photo of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
rotation, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
temperature of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
total eclipse of __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
weight, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Comparing the sizes of the Sun and Earth, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Sunspots, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
telescopic feature of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
T
Temporary stars, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
Three Kings, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Total lunar eclipse, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
of sun, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Triangulation, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Triple Star, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
U
Umbra, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Universe, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__
Urania, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
Uranoliths, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
Uranus, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
V
Variable stars, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Vega, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Venus, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
phases of __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Vesper, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Victor Hugo, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
W
Weighing worlds, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Winter constellations, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Z
Zodiac constellations, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
Zones, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
FOOTNOTES:
[3] It is useful to know the letters of the Greek Alphabet. They are easily learned, as follows:
[3] It’s helpful to know the letters of the Greek Alphabet. They’re easy to learn, as follows:
α Alpha
β Beta
γ Gamma
δ Delta
ε Epsilon
ζ Zeta
η Eta
θ Theta
ι Iota
κ Kappa
λ Lambda
μ Mu
ν Nu
ξ Xi
ο Omicron
π Pi
ρ Rho
σ or ς Sigma
τ Tau
υ Upsilon
φ Phi
χ Chi
ψ Psi
ω Omega
α Alpha
Beta
gamma
Delta
ε Epsilon
Zeta
η Eta
θ Theta
ι Iota
κ Kappa
Lambda
μ Mu
ν Nu
ξ Xi
Omicron
π Pi
ρ Rho
σ or ς Sigma
τ Tau
υ Upsilon
φ Phi
χ Chi
ψ Psi
ω Omega
[5] Let it be remarked in passing that the stars might be much farther off than they are, and invisible to our eyes; the Heavens would then assume the aspect of an absolutely empty space, the moon and planets alone remaining.
[5] It's worth mentioning that the stars could be much farther away than they are now, making them invisible to us; in that case, the sky would look completely empty, with only the moon and planets visible.
[6] 14″ = 14 seconds of arc. One second of the circle is an exceedingly minute quantity. It is 1 millimeter seen at a distance of 206 meters. One millimeter seen at a distance of 20 m. 62 = 10 secs. These values are invisible to the unaided eye.
[6] 14″ = 14 seconds of arc. One second of a circle is an incredibly small amount. It’s 1 millimeter observed from a distance of 206 meters. One millimeter viewed from a distance of 20 m. 62 = 10 secs. These measurements are invisible to the naked eye.
[8] For the explanation of the angular distances of degrees, minutes, and seconds, see Chapter XI, on Methods of Measurement.
[8] For details on the angular distances of degrees, minutes, and seconds, see Chapter XI, on Methods of Measurement.
[9] The author has endeavored on the plates to represent the aspect of the Earth in the starry sky of Mercury, Venus, and Mars; but in all representations of this kind the stars are necessarily made too large. By calculation the diameters of the Earth and Moon as seen from the planets, and their distances, are as follows:
[9] The author has tried to show what the Earth looks like in the night sky of Mercury, Venus, and Mars on the plates; however, in all these kinds of representations, the stars are inevitably shown too large. According to calculations, the sizes of the Earth and Moon as seen from the planets, along with their distances, are as follows:
Diameter of the Earth. | Diameter of the Moon. | Distance Earth-Moon. | |
Of Mercury (opposition) | 20″ | 8″ | 871″ |
Of Venus (opposition) | 64″ | 17″ | 1,928″ |
Of Mars (quadrature) | 15″ | 4″ | 464″ |
Of Jupiter (quadrature) | 3.5″ | 0.1″ | 105″ |
These aspects will be appreciated if we remember that the distance of the components of ε Lyre = 207″, that of Atlas in Pleione = 301″, and that of the stars Mizar and Alcor = 708″.
These details will be appreciated if we remember that the distance of the components of ε Lyrae is 207″, that of Atlas in Pleione is 301″, and that of the stars Mizar and Alcor is 708″.
[10] A few evenings ago, after observing Venus in the calm and silent Heavens at the close of day, my eyes fell upon a drawing sent me by my friend Gustave Dore, which is included in the illustrations of his wonderful edition of Dante's Divina Commedia. This drawing seems to be in place here, and I offer my readers a poor reproduction of it, taken from the fine engraving in the book. Dante and Virgil, in the peaceful evening, are contemplating lo bel pianeta ch'ad amar conforta (the beautiful planet that incites to love).
[10] A few evenings ago, after watching Venus in the calm and quiet sky at sunset, I noticed a drawing my friend Gustave Dore sent me, which is included in the illustrations of his amazing edition of Dante's Divine Comedy. This drawing seems fitting here, and I’m sharing a poor reproduction of it, taken from the beautiful engraving in the book. Dante and Virgil, in the peaceful evening, are gazing at lo bel pianeta ch'ad amar conforta (the beautiful planet that inspires love).
[12] Translator: Compare the well-known English rhyme:
Thirty days hath September,
April, June, and November.
While all the rest have thirty-one,
Excepting February alone,
In which but twenty-eight appear
And twenty-nine when comes Leap Year.
[12] Translator: Check out the familiar English rhyme:
Thirty days has September,
April, June, and November.
All the other months have thirty-one days,
Every month has its own, except for February, which is the only one.
With just twenty-eight days, you see,
And twenty-nine in a leap year, that’s the key.
[13] Fifty-eight different pictures of the aspect of the Moon to the unaided eye will be found in the Monthly Bulletins of the Astronomical Society of France, for the year 1900, in pursuance of an investigation made by the author among the different members of the Society.
[13] In the Monthly Bulletins of the Astronomical Society of France from the year 1900, you can find fifty-eight different images showing the appearance of the Moon as seen without a telescope, based on a study conducted by the author among the Society's members.
[14] My readers are charged not to speak of this property (which is fairly extensive), lest the Budget Commission, at the end of its resources, should be tempted to put on an unexpected tax. This ring, which the astronomers presented to me in the year 1887, is almost in the center of the lunar disk, to the north of Ptolemy and Herschel.
[14] My readers are asked not to mention this property (which is quite large), so the Budget Commission, when it runs out of funds, doesn't get tempted to impose an unexpected tax. This ring, which the astronomers gave me in 1887, is almost in the center of the moon's disk, north of Ptolemy and Herschel.
[16] Victor Hugo. Tristesse d'Olympia.
Download ePUB
If you like this ebook, consider a donation!